The Conventional Personality Window


Basic Page


Alias

The Alias is a radio-user recognizable description for the current Conventional Personality being defined. Characters, Numbers, Spaces, and Special Characters can be used.

• See More Information


Channel Bandwidth Select

Selects the channel bandwidth while operating on the current Conventional Personality.

• See More Information


Receive Only Personality

  Causes the radio to not have transmit capability while operating on the current Conventional Personality.

• See More Information


Rx Frequency

Selects a designated frequency used when receiving carrier squelch for the current Conventional Personality.

• See More Information


Rx Squelch Type

Selects the type of Private Line (PL) or Carrier Squelch needed to receive a call, while operating on the current Conventional Personality.

• See More Information


Rx TPL Frequency

Selects a designated frequency used when receiving Tone Private Line (TPL) encoding, while operating on the current Conventional Personality. This frequency can directly correlate to the Rx TPL Code field; however, non standard code frequencies may also be selected.

• See More Information


Rx TPL Code

Selects the specific code accepted when receiving Tone Private Line (TPL) encoding, while operating on the current Conventional Personality. This code can directly correlate to the Rx TPL Frequency field. That is, selecting a value for this field automatically selects an Rx TPL Frequency; however, from the Rx TPL Frequency field, non standard code frequencies may also be selected.

• See More Information


Rx DPL Code

Selects the specific code accepted when receiving Digital Private Line (DPL) encoding, while operating on the current Conventional Personality.

• See More Information


Rx DPL Invert

  Causes Digital Private Line (DPL) signals to be inverted when they are received by the radio, while operating on the current Conventional Personality. Inverted coding allows for more traffic/usage on frequencies.

• See More Information


Tx Frequency

Selects a designated frequency used when transmitting carrier for the current Conventional Personality.

• See More Information


Tx Squelch Type

Selects the type of Private Line (PL) or Carrier Squelch that the radio transmits while operating on the current Conventional Personality.

• See More Information


Tx TPL Frequency

Selects a designated frequency used to transmit Tone Private Line (TPL) encoding, while operating on the current Conventional Personality. This frequency can directly correlate to the Tx TPL Code field; however, non standard code frequencies may also be selected.

• See More Information


Tx TPL Code

Selects the specific code accepted when receiving Tone Private Line (TPL) encoding, while operating on the current Conventional Personality. This code can directly correlate to the Tx TPL Frequency field. That is, selecting a value for this field automatically selects a Tx TPL Frequency; however, from the Tx TPL Frequency field, non standard code frequencies may also be selected.

• See More Information


TPL Reverse Burst

  Causes a Tone Private Line (TPL) code to be transmitted at the end of a transmission - once PTT is released, and while operating on the current Conventional Personality. This sub-audible tone causes the receiving radio to mute its speaker before loss of a carrier is detected. Muting the speaker eliminates unwanted noise (squelch tail) during loss of carrier detection.

• See More Information


Tx DPL Code

Selects the Digital Private Line (DPL) code that transmits while operating on the current Conventional Personality.

• See More Information


Tx DPL Invert

  Causes Digital Private Line (DPL) signals to be inverted before they are transmitted from the radio, while operating on the current Conventional Personality. Inverted coding allows for more traffic/usage on frequencies.

• See More Information


Tx DPL Turnoff Code

  Causes a Digital Private Line (DPL) code to be transmitted at the end of a transmission - once PTT is released, and while operating on the current Conventional Personality. This sub-audible code causes the receiving radio to mute its speaker before  loss of a carrier is detected. Muting the speaker eliminates unwanted noise (squelch tail) during this process.

• See More Information


Options Page


Talkaround

  Allows the radio to operate in Talkaround Mode, while operating on the current Conventional Personality. Radio-wide Talkaround can be selected by a radio-user (short or long) programmable button-press, or menu selection.

  Disabling causes the current personality to operate in a Repeater mode only.

• See More Information


Voice Operated Tx (VOX)

  Enables the radio to automatically key-up due to recognition of voice received through an Accessory Connector headset microphone on a Portable radio. For a Mobile radio the selected Hot Microphone automatically keys-up due to recognition of voice. In both cases the radio automatically de-keys when audio is no longer present. This feature applies while operating on the current Conventional Personality and while in Emergency Mode.

• See More Information


Edit Mode

  Allows channel parameters to be radio-user modified through the Edit Mode functionality for the current Conventional Personality. Channel parameters include Rx and Tx Frequencies, Rx and Tx Squelch Code Types, and Bandwidth (see Conventional Personality, The Basic Page).

• See More Information


Tx Power Level

Selects the transmit power level while operating on the current Conventional Personality.

• See More Information


Time-Out Timer

Selects the maximum amount of communication time allowed per transmission, while operating on the current Conventional Personality. Once this time expires, the transmission is automatically terminated. Time is in seconds.

• See More Information


Squelch Setting

Selects the amount of carrier energy required to unmute the radio’s speaker upon satisfying this selected Carrier Squelch threshold. This feature applies while operating on the current Conventional Personality.

Note: These selections apply only to Portable radios operating in Conventional dispatch mode. All other squelch thresholds are internal to the radio.

• See More Information


Unmute/Mute Rule

Selects the rule that determines when a radio opens and closes its speaker to receive audio for the current Conventional Personality. The Unmute/Mute rule applies when PL is the selected Rx Squelch Type for the current Conventional Personality. Unmuting opens the speaker. Muting closes the speaker.

• See More Information


Busy Channel Lockout

Selects a channel lockout rule while operating on the current Conventional Personality.

These selections prevent the radio from transmitting while the chosen “On Busy Channel” condition exists for the current channel. In addition, when either of the two “On Busy Channel” selections are chosen, Monitor Mode is not possible for the current channel.

• See More Information


Signaling Page


Rx Signaling System

Selects the Signaling System and data type that the radio uses when receiving Signaling data, while operating on the current Conventional Personality.

• See More Information


TPL/DPL Required for Data

  Causes the radio to require the correct Private Line (PL) codes before Signaling data can be received, while operating on the current Conventional Personality.

• See More Information


Signaling Squelch

Selects the Unmute rule for the current Rx Signaling System that is selected for the current Conventional Personality. This Signaling System unmute rule applies only to the detection of Voice Calls.

• See More Information


Tx Signaling System

Selects the Signaling System and data type that the radio uses when transmitting Signaling data, while operating on the current Conventional Personality.

• See More Information


Repeater Access ID

Selects the Signaling System Access ID code to be transmitted while operating on the current Conventional Personality. During transmission, this ID code determines if Repeater access is granted.

• See More Information


Scan Page


Scan List

Selects the Scan List used by the radio while operating in the Scan Mode, on the current Conventional Personality. The Scan List determines which callers the radio scans for (actively looks for), and considers Unmuting to, on the selected Scan List channels (Conventional Personalities or Trunking Groups).

• See More Information


Auto Scan

  Causes the radio to automatically enter the Scan Mode, when the radio-user selects (with the Channel Selector) the current Conventional Personality.

  When disabled, the radio-user is able to invoke the Scan Mode operation through a programmable button-press or menu selection, while operating on the current Conventional Personality

• See More Information


Phone Page


Phone System

Selects the Phone System to be used when operating in Phone Mode, for the current Conventional Personality. A Phone System defines certain operational functionality for the Phone List.

• See More Information


Advanced Page


Option Board Feature

  Enables Option Board functionality to be active for the current Conventional Personality.

• See More Information


Option Board Configuration Index

Selects the desired “Advanced” only option board functionality for the current Conventional Personality. Advanced option board types allow for unique settings on a per personality basis. Option board functionality selections are based on the ‘Imported’ third party option board configuration data that applies for the selected Option Board Type.

• See More Information


Noise Blanker

  Enables the use of special noise reduction circuitry that targets certain noise emissions that may be generated in the proximity of a receiving radio.

• See More Information


Compression Type

Selects the transmit-audio compression type for the current Conventional Personality. These selections can control or enhance audio clarity. Full Compression allows for Companding Mode. The radio-user can also initiate Companding on a Personality basis, if the Companding menu selection is enabled.

• See More Information


Expansion Type

Selects the receive-audio expansion type for the current Conventional Personality. These selections can control or enhance audio clarity. Full Expansion allows for Companding Mode. The radio-user can also initiate Companding on a Personality basis, if the Companding menu selection is enabled.

• See More Information


Emphasis Selection

Selects the type of audio shaping used while operating on the current Conventional Personality. These selections can enhance audio clarity.

• See More Information


Rx Reference Frequency

Selects the Reference Frequency used when receiving on the current Conventional Personality.

WARNING: It is possible to disable the radio's ability to receive and or transmit data. If you are not fully aware of the impact of this setting, DO NOT MODIFY IT!

• See More Information


Tx Reference Frequency

Selects the Reference Frequency used when transmitting on the current Conventional Personality.

WARNING: It is possible to disable the radio's ability to receive and or transmit data. If you are not fully aware of the impact of this setting, DO NOT MODIFY IT!

• See More Information


Tx Only Personality

  Causes the radio not to have receive capability while operating on the current Conventional Personality.

• See More Information


Non Standard Reverse Burst

  Causes the radio to receive and or transmit a Non-Standard TPL Reverse Burst. This is needed when working with other radios/equipment that require a Non-Standard Reverse Burst. A Reverse Burst is a sub-audible tone. When the radio receives and decodes this sub-audible tone the radio’s speaker is muted, thus eliminating unwanted noise (squelch tail) during loss of the carrier signal. This feature applies while operating on the current Conventional Personality.

  When disabled, the radio receives Standard TPL Reverse Bursts, and may transmit Standard TPL Reverse Bursts depending on the status of the TPL Reverse Burst field.

• See More Information


The Data Revert Page


Data Revert Zone Alias

Selecting a value for the Data Revert Zone field automatically retrieves this Zone Alias. Zone Aliases are defined in the Personality Assignment, Zone Alias field. This is a view-only field.

• See More Information


Data Revert Zone

Selects a Conventional Zone that the radio engages (jumps to) when Data Revert is initiated. This selection applies while operating on the current Conventional Personality.

• See More Information


Data Revert Channel Alias

Selecting a value for the Data Revert Channel field automatically retrieves this Channel. Aliases are defined in the Conventional Personality Alias field. This is a view-only field.

• See More Information


Data Revert Channel

Selects the Channel that the radio engages (jumps to) when Data Revert is initiated. The Data Revert Zone must be selected first. This selection applies while operating on the current Conventional Personality.

• See More Information


Call List


Alias

Allows you to view-only the Alias associated with the current Call List Member. Aliases are defined in their respective Call List type window, such as, MDC, QCII, and DTMF.

• See More Information


Signaling Type

Allows you to view-only the Signaling System Type of the current Call List Member. Signaling Systems are defined in their respective Signaling System window, that is, MDC, QCII, and DTMF.

• See More Information


The MDC Call Window


MDC Call Basic Page


Alias

Allows the radio-user to easily recognize and select to call the current MDC - Call List Member. Characters, Numbers, Spaces, and Special Characters can be used.

Examples: EMT-001, #500, Electric. #A5.

• See More Information


MDC System

Selects the MDC Signaling System to be used by the current MDC Call List Member.

• See More Information


Revert Personality Alias

Selecting a value for the Revert Personality field, or the Revert Group field automatically displays this Revert Personality Alias. This is a view-only field.

• See More Information


Revert Personality

Selects a Conventional or Trunking Personality (by its CPS given name) causing the current MDC - Call List Member to transmit on that channel.

• See More Information


Revert Group

Selects a Trunking Group causing the current MDC - Call List Member to transmit on that channel.

• See More Information


Strip PL/DPL

  Causes the radio to not transmit Private Line (PL) codes for the current MDC- Call List Member. PL codes are stripped when a current Revert Personality, or current (Channel Selector) Conventional Personality, has Transmit PL enabled.

• See More Information


Acknowledge Expected

  Causes the radio to expect a reply from the radio being called, for the current MDC Call List Member. Replies are generally expected from call types such as, Call Alerts and Radio Checks. The radio continues to transmit these call types until an acknowledge is received. The maximum number of transmission retries is five.

  Disabling this feature causes the radio to send Call Alerts and Radio Checks only once. The radio shows no indication of acknowledges, therefore Radio Checks are rendered ineffective. The benefit is to reduce channel traffic by eliminating mandatory acknowledges and possible retries for Call Alerts. This applies for the current MDC Call List Member..

• See More Information


Name Tone Tag

Selects the tone that sounds when receiving a Call Alert or Sel Cal from the current MDC Call List Member. This allows the radio-user to identify a caller by a distinctive tone. These settings take precedence over the Signaling Configuration Sel Cal and Call Alert Tone Tags. However, when this field is set to Standard, the Signaling Configuration Tone Tag settings then take precedence. There are several ring tones to choose from.

• See More Information


MDC ID Page


Call ID Type

Selects the transmit Call ID format for the current MDC Call List Member.

• See More Information


Call Individual ID

Selects the unique four digit ID to be transmitted for the current MDC - Call List Member. The transmitted ID can target one or more receiving radios. This allows MDC calls to be made to a specific radio (or radios) without disturbing other radios operating on the same channel.

• See More Information


Call Fleet ID

Selects the unique one digit ID to be transmitted for the current MDC - Call List Member. The transmitted Fleet ID can include many receiving radios. This allows MDC transmissions to be made to a specific Fleet of radios without disturbing other radios operating on the same channel.

• See More Information


Call Group ID

Selects the unique two digit ID to be transmitted for the current MDC - Call List Member. The Fleet ID must also be defined. The transmitted Call Group ID can target several receiving radios. This allows MDC transmissions to be made to a specific Group of radios without disturbing other radios operating on the same channel.

• See More Information


The Quik-Call II Window


Basic Page


Alias

Allows the radio-user to easily recognize and select to call the current Quik-Call II (QCII) - Call List Member. Characters, Numbers, Spaces, and Special Characters can be used.

Examples: EMT-001, #500, Electric. #A5.

• See More Information


Quik Call II, System

Selects the Quik Call II, Signaling System to be used by the current Call List Member.

• See More Information


Revert Personality Alias

Selecting a value for the QCII Revert Personality field, automatically displays this Conventional Personality Alias. This is a view-only field.

• See More Information


Revert Personality

Selects a Conventional Personality (by its CPS given name) causing the current Quik-Call II (QCII) - Call List Member to transmit on that channel.

• See More Information


Strip PL/DPL

  Causes the radio to not transmit PL codes with the call for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) - Call List Member. PL codes are stripped when the current Revert Personality, or current (Channel Selector) Conventional Personality, has Transmit PL enabled.

• See More Information


Format Page


Call Format

Selects the Call Tone Type for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) Call List Member.

• See More Information


Tone A Frequency

Selects the frequency of the first tone to be transmitted for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) Call List Member. Selecting a value for this field automatically selects a value for the Tone A Code field. Some Frequencies may not have a correlating Code causing nothing to display in the Code field.

• See More Information


Tone A Code

Selects the Code correlating to the Tone A Frequency to be transmitted for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) Call List Member. QCII Standard Tones are a subset of the QCII Frequency range. Therefore, selecting a value for this field automatically selects a value for the Tone A Frequency field.

• See More Information


Tone B Frequency

Selects the frequency of the second-tone to be transmitted for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) Call List Member. Selecting a value for this field automatically selects a value for the Tone B Code field. Some Frequencies may not have a correlating Code causing nothing to display in the Code field.

• See More Information


Tone B Code

Selects the Code correlating to the Tone B Frequency to be transmitted for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) Call List Member. QCII Standard Tones are a subset of the QCII Frequency range. Therefore, selecting a value for this field automatically selects a value for the Tone A Frequency field.

• See More Information


The DTMF Call Window


DTMF Call Page


Alias

Allows the radio-user to easily recognize and select to call the current DTMF - Call List Member. Characters, Numbers, Spaces, and Special Characters can be used.

Examples: EMT-001, #500, Electric. #A5

• See More Information


DTMF System

Selects the DTMF, Signaling System to be used by the current DTMF Call List Member.

• See More Information


Call ID

Selects the one to eight digit ID to be transmitted for the current DTMF - Call List Member. The transmitted ID can target one or several receiving radios. This allows DTMF transmissions to be made to a specific radio or groups of radios without disturbing other radios operating on the same channel.

• See More Information


Revert Personality Alias

Selecting a value for the DTMF Revert Personality field, automatically displays this Conventional Personality Alias. This is a view-only field.

• See More Information


Revert Personality

Selects a Conventional Personality (by its CPS given name) causing the current DTMF Call List Member to transmit on that channel.

• See More Information


Strip PL/DPL

  Causes the radio to not transmit Private Line (PL) codes for the current DTMF- Call List Member. PL codes are stripped when the current Revert Personality, or current (Channel Selector) Conventional Personality, has Transmit PL enabled.

• See More Information


The Remote Monitor Page


Remote Monitor Type

Selects the Remote Monitor functionality on the receiving radio for the current MDC- Call List Member. The MDC System Remote Monitor Type selections on the radio being monitored take precedence over these settings. However, when MDC System Remote Monitor Type is set to “Per Command” then this setting is the rule.

Important Note: This feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

• See More Information


Rx Multiplier

Selects a value that is multiplied by the receiving radio’s selected MDC System Remote Monitor Time. This total amount of time then determines how long (in seconds ) that the radio commanded into Remote Monitor mode is then able to receive calls. This setting applies for the current MDC- Call List Member.

Important Note: This feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

• See More Information


Tx Multiplier

Selects a value that is multiplied by the receiving radio’s selected MDC System Remote Monitor Time. This total amount in time then determines how long (in seconds) that the radio commanded into Remote Monitor mode automatically keys-up allowing the initiating radio to listen-in on all surrounding audio. This setting applies for the current MDC- Call List Member.

Important Note: This feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

• See More Information


Global Multiplier

  Causes the Rx Multiplier and the Tx Multiplier values to double for the current MDC- Call List Member. This effectively doubles receive and transmit times for Remote Monitor.

Important Note: This feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

• See More Information


(has been removed) Name Tone Tag

Selects the tone that sounds when receiving a Call Alert or Sel Cal from the current DTMF Call List Member. This allows the radio-user to identify a caller by a distinctive tone. These settings take precedence over the Signaling Configuration Sel Cal and Call Alert Tone Tags. However, when this field is set to Standard, the Signaling Configuration Tone Tag settings then take precedence. There are several ring tones to choose from.

• See More Information


Signaling Configuration Window


General Page


Call Alert Encode

  Allows Call Alerts to be transmitted for Signaling Systems. A Call Alert allows a transmitting radio to notify the targeted radio-user of a missed call. The receiving radio responds with both audible and visual alerts to the user. The visual alert persists until reset by the returning user.

• See More Information


Sel Cal Encode

  Allows Sel Cal (Select Calls) to be transmitted for Signaling Systems. A Select Call is typically used when the majority of transmissions are between a dispatcher and one radio-user, or group of radio-users, and when other users need not be bothered. This is accomplished by addressing based on Radios ID’s.

•  See More Information


Radio Check Encode

  Allows Radio Checks to be transmitted for Signaling Systems. A Radio Check is used to test the status of another radio expected to be listening. When a radio receives a Radio Check, it sends back an acknowledgement to verify that it is working properly and within range.

•  See More Information


Remote Monitor Encode

  Enables the radio to encode / transmit Remote Monitor commands for MDC - Signaling Sytems.

Important Note: This Feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

• See More Information


Emergency Remote Monitor Encode

  Enables the radio to encode / transmit Emergency Mode - Remote Monitor commands for MDC - Signaling Sytems. That is, when a radio has initiated Emergency Mode, this feature allows Emergency Remote Monitor commands to be sent to that radio for Remote Monitor mode operation.

Important Note: This Feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

• See More Information


Radio Call Menu Time-Out Timer

Selects the amount of time the radio remains in the Radio Call Menu without any radio-user activity. Once the timer expires, the radio exits out of Menu mode. Time is in seconds.

•  See More Information


Limited Patience Timer

Selects the amount of time that the radio politely waits for a busy channel to become free in order to make a Signaling System communication, known as a Polite Transmission. Once this timer expires, the radio impolitely transmits, even when the channel is currently in use, in-effect stepping on other channel traffic. Time is in seconds.

•  See More Information


Auto Reset Timer

Selects the amount of time to be used by the Auto Reset Timer Types for Signaling System communications. Time is in seconds.

•  See More Information


Basic Sel Cal

  When selected, a Sel Cal data packet is transmitted only when a Sel Cal radio call is initiated. That is, the Sel Cal data packet is transmitted once the radio-user selects to send a Sel Cal, then selects a call recipient, and then presses the PTT button. Subsequent PTT presses will not send a Sel Cal data packet. See also Radio Call menu. See also Radio Call menu.

  When disabled Auto Sel Cal mode is initiated. That is, once the radio-user selects to send a Sel Cal, then selects a call recipient, a Sel Cal is transmitted each time the radio’s PTT button is pressed.

• See More Information


Call Stack

  Enables Call Stack for Signaling Systems. Call Stack allows the radio to maintain a list of the most recent caller information received by the radio. The radio-user is then able to view the list of received calls from the Call Stack menu selection. Reverse Aliasing may only be possible in the Call Stack for MDC type calls.

• See More Information


Call Stack Icon

  Enables an icon [image] to appear in the radio’s display when caller information exists in the radio’s Call Stack. This icon remains in the radio’s display until the calls are radio-user deleted. This is a Signaling System feature.

• See More Information


Call Tone Tag Page


Call Alert Tone Tag

Selects the tone type that sounds (on the decoding radio) when a Call Alert is received. Call Alert is a Signaling System call feature. There are several ring tones to choose from. These tones apply only when the Call List member’s Name Tone Tag is set to Standard.

•  See More Information


Sel Cal Tone Tag

Selects the tone type that sounds (on the decoding radio) when a Sel Cal is received. Sel Cal is a Signaling System call feature. There are several ring tones to choose from. These tones apply only when the Call List member’s Name Tone Tag is set to Standard.

•  See More Information


Emergency Page


Emergency Type

Selects behavioral traits of the transmitting radio while operating in Emergency Mode.

•  See More Information


Impolite Retries

When in Emergency Mode, this feature selects the number of times the radio impolitely sends an Emergency Transmission, even when the channel is currently busy with other radio traffic. This is known as an Impolite Transmission.

•  See More Information


Polite Retries

When in Emergency Mode, this feature selects the number of times the radio politely sends an Emergency Transmission when the channel is free. This is known as a Polite Transmission.

•  See More Information


Emergency Open Microphone Duration

Selects the amount of time that the microphone remains automatically keyed-up once an acknowledgement confirming the successful transmission of the emergency data packets is received. This automatic Emergency Open Microphone broadcast transmits on the same channel as the Emergency Alarm data packets. Time is in seconds.

Important Note: This Feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

•  See More Information


Tx Cycles

Selects the number of times that the radio automatically keys-up for the purpose of sending voice during Emergency Mode. The radio automatically transmits for the amount of time defined in the Open Mic Duration field.

Important Note: This Feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

• See More Information


Tx Cycles Delay

Selects the amount of time between Tx Cycles. The Tx Cycles selection defines how many Open Mic Durations are initiated during an Emergency Mode.

Important Note: This Feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

• See More Information


Emergency Long Press Duration

Selects the amount of time that the radio’s Emergency button must be continuously pressed to end the Emergency Mode.

•  See More Information


Emergency Sidetone

  Causes the transmitting radio to sound an alert tone every time the Emergency Data Packet is sent during Emergency Mode. The Emergency Data Packet contains information as to which radio was the source of the transmission.

•  See More Information


Emergency LED

  Causes the transmitting radio’s LED to continuously light-up during Emergency Mode.

•  See More Information


Emergency Mode Type

Selects the emergency functionality during the radio’s Emergency Mode.

Important Note: This Feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

• See More Information


Emergency Alert

  Causes the radio to sound an alert tone when the Emergency Button is pressed initiating the Emergency Mode.

•  See More Information


Emergency Acknowledge Alert

  Causes the radio to sound an alert tone when an Emergency Transmission acknowledgement is received. The acknowledgement is sent back from the receiving radio, confirming a successful Emergency Transmission.

•  See More Information


Enable Emergency PTT ID

  Causes the radio to transmit a unique Emergency PTT ID while the radio is operating in an Emergency Mode. This is only true when the Emergency Mode Type field is set to "Alarm/Call".

Important Note: This Feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

• See More Information


Emergency PTT ID

Selects a unique PTT ID that is transmitted while the radio is operating in an Emergency Mode. This is only true when the Emergency Mode Type field is set to "Alarm/Call".

Important Note: This Feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

• See More Information


Emergency Revert Personality Alias

Selecting a value for the Emergency Revert Personality or the Emergency Revert Group field, automatically displays this Revert Personality Alias. This is a view-only field.

•  See More Information


Emergency Revert Personality

Selects the Conventional or Trunking Personality (by its CPS given name) to be used during Emergency Mode. No matter what channel the radio is currently operating on, the radio is automatically switched to this personality for an emergency transmission.

If "No Revert" is selected, be sure to select an MDC Tx System for every Conventional and Trunking Personality to ensure that Emergency operation works on all channels.

•  See More Information


Emergency Revert Group

Selects a Trunking Group for the personality selected in the Emergency Revert Personality field.

• See More Information


Emergency Sticky Revert

  Causes the radio to remain permanently on the Emergency Revert Personality after the emergency transmission has been sent and acknowledged. The radio must be powered off for it to return to the radio’s Channel Selector selected channel.

•  See More Information


Emergency Sticky Revert Alert

  Causes the radio to sound an alert tone, if the PTT button is pressed, while the radio is in Emergency Mode.

•  See More Information


Option Board Emergency Filter

  Causes the radio to sound an alert tone, if the PTT button is pressed, while the radio is in Emergency Mode.

•  See More Information


Message/Status Page


Message Encode

  Allows MDC Messages to be transmitted from this radio for all applicable Signaling Systems.

• See More Information


Message Tone Tag

Specifies the tone that sounds (on the decoding radio) when an MDC Messages is received for all applicable Signaling Systems. This notifies the receiving radio-user that an MDC Message has been received. This tone applies only when the Message Name Tone Tag is set to Standard. There are several ring tones to choose from.

• See More Information


Status Encode

  Allows MDC Statuses to be transmitted for all applicable Signaling Systems.

• See More Information


Status On Power Up

  Causes the radio to automatically enter into the Status menu upon radio power-up. The last acknowledged - Status automatically appears in the radio’s display.

• See More Information


MDC System Window


MDC System Basic Page


Primary ID

Selects the unique one to four digit ID that identifies the radio while operating (transmitting or receiving MDC calls) on the current MDC - Signaling System.

•  See More Information


Group ID

Selects the unique three digit ID that identifies the radio as belonging to a unique group while operating (receiving MDC calls) on the current MDC - Signaling System.

•  See More Information


PTT ID Type

Selects when the PTT ID is sent during a Normal Dispatch transmission for the current MDC - Signaling System.

•  See More Information


PTT Sidetone

  Causes the radio to sound a continuous alert tone, from the time the PTT button is pressed, until the time that the Signaling System data packet is transmitted. The purpose is to indicate to the radio-user when voice may be initiated. This feature applies for the current MDC Signaling System.

•  See More Information


PTT Short Sidetone

  Causes the radio to sound one short alert tone, after the PTT button is pressed, and immediately following the Signaling System data packet being transmitted. The purpose is to indicate to the radio-user when voice may be initiated. This feature applies for the current MDC Signaling System.

•  See More Information


PL Transmit

  Causes the radio to transmit Private Line (PL) signals for the current MDC Signaling System. PL is only transmitted if the Conventional Personality that uses this MDC system has PL selected in its Tx Squelch Type field.

  Disabling causes the radio to not transmit PL signals for current MDC Signaling System. The only exception being PTT-ID transmissions. Disabling PL speeds up transmissions and reduces radio channel traffic.

•  See More Information


Radio Check Decode

  Causes the radio to acknowledge receipt of a Radio Check from a dispatcher or another radio by sending back a reply. This feature applies for the current MDC Signaling System.

•  See More Information


Display Decode ID

  Causes the transmitting radio’s Primary ID to appear in this radio’s display upon receipt of certain MDC transmissions. This feature applies for the current MDC Signaling System.

•  See More Information


Emergency Decode

  Enables the radio to receive Emergency Mode signaling for the current MDC - Signaling System.

Important Note: This Feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

• See More Information


Call Alert/Sel Cal Page


Call Alert Type

Selects the type of Call Alerts that can be received for the current MDC Signaling System. A Call Alert allows a transmitting radio to notify (with an alert tone) and leave evidence of (by lighting the LED) a call on a receiving radio, when the radio-user is away. The Call Alert LED persists until reset by the user. A Call Alert w/Voice is a combination of a Sel Cal and a Call Alert.

•  See More Information


Call Alert LED

  Causes the receiving radio to blinks its LED when it has received a Call Alert, for the current MDC Signaling System. The LED double-flashes yellow for an individual call, and single-flashes yellow for a group call.

•  See More Information


Alert Tone Auto Reset

  Causes the radio to generate only one sequence of the Call Alert or Call Alert w/Voice alert tone, for the current MDC Signaling System. Normally the Call Alert Tone Tag is a repeating alert tone.

•  See More Information


Sel Cal Decode

  Allows the radio to receive a Sel Cal (Select Call) for the current MDC Signaling System. A Select Call is typically used when the majority of transmissions are between a dispatcher and a radio-user, or a group of radio-users, and when other users need not be bothered. This is accomplished by addressing based on Radio ID’s.

•  See More Information


Sel Cal LED

  Causes the radio to blink its LED while receiving a Sel Cal (Select Call) for the current MDC Signaling System. The radio’s LED double-flashes yellow for an individual call, and single-flashes yellow for a group call.

•  See More Information


Auto Reset Timer Type

Selects a **Timed or *Manual exception to the Signaling Squelch unmuting rule for the current MDC - Signaling System.

•  See More Information


DOS Page


DOS Auto Mute Duration

Selects the amount of time that the radio is muted once Carrier Squelch is detected. This DOS timer is then active while receiving MDC Signaling data, this helps to reduce unwanted noise. This applies for the current MDC - Signaling System. Time is in milliseconds.

WARNING: If you do not have complete knowledge of the system configuration that this radio will be operating on, do not attempt to modify this setting!

•  See More Information


DOS Coast Duration

Selects an amount of time that the radio waits muted once the Carrier Squelch signal has been lost. This applies for the current MDC - Signaling System. Time is in milliseconds.

WARNING: If you do not have complete knowledge of the system configuration that this radio will be operating on, do not attempt to modify this setting!

•  See More Information


DOS Criteria Type

Selects the frequency type used to determine DOS activation, for the current MDC - Signaling System.

WARNING: If you do not have complete knowledge of the system configuration that this radio will be operating on, do not attempt to modify this setting!

•  See More Information


Advanced Page


Pretime

Selects the amount of time between PTT button press and the first digit of the Signaling System data packet transmission. This time allows the receiving radio to stabilize before receiving data. This applies for the current MDC Signaling System. Time is in milliseconds.

•  See More Information


Preamble Bit Sync

Selects the number of synchronizing packets sent during MDC Pretime, for the current MDC Signaling System. Synchronizing packets allow transmitting and receiving radios to synchronize prior to Signaling System data packet transmission.

WARNING: If you do not have complete knowledge of the system configuration that this radio will be operating on, do not attempt to modify this setting!

•  See More Information


Acknowledge Pretime

Selects the amount of time between automatic transmitter key-up and the first sent digit of a Signaling System data packet, for a transmission acknowledgement. This time allows the receiving radio to stabilize before receiving data. This applies for the current MDC Signaling System. Time is in milliseconds.

•  See More Information


Repeater Access Type

Selects the type of Repeater access for the current MDC - Signaling System. This repeater Access Type field has to do with transmitting the Repeater Access ID.

•  See More Information


Repeater Access Pretime

Selects the amount of time between PTT button press and the first digit of a Signaling System data packet transmission to the Repeater. This time allows the Repeater to stabilize before receiving data. This applies for the current MDC Signaling System. Time is in milliseconds.

•  See More Information


Interseqence Delay

Selects the length of time separation between data-words that are part of the same call, for the current MDC Signaling System. Time is in milliseconds.

WARNING: If you do not have complete knowledge of the system configuration that this radio will be operating on, do not attempt to modify this setting!

•  See More Information


Fixed Retry Wait Time

This duration is added to the CPS-calculated retry-wait-duration for Polite and Impolite transmissions. This has the effect of randomly staggering retry attempts, in an effort to have unsynchronized retry attempts from competing radios. This applies for the current MDC Signaling System. Time is in milliseconds.

•  See More Information


PTT-ID Overrides Signaling Squelch

  Enables the radio while operating on a MDC enabled Trunking Personality to transmit an override of the Signaling Squelch Rules. On receiving MDC Trunking dispatch radios, this feature allows the Signaling Squelch rules to be ignored when this override instruction is received. Therefore, this feature must be enabled on both the transmitting and the receiving radios in order for the Signaling Squelch rules to be ignored. This allows the radio to easily communicate to all other radios operating in the same Trunking Group. This feature applies for the current MDC Signaling System.

• See More Information


Message/Status Page


Message Decode

  Allows the radio to receive MDC Messages for the current MDC - Signaling System.

• See More Information


Message Alert Tone Auto Reset

  Causes the radio to generate only one sequence of an MDC Message alert tone. Normally an MDC Message Alert Tone Tag is a repeating alert tone. This feature applies for the current MDC - Signaling System.

• See More Information


Message LED

  Causes the receiving radio to blinks its LED (yellow) immediately upon receiving an MDC Message. The LED continues to flash until there is radio-user interaction with the radio, such as a button press. This feature applies for the current MDC - Signaling System.

• See More Information


Status No Ack Auto Reset

  Causes the "No Acknowledge" indicator to appear only momentarily. This feature applies for the current MDC - Signaling System.

  When disabled, "No Acknowledge" remains on the radio’s display until the radio-user clears it with any button-press or any selector adjustment. "No Acknowledge" appears as the result of an MDC Status packet that was not successfully received and acknowledged, and also having failed on all subsequent retry attempts. This feature applies for the current MDC - Signaling System.

• See More Information


Status Poll

  Enables the radio to respond to a dispatch initiated MDC Status poll. The radio responds by re-transmitting the radio’s last transmitted MDC Status. This requested MDC Status packet is automatically transmitted without any radio-user involvement. This feature applies for the current MDC - Signaling System.

• See More Information


Request To Talk Page


Request To Talk (Mobile Only)

  Enables the Request To Talk (RTT) feature for the current MDC - Signaling System. Once PTT is pressed, the radio sends the RTT packet to the dispatcher, thus requesting the ability to transmit voice on the channel. Upon receipt of a Transmit Enable packet from the dispatcher, this radio may begin a voice transmission. This feature allows the dispatcher to manage channel traffic for voice communications.

• See More Information


Access-Request Wait Timer (Mobile Only)

Selects the amount of time that the radio waits for a Transmit Enable packet (from the dispatcher) after sending a Request To Talk (RTT). Once the timer expires, the RTT must be initiated again. This feature applies for the current MDC - Signaling System. Time is in seconds.

• See More Information


Auto Reset Timer (Mobile Only)

Selects the maximum period of time that the radio is allowed to transmit voice communications once the Request to Talk (RTT) permission (from the dispatcher) has been received. This feature applies for the current MDC - Signaling System. Time is in seconds.

• See More Information


Quik-Call II System Window


Basic Page


Call Format

Selects the call format used for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) Signaling System.

•  See More Information


Pretime

Selects the amount of time between PTT button press and the first tone of the Quik Call II (QCII) transmission. This time allows the receiving radio to stabilize before receiving the tone. This applies for the current QCII Signaling System. Time is in milliseconds.

•  See More Information


Long Tone Duration

Selects the time amount used when transmitting (encode) a Quik-Call II (QCII) Long Tone, for the current QCII Signaling System (also see Call Format selections). Time is in seconds.

•  See More Information


PTT Sidetone

  Causes the radio to sound a continuous alert tone, from the time the PTT button is pressed, until the time that the Signaling System data packet is transmitted. The purpose is to indicate to the radio-user when voice may be initiated. This feature applies for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) Signaling System.

•  See More Information


PTT Short Sidetone

  Causes the radio to sound one short alert tone, after the PTT button is pressed, and immediately following the Signaling System data packet being transmitted. The purpose is to indicate to the radio-user when voice may be initiated. This feature applies for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) Signaling System.

•  See More Information


Call Alert/Select Cal Page


Call Alert Type

Selects the type of Call Alerts that can be received for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) Signaling System. A Call Alert allows a transmitting radio to notify (with an alert tone) and leave evidence of (by lighting the LED) a call on a receiving radio while the radio-user is away. The Call Alert LED persists until reset by the user. A Call Alert w/Voice is a combination of a Sel Cal and a Call Alert.

•  See More Information


Call Alert LED

  Causes the receiving radio to blinks its LED once it has received a Call Alert for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) Signaling System. The radio’s LED double-flashes yellow for an individual call, and single-flashes yellow for a group call.

•  See More Information


Alert Tone Auto Reset

  Causes the radio to generate only one sequence of the Call Alert or Call Alert w/Voice alert tone, for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) Signaling System. Normally the Call Alert Tone Tag is a repeating alert tone.

•  See More Information


Sel Cal Decode

 Allows the radio to receive a Sel Cal (Select Call) for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) Signaling System. A Select Call is typically used when the majority of transmissions are between a dispatcher and a radio-user, or a group of radio-users, and when other users need not be bothered. This is accomplished by addressing based on Radio ID’s.

•  See More Information


Sel Cal LED

  Causes the radio to blink its LED while receiving a Sel Cal (Select Call) for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) Signaling System. The radio’s LED double-flashes yellow for an individual call, and single-flashes yellow for a group call.

•  See More Information


Auto Reset Timer Type

Selects a **Timed or *Manual exception to the Signaling Squelch unmuting rule for the current Quik Call II (QCII) Signaling System.

•  See More Information


Tones Page


Individual Tone A Frequency

Selects the receive Tone A Frequency for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) Signaling System. Selecting a value for this field automatically selects a value for the Individual Tone A Code field. Some Frequencies may not have a correlating Code causing nothing to display in the Code field.

•  See More Information


Individual Tone A Code

Selects the receive Tone A Code for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) Signaling System. QCII Standard Tones are a subset of the QCII Frequency range. Therefore, selecting a value for this field automatically selects a value for the Individual Tone A Frequency field.

•  See More Information


Individual Tone B Frequency

Selects the receive Tone B Frequency for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) Signaling System. Selecting a value for this field automatically selects a value for the Individual Tone B Code field. Some Frequencies may not have a correlating Code causing nothing to display in the Code field.

•  See More Information


Individual Tone B Code

Selects the receive Tone B Code for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) Signaling System. QCII Standard Tones are a subset of the QCII Frequency range. Therefore, selecting a value for this field automatically selects a value for the Individual Tone B Frequency field.

•  See More Information


Individual Tone C Frequency

Selects the receive Tone C Frequency for current Quik-Call II (QCII) Signaling System. Selecting a value for this field automatically selects a value for the Individual Tone C Code field. Some Frequencies may not have a correlating Code causing nothing to display in the Code field.

•  See More Information


Individual Tone C Code

Selects the receive Tone C Code for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) Signaling System. QCII Standard Tones are a subset of the QCII Frequency range. Therefore, selecting a value for this field automatically selects a value for the Individual Tone C Frequency field.

•  See More Information


Individual Tone D Frequency

Selects the receive Tone D Frequency for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) Signaling System. Selecting a value for this field automatically selects a value for the Individual Tone D Code field. Some Frequencies may not have a correlating Code causing nothing to display in the Code field.

•  See More Information


Individual Tone D Code

Selects the receive Tone D code for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) Signaling System. QCII Standard Tones are a subset of the QCII Frequency range. Therefore, selecting a value for this field automatically selects a value for the Individual Tone D Frequency field.

•  See More Information


DTMF System Window


Basic Page


Primary ID

Selects the unique one to eight digit ID that identifies the radio while operating (transmitting or receiving DTMF calls) on the current DTMF - Signaling System.

•  See More Information


Group ID

Selects the unique one to eight digit ID that identifies the radio as belonging to a unique group while operating (receiving DTMF calls) on the current DTMF - Signaling System.

•  See More Information


PTT ID Type

Selects when the PTT ID is sent during a Normal Dispatch transmission for the current DTMF - Signaling System.

•  See More Information


PTT Sidetone

  Causes the radio to sound a continuous alert tone, from the time the PTT button is pressed, until the time that the Signaling System data packet is transmitted. The purpose is to indicate to the radio-user when voice may be initiated. This feature applies for the current DTMF Signaling System.

•  See More Information


PTT Short Sidetone

  Causes the radio to sound one short alert tone, after the PTT button is pressed, and immediately following the Signaling System data packet being transmitted. The purpose is to indicate to the radio-user when voice may be initiated. This feature applies for the current DTMF Signaling System.

•  See More Information


Display Decode ID

  Causes the transmitting radio’s Primary ID to appear in this radio’s display upon receipt of a PTT ID. This feature applies for the current DTMF - Signaling System.

•  See More Information


Call Alert/Sel Cal Page


Call Alert Type

Selects the type of Call Alerts that can be received for the current DTMF Signaling System. A Call Alert allows a transmitting radio to notify (with an alert tone) and leave evidence of (by lighting the LED) a call on a receiving radio, when the radio-user is away. The Call Alert LED persists until reset by the user. A Call Alert w/Voice is a combination of a Sel Cal and a Call Alert.

•  See More Information


Call Alert LED

  Causes the receiving radio to blinks its LED when it has received a Call Alert, for the current DTMF Signaling System. The radio’s LED double-flashes yellow for an individual call, and single-flashes yellow for a group call.

•  See More Information


Alert Tone Auto Reset

  Causes the radio to generate only one sequence of the Call Alert or Call Alert w/Voice alert tone, for the current DTMF Signaling System. Normally the Call Alert Tone Tag is a repeating alert tone.

•  See More Information


Sel Cal Decode

  Allows the radio to receive a Sel Cal (Select Call) for the current DTMF Signaling System. A Select Call is typically used when the majority of transmissions are between a dispatcher and a radio-user, or a group of radio-users, and when other users need not be bothered. This is accomplished by addressing based on Radio ID’s.

•  See More Information


Sel Cal LED

  Causes the radio to blink its LED while receiving a Sel Cal (Select Call) for the current DTMF Signaling System. The radio’s LED double-flashes yellow for an individual call, and single-flashes yellow for a group call.

•  See More Information


Auto Reset Timer Type

Selects a **Timed or *Manual exception to the Signaling Squelch unmuting rule for the current DTMF - Signaling System.

•  See More Information


Advanced Page


Pretime

Selects the amount of time between PTT button press and the first digit of Signaling System data packet transmission. This time allows the receiving radio to stabilize before receiving data. This applies for the current DTMF Signaling System. Time is in milliseconds.

•  See More Information


Reset Duration

Selects the amount of time the radio waits for the next incoming DTMF digit in a sequence of digits, before resetting itself to look for the first DTMF digit of a new sequence. The feature applies for the current DTMF Signaling System. Time is in seconds.

WARNING: If you do not have complete knowledge of the system configuration that this radio will be operating on, do not attempt to modify this setting!

•  See More Information


Acknowledge Pretime

Selects the amount of time between automatic transmitter key-up and the first sent digit of the DTMF transmission-acknowledgement data packet. This time allows the receiving radio to stabilize before receiving data. This applies for the current DTMF Signaling Systems. Time is in milliseconds.

•  See More Information


Acknowledge Type

Selects the type of acknowledgment that is sent back when the radio receives a DTMF call, for the current DTMF Signaling system.

•  See More Information


Acknowledge Digit

Selects the digit that is transmitted after a valid call, only when the Acknowledge Type is set to Digit. This feature applies to the current DTMF Signaling System.

•  See More Information


Tx Tone Duration

Selects the amount of time that a DTMF tone is transmitted for a single digit. This is the case when speed dialing, or when manually dialing if the Tone Span field is set to Timed duration. Once this Tx Tone Duration ends, the Tx Tone Interval begins, and vice-versa. This applies for the current DTMF Signaling Systems. Time is in milliseconds.

•  See More Information


Tx Tone Interval

Selects the amount of time that the radio waits between DTMF digits. This is the case when speed dialing, or when manually dialing if the Tone Span field is set to Timed duration. Once Tx Tone Interval ends, the Tx Tone Duration begins, and vice-versa. This applies for the current DTMF Signaling Systems. Time is in milliseconds.

•  See More Information


Remote Monitor

HIDD_PG_MDC_SYS_REM_MON


Remote Monitor Type

Selects Remote Monitor functionality for the current MDC - Signaling System.

Important Note: This Feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

• See More Information


Remote Monitor Time (sec)

Selects the amount of time that determines how long (transmit and receive) the radio remains in the Remote Monitor mode for the current MDC - Signaling System. Time is in seconds.

Important Note: This Feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

• See More Information


Emergency Remote Monitor

  Enables the radio to receive Remote Monitor commands while operating in Emergency Mode. This is only true when the Emergency Mode Type field is set to "Alarm/Call".

Important Note: This Feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

• See More Information


Emergency Remote Monitor Time (sec)

Selects the amount of time that determines how long (transmit and receive) the radio remains in the Remote Monitor mode while operating in Emergency Mode. This is only true when the Emergency Mode Type field is set to "Alarm/Call". This selection applies for the current MDC - Signaling System. Time is in seconds.

Important Note: This Feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

• See More Information


Scan List Information Window


List Page


Alias

Selecting a correlating Conventional Personality, or Trunking Group, automatically displays the Alias for the current Scan List Member. This is a view-only field. The Alias is created in either the Conventional Personality Alias, or Trunking Group Alias field.

• See More Information


Personality

Selects a Conventional or Trunking Personality for the current Scan List Member. Personality selections are CPS given names. For example; Conventional-1, or Trunking-1.

• See More Information


Group

Selects a Group for the current Scan List Member. The correlating Personality must be selected first, and the selection must be of the Trunking dispatch type. This Group choice automatically fills-in the correlating Alias field.

• See More Information


General Page Scan List Information


Priority #1 Scan List Member

  Causes the highest priority to be assigned to the first member/row in the current Scan List. When the radio is scanning a Scan List (Active Scan), 50% of the scans are targeted at the Priority #1 Member channel.

• See More Information


Priority #2 Scan List Member

  Causes the second highest priority to be assigned to the second member/row in the current Scan List. When the radio is scanning a Scan List (Active Scan), 25% of the scans are targeted at the Priority #2 Member channel. When a Priority #2 Member exists, scan checks for the Priority #1 Member are reduced from 50% to 25%.

• See More Information


Priority Sample Time

Selects the delay period between checking for priority Scan List Member transmission activity for the current Scan List. The checking for Priority #1, or Priority #2 Members, occurs in Landed Scan Mode when the radio is unmuted on a non-priority, or a Priority #2 Member call. This checking briefly mutes the current transmission. Time is in milliseconds.

• See More Information


PL Scan Type

Causes Private Line (PL) to be required - when accepting calls from members of the current Scan List, while in Scan Mode. PL is considered only when the Conventional transmission being recieved has its Tx Squelch Type set for PL.

• See More Information


Nuisance Delete

  When a Scan List Member continually generates unwanted noise, this allows the radio-user to temporarily remove the channel from the current Active Scan. This feature applies for the current Scan List.

• See More Information


User Programmable

  Allows the radio-user the ability to modify the contents of the current Scan List using the radio’s display and menu navigation keys.

• See More Information


PL Scan Lockout

  Enhances Scan Mode performance for the current Scan List. The lockout condition occurs when, the unsuccessfully scanned - Scan List Member channel/call, had no PL code where a PL code was expected, or where the PL code was incorrect. Once lockout occurs a counter begins. The counter continues the lockout for the next nine scans of that channel. However, if scan finds that carrier has dropped on that channel, then the counter is reset and the lockout is discontinued.

This is particularly effective when in Landed Scan Mode on a non-priority scan list member - and when the radio briefly mutes at specific time intervals to check for Priority #1 or Priority #2 Member activity. The lockout allows this muting period to be a smaller amount of time. Therefore there is less interruption for the current call.

• See More Information


Tx Configuration Page


Designated Tx Channel Alias

Selecting a correlating Conventional Designated Tx Channel Personality or Trunking Designated Tx Channel Group, automatically displays the Designated Tx Channel Alias for the current Scan List Member. This is a view-only field. The Alias is created in either the Conventional Personality Alias, or Trunking Group Alias field.

• See More Information


Designated Tx Channel Personality

Selects a transmit Conventional, or Trunking Personality, to be used for the current Scan List, while operating in Scan Mode. Personality selections are CPS given names. For example; Conventional-1, or Trunking-1.

• See More Information


Designated Tx Channel Group

Selects a Trunking transmit Group / channel to be used for the current Scan List and while operating in Scan Mode.

• See More Information


Talkback

  Causes the radio to transmit on the landed channel, relating to Landed Scan Mode, this is true for the duration of the Scan Hang Timer. Once the Scan Hang Timer has expired, and Active Scan is initiated, the radio uses the Designated Tx Channel ‘Conventional’ Personality, or the Designate Tx Channel ‘Trunking’ Group to transmit on.

This applies to the current Scan List, while operating in Scan Mode.

  Disabling Talkback, causes the radio to transmit on the Designated Tx Channel ‘Conventional’ Personality, or the Designate Tx Channel ‘Trunking’ Group. This applies to the current Scan List, while operating in Scan Mode.

• See More Information


Advanced Property Page Window


LS Scan Activity Search Time

Selects the amount of time that the radio waits in Active Scan Mode on a Trunking dispatch mode - Scan List Member channel. This feature applies to the current Scan List. Time is in milliseconds.

• See More Information


Signaling Scan Type

While in Scan Mode, these selections cause Signaling System data decoding to be required when receiving Signaling System calls from the members of the current Scan List.

• See More Information


Signaling Hold Time

Selects the amount of time that the radio waits in Active Scan, on a Scan List Member channel. The wait only applies when carrier squelch is detected on the channel. This pause allows the radio enough time to decode Signaling System data. If Signaling System data is not decoded and the timer expires, the radio then scans the next Scan List Member channel. This feature applies to the current Scan List. Time is in milliseconds.

• See More Information


Radio Information Window


General Page


Model Number

The CPS retrieves and allows you to view-only the radio’s model number. The model number identifies the type of radio. This information is stored in the radio’s codeplug.

• See More Information


Serial Number

The CPS retrieves and allows you to view-only the radio’s serial number. Each radio has its own unique serial number. This information is stored in the radio’s codeplug.

• See More Information


Firmware Version

The CPS retrieves and allows you to view-only the firmware version of the currently connected radio. Firmware is Software that controls the internal hardware components of the radio. Firmware cannot be modified with the CPS.

• See More Information


Tracking Info Page


Original Codeplug Version

The CPS retrieves and allows you to view-only the first version number of the codeplug that was loaded into the radio. This information is stored in the radio’s codeplug.

• See More Information


Latest Codeplug Version

The CPS retrieves and allows you to view-only the most recent version number of the codeplug that was loaded into the radio. This information is stored in the radio’s codeplug.

• See More Information


Original Programming Source

The CPS retrieves and allows you to view-only the first source used to program the radio. The programming source is either the Factory, or the CPS. This information is stored in the radio’s codeplug.

• See More Information


Latest Programming Source

The CPS retrieves and allows you to view-only the most recent source used to program the radio. The programming source is either the Factory, or the CPS. This information is stored in the radio’s codeplug.

• See More Information


Original Programming Date

The CPS retrieves and allows you to view-only the first date on which the radio was programmed. This information is stored in the radio’s codeplug.

• See More Information


Original Programming Time

The CPS retrieves and allows you to view-only the first time at which the radio was programmed. This information is stored in the radio’s codeplug.

• See More Information


Latest Programming Date

The CPS retrieves and allows you to view-only the most recent date on which the radio was programmed. This information is stored in the radio’s codeplug.

• See More Information


Latest Programming Time

The CPS retrieves and allows you to view-only the most recent time at which the radio was programmed. This information is stored in the radio’s codeplug.

• See More Information


Frequency Range Page


Minimum Radio Frequency

The CPS retrieves and allows you to view-only the minimum frequency setting at which the radio is allowed to operate. The radio’s frequency range is defined as being between, or equal to, the Minimum and Maximum frequencies. This information is stored in the radio’s codeplug.

• See More Information


Maximum Radio Frequency

The CPS retrieves and allows you to view-only the maximum frequency setting at which the radio is allowed to operate. The radio’s frequency range is defined as being between, or equal to, the Minimum and Maximum frequencies. This information is stored in the radio’s codeplug.

• See More Information


Tx Power Page


Minimum Tx Power

The CPS retrieves and allows you to view-only the lowest possible transmit power setting (in watts) for a mobile radio only. This information is stored in the radio’s codeplug. Tx Low and Tx High power settings are then definable for a mobile radio.

• See More Information


Maximum Tx Power

The CPS retrieves and allows you to view-only the highest possible transmit power setting (in watts) for a mobile radio only. This information is stored in the radio’s codeplug. Tx Low and Tx High power settings are then definable for a mobile radio.

• See More Information


Radio Configuration Window


Basic Page


VOX Headset

  Causes voice to be routed to an Accessory Connector external headset speaker.

• See More Information


Hot Keypad

  Allows the radio-user the ability to dial telephone numbers using the radio’s keypad, even when the radio is not in Phone Mode. This mode is initiated by pressing the PTT button and while dialing the required numbers.

• See More Information


Tx Inhibit Quick Key Override

  Gives the radio-user the ability to override the selected Busy Channel Lockout rule, thus allowing a transmission to be sent on a busy channel. The radio-user accomplishes this by Quick-Keying the PTT button. In other words, pressing the PTT, then releasing, and then quickly re-pressing. This feature applies only when the radio is operating in Conventional dispatch mode.

• See More Information


Auto Power Mode

  Allows the Conventional personality Tx Power Level field to be set to Automatic. This ‘Auto’ setting causes the radio to automatically select between transmitting at low or high power based upon the strength of the last received transmission. After a period of inactivity the radio will always transmit at high power.

• See More Information


Infrared Remote

   Enables the use of the Infrared Remote control with a mobile radio’s control head.

• See More Information


Audio Processing Filter (APF)

  Enables the Audio Processing Filter. When receive audio exceeds a certain volume threshold, this filter is automatically activated. This filter reduces radio and airway noise thus enhancing audio clarity.

• See More Information


Long Press Duration

Selects the amount of time that the radio-user is required to press (and hold down) a button, for the press to be interpreted by the radio as a long press. The radio’s programmable buttons can be assigned unique long press vs short press functionality. See Control and Menus. Time is in milliseconds.

• See More Information


Language Selection

Selects the language that appears in the radio’s display. If the Language Mode field is enabled, the radio-user can override this selection.

IMPORTANT NOTE:

This Feature is not available in portables with firmware releases before RO2.00. In addition, some non-English alphabet keyboard characters may not appear correctly in the radio’s display with firmware releases before RO2.00.

• See More Information


Disable Alerts

Selects which type(s) of radio alerts, if any, that are disabled. The radio-user has the ability to override these selections with the Tone Disable and or the Light Disable menu selections, if these fields are enabled for radio-user use.

• See More Information


Keypad/Microphone Configuration

Selects the keypad hardware-option for the current portable radio or mobile radio microphone. This allows the radio’s internal software to be compatible with the current hardware configuration. In addition, this offers radio-users the ability to upgrade the radio’s functionality.

• See More Information


Radio-to-Radio Cloning

  Enables the radio’s ability to be cloned or to clone. This type of Cloning is the ability to transfer a radio’s entire codeplug to another radio via a special programming cloning cable. This type of Cloning is accomplished without the use of the CPS.

  When disabled, the radio cannot clone or be cloned-to.

• See More Information


Radio Clock Update

  Enables the radio’s time and date to be automatically updated using the computer’s time and date. The computer’s time and date is transferred to the radio when the radio is written-to.

• See More Information


Talkgroups Assignment to Rotary Knob

  Enables the radio's ability to assign LTR/Passport talkgroups to rotary knob and LTR/Passport Zones to Up/Down buttons.

• See More Information


Lights/LEDs Page


Auto Back Light

  Allows a portable radio's display and front panel back light to automatically illuminate on any key press from the radio’s front panel. After a short period of inactivity the light automatically turns off.

• See More Information


Busy LED

  Causes the radio’s Busy LED to flash red when the current channel is busy.

• See More Information


Tx Low Battery LED

  Causes a portable radio's LED to flash red when the low battery threshold is reached. This occurs only while the radio is transmitting.

• See More Information


Power Up Test LED

  Causes the radio’s LED to be solid red during the power-up-test. This indicates to the radio-user that the radio is in a warm-up phase, and is not yet ready for user operation.

• See More Information


Mobile Backlight

Selects the brightness level of a mobile radio’s Control Head. This radio backlight can also be turned off.

• See More Information


Alert Tones Page


Tx Low Battery Alert

  Causes a portable radio to sound an alert tone (chirp) when its low battery threshold is reached. This tone only occurs following a transmission and when the PTT button is released.

• See More Information


Wrap-around Alert

   Causes an alert tone to sound when a portable radio’s Rotary Channel Selector passes from the last programmed position to the first programmed position, or from the first to the last programmed position.

Zones and Channels are dynamically assigned to the positions of the Rotary Channel Selector. These are radio specific Rotary features known as Continuous Zone and Continuous Channel.

• See More Information


Rx Low Battery Alert Interval

Selects the amount of time that defines the silent interval between each low battery alert tone for a portable radio. This tone only occurs while a call is being received, and when radio’s low battery threshold is reached. Time is in seconds.

• See More Information


Power Up Tone Type

Selects the type of alert tone that is sounded - one time - when the radio is powering-on.

• See More Information


Alert Tone Fixed Volume

Note: Enabling the Alert Volume Level menu selection allows the radio-user the ability to toggle on and off this same functionality.

  Causes all alert tones to remain at a constant volume level. This constant volume level is equal to the radio’s Midpoint Volume Setting, plus or minus the Alert Tone Volume Offset setting. The audio level for alert tones then remains at this constant, even when the radio’s Volume Knob is adjusted.

  Causes all alert tones volume levels to be adjustable with the radio’s Volume Knob. The effect that the Volume Knob has on alert tones is then determined by the Alert Tone Constant Boost setting.

• See More Information


Alert Tone Constant Boost

Important Note: 	When the Alert Tone Fixed Volume field is enabled, these Constant Boost settings are completely ignored. When the Alert Tone Fixed Volume field is disabled, one of the two following scenarios will be true for the radio-user.

  Based on the Alert Tone Volume Offset setting, alert tone volume levels will be constantly offset higher, lower, or equal to, receive audio volume levels, which are controlled by the radio’s Volume Knob position.

Note: 	The alert tone volume levels always remain within the radio’s internal Minimum / Maximum range for receive audio volume levels.

  When disabled the following rules apply:

•	If the Alert Tone Volume Offset field is set to a negative (-) amount, alert tone volume levels never exceed the (Maximum Volume setting ‘less’ the Volume Offset amount).

•	If the Alert Tone Volume Offset field is set to a positive (+)amount, all alert tone volume levels never go lower than the (Minimum Volume setting ‘plus’ the Volume Offset amount).

• See More Information


Escalating Alerts

  Causes the radio to gradually increase the volume of a repetitive alert tone. This repetitive tone is an alert of an incoming radio call. The radio-user can also make this selection with the Escalert menu feature.

• See More Information


Alert Tone Volume Offset

Selects the offset value amount to be used by the Alert Tone Fixed Volume, and Alert Tone Constant Boost fields.

If Alert Tone Fixed Volume is enabled, all alert tones to remain at a constant volume level. This constant volume level is equal to the radio’s Midpoint Volume Setting, plus or minus this Volume Offset amount.

When Alert Tone Fixed Volume is disabled, the Alert Tone Constant Boost uses this Volume Offset amount differently when it is enabled, then when it is disabled.

• See More Information


Scan Page


Scan Hang Time

Selects the amount of time that the radio waits on the scanned channel – in Landed Scan mode, before returning to Active Scan mode. The timer begins once receive or transmit activity has ceased. While the timer is counting down, if the radio transmits (PTT is pressed), or the radio unmutes its speaker to receive audio, the timer is reset, and the original conditions again apply. Time is in milliseconds (ms).

• See More Information


Revert Scan

   Causes the radio to automatically move to the last landed scan - channel when exiting scan mode.

   When disabled, the radio automatically moves back to the channel where scan was originally initiated.

• See More Information


Priority Scan Alert

  Causes an alert tone to sound when the radio unmutes to a Priority #1, or a Priority #2 Scan List Member transmission.

• See More Information


Scanned Channel Discovery Alert

  Causes an alert tone to sound when the radio-user selects (with the Channel Selector) the Scan List Member channel that last unmuted.

• See More Information


Selected Channel Lock

Causes the selected channel can not be added into scan list or deleted from san list via radio menu.

Causes the Selected channel can not be deleted temporarily from scan list via Nuisance delete.

• See More Information


Priority Channel 1 Lock

Causes the priority channel 1 can not be edit via radio menu.

• See More Information


Menu Options Page


Recall Last Selected Menu

  Causes the last-used Top Level Menu option to automatically appear in the radio’s display when the radio-user enters the Menu Mode.

  When disabled, the first available Top-Level Menu option appears in the radio’s display when the radio-user enters the Menu Mode.

• See More Information


Menu Time-Out Timer

Selects the amount of time the radio waits in Menu Mode, without any radio-user key press activity, before automatically exiting out of Menu Mode. Time is in seconds.

• See More Information


Test Options Page


FPA Entry

  Allows admittance into the radio’s FPA (Front Panel Access) testing mode.

• See More Information


RF Test

  Allows the ability to run the Radio Frequency Test once the radio is in the Front Panel Access test mode.

WARNING: Disable this feature in countries that have strict regulations against radiating unauthorized frequency tests in the air.

• See More Information


(Has Been Removed) RF Test Power Select

Selects the transmit power-level for the Radio Frequency Test. Radio power output affects the strength and distance of the radio’s transmissions.

• See More Information


Monitor Page


Sticky Permanent Alert

  Causes a portable radio to generate an alert tone upon entering Sticky Permanent Monitor Mode. Therefore, the alert tone is sounded when the Monitor button has reached its Long Press duration. This feature only applies for channels capable of Conventional Dispatch.

• See More Information


Monitor Type

Selects the monitoring mode of the radio (portable only). Monitor allows the radio-user to listen to all radio traffic for channels of Conventional dispatch type. Monitor is possible for PL (Private Line) transmissions that do not match for the current channel.

• See More Information


Option Board Page


Option Board Type

Selects the type of option board that has been installed in the current radio. This prompts the radio to expect certain new functionality.

• See More Information


Option Board Configuration Download

  Causes the radio to download third party option board configuration data which initializes specific option board functionality on a per Conventional or Trunking Personality basis. Option board configuration data downloads apply only to specific option board types.

• See More Information


Enable Flat Tx Audio

  Enables a data path for an external option board. Flat Tx Audio allows for backward compatibility and should only be enabled with full knowledge of the option board type to be used.

When enabled Conventional PL and LTR Trunking are automatically disabled on a radio-wide basis.

• See More Information


The Voice Storage Page


Total Recording Time

Selects the maximum amount of recording time for the installed Voice Storage Board. Time is in seconds.

WARNING: Do not exceed the maximum setting for the particular Voice Storage Board being installed. It may be 120, 240, or 480 seconds. Setting the Maximum higher than the board’s capacity could cause the board to severely malfunction. Refer to the User/Installation guide for the proper setting.

• See More Information


Maximum Message Length

Selects the maximum amount of time for a recorded voice message. This time period determines the number of recording slots that are available. The number of slots is equal to Total Recording Time, divided by this Maximum Message Length. The maximum number of recorded voice slots currently supported is 99. Time is in seconds.

• See More Information


Voice Storage Inactivity Timer

Selects the amount of time that the radio waits after the completion of a message playback. Once the timer expires, the radio automatically returns to the top of the Voice Storage message list. If the radio-user ‘short-presses’ the ‘programmed’ message playback button before the timer expires, the next message in the Voice Storage message list plays. Time is in seconds.

• See More Information


Voice Storage Debouncer Timer

During a recording of an incoming call, this selects the amount of time that the Voice Storage recorder waits once carrier is lost. The loss of carrier starts the timer and suspends the recording. If the radio then begins receiving data before the timer expires, the suspended recording resumes. If the timer expires, the current recording is considered complete. Time is in seconds.

• See More Information


Accessory Configuration Page


Accessory Power Up Delay

Selects the amount of time (during radio power-up) that the Active Level of the Accessory Connector pins are ignored. During this time any functionality associated with all connector pins is delayed for the duration of the timer. Time is in milliseconds.

• See More Information


Debounce Duration

Selects the amount of time that the radio waits before rechecking any fully programmable Accessory Connectors pin’s Active Level. Debounce is the electrical noise usually caused by relays or other mechanical devices which can cause misleading readings. Therefore certain Accessory Connector pins may require a wait time to allow for possible debounce noise. This applies to Input Lines only. Time is in milliseconds.

• See More Information


External Alarm Duration

Selects the amount of time that the External Alarm feature remains active. The External Alarm is activated by an incoming Call Alert, Sel Cal, or MDC Message Time is in seconds.

• See More Information


External Alarm Delay

Selects the amount of time prior to the External Alarm Duration timer. Once this External Alarm Delay timer expires, the External Alarm Duration timer begins and the External Alarm becomes active. Time is in seconds.

• See More Information


External Alarm Configuration

Selects the mode of operation for the External Alarm feature.

The armed state is when the radio is constantly polling for the possible triggers to set off the External Alarm.

The unarmed state is when the radio’s External Alarm feature is not polling for any External Alarm triggers, thus the External Alarm Delay or the External Alarm Duration can not begin.

• See More Information


Rx Audio Type

Selects the configuration of the audio output line. The audio output line uses the partially programmable Pin #11 of the Accessory Connector. Certain external accessories such as modems or public address systems may require unfiltered or filtered audio.

• See More Information


Data PTT Audio Source

Selects the point of input for audio data and whether filtering is applied. Data PTT Audio is generally used with accessories such as a Global Positioning System (GPS) or Vehicular Radio Modem (VRM).

• See More Information


Insert External PTT Audio Source


Data PTT Overrides Voice

Selects PTT with a data transmission to override a voice transmission. When the radio is transmitting or receiving a voice transmission, enabling this selection allows PTT with data to interrupt the voice transmission and begin its own transmission.

• See More Information


External PTT Audio Source

Selects the point of input and whether filtering is applied. External PTT Audio is generally used when the radio and the radio-user are in two different locations. For example, the radio-user is inside the car and the radio is in the vehicle’s trunk.

Important Note: This feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

• See More Information


Handset

  Enables the Handset accessory feature. The Handset is similar to a telephone handset, which allows for speaker privacy.

• See More Information


Ignition Sense Type

The mobile radio can be automatically powered-off or the PTT button can be disabled in conjunction with the switching-off of a vehicle’s ignition. The manual powering-off of a vehicle’s ignition is known as a loss of Ignition Sense. Ignition Sense is a function of Accessory Connector Pin #10.

• See More Information


Accessory Pins Page


Accessory Package

Selects an accessory connector package. Each package assigns a related group of default settings to the fully programmable pins of the Accessory Connector. Once an Accessory Package has been assigned, individual pin settings may be modified.

• See More Information


Pin #3 Function Select

Selects the radio accessory or functionality for Accessory Connector Pin #3. The data direction for this pin is input-only. The Active Level and the Debounce Enable also define this pin’s functionality.

•	The Pin selections: Data PTT and PA Switch, are mutually exclusive selections. That is, when selecting either one, the other will not be available.

•	Also see the definition for the Data Revert input pin selection and the LS RPTR Control input pin selection.

• See More Information


Pin #3 Active Level

Selects the voltage level required to activate Accessory Connector Pin #3’s selected Functionality.

• See More Information


Pin #3 Debounce Enabled

  Causes the Debounce Duration to be used for the Accessory Connector Pin #3’s selected Functionality. The Debounce Duration is the amount of time that the radio waits before rechecking Pin #3’s Active Level.

• See More Information


Pin #4 Function Select

Selects the radio accessory or functionality for Accessory Connector Pin #4. The Active Level also defines this pin’s functionality. The data direction for this pin is output-only, therefore Debounce does not apply.

• See More Information


Pin #4 Active Level

Selects the voltage level required to activate Accessory Connector Pin #4’s selected Functionality. Low is the only Active Level setting that the radio acknowledges for Pin #4.

• See More Information


Pin #4 Debounce Enabled

  Pin #4's data direction is output-only, therefore the Debounce Duration does not apply.

• See More Information


Pin #6 Function Select

Selects the radio accessory or functionality for Accessory Connector Pin #6. The data direction for this pin is input-only. The Active Level and the Debounce Enable also define this pin’s functionality.

•	The Pin selections: Data PTT and PA Switch, are mutually exclusive selections. That is, when selecting either one, the other will not be available.

•	Also see the definition for the Data Revert input pin selection and the LS RPTR Control input pin selection.

• See More Information


Pin #6 Active Level

Selects the voltage level required to activate Accessory Connector Pin #6’s selected Functionality.

• See More Information


Pin #6 Debounce Enabled

  Causes the Debounce Duration to be used for Accessory Connector Pin #6. The Debounce Duration is the amount of time that the radio waits before rechecking Pin #6’s Active Level. Debounce applies only when Pin #6’s selected Functionality has an Input data direction.

• See More Information


Pin #8 Function Select

Selects the radio accessory or functionality for Accessory Connector Pin #8. The data direction for this pin can be input or output. The Active Level and the Debounce Enable for Pin #8 also define this selection.

•	The Pin selections: Data PTT and PA Switch, are mutually exclusive selections. That is, when selecting either one, the other will not be available.

•	Also see the definition for the Data Revert input pin selection and the LS RPTR Control input pin selection.

• See More Information


Pin #8 Active Level

Selects the voltage level required to activate Accessory Connector Pin #8’s selected Functionality.

• See More Information


Pin #8 Debounce Enabled

  Causes the Debounce Duration to be used for Accessory Connector Pin #8. The Debounce Duration is the amount of time that the radio waits before rechecking Pin #8’s Active Level. Debounce applies only when Pin #8's selected Functionality has an Input data direction.

• See More Information


Pin #9 Function Select

Selects the radio accessory or functionality for Accessory Connector Pin #9. The data direction for this pin is input-only. The Active Level and the Debounce Enable for Pin #9 also define this selection.

• See More Information


Pin #9 Active Level

Selects the voltage level required to activate Accessory Connector Pin #9’s selected Functionality.

• See More Information


Pin #9 Debounce Enabled

  Causes the Debounce Duration to be used for the Accessory Connector Pin #9’s selected Functionality. The Debounce Duration is the amount of time that the radio waits before rechecking Pin #9’s Active Level.

• See More Information


Pin #12 Function Select

Selects the radio accessory or functionality for Accessory Connector Pin #12. The data direction for this pin can be input or output. The Active Level and the Debounce Enable for Pin #12 also define this selection.

•	The Pin selections: Data PTT and PA Switch, are mutually exclusive selections. That is, when selecting either one, the other will not be available.

•	Also see the definition for the Data Revert input pin selection and the LS RPTR Control input pin selection.

• See More Information


Pin #12 Active Level

Selects the voltage level required to activate Accessory Connector Pin #12’s selected Functionality.

• See More Information


Pin #12 Debounce Enabled

  Causes the Debounce Duration to be used for Accessory Connector Pin #12. The Debounce Duration is the amount of time that the radio waits before rechecking Pin #12’s Active Level. Debounce applies only when Pin #12’s selected Functionality has an Input data direction.

• See More Information


Pin #14 Function Select

Selects the radio accessory or functionality for Accessory Connector Pin #14. The data direction for this pin can be input or output. The Active Level and the Debounce Enable for Pin #14 also define this selection.

•	The Pin selections: Data PTT and PA Switch, are mutually exclusive selections. That is, when selecting either one, the other will not be available.

•	Also see the definition for the Data Revert input pin selection and the LS RPTR Control input pin selection.

• See More Information


Pin #14 Active Level

Selects the voltage level required to activate Accessory Connector Pin #14’s selected Functionality.

• See More Information


Pin #14 Debounce Enabled

  Causes the Debounce Duration to be used for Accessory Connector Pin #14. The Debounce Duration is the amount of time that the radio waits before rechecking Pin #14’s Active Level. Debounce applies only when Pin #14’s selected Functionality has an Input data direction.

• See More Information


Auxiliary Control Page


Auxiliary Control #1 Momentary Duration

Selects the amount of time that the radio activates voltage Active Levels for the assigned Accessory Connector pin. Time is in milliseconds.

• See More Information


Auxiliary Control #1 Active ID

Selects the Auxiliary Control #1 Active ID. When the Auxiliary Control #1 Active ID is received by the radio, the Auxiliary Control #1 Momentary Duration is activated. Thus toggling-on voltage Active Levels for the assigned Accessory Connector pin, and for the Momentary Duration time period.

Important Note:

•	All four digits must be filled in, and ‘F’ is not allowed for any digit.

•	The Auxiliary Control #1 Active ID must not be equal to the Auxiliary Control #1 Inactive ID.

• See More Information


Auxiliary Control #1 Inactive ID

Selects the Auxiliary Control #1 Inactive ID. When the Auxiliary Control #1 Inactive ID is received by the radio, the voltage Active Level for the assigned Accessory Connector pin is toggled off. This is only true when the Auxiliary Control #1 Momentary Duration is set to zero "0" causing the voltage Active Level to be toggled-on indefinitely.

Important Note:

•	All four digits must be filled in, and ‘F’ is not allowed for any digit.

•	The Auxiliary Control #1 the Inactive ID must not be equal to the Auxiliary Control #1 Active ID.

• See More Information


Auxiliary Control #1 Alias "On"

Allows the ability to add a radio-user recognizable description that appears in the radio’s display. This Alias "On" appears when the Auxiliary Control #1 Momentary Duration is running, and when the Active Level is toggled-on (indefinitely) for a Momentary Duration selection of Zero "0".

• See More Information


Auxiliary Control #1 Alias "Off"

Allows the ability to add a radio-user recognizable description that appears in the radio’s display. This Alias "Off" appears briefly when the Active Level is toggled-off by a programmable button or remotely by the Auxiliary Control #1 Inactive ID.

• See More Information


Auxiliary Control #2 Momentary Duration

Selects the amount of time that the radio activates voltage Active Levels for the assigned Accessory Connector pin. Time is in milliseconds.

• See More Information


Auxiliary Control #2 Active ID

Selects the Auxiliary Control #2 Active ID. When the Auxiliary Control #2 Active ID is received by the radio, the Auxiliary Control #2 Momentary Duration is activated. Thus toggling-on voltage Active Levels for the assigned Accessory Connector pin, and for this momentary duration time period.

Important Note:

•	All four digits must be filled in, and ‘F’ is not allowed for any digit.

•	The Auxiliary Control #1 Active ID must not be equal to the Auxiliary Control #2 Inactive ID.

• See More Information


Auxiliary Control #2 Inactive ID

Selects the Auxiliary Control #2 Inactive ID. When the Auxiliary Control #2 Inactive ID is received by the radio, the voltage Active Level for the assigned Accessory Connector pin is toggled off. This is only true when the Auxiliary Control #2 Momentary Duration is set to zero "0" causing the voltage Active Level to be toggled-on indefinitely.

Important Note:

•	All four digits must be filled in, and ‘F’ is not allowed for any digit.

•	The Auxiliary Control #2 the Inactive ID must not be equal to the Auxiliary Control #2 Active ID.

• See More Information


Auxiliary Control #2 Alias "On"

Allows the ability to add a radio-user recognizable description that appears in the radio’s display. This Alias "On" appears when the Auxiliary Control #2 Momentary Duration running, and when Active Level is toggled-on (indefinitely) for a Momentary Duration selection of Zero "0".

• See More Information


Auxiliary Control #2 Alias "Off"

Allows the ability to add a radio-user recognizable description that appears in the radio’s display. This Alias "Off" appears briefly when the Active Level is toggled-off by a programmable button or remotely by the Auxiliary Control #2 Inactive ID.

• See More Information


Tx Power Page


Tx Low Power

For mobile radios this setting determines the wattage for the CPS Tx Power Level "Low" setting. The "Low" setting can also be radio-user selected with a programmable button press.

• See More Information


Tx High Power

For mobile radios this setting determines the wattage for the CPS - Tx Power Level "High" setting. The "High" setting can also be radio-user selected with a programmable button press.

• See More Information


Home Revert Page


Home Revert Zone Alias

Selecting a value for the Home Revert Zone field automatically retrieves this Zone Alias. Zone Aliases are defined in the Personality Assignment, Zone Alias field. This is a view-only field.

• See More Information


Home Revert Zone

Selects the Zone that the radio engages (jumps to) when a programmable button set for "Home Revert" is pressed.

• See More Information


Home Revert Channel Alias

Selecting a value for the Home Revert Channel field automatically retrieves this Conventional Personality Alias, or Trunking Group Alias depending on the dispatch type of the selected Home Revert Zone. This is a view-only field.

• See More Information


Home Revert Channel

Selects the Channel that the radio engages (jumps to) when a programmable button set to "Home Revert" is pressed. The channel will represent either a Conventional Personality or a Trunking Group, depending on the dispatch type of the selected Home Revert Zone.

• See More Information


Home Revert Zone Alias 2

Selecting a value for the Home Revert Zone 2 field automatically retrieves this Zone Alias 2. Zone Aliases are defined in the Personality Assignment, Zone Alias field. This is a view-only field.

• See More Information


Home Revert Zone 2

Selects the Zone that the radio engages (jumps to) when a programmable button set for "Home Revert 2" or "Home Channel 2" is pressed.

• See More Information


Home Revert Channel Alias 2

Selecting a value for the Home Revert Channel 2 field automatically retrieves this Conventional Personality Alias, or Trunking Group Alias depending on the dispatch type of the selected Home Revert Zone 2. This is a view-only field.

• See More Information


Home Revert Channel 2

Selects the Channel that the radio engages (jumps to) when a programmable button set to "Home Revert 2" or "Home Channel 2" is pressed. The channel will represent either a Conventional Personality or a Trunking Group, depending on the dispatch type of the selected Home Revert Zone 2.

• See More Information


HUB (Hook Up Box) Defeats PL

   Causes the radio to unmute to all carrier squelch activity on a channel when the microphone is off the hook. This is true even when the selected radio channel’s Unmute/Mute rule requires PL (Private Line).

• See More Information


Hook(HUB) Suspends Scan

Selects the radio’s Scan Mode behavior when the microphone is off the hook.

• See More Information


The Microphone Page


Microphone Gain

Selects the Gain control for the standard microphone. Gain determines a non-fluctuating audio volume level for the receiving radio’s speaker, this level remains constant regardless of the audio level that the transmitting radio’s microphone receives. The radio-user on the receiving radio can as always adjust speaker levels.

The standard microphone is on the front side of a Portable radio, and attaches to the control head of a Mobile radio.

IMPORTANT NOTE:

This Feature is not available in portables with firmware releases before RO2.00.

• See More Information


Accessory Microphone Gain

Selects the Gain control for the Accessory Microphone. Gain determines a non-fluctuating audio volume level for the receiving radio’s speaker, this level remains constant regardless of the audio level that the transmitting radio’s microphone receives. The radio-user on the receiving radio can as always adjust speaker levels.

The Accessory Microphone attaches to the Accessory Connector of a Portable or Mobile radio.

IMPORTANT NOTE:

This Feature is not available in portables with firmware releases before RO2.00.

• See More Information


Emergency Microphone Gain

Selects the microphone Gain control during Emergency Mode. Gain determines a non-fluctuating audio volume level for the receiving radio’s speaker, this level remains constant regardless of the audio level that the transmitting radio’s microphone receives. The radio-user on the receiving radio can as always adjust speaker levels. Once the Emergency button is pressed and Emergency Mode is initiated, the microphone automatically keys-up for transmission. This is only true when Emergency Open Mic Duration is not set to Disabled.

• See More Information


Hot Microphone (Hot Mic)

Selects which microphone automatically keys-up and accepts audio and then automatically de-keys when audio is no longer present: Accessory, or Standard. The Voice Operated Tx field determines if Hot Mic is available on a per Conventional Personality basis. Additionally, during Emergency Mode, the Hot Mic automatically keys-up for the Open Mic Duration regardless of the currently selected radio channel.

• See More Information


Password Page


Enable Radio Lock

  Causes a radio-user prompt for the input of the current Radio Lock Password. The password is required before normal radio operations are allowed.

• See More Information


Radio Lock Password

Selects the four-digit password that the radio requires prior to allowing normal radio operations. The radio-user is prompted to enter this password during radio power-up.

• See More Information


Enable CPS Password

  Causes the current codeplug to be CPS Password protected.

1.	When reading or writing radio, CPS will validate the password if the checkbox is set.

2.	When opening archive file, CPS will validate the password if the checkbox is set.

• See More Information


CPS Password

Selects the seven character password that is required when reading/writing the current codeplug.

1.	When reading or writing radio, CPS will validate the password if the radio is CPS password protected.

2.	When opening archive file, CPS will validate the password if the archive file is CPS password protected.

• See More Information


The Edit Mode Page


Edit Mode Password

Selects the four digit password that is required in order for the radio-user to gain access to Edit Mode.

• See More Information


Lower Limit Frequency (MHz)

Selects the lower frequency limit for the radio-user when operating in the Edit Mode. This Lower Limit Frequency and the Upper Limit Frequency define the Edit Mode frequency range.

• See More Information


Upper Limit Frequency (MHz)

Selects the upper frequency limit for the radio-user when operating in the Edit Mode. This Upper Limit Frequency and the Lower Limit Frequency define the Edit Mode frequency range.

• See More Information


Tx Offset Frequency (MHz)

Selects the offset amount for the transmit frequency when operating in the Edit Mode. That is, the radio-user is able to select for the transmit frequency to be offset positively or negatively from the receive frequency by this selected amount.

• See More Information


The Default Display Page


Line 1

Selects the value that appears on the first line of the four line Display.

• See More Information


Line 2

Selects the value that appears on the second line of the four line Display.

• See More Information


Line 3

Selects the value that appears on the third line of the four line Display.

• See More Information


Line 4

Selects the value that appears on the fourth line of the four line Display.

• See More Information


VOX Status

  Enables the Voice Operated Transmit (VOX) indicator to appear on the same line as the "Clock/Status" selection in the radio’s display. VOX Status indicates to the radio-user if VOX is available for the currently selected channel.

• See More Information


Answer Machine Status

  Causes the Answer Machine indicator (AM) to appear on the same line as the "Clock/Status" selection in the radio’s display. Answer Machine Status indicates to the radio-user if the Answer Mode functionality is currently active.

Important Note: This feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

• See More Information


Call Stack Status

  Causes the Call Stack Status field to appear on the same line as the "Clock/Status" selection in the radio’s display. Call Stack Status indicates to the radio-user if the Call Stack functionality is currently active and the number of calls the radio-user may have missed.

• See More Information


Conventional Buttons Window


Rotary/Top Page


Rotary (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional dispatch functionality assigned to a portable multi-line display radio’s rotary dial.

• See More Information


Top Button Short Press (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Short Press of the Top Button. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

• See More Information


Top Button Long Press (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of the Top Button.

• See More Information


Side Buttons Page


Side Button 1 (Upper) Short Press (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of Side Button 1 (SB1). A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

• See More Information


Side Button 1 (Upper) Long Press (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of Side Button 1 (SB1).

• See More Information


Side Button 2 (Middle) Short Press (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality function to be assigned to a Short Press of Side Button 2 (SB2). A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

• See More Information


Side Button 2 (Middle) Long Press (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of Side Button 2 (SB2).

• See More Information


Side Button 3 (Lower) Short Press (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Short Press of Side Button 3 (SB3). A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

• See More Information


Side Button 3 (Lower) Long Press (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of Side Button 3 (SB3).

• See More Information


Front Buttons Page


Front Button P1 Short Press (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Short Press of Front Button P1. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

• See More Information


Front Button P1 Long Press (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of Front Button P1.

• See More Information


Front Button P2 Short Press (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Short Press of Front Button P2. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

• See More Information


Front Button P2 Long Press (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of Front Button P2.

• See More Information


Front Button P3 Short Press (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Short Press of Front Button P3. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

• See More Information


Front Button P3 Long Press (Conventional)

Selects the functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of Front Button P3.

• See More Information


LS Trunking Buttons Window


Rotary (Trunking)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality assigned to a portable multi-line display radio’s rotary dial.

• See More Information


Top Button Short Press (Trunking)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Short Press of the Top Button. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

• See More Information


Top Button Long Press (Trunking)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of the Top Button.

• See More Information


Side Buttons Page (Trunking)


Side Button 1 (Upper) Short Press

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Short Press of Side Button 1 (SB1). A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

• See More Information


Side Button 1 (Upper) Long Press

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of Side Button 1 (SB1).

• See More Information


Side Button 2 (Middle) Short Press

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Short Press of Side Button 2 (SB2). A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

• See More Information


Side Button 2 (Middle) Long Press (Trunking)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of Side Button 2 (SB2).

• See More Information


Side Button 3 (Lower) Short Press (Trunking)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Short Press of Side Button 3 (SB3). A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

• See More Information


Side Button 3 (Lower) Long Press (Trunking)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of Side Button 3 (SB3).

• See More Information


Front Buttons Page (Trunking)


Front Button P1 Short Press (Trunking)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Short Press of Front Button P1. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

• See More Information


Front Button P1 Long Press (Trunking)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of Front Button P1.

• See More Information


Front Button P2 Short Press (Trunking)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Short Press of Front Button P2. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

• See More Information


Front Button P2 Long Press (Trunking)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of Front Button P2.

• See More Information


Front Button P3 Short Press (Trunking)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Short Press of Front Button P3. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

• See More Information


Front Button P3 Long Press (Trunking)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of Front Button P3.

• See More Information


The Conventional Buttons Window (Mobile)


The Mobile Key Buttons Page (Conventional)


Mobile Key Button 1 Short Press (Conventional)

Currently the short press and the Long Press for MK1 is view-only and is always set to Channel Select 1.

• See More Information


Mobile Key Button 1 Long Press (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of the Control Head’s MK2 button.

• See More Information


Mobile Key Button 2 Short Press (Conventional)

Currently the short press and the Long Press for MK1 is view-only and is always set to Channel Select 2.

• See More Information


Mobile Key Button 2 Long Press (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of the Control Head’s MK2 button.

• See More Information


Mobile Key Button 3 Short Press (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of the Control Head’s MK3 button. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

• See More Information


Mobile Key Button 3 Long Press (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of the Control Head’s MK3 button.

• See More Information


Mobile Key Button 4 Short Press (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of the Control Head’s MK4 button. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

• See More Information


Mobile Key Button 4 Long Press (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of the Control Head’s MK4 button.

• See More Information


The Programmable Buttons Page (Conventional)


P1 Button Short Press (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of the Control Head’s P1 button. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

• See More Information


P1 Button Long Press (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of the Control Head’s P1 button.

• See More Information


P2 Button Short Press  (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of the Control Head’s P2 button. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

• See More Information


P2 Button Long Press (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of the Control Head’s P2 button.

• See More Information


P3 Button Short Press (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of the Control Head’s P3 button. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

• See More Information


P3 Button Long Press (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of the Control Head’s P3 button.

• See More Information


P4 Button Short Press (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of the Control Head’s P4 button. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

• See More Information


P4 Button Long Press (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of the Control Head’s P4 button.

• See More Information


The Microphone Buttons Page (Conventional)


Microphone Button A Short Press (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of the Microphone’s Button A. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

• See More Information


Microphone Button A Long Press (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of the Microphone’s Button A.

• See More Information


Microphone Button B Short Press (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of the Microphone’s Button B. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

• See More Information


Microphone Button B Long Press (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of the Microphone’s Button B.

• See More Information


Microphone Button C Short Press (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of the Microphone’s Button C. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

• See More Information


Microphone Button C Long Press (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of the Microphone’s Button C.

• See More Information


The Infrared Remote Page (Conventional)


Infrared Remote Button 1 (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to Infrared Remote Control Button 1.

• See More Information


Infrared Remote Button 2 (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to Infrared Remote Control Button 2.

• See More Information


Infrared Remote Button 3 (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to Infrared Remote Control Button 3.

• See More Information


Infrared Remote Button 4 (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to Infrared Remote Control Button 4.

• See More Information


Infrared Remote Button 5 (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to Infrared Remote Control Button 5.

• See More Information


Infrared Remote Button 6 (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to Infrared Remote Control Button 6.

• See More Information


Infrared Remote Button 7 (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to Infrared Remote Control Button 7.

• See More Information


Infrared Remote Button 8 (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to Infrared Remote Control Button 8.

• See More Information


The Function Buttons Page (Conventional)


Function Button F1 Short Press (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of the Control Head’s F1 button. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

• See More Information


Function Button F1 Long Press (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a defined Long Press of the Control Head’s F1 button.

• See More Information


Function Button F2 Short Press (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of the Control Head’s F2 button. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

• See More Information


Function Button F2 Long Press (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a defined Long Press of the Control Head’s F2 button.

• See More Information


Function Button F3 Short Press (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of the Control Head’s F3 button. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

• See More Information


Function Button F3 Long Press (Conventional)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a defined Long Press of the Control Head’s F3 button.

• See More Information


The LS Trunking  Buttons Window (Mobile)


The Programmable Buttons Page (Trunking)


P1 Button Short Press (Trunking)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of the Control Head’s P1 Button. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

• See More Information


P1 Button Long Press (Trunking)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of the Control Head’s P1 Button.

• See More Information


P2 Button Short Press (Trunking)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of the Control Head’s P2 Button. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

• See More Information


P2 Button Long Press (Trunking)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of the Control Head’s P2 Button.

• See More Information


P3 Button Short Press (Trunking)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of the Control Head’s P3 Button. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

• See More Information


P3 Button Long Press

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of the Control Head’s P3 Button.

• See More Information


P4 Button Short Press (Trunking)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of the Control Head’s P4 Button. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

• See More Information


P4 Button Long Press (Trunking)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of the Control Head’s P4 Button.

• See More Information


The Microphone Buttons Page (Trunking)


Microphone Button A Short Press (Trunking)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of the Microphone’s Button A. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

• See More Information


Microphone Button A Long Press (Trunking)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of the Microphone’s Button A.

• See More Information


Microphone Button B Short Press (Trunking)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of the Microphone’s Button B. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

• See More Information


Microphone Button B Long Press (Trunking)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of the Microphone’s Button B.

• See More Information


Microphone Button C Short Press (Trunking)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of the Microphone’s Button C. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

• See More Information


Microphone Button C Long Press (Trunking)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of the Microphone’s Button C.

• See More Information


The Infrared Remote Buttons Page (Trunking)


Infrared Remote Button 1 (Trunking)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to Infrared Remote Control Button 1.

• See More Information


Infrared Remote Button 2 (Trunking)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to Infrared Remote Control Button 2.

• See More Information


Infrared Remote Button 3 (Trunking)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to Infrared Remote Control Button 3.

• See More Information


Infrared Remote Button 4 (Trunking)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to Infrared Remote Control Button 4.

• See More Information


Infrared Remote Button 5 (Trunking)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to Infrared Remote Control Button 5.

• See More Information


Infrared Remote Button 6 (Trunking)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to Infrared Remote Control Button 6.

• See More Information


Infrared Remote Button 7 (Trunking)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to Infrared Remote Control Button 7.

• See More Information


Infrared Remote Button 8 (Trunking)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to Infrared Remote Control Button 8.

• See More Information


The Function Buttons Page (Trunking)


Function Button F1 Short Press (Trunking)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of the Control Head’s F1 Button. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

• See More Information


Function Button F1 Long Press (Trunking)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a defined Long Press of the Control Head’s F1 Button.

• See More Information


Function Button F2 Short Press (Trunking)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of the Control Head’s F2 Button. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

• See More Information


Function Button F2 Long Press (Trunking)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a defined Long Press of the Control Head’s F2 Button.

• See More Information


Function Button F3 Short Press (Trunking)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of the Control Head’s F3 Button. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

• See More Information


Function Button F3 Long Press (Trunking)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a defined Long Press of the Control Head’s F3 Button.

• See More Information


Menu Items Window


Top Level Menu Page


Top Level Menu

The Top Level Menu Options Page allows you to activate the following Top-Level radio-user menus and Top-Level radio-user features: System Scan, All Group Scan, Program Lists, Phone, Radio Call, Zone, Utilities, Repeater/Talkaround, Edit Mode, Audio/Tones, Voice Storage, MDC Message, and MDC Status.

• See More Information


System Scan Menu

  Enables ‘System Scan’ as a radio-user Top Level Menu feature. This allows radio-user to enter the radio’s Scan Mode. This is true provided the Conventional or Trunking Personality for the current Channel Selector selected channel has a Scan List selected.

• See More Information


All Group Scan

  Enables All Group Scan as a radio-user Top Level Menu feature. While in Scan Mode, this feature causes the radio to automatically scan (listen for), and consider unmuting to, the Tx ID’s (transmission activity) for all Groups within the current Channel Selector selected Trunking Personality / Zone.

• See More Information


Program Lists Page

  Enables the Program Lists Sub-Menu page, which activates ‘Program Lists’ as a radio-user Top Level Menu item. This allows the following radio-user features to be assigned to this menu: Scan List, Phone List, and Radio Call List.

• See More Information


Phone

  Enables ‘Phone’ as a radio-user Top Level Menu feature. This allows the radio-user to enter the Phone Mode, which is when the radio is capable of transmitting phone calls.

This same radio-wide functionality can be assigned to a (short or long) programmable button-press

• See More Information


Radio Call Page

  Enables the Radio Call Sub-Menu page, which activates ‘Radio Calls’ as a radio-user Top Level Menu item. This allows the following radio-user features to be assigned to this menu: Sel Cal, Call Alert, Radio Check, Call Stack and Remote Monitor.

• See More Information


Zone

  Enables ‘Zone’ as a radio-user Top Level Menu feature. This offers the radio-user the ability to select the appropriate Zone.

• See More Information


Utilities Page

  Enables the Utilities Sub-Menu page, which activates ‘Utilities’ as a radio-user Top Level Menu item. This allows the following radio-user features to be assigned to this menu: Squelch, Power Level, Clock, Reminder Alarm, Language Mode, Option Board, Light Disable, When Available, Software Version # and Radio Lock.

• See More Information


Repeater/Talkaround

  Enables ‘Repeater/Talkaround’ as a radio-user Top Level Menu feature. This allows the radio-user to select to operate radio-wide in Repeater Mode or Talkaround Mode. This feature applies only for Conventional Personalities.

• See More Information


Edit Mode

  Causes the Edit Mode feature to be included in the Top Level Menu. This allows the radio-user to access Edit Mode from the radio’s display.

• See More Information


Audio/Tones Page

  Enables the Audio/Tones Sub-Menu page, which activates ‘Audio/Tones’ as a radio-user Top Level Menu item. This allows the following radio-user features to be assigned to this menu: Alert Volume Level, Tone Disable, Name Tone Tag, Call Tone Tag, Escalert, Keypad Tones, and Companding.

• See More Information


Voice Storage Page

  Enables the Voice Storage Sub-Menu page, which activates ‘Voice Storage’ as a radio-user Top Level Menu item. This allows the following radio-user features to be assigned to this menu: Playback, Delete, Record, Voice Memo, All Incoming, Answer Mode and Silent Answer Mode.

• See More Information


MDC Status

   Enables MDC Status as a radio-user Top Level Menu feature. This allows the radio-user to select and transmit a Status from a portable or mobile unit to a dispatcher.

• See More Information


MDC Message

  Enables MDC Message as a radio-user Top Level Menu feature. This allows radio-users to select and transmit MDC Messages.

• See More Information


Utilities Page Macro


Squelch

  Causes the Squelch feature to be included in the Utilities menu. This allows the radio-user the ability to temporarily adjust the Squelch Threshold setting to ‘Normal’ or ‘Tight’ for the current Channel Selector selected channel. Once the radio’s channel is changed, or the radio is powered-off, this setting reverts back to the Squelch Setting for each Conventional Personality.

This same functionality can be assigned to a (short or long) programmable button-press.

• See More Information


Power Level

  Causes the Power Level feature to be included in the Utilities menu. This allows the radio-user to adjust the Transmit Power setting (radio-wide) to ‘High’ or ‘Low’. The CPS-user can also select the Tx Power Level setting, however, the CPS settings are based-on individual Conventional and Trunking Personalities.

Radio-wide Tx Power Level functionality can also be assigned to a (short or long) programmable button-press.

• See More Information


Clock

  Causes the Clock feature to be included in the Utilities menu. This allows the radio-user the ability to set the time.

• See More Information


Reminder Alarm

  Causes the Reminder Alarm feature to be included in the Utilities menu. This allows the radio-user the ability to set an alarm to go off at a reqiured time.

• See More Information


Option Board

  Causes the Option Board feature to be included in the Utilities menu. This allows the radio-user the ability to toggle on and off radio-wide Option Board functionality. Radio-wide functionality only applies to Conventional and Trunking Personalities that have Option Board functionality enabled.

Radio-wide Option Board functionality can also be assigned to a (short or long) programmable button-press.

• See More Information


Light Disable

    Causes the Light Disable feature to be included in the Utilities menu. This allows the radio-user the ability to disable a portable radio’s; keypad back light, the Display light, and the radio’s LED.

• See More Information


When Available

  Causes the When Available feature to be included in the Utilities menu. This allows the radio-user to record a message that is automatically heard by any callers, when the radio is left unattended.

• See More Information


Software Version #

  Causes the Software Version # feature to be included in the Utilities menu. This allows the radio-user the ability to display the Version Number of internal-radio Firmware Software stored in Read-Only Memory (ROM).

• See More Information


Radio Lock

  Causes the Radio Lock feature to be included in the Utilities menu. The radio-user is then able to toggle the Radio Lock feature on or off. The initial password is defined in the Radio Lock Password field. The radio-user has the ability to change the password.

• See More Information


Language Mode

  Causes the Language Mode feature to be included in the Utilities menu. This allows the radio-user the ability to select the language of the characters that appear in the radio’s display.

IMPORTANT NOTE:

This Feature is not available in portables with firmware releases before RO2.00. In addition, some non-English alphabet keyboard characters may not appear correctly in the radio’s display with firmware releases before RO2.00.

• See More Information


Radio Call Page Macro


Sel Cal (Select Call)

  Causes the Sel Cal feature to be included in the Radio Call menu. This allows the radio-user the ability to transmit Sel Cal’s.

• See More Information


Call Alert

  Causes the Call Alert feature to be included in the Radio Call Top Level menu. This allows the radio-user the ability to transmit Call Alerts.

• See More Information


Radio Check

  Causes the Radio Check feature to be included in the Radio Call Top Level menu. This allows the radio-user the ability to transmit Radio Checks.

• See More Information


Call Stack

  Causes the Call Stack feature to be included in the Radio Call menu.

Important Note: The Signaling Configuration Call Stack field must be enabled for Call Stack operation to take place.

• See More Information


Remote Monitor

  Causes the Remote Monitor feature to be included in the Radio Call menu. This allows the radio-user to transmit Remote Monitor commands thus initiating the Remote Monitor mode on another radio.

Important Note: This feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

• See More Information


Audio/Tones Page Macro


Alert Volume Level

  Causes the Alert Volume Level feature to be included in the Audio/Tones menu. If the radio-user then enables this field, all Alert Tone Volumes are set to a constant level. The Alert Tone Fixed Volume field allows the CPS-user to toggle on or off the same functionality.

• See More Information


Tone Disable

  Causes the Tone Disable feature to be included in the Audio/Tones menu. This allows the radio-user to toggle on and off all Alert Tones. Tone Disable mutes keypad audio, even when Keypad Tones are set to on. Alert tones only can also be disabled by the CPS-user with the Disable Alerts field.

• See More Information


Name Tone Tag

  Causes the Name Tone Tag feature to be included in the Audio/Tones menu. This allows the radio-user to select which tone sounds (on the decoding radio) when receiving a Call Alert or Sel Cal for each Call List Member, thus identifying callers by distinctive tones. These settings take precedence over the Call Tone Tag radio-user menu settings for Call Alerts and Sel Cal’s. However, when this field is set to Standard, the Call Tone Tag radio-user menu settings then take precedence. There are several ring tones to choose from.

• See More Information


Call Tone Tag

  Causes the Call Tone Tag feature to be included in the Audio/Tones menu. This allows the radio-user to select which tone sounds when receiving a Call Alert, a Sel Cal, or an MDC Message. There are several ring tones to choose from. MDC Message is only available when the Message Name Tone Tag field is enabled.

• See More Information


Escalert

  Causes the Escalert feature to be included in the Audio/Tones menu allowing the radio-user to toggle on and off this functionality. Escalert causes the radio to gradually increase the volume of a repetitive alert tone. This repetitive tone is an alert of an incoming radio call.

The CPS-user can also make this selection with the Escalating Alerts field.

• See More Information


Keypad Tones

  Causes the Keypad Tones feature to be included in the Audio/Tones menu. This allows the radio-user to toggle on or off the DTMF audio tones heard when using the keypad.

• See More Information


Companding

  Causes the Companding option to be included in the Audio/Tones menu. This allows the radio-user to toggle Companding functionality on or off for individual Conventional Personalities. Companding is a new standard feature in the cellular phone industry and is supported industry-wide. The purpose of Companding is to reduce radio and airway noise, thus enhancing audio clarity.

When radio-user activated, Companding overrides all individual Conventional Personality settings for Compression Type and Expansion Type.

When radio-user de-activated, control of Compression Type and Expansion Type settings is returned to the individual Convention Personalities where Companding may or may not be selected.

• See More Information.


MDC Message Tone Tag

Causes the MDC Message Tone Tag feature to be included in the Audio/Tones menu. This allows the radio-user to select which tone sounds when receiving an MDC Message, thus identifying callers by distinctive tones.

• See More Information


Program Lists Page Macro


Scan List

  Causes the Scan List feature to be included in the Program Lists menu. This allows the radio-user the ability to define and use certain Scan List functionality.

• See More Information


Phone List

  Causes the Phone List feature to be included in the Program Lists menu. This allows the radio-user the ability to define and use certain Phone List functionality. The radio-user is able to edit and add Phone list entries when the radio is equipped with a full keypad.

• See More Information


Radio Call List

  Causes the Radio Call List feature to be included in the Program Lists menu. This allows the radio-user the ability to define and use certain Call List functionality. The radio-user is able to edit and add Call List entries when the radio is equipped with a full keypad.

• See More Information


Voice Storage Page Macro


Playback

  Causes the Playback feature to be included in the Voice Storage menu. This allows the radio-user the ability to listen-to previously recorded calls.

• See More Information


Delete

  Causes the Delete feature to be included in the Voice Storage menu. This allows the radio-user the ability to remove previously recorded calls.

• See More Information


Record

  Causes the Record feature to be included in the Voice Storage menu. This allows the radio-user the ability to record calls.

• See More Information


Voice Memo

  Causes the Voice Memo feature to be included in the Voice Storage menu. This allows the radio-user the ability to record a reminder message for personal use.

• See More Information


All Incoming

  Causes the All Incoming feature to be included in the Voice Storage menu. This allows the radio-user the ability to record all incoming calls.

• See More Information


Answer Mode

  Causes the Answer Mode feature to be included in the Voice Storage menu. The radio-user can then toggle Answer Mode on and off. Answer Mode allows radio callers to leave recorded audio messages.

Important Note: This feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

• See More Information


Silent Answer Mode

  Causes the Silent Answer Mode feature to be included in the Voice Storage menu. Silent Answer Mode causes the radio to mute its speaker when recording calls in the Answer Mode. Silent Answer mode is only available to the radio-user when Answer Mode is active.

Important Note: This feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

• See More Information


One Touch Setup Table


One Touch Function

Selects either an MDC Message or an MDC Status for the current One Touch selection. The One Touch Index selection must then be made to the same row in this One Touch table.

• See More Information


One Touch Index

Selects the desired MDC Message or MDC Status number for the current One Touch selection. The Message or Status selection is determined in the One Touch Function field for the same row of this One Touch table.

• See More Information


One Touch Alias

Selecting a correlating One Touch Function, or One Touch Index automatically displays this Alias. This is a view-only field. These Aliases are created in either the MDC Message Alias, or MDC Status Alias field.

• See More Information


Personality Assignment Window


Zone Page


Zone Alias

The Alias is a radio-user recognizable description for the current Zone. Characters, Numbers, Spaces, and Special Characters can be used.

• See More Information


Conventional Zone Type

Selects Conventional as the dispatch mode for the current Zone. Zones can operate in either Conventional or Trunking dispatch mode.

• See More Information


LS Trunking Zone Type

Selects Trunking as the dispatch mode for the current Zone. Zones can operate in either Trunking or Conventional dispatch mode.

• See More Information


LS Trunking Personality

Selects which Trunking Personality is assigned to the current Zone. The selected Personality’s Groups are automatically and sequentially assigned to the radio’s possible Channel Selector - channels.

• See More Information


Channels Page


Alias

Selecting a Conventional Personality, or Trunking Group, automatically displays its associated Alias. This is a view-only field.

• See More Information


Personality

Selecting a Personality (by its CPS given name) assigns its functionality to the currently highlighted channel position, for the current Zone. The channel number is listed in the far-left column of this Channels page. It is possible to select either a Conventional or a Trunking Personality.

• See More Information


Group

Selecting the Trunking Group assigns its functionality to the currently highlighted channel position, for the current Zone. The channel number is listed in the far-left column of this Channels page.

• See More Information


Phone List Page


Phone Number

Allows the ability to add a phone number entry to the Phone List.

• See More Information


Alias

Allows the ability to add a user-recognizable name to a correlating Phone number entry in the Phone List.

• See More Information


Phone Window


Connection Property Page


Access Code

Specifies the 8 digit Access Code for the current Phone System. The Access Code allows a connection to a telephone line and subsequent dial tone.

• See More Information


Deaccess Code

Specifies the 8 digit Deaccess Code for the current Phone System. The Deaccess Code causes disconnection from a phone call.

• See More Information


Dial Type

Selects the method that the radio uses to transmit the DTMF digits - dialed by the radio-user, while in the Phone Mode. This applies for the current Phone System.

• See More Information


Override Busy Channel Lockout

  Causes the radio to override the Busy Channel Lockout Rule, while operating in Phone Mode, and for the current Phone System.

• See More Information


PL Required

  Causes a Private Line (PL) code match to be required on a incoming phone call- while in the Phone Mode, in order for communication to occur. This only applies when the current Phone System is assigned to a Conventional Personality, that requires Receive PL.

• See More Information


Strip PL

 Causes the radio to not transmit Private Line (PL) codes while in the Phone Mode. This only applies when the current Phone System is assigned to a Conventional Personality that is configured for Transmit PL.

• See More Information


Deaccess Back Porch Delay

Selects the amount of time the radio remains in phone mode after sending the deaccess code. This allows the radio a transition time to re-establish normal Conventional or Trunking dispatch repeater access operation. Time is in seconds.

• See More Information


Access/Deaccess Type

Selects the method used to send the Access and Deaccess codes that are defined for the current Phone System. This feature applies while in Phone Mode for the current Phone System.

• See More Information


Tone Configuration Property Page


Tone Span

Selects the type of DTMF tone length that is sent when dialing - while in the Phone Mode, and for the current Phone System.

• See More Information


PTT Sidetone

  Causes the radio to sound DTMF digits as they are sent. The purpose is to indicate to the radio-user when the next process may be started. This feature applies while in Phone Mode for the current Phone System.

• See More Information


PTT Short Sidetone

 Causes the radio to sound one short alert tone, after the PTT button is pressed, and immediately following the phone data packet being transmitted. The purpose is to indicate to the radio-user when voice may be initiated. This feature applies while in Phone Mode for the current Phone System.

• See More Information


Mute Access/Deacess

  Causes the DTMF tones for Access and Deaccess codes to be muted - when the Access/Deaccess Type field is set to Delayed or Immediate Auto. This feature applies while in Phone Mode for the current Phone System.

• See More Information


Tx Hang Time

Selects the maximum time that the radio waits between key presses (DTMF digits) - when manually dialing a phone number, before Pretime is automatically inserted before the transmission of the next digit. If the Pretime value is required to be to a large duration, it can significantly slow the dialing process. This feature applies while in Phone Mode for the current Phone System. Time is in milliseconds (ms).

WARNING: If you do not have complete knowledge of the system configuration that this radio will be operating on, do not attempt to modify this setting !

• See More Information


Pause Duration

Selects the amount of time that the radio waits during a dialing pause. This creates a momentary wait at a strategic point - when the radio is automatically dialing pre-programmed speed dial numbers. This wait is sometimes needed, so that the radio does not get ahead of the external phone system that it is attempting to access. This feature applies while in Phone Mode for the current Phone System. Time is in milliseconds (ms).

• See More Information


Pretime

Selects the amount of time between pressing PTT and the first bit of data packet transmission. This time allows the receiving radio to stabilize before receiving data. This feature applies while in Phone Mode for the current Phone System. Time is in milliseconds (ms).

• See More Information


Tx Tone Duration

Selects the amount of time that a single DTMF tone is transmitted for manually dialed digits, and when the Tone Span field is set to Timed. This field automatically applies during a preprogrammed Speed Dial, even when the Tone Span field is not set to Timed. This feature applies while in Phone Mode for the current Phone System. Time is in milliseconds (ms).

WARNING: If you do not have complete knowledge of the system configuration that this radio will be operating on, do not attempt to modify this setting !

• See More Information


Tx Tone Interval

Selects the amount of time that the radio waits between DTMF digits during a preprogrammed Speed Dial. Once Tx Tone Duration ends, the Tone Interval begins, and vice-versa. This feature applies while in Phone Mode for the current Phone System. Time is in milliseconds (ms).

WARNING: If you do not have complete knowledge of the system configuration that this radio will be operating on, do not attempt to modify this setting !

• See More Information


Revert Page


Interconnect Revert Alias

Selecting a value for the Interconnect Revert Group field, automatically displays this Trunking Personality, Group Alias. This is a view-only field.

• See More Information


Interconnect Revert Personality

Selects the Trunking Personality (by its CPS given name) to be used for transmitting or receiving a telephone call. This is true while the radio is operating in a Trunking dispatch mode.

The Interconnect Revert Group must then be selected.

• See More Information


Interconnect Revert Group

Selects a Trunking transmit and receive Group / channel to be used for telephone calls. This is true while the radio is operating in a Trunking dispatch mode.

The correlating Interconnect Revert Personality must be selected first.

This Group choice automatically fills-in the correlating Interconnect Revert Alias field with the Group Alias.

IMPORTANT NOTE:

For Interconnect Revert to be possible:

The selected Group must have its Group Interconnect enabled, and

the selected Group’s Home Repeater must have its Interconnect enabled.

• See More Information


Call List Window
The Call List Window

DEFINITION:

The Call List window allows you to view-only all Call List Members that exist. The Call List allows the radio-user to select, and transmit to, a specific radio, or group of radios. Only one Call List exists per radio.

Call List Members are created, deleted, and defined in the window correlating with their Signaling System type. Signaling System data types include; MDC, QCII, and DTMF.

•	Table Type window records can be moved using the Short Cut Menu.

•	Right-clicking anywhere on Table Type windows retrieves the Short Cut Menu.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS

Alias

Signaling Type

     Go to the MDC Call Window

   Go to the Quik Call II (QCII) Call Window

     Go to the DTMF Call Window


Alias (Call List)
Alias

(Call List)

DEFINITION:

Allows you to view-only the Alias associated with the current Call List Member. Aliases are defined in their respective Call List type window, such as, MDC, QCII, and DTMF.

Note: Call List Members may be rearrange within the Call List with the move feature.

When the radio is a display model, and

(is capable of PTT ID, or is capable of Radio Calls.)

     Go To the Call List


Signaling Type (Call List)
Signaling Type

(Call List)

DEFINITION:

Allows you to view-only the Signaling System Type of the Call List Member. Signaling Systems are defined in their respective Signaling System window, that is, MDC, QCII, and DTMF.

Note: Call list Members may be rearrange within the Call List by accessing the move menu item feature.

When the radio is capable of PTT ID, or

is capable of Radio Calls .

     Go To the Call List


The MDC Call Window

DEFINITION:

The MDC Call window allows you to create and delete MDC Call List Members, as well as define individual Call List Member functionality. MDC Signaling System calls are capable of transmitting Call Alerts, Sel Cal's, Radio Checks, and Remote Monitor functionality.

The window’s Navigation Toolbar offers high-level functionality for maintaining MDC Call List Members.

Click on any page title below (underlined in green) to see more information.

  Go to the Call List Window


Basic Page (MDC Call)
The Basic Page

(MDC Call)

DEFINITION:

The Basic page allows you to define general functionality for the current MDC - Call List Member.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Alias MDC System Revert Personality Alias Revert Personality	Revert Personality Group Strip PL/DPL Acknowledge Expected Name Tone Tag
     Go To the MDC Call Window


Alias (MDC Call)
Alias

(MDC Call)

DEFINITION:

Allows the radio-user to easily recognize and select to call the current MDC - Call List Member. Characters, Numbers, Spaces, and Special Characters can be used.

Examples: EMT-001, #500, Electric. #A5.

Note:

•	When the radio receives a call, this alias can facilitate Reverse Aliasing.

•	This alias appears on the tree view.

When the radio is a display model.

  Go To the MDC Call Basic Page


MDC System (MDC Call)
MDC System

(MDC Call)

DEFINITION:

Selects the MDC Signaling System to be used by the current MDC - Call List Member.

When the radio is capable of transmitting Radio Calls.

     Go To the MDC Call Basic Page


Revert Personality Alias (MDC Call)
Revert Personality Alias

(MDC Call)

DEFINITION:

Selecting a value for the Revert Personality field, or the Revert Group field automatically displays this Revert Personality Alias. This is a view-only field.

Note: The Alias is created in either the Conventional Personality Alias, or Trunking Group Alias field.

When the radio model has a display.

  Go To the MDC Call Basic Page


Revert Personality (MDC Call)
Revert Personality

(MDC Call)

DEFINITION:

Selects a Conventional or Trunking Personality (by its CPS given name) causing the current MDC - Call List Member to transmit on that channel.

Therefore, when a Radio Call is initiated using a Call List Member where a Revert Personality has been selected, that personality’s functionality is utilized (reverted to) during the call. Once the call has completed, the radio reverts back to the Personality/Group assigned to the current Channel Selector selected channel (see Personality Assignment).

Note:

•	The Revert Personality uses the MDC Signaling System selected for the current MDC Call list Member.

•	Selecting a Conventional Personality value for this field automatically selects a value for the Revert Personality Alias.

•	When selecting a Trunking Personality value for this field, a Trunking Revert Group must also be selected.

     Go To the MDC Call Basic Page


Revert Group (MDC Call)
Revert Group

(MDC Call)

DEFINITION:

Selects a Trunking Group causing the current MDC - Call List Member to transmit on that channel.

Note:

•	The Revert Personality uses the MDC Signaling System selected for the current MDC Call list Member.

•	The correlating Revert Personality must be selected first.

•	This Group choice automatically fills-in the correlating Revert Personality Alias field.

When the MDC Call, Revert Personality field is set to a Trunking Personality value.

     Go To the MDC Call Basic Page


Strip PL/DPL (MDC Call)
Strip PL/DPL

(MDC Call)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio to not transmit Private Line (PL) codes for the current MDC- Call List Member. PL codes are stripped when a current Revert Personality, or current (Channel Selector) Conventional Personality, has Transmit PL enabled.

Note: This is useful when it is necessary to selectively call a radio or group of radios (using Sel Cal) without disturbing other radio-users.

When the Radio is capable of transmitting Radio Calls.

     Go To the MDC Call Basic Page


Acknowledge Expected (MDC Call)
Acknowledge Expected

(MDC Call)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio to expect a reply from the radio being called, for the current MDC - Call List Member. Replies are generally expected from call types such as, Call Alerts and Radio Checks. The radio continues to transmit these call types until an acknowledge is received. The maximum number of transmission retries is five.

  Disabling this feature causes the radio to send Call Alerts and Radio Checks only once. The radio shows no indication of acknowledges, therefore Radio Checks are rendered ineffective. The benefit is to reduce channel traffic by eliminating mandatory acknowledges and possible retries for Call Alerts. This applies for the current MDC Call List Member.

When the MDC Call ID Type field is set to "Individual" for the current MDC Call List Member, and

(when the radio is capable of transmitting Radio Checks, or

when the radio is capable of Radio Calls).

     Go To the MDC Call Basic Page


Name Tone Tag (MDC Call)
Name Tone Tag

(MDC Call)

DEFINITION:

Selects the tone that sounds when receiving a Call Alert or Sel Cal from the current MDC - Call List Member. This allows the radio-user to identify a caller by a distinctive tone. These settings take precedence over the Signaling Configuration Sel Cal and Call Alert Tone Tags. However, when this field is set to Standard, the Signaling Configuration Tone Tag settings then take precedence. There are several ring tones to choose from.

When the Radio is capable of receiving:

Sel Cal’s, or Call Alerts, or Call Alerts w/Voice.

Alert 1 thru Alert 7, or Standard.

  Go To the MDC Call Basic Page


ID Page (MDC Call)
The ID Page

(MDC Call)

DEFINITION:

The ID page allows you to select and define the call ID type. This determines calling (transmit) functionality for current MDC, Call List Member.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Call ID Type

Call Individual ID

Call Fleet ID

Call Group ID

     Go To the MDC Call Window


ID Type (MDC Call)
ID Type

(MDC Call)

DEFINITION:

Selects the transmit Call ID format for the current MDC - Call List Member.

When the radio is capable of PTT ID, or

is capable of transmitting Radio Calls.

Individual

Fleet

Group

All Call:	Transmits-to (targets) all radios currently receiving MDC Fleet, Group, and Individual calls.

     Go To the MDC Call ID Page


Individual ID (MDC Call)
Individual ID

(MDC Call)

DEFINITION:

Selects the unique four digit ID to be transmitted for the current MDC - Call List Member. The transmitted ID can target one or more receiving radios. This allows MDC calls to be made to a specific radio (or radios) without disturbing other radios operating on the same channel.

When an Individual ID is transmitted with a call, it must be equal to the receiving radio’s current Primary ID for the call to be successfully received. The "F" character can be used as a wildcard (an all-inclusive digit) in the last three digits of the ID.

Note: When the Primary ID of this radio is transmitted with certain MDC call types, and matches an Individual ID in the Call List of the receiving radio, Reverse Aliasing then takes place on the receiving radio.

When MDC ID Type is set to Individual ID.

Minimum = 0001

Maximum = DFFF

In Increments = 1

  Go To the MDC Call ID Page


Fleet ID (MDC Call)
Fleet ID

(MDC Call)

DEFINITION:

Selects the unique one digit ID to be transmitted for the current MDC - Call List Member. The transmitted Fleet ID can include many receiving radios. This allows MDC transmissions to be made to a specific Fleet of radios without disturbing other radios operating on the same channel.

The Fleet can include more than one Call Group ID. The Fleet ID can define the first digit of the three digit Call Group ID. However, for a Fleet ID Type call, the second and third digits of the targeted Groups are sent using the "F" wildcard character (an all-inclusive digit).

The Fleet ID must be equal to the first digit of the receiving radio’s current (three digit) Group ID for the call to be successfully received.

Note:

•	The "F" character can be used as a wildcard (an all-inclusive digit) for the one digit Fleet ID.

•	Fleet calls are possible for calls not requiring an acknowledge, see Acknowledge Expected.

When MDC ID Type is set to:

Fleet ID, or Group ID.

Minimum = 0

Maximum = F

In Increments = 1

     Go To the MDC Call ID Page


Group ID (MDC Call)
Group ID

(MDC Call)

DEFINITION:

Selects the unique two digit ID to be transmitted for the current MDC - Call List Member. The Fleet ID must also be defined. The transmitted Call Group ID can target several receiving radios. This allows MDC transmissions to be made to a specific Group of radios without disturbing other radios operating on the same channel.

For a Group ID Type call, the Fleet ID combines with this two digit Call Group ID to define the first digit of the three digit transmitted ID. This transmitted ID must be equivalent to the (three digit) Group ID of the receiving radios for the call to be successful.

Note:

•	The "F" character can be used as a wildcard (an all-inclusive digit) for either or both digits of the Group.

•	Group calls are possible for calls not requiring an acknowledge, see Acknowledge Expected.

When MDC ID Type is set to Group ID.

Minimum = 00

Maximum = FF

In Increments = 1

     Go To the MDC Call ID Page


The Quik-Call II - Call Window
The Quik-Call II, Call Window

DEFINITION:

The Quik-Call II (QCII), Call Window allows you to create and delete QCII Call List Members, as well as define individual Call List Member functionality. QCII Signaling System calls are capable of transmitting Call Alerts, and Sel Cal's.

QCII is a two-tone, sequential tone, Signaling System protocol that is mostly associated with portable radios and pagers.

The window’s Navigation Toolbar offers high-level functionality for maintaining QCII Call List Members.

Click on any page title below (underlined in green) to see more information.

  Go to the Call List Window


Basic Page (Quik-Call II - Call)
The Basic Page

(Quik-Call II - Call)

DEFINITION:

The Basic page allows you to define general radio functionality for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) - Call List Member.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Alias

Quik Call II System

Revert Personality Alias

Revert Personality

Strip PL/DPL

     Go To The Quik-Call II Window


Alias (Quik-Call II - Call)
Alias

(Quik-Call II - Call)

DEFINITION:

Allows the radio-user to easily recognize and select to call the current Quik-Call II (QCII) - Call List Member. Characters, Numbers, Spaces, and Special Characters can be used.

Examples: EMT-001, #500, Electric. #A5.

Note: This alias appears on the tree view.

When the radio is a display model.

     Go To the QCII Basic Page


Quik Call II System

(Quik-Call II - Call)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Quik-Call II Signaling System to be used by the current Quik Call II (QCII) - Call List Member.

When the radio is capable of transmitting Call Alerts or Sel Cal's.

     Go To the QCII Basic Page


Revert Personality Alias (Quik-Call II - Call)
Revert Personality Alias

(Quik-Call II - Call)

DEFINITION:

Selecting a value for the QCII Revert Personality field, automatically displays this Conventional Personality Alias. This is a view-only field.

When the radio model has a display.

     Go To the QCII Basic Page


Revert Personality (Quik-Call II - Call)
Revert Personality

(Quik-Call II - Call)

DEFINITION:

Selects a Conventional Personality (by its CPS given name) causing the current Quik-Call II (QCII) - Call List Member to transmit on that channel.

Therefore, when a Radio Call is initiated using a Call List Member where a Revert Personality has been selected, that personality’s functionality is utilized (reverted to) during the call. Once the call has completed, the radio reverts back to the Personality/Group assigned to the current Channel Selector selected channel (see Personality Assignment).

Note:

•	The Revert Personality uses the QCII Signaling System selected for the current MDC Call list Member.

•	Selecting a value for this field automatically selects a value for the Revert Personality Alias.

  Go To the QCII Basic Page


Strip PL/DPL (Quik-Call II - Call)
Strip PL/DPL

(Quik-Call II - Call)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio to not transmit PL codes with the call for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) - Call List Member. PL codes are stripped when the current Revert Personality, or current (Channel Selector) Conventional Personality, has Transmit PL enabled.

Note: This is useful when it is necessary to selectively call a radio or group of radios (using Sel Cal) without disturbing other radio-users.

When the radio is capable of transmitting Call Alerts or Sel Cal's.

     Go To the QCII Basic Page


Format Page (Quik-Call II - Call)
The Format Page

(Quik-Call II - Call)

DEFINITION:

The Format page allows you to select the Quik-Call II (QCII) Tone format, as well as call tone frequency(s), for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) - Call List Member.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Call Format

Tone A Frequency

Tone A Code

Tone B Frequency

Tone B Code

     Go To The Quik-Call II Window


QCII Call Format (Quik-Call II - Call)
Call Format

(Quik-Call II - Call)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Call Tone Type for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) - Call List Member.

Two Tone

Long Tone

     Go To the QCII Format Page


QCII Tone A Frequency (Quik-Call II - Call)
Tone A Frequency

(Quik-Call II - Call)

DEFINITION:

Selects the frequency of the first tone to be transmitted for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) -Call List Member. Selecting a value for this field automatically selects a value for the Tone A Code field. Some Frequencies may not have a correlating Code causing nothing to display in the Code field.

When the radio is capable of transmitting Call Alerts or Sel Cal's.

Minimum = 288.5

Maximum = 3086.0

In Increments = 0.1

     Go To the QCII Format Page


QCII Tone A Code  (Quik-Call II - Call)
Tone A Code

(Quik-Call II - Call)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Code correlating to the Tone A Frequency to be transmitted for current Quik-Call II (QCII) - Call List Member. QCII Standard Tones are a subset of the QCII Frequency range. Therefore, selecting a value for this field automatically selects a value for the Tone A Frequency field.

When the radio is capable of transmitting Call Alerts or Sel Cal's.

Codes = Frequency List

     Go To the QCII Format Page


QCII Tone B Frequency (Quik-Call II - Call)
Tone B Frequency

(Quik-Call II - Call)

DEFINITION:

Selects the frequency of the second-tone to be transmitted for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) - Call List Member. Selecting a value for this field automatically selects a value for the Tone B Code field. Some Frequencies may not have a correlating Code causing nothing to display in the Code field.

When the QCII Call Format is set to Two Tone, and

(the radio is capable of transmitting Call Alerts or Sel Cal's.)

Minimum = 288.5

Maximum = 3086.0

In Increments = 0.1

  Go To the QCII Format Page


QCII Tone B Code (Quik-Call II - Call)
Tone B Code

(Quik-Call II - Call)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Code correlating to the Tone B Frequency to be transmitted for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) - Call List Member. QCII Standard Tones are a subset of the QCII Frequency range. Therefore, selecting a value for this field automatically selects a value for the Tone B Frequency field.

When the QCII Call Format is set to Two Tone, and

(the radio is capable of transmitting Call Alerts or Sel Cal's.)

Codes = Frequency List

     Go To the QCII Format Page


DTMF Call Window
The DTMF Call Window

DEFINITION:

The DTMF Call Window allows you to create and delete DTMF Call List Member, as well as define individual Call List Member functionality. DTMF Signaling System calls are capable of transmitting Call Alerts, and Sel Cal's.

DTMF is a protocol widely used in the telephone industry. Two tones are transmitted simultaneously at different amplitudes for each keypad key press. A sequential series of Dual Tones makes a data word.

The window’s Navigation Toolbar offers high-level functionality for maintaining DTMF Call List Members.

Click on the page below to see more information.

  Go to the Call List Window


Call Page (DTMF Call)
The Call Page

(DTMF Call)

DEFINITION:

The DTMF Call page allows you to define general functionality for the current DTMF, Call List Member.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Alias DTMF System Call ID	Revert Personality Alias Revert Personality Strip PL/DPL
     Go to the DTMF Call Window


Alias (DTMF Call)
Alias

(DTMF Call)

DEFINITION:

Allows the radio-user to easily recognize and select to call the current DTMF - Call List Member. Characters, Numbers, Spaces, and Special Characters can be used.

Examples: EMT-001, #500, Electric. #A5.

Note:

•	When the radio receives a PTT ID, this alias allows for Reverse Aliasing.

•	This alias appears on the tree view.

When the radio is a display model.

     Go To the DTMF Call Page


DTMF System (DTMF Call)
DTMF System

(DTMF Call)

DEFINITION:

Selects the DTMF Signaling System to be used by the current DTMF - Call List Member.

When the radio is capable of transmitting Radio Calls.

  Go To the DTMF Call Page


Call ID (DTMF Call)
Call ID

(DTMF Call)

DEFINITION:

Selects the one to eight digit ID to be transmitted for the current DTMF - Call List Member. The transmitted ID can target one or several receiving radios. This allows DTMF transmissions to be made to a specific radio or groups of radios without disturbing other radios operating on the same channel.

When a Call ID is transmitted with a call, it must be equal to the receiving radio’s Primary ID or Group ID for the call to be successful. Call Alerts, Call Alerts w/ Voice and Sel Cal's are possible.

     Go To the DTMF Call Page


Revert Personality Alias (DTMF Call)
Revert Personality Alias

(DTMF Call)

DEFINITION:

Selecting a value for the DTMF Revert Personality field, automatically displays this Conventional Personality Alias. This is a view-only field.

When the radio model has a display.

     Go To the DTMF Call Page


Revert Personality (DTMF Call)
Revert Personality

(DTMF)

DEFINITION:

Selects a Conventional Personality (by its CPS given name) causing the current DTMF - Call List Member to transmit on that channel.

Therefore, when a Radio Call is initiated using a Call List Member where a Revert Personality has been selected, that personality’s functionality is utilized (reverted to) during the call. Once the call has completed, the radio reverts back to the Personality/Group assigned to the current Channel Selector selected channel (see Personality Assignment).

Note:

•	The Revert Personality uses the DTMF Signaling System selected for the current DTMF Call list Member.

•	Selecting a value for this field automatically selects a value for the Revert Personality Alias.

     Go To the DTMF Call Page


Strip PL/DPL (DTMF Call)
Strip PL/DPL

(DTMF Call)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio to not transmit Private Line (PL) codes for the current DTMF- Call List Member. PL codes are stripped when the current Revert Personality, or current (Channel Selector) Conventional Personality, has Transmit PL enabled.

Note: This is useful when it is necessary to selectively call a radio or group of radios (using Sel Cal) without disturbing other radio-users.

When the radio is capable of transmitting Call Alerts or Sel Cal's.

     Go To the DTMF Call Page


The Remote Monitor Page (MDC Call)
The Remote Monitor Page

(MDC Call)

DEFINITION:

The Remote Monitor page allows you to view and define functionality having to do with transmitting Remote Monitor commands. Remote Monitor commands cause a receiving mobile radio to enter into the Remote Monitor mode. The Remote Monitor mode causes the receiving radio to automatically key-up allowing the initiating radio to listen-in-on all surrounding audio. See the MDC System Remote Monitor Page.

When the radio-user selects Remote Monitor from the radio’s display, the radio prompts the radio-user with the Call List. This allows the radio-user to select which radio will be monitored. Once a radio is commanded into Remote Monitor mode, and the radio-user for that radio decides to make a call, the radio’s transmit and receive functionality is determined by these CPS Remote Monitor call timed limits. Remote Monitor mode continues for one transmit and one receive cycle and then automatically ceases.

These settings apply to individual MDC - Call List Members.

Important Note: This feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

Note:

•	A Remote Monitor command can be initiated by a dispatcher to a mobile radio, or from a mobile radio to a mobile radio.

•	Any radio-user interaction on the radio sending the command automatically ends the Remote Monitor mode.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Remote Monitor Type

Rx Multiplier

Tx Multiplier

Global Multiplier

     Go To The MDC Call Window


Remote Monitor Type (MDC Call)
Remote Monitor Type

(MDC Call)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Remote Monitor functionality on the receiving radio for the current MDC- Call List Member. The MDC System Remote Monitor Type selections on the radio being monitored take precedence over these settings. However, when MDC System Remote Monitor Type is set to "Per Command" then this setting is the rule.

Important Note: This feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

When the radio is a mobile model.

Silent:	When a radio receives a remote monitor command, no audio or visual indication is apparent to the radio-user.

Non-Silent:	When a radio receives a remote monitor command, audio and visual indications are apparent to the radio-user.

     Go To The Remote Monitor Page


Rx Multiplier (MDC Call)
Rx Multiplier

(MDC Call)

DEFINITION:

Selects a value that is multiplied by the receiving radio’s selected MDC System Remote Monitor Time. This total amount of time then determines how long (in seconds ) that the radio commanded into Remote Monitor mode is then able to receive calls. This setting applies for the current MDC- Call List Member.

This receive audio can not be remotely monitored. Only transmitting audio is able to be remotely monitored; see Tx Multiplier. This Rx Multiplier value is transmitted with the initiating Remote Monitor command data packet. The Rx Multiplier value can be doubled by enabling the Global Multiplier field.

Important Note: This feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

When the radio is a mobile model.

Minimum = 0

Maximum = 3

     Go To The Remote Monitor Page


Tx Multiplier (MDC Call)
Tx Multiplier

(MDC Call)

DEFINITION:

Selects a value that is multiplied by the receiving radio’s selected MDC System Remote Monitor Time. This total amount in time then determines how long (in seconds) that the radio commanded into Remote Monitor mode automatically keys-up allowing the initiating radio to listen-in on all surrounding audio. This setting applies for the current MDC- Call List Member.

This Tx Multiplier value is transmitted with the initiating Remote Monitor command data packet. Only this Tx Multiplier time allows for Remote Monitoring, Rx Multiplier audio can not be remotely monitored. The Tx Multiplier value can be doubled by enabling the Global Multiplier field.

Important Note: This feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

When the radio is a mobile model.

Minimum = 0

Maximum = 3

     Go To The Remote Monitor Page


Global Multiplier (MDC Call)
Global Multiplier

(MDC Call)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the Rx Multiplier and the Tx Multiplier values to double for the current MDC- Call List Member. This effectively doubles receive and transmit times for Remote Monitor.

Important Note: This feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

When the radio is a mobile model.

     Go To The Remote Monitor Page


(Has been removed) Name Tone Tag

(DTMF Call)

DEFINITION:

Selects the tone that sounds when receiving a Call Alert or Sel Cal from the current DTMF - Call List Member. This allows the radio-user to identify a caller by a distinctive tone. These settings take precedence over the Signaling Configuration Sel Cal and Call Alert Tone Tags. However, when this field is set to Standard, the Signaling Configuration Tone Tag settings then take precedence. There are several ring tones to choose from.

When the Radio is capable of receiving:

Sel Cal’s, or Call Alerts, or Call Alerts w/Voice.

Alert 1 thru Alert 7, or Standard.

     Go To the DTMF Call Page


Conventional Buttons (Portable)
The Conventional Buttons Window

(Portable)

DEFINITION:

The Conventional Buttons window allows you to assign functionality to the radio’s programmable buttons. The programmable buttons include, The Top Button, Side Buttons (SB1, SB2, and SB3), and Front Buttons (P1, P2, and P3). These assignments apply while the radio is operating in Conventional Dispatch Mode.

Click on any page title below (underlined in green) to see more information.


Rotary/Top Buttons Page (Conventional Buttons - Portable)
The Rotary/Top Buttons Page

(Conventional Buttons - Portable)

DEFINITION:

The Rotary/Top Buttons page allows you to assign functionality to the radio’s Rotary and Top buttons. These assignments apply while the radio is operating in Conventional Dispatch Mode.

Click on any CPS field title (in green) below to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Rotary

Top Button Short Press

Top Button Long Press

     Go To The Conventional Buttons Window


Rotary (Conventional Buttons - Portable)
Rotary

(Conventional Buttons - Portable)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional dispatch functionality assigned to a portable multi-line display radio’s rotary dial.

Notes:

1.	For continuous rotary selections the Wrap Around Tone field applies.

2.	For programming Channels/Groups  to Rotary Selector and Zones to up/down front buttons, refer to Talkgroup Assignment To Rotary Knob  in the Radio Configuration Screen. When the Selection is Fixed Zone or Continuous Zone, the Talkgroup Assignment To Rotary Knob  does not apply.

3.	When rotary selection is "Zone Selection (Fixed)" in Conventional/LS Trunking bottons, all programmable button’s "Zone" item in Conventional/LS Trunking screen does not apply.

4.	For fixed rotary radios, the rotary selection  for both Conventional and LS Trunking should be the same.

When the radio is a Conventional disatch only portable multi-line display model, or

(when the radio is capable of Trunking dispatch operation, and

when the radio is not a non-display model.)

Fixed Channel:	Conventional Personalities are assigned to the 16 positions of the radio’s rotary dial. See Personality Assignment.

Continuous Channel:

Conventional Personalities are dynamically assigned to the 16 positions of the radio’s rotary dial. The rotary has no defined start and stop positions allowing it to rotate completely around 360°. When less than 16 Conventional Personalities or more than 16 Conventional Personalities exist in a Zone, dynamic re-assigning of channels allows there to never be any empty positions on the rotary dial.

Fixed Zone:	Zones not channels are sequentially assigned to the 16 positions of the radio’s rotary dial. See Personality Assignment.

Continuous Zone:

Zones are dynamically assigned to the 16 positions of the radio’s rotary dial. The rotary has no defined start and stop positions allowing it to rotate completely around 360°. When less than 16 Zones or more than 16 Zones exist, dynamic re-assigning of Zones allows there to never be any empty positions on the rotary dial.

     Go To The Rotary/Top Buttons Page


Top Button Short Press  (Conventional Buttons - Portable)
Top Button Short Press

(Conventional Buttons - Portable)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Short Press of the Top Button. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Emergency On:	The Radio is capable of transmitting MDC radio calls, and the radio is capable of Emergency Mode, and  Emergency Type is not set to Disabled, and this button’s Long Press is set to Emergency Off.
Emergency Siren On:	This button’s Long Press is set to Emergency Siren Off.
Monitor:	This button’s Long Press is set to Sticky Permanent Monitor, or is Unassigned.
Volume Set:	This button’s Long Press is Unassigned.
LED Battery Indicator:	This button’s Long Press is Unassigned.
Toggle System Scan On/Off:	Always available.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Tight / Normal Squelch:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  Menu Keys present.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has Menu Keys present.
Radio Call:	The radio model has a Display, and  is capable of transmitting Radio Calls
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Long Press is set to Voice Storage Record.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Light:	Always available.
Home Revert:	Always available.
Home Revert AutoKey	The radio model has a multi-line display.
Home Revert 2	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
     Go To The Rotary/Top Buttons Page


Top Button Long Press  (Conventional Buttons - Portable)
Top Button Long Press

(Conventional Buttons - Portable)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of the Top Button.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Emergency Off:	The radio is capable of Emergency Mode, and  Emergency Type is not set to Disabled, and this button’s Short Press is set to Emergency On.
Emergency Siren Off:	This button’s Short Press is set to Emergency Siren On.
Sticky Permanent Monitor:	This button’s Short Press is set to Monitor.
Volume Set:	Always available.
LED Battery Indicator:	Always available.
Nuisance Delete:	This button’s Short Press is set to Toggle System Scan On/Off.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle KeypadLock On/Off:	The radio must have a Keypad.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Tight / Normal Squelch:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  Menu Keys present.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has Menu Keys present.
Radio Call:	The radio model has a Display, and  is capable of transmitting Radio Calls
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  This button’s Short Press is set to Voice Storage Playback.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Light:	Always available.
Home Revert:	Always available.
Home Revert AutoKey	The radio model has a multi-line display.
Home Revert 2	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
     Go To The Rotary/Top Buttons Page


Side Buttons Page (Conventional Buttons - Portable)
The Side Buttons Page

(Conventional Buttons - Portable)

DEFINITION:

The Side Buttons Page allows you to assign functionality to the radio’s three side buttons (SB1, SB2, and SB3). These assignments apply while the radio is operating in Conventional Dispatch Mode.

Click on any CPS field title (in green) below to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Side Button 1 (SB1) Short Press Side Button 1 (SB1) Long Press Side Button 2 (SB2) Short Press	Side Button 2 (SB2) Long Press Side Button 3 (SB3) Short Press Side Button 3 (SB3) Long Press
     Go To The Convetional Buttons Window


Side Button 1 (Upper) Short Press  (Conventional Buttons - Portable)
Side Button 1 (Upper) Short Press

(Conventional Buttons - Portable)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of Side Button 1 (SB1). A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Emergency On:	The Radio is capable of transmitting MDC radio calls, and the radio model supports Side Button Emergency access, and the radio is capable of Emergency Mode, and Emergency Type is not set to Disabled, and this button’s Long Press is set to Emergency Off.
Monitor:	This button’s Long Press is set to Sticky Permanent Monitor, or is Unassigned.
Volume Set:	This button’s Long Press is Unassigned.
LED Battery Indicator:	This button’s Long Press is Unassigned.
Toggle System Scan On/Off:	Always available.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Tight / Normal Squelch:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  Menu Keys present.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has Menu Keys present.
Radio Call:	The radio model has a Display, and  is capable of transmitting Radio Calls
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Long Press is set to Voice Storage Record.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Light:	Always available.
Home Revert:	Always available.
Home Revert AutoKey	The radio model has a multi-line display.
Home Revert 2	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
     Go To The Side Buttons Page


Side Button 1 (Upper) Long Press  (Conventional Buttons - Portable)
Side Button 1 (Upper) Long Press

(Conventional Buttons - Portable)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of Side Button 1 (SB1).

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Emergency Off:	The radio model supports Side Button Emergency access, and the radio is capable of Emergency Mode, and Emergency Type is not set to Disabled, and this button’s Short Press is set to Emergency On.
Sticky Permanent Monitor:	This button’s Short Press is set to Monitor.
Volume Set:	Always available.
LED Battery Indicator:	Always available.
Nuisance Delete:	This button’s Short Press is set to Toggle System Scan On/Off.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Keypad Lock On/Off:	The radio must have a Keypad.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Tight / Normal Squelch:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  Menu Keys present.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has Menu Keys present.
Radio Call:	The radio model has a Display, and  is capable of transmitting Radio Calls
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  This button’s Short Press is set to Voice Storage Playback.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Light:	Always available.
Home Revert:	Always available.
Home Revert AutoKey	The radio model has a multi-line display.
Home Revert 2	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  When Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
     Go To The Side Buttons Page


Side Button 2 (Middle) Short Press  (Conventional Buttons - Portable)
Side Button 2 (Middle) Short Press

(Conventional Buttons - Portable)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Short Press of Side Button 2 (SB2). A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Emergency On:	The Radio is capable of transmitting MDC radio calls, and the radio model supports Side Button Emergency access, and the radio is capable of Emergency Mode, and Emergency Type is not set to Disabled, and this button’s Long Press is set to Emergency Off.
Monitor:	This button’s Long Press is set to Sticky Permanent Monitor, or is Unassigned.
Volume Set:	This button’s Long Press is Unassigned.
LED Battery Indicator:	This button’s Long Press is Unassigned.
Toggle System Scan On/Off:	Always available.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround::	Always available.
Toggle Tight / Normal Squelch:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  Menu Keys present.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has Menu Keys present.
Radio Call:	The radio model has a Display, and  is capable of transmitting Radio Calls
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Long Press is set to Voice Storage Record.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Light:	Always available.
Home Revert:	Always available.
Home Revert AutoKey	The radio model has a multi-line display.
Home Revert 2	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  When Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
     Go To The Side Buttons Page


Side Button 2 (Middle) Long Press  (Conventional Buttons - Portable)
Side Button 2 (Middle) Long Press

(Conventional Buttons - Portable)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of Side Button 2 (SB2).

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Emergency Off:	The radio model supports Side Button Emergency access, and the radio is capable of Emergency Mode, and Emergency Type is not set to Disabled, and this button’s Short Press is set to Emergency On.
Sticky Permanent Monitor:	This button’s Short Press is set to Monitor.
Volume Set:	Always available.
LED Battery Indicator:	Always available.
Nuisance Delete:	This button’s Short Press is set to Toggle System Scan On/Off.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Keypad Lock On/Off:	The radio must have a Keypad.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Tight / Normal Squelch:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  Menu Keys present.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has Menu Keys present.
Radio Call:	The radio model has a Display, and  is capable of transmitting Radio Calls
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  This button’s Short Press is set to Voice Storage Playback.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Light:	Always available.
Home Revert:	Always available.
Home Revert AutoKey	The radio model has a multi-line display.
Home Revert 2	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
     Go To The Side Buttons Page


Side Button 3 (Lower) Short Press  (Conventional Buttons - Portable)
Side Button 3 (Lower) Short Press

(Conventional Buttons - Portable)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Short Press of Side Button 3 (SB3). A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Monitor:	This button’s Long Press is set to Sticky Permanent Monitor, or is Unassigned.
Volume Set:	This button’s Long Press is Unassigned.
LED Battery Indicator:	This button’s Long Press is Unassigned.
Toggle System Scan On/Off:	Always available.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Tight / Normal Squelch:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  Menu Keys present.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has Menu Keys present.
Radio Call:	The radio model has a Display, and  is capable of transmitting Radio Calls
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Long Press is set to Voice Storage Record.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Light:	Always available.
Home Revert:	Always available.
Home Revert AutoKey	The radio model has a multi-line display.
Home Revert 2	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
     Go To The Side Buttons Page


Side Button 3 (Lower) Long Press  (Conventional Buttons - Portable)
Side Button 3 (Lower) Long Press

(Conventional Buttons - Portable)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of Side Button 3 (SB3).

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Sticky Permanent Monitor:	This button’s Short Press is set to Monitor.
Volume Set:	Always available.
LED Battery Indicator:	Always available.
Nuisance Delete:	This button’s Short Press is set to Toggle System Scan On/Off.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Keypad Lock On/Off:	The radio must have a Keypad.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Tight / Normal Squelch:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  Menu Keys present.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has Menu Keys present.
Radio Call:	The radio model has a Display, and  is capable of transmitting Radio Calls
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  This button’s Short Press is set to Voice Storage Playback.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Light:	Always available.
Home Revert:	Always available.
Home Revert AutoKey	The radio model has a multi-line display.
Home Revert 2	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
     Go To The Side Buttons Page


Front Buttons Page (Conventional Buttons - Portable)
The Front Buttons Page

(Conventional Buttons - Portable)

DEFINITION:

The Front Buttons Page allows you to assign functionality to the radio’s three Front buttons (P1, P2, and P3). These assignments apply when the radio is operating in Conventional Dispatch Mode.

Click on any CPS field title (in green) below to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Front Button P1 Short Press Front Button P1 Long Press Front Button P2 Short Press	Front Button P2 Long Press Front Button P3 Short Press Front Button P3 Long Press
     Go To The Conventional Buttons Window


Front Button P1 Short Press  (Conventional Buttons - Portable)
Front Button P1 Short Press

(Conventional Buttons - Portable)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Short Press of Front Button P1. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Monitor:	This button’s Long Press is set to Sticky Permanent Monitor, or is Unassigned.
Volume Set:	This button’s Long Press is Unassigned.
LED Battery Indicator:	This button’s Long Press is Unassigned.
Toggle System Scan On/Off:	Always available.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Tight / Normal Squelch:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  Menu Keys present.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has Menu Keys present.
Radio Call:	The radio model has a Display, and  is capable of transmitting Radio Calls
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Long Press is set to Voice Storage Record.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Light:	Always available.
Home Revert:	Always available.
Home Revert AutoKey	The radio model has a multi-line display.
Home Revert 2	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
     Go To The Front Buttons Page


Front Button P1 Long Press  (Conventional Buttons - Portable)
Front Button P1 Long Press

(Conventional Buttons - Portable)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of Front Button P1.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Sticky Permanent Monitor:	This button’s Short Press is set to Monitor:.
Volume Set:	Always available.
LED Battery Indicator:	Always available.
Nuisance Delete:	This button’s Short Press is set to Toggle System Scan On/Off.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Keypad Lock On/Off:	The radio must have a Keypad.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Tight / Normal Squelch:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  Menu Keys present.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has Menu Keys present.
Radio Call:	The radio model has a Display, and  is capable of transmitting Radio Calls
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  This button’s Short Press is set to Voice Storage Playback.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Light:	Always available.
Home Revert:	Always available.
Home Revert AutoKey	The radio model has a multi-line display.
Home Revert 2	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
     Go To The Front Buttons Page


Front Button P2 Short Press  (Conventional Buttons - Portable)
Front Button P2 Short Press

(Conventional Buttons - Portable)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Short Press of Front Button P2. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Monitor:	This button’s Long Press is set to Sticky Permanent Monitor, or is Unassigned.
Volume Set:	This button’s Long Press is Unassigned.
LED Battery Indicator:	This button’s Long Press is Unassigned.
Toggle System Scan On/Off:	Always available.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Tight / Normal Squelch:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  Menu Keys present.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has Menu Keys present.
Radio Call:	The radio model has a Display, and  is capable of transmitting Radio Calls
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Long Press is set to Voice Storage Record.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Light:	Always available.
Home Revert:	Always available.
Home Revert AutoKey	The radio model has a multi-line display.
Home Revert 2	Always available.
Channel/Group or Zone Down:	The radio is capable of Trunking dispatch. The radio model has a continuous rotary, or  The radio model has a fixed rotary which has capable of Fixed Zone.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
     Go To The Front Buttons Page


Front Button P2 Long Press  (Conventional Buttons - Portable)
Front Button P2 Long Press

(Conventional Buttons - Portable)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of Front Button P2.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Sticky Permanent Monitor:	This button’s Short Press is set to Monitor.
Volume Set:	Always available.
LED Battery Indicator:	Always available.
Nuisance Delete:	This button’s Short Press is set to Toggle System Scan On/Off.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Keypad Lock On/Off:	The radio must have a Keypad.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Tight / Normal Squelch:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  Menu Keys present.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has Menu Keys present.
Radio Call:	The radio model has a Display, and  is capable of transmitting Radio Calls
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  This button’s Short Press is set to Voice Storage Playback.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Light:	Always available.
Home Revert:	Always available.
Home Revert AutoKey	The radio model has a multi-line display.
Home Revert 2	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
     Go To The Front Buttons Page


Front Button P3 Short Press  (Conventional Buttons - Portable)
Front Button P3 Short Press

(Conventional Buttons - Portable)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Short Press of Front Button P3. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Monitor:	This button’s Long Press is set to Sticky Permanent Monitor, or is Unassigned.
Volume Set:	This button’s Long Press is Unassigned.
LED Battery Indicator:	This button’s Long Press is Unassigned.
Toggle System Scan On/Off:	Always available.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Tight / Normal Squelch:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  Menu Keys present.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has Menu Keys present..
Radio Call:	The radio model has a Display, and  is capable of transmitting Radio Calls
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Long Press is set to Voice Storage Record.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Light:	Always available.
Home Revert:	Always available.
Home Revert AutoKey	The radio model has a multi-line display.
Home Revert 2	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
     Go To The Front Buttons Page


Front Button P3 Long Press  (Conventional Buttons - Portable)
Front Button P3 Long Press

(Conventional Buttons - Portable)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of Front Button P3.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Sticky Permanent Monitor:	This button’s Short Press is set to Monitor.
Volume Set:	Always available.
LED Battery Indicator:	Always available.
Nuisance Delete:	This button’s Short Press is set to Toggle System Scan On/Off.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Keypad Lock On/Off:	The radio must have a Keypad.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Tight / Normal Squelch:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  Menu Keys present.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has Menu Keys present..
Radio Call:	The radio model has a Display, and  is capable of transmitting Radio Calls
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  This button’s Short Press is set to Voice Storage Playback.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Light:	Always available.
Home Revert:	Always available.
Home Revert AutoKey	The radio model has a multi-line display.
Home Revert 2	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
     Go To The Front Buttons Page


LS Trunking Buttons (Portable)
The LS Trunking Buttons Window

(Portable)

DEFINITION:

The LS Trunking Buttons window allows you to assign functionality to the radio’s buttons. The programmable buttons include, The Top Button, Side Buttons (SB1, SB2, and SB3), and Front Buttons (P1, P2, and P3). These assignments apply when the radio is operating in a Trunking Dispatch Mode.

Click on any page title below (underlined in green) to see more information.


Rotary/Top Buttons Page (LS Trunking Buttons - Portable)
The Rotary/Top Buttons Page

(LS Trunking Buttons - Portable)

DEFINITION:

The Rotary/Top Buttons Page allows you to assign functionality to the radio’s Rotary and Top buttons. These assignments apply when the radio is operating in a Trunking Dispatch Mode.

Click on any CPS field title (in green) below to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Rotary

Top Button Short Press

Top Button Long Press

     Go To The LS Trunking Buttons Window


Rotary (LS Trunking Buttons - Portable)
Rotary

(LS Trunking Buttons - Portable)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality assigned to a portable multi-line display radio’s rotary dial.

Note:

1.	For continuous rotary selections the Wrap Around Tone field applies.

2.	For programming Channels/Groups to Rotary Selector and Zones to up/down front buttons, refer to Talkgroup Assignment To Rotary Knob  in the Radio Configuration Screen. When the Selection is Fixed Zone or Continuous Zone, the Talkgroup Assignment To Rotary Knob  does not apply.

3.	When rotary selection is "Zone Selection (Fixed)" in Conventional/LS Trunking bottons, all programmable button’s "Zone" item in Conventional/LS Trunking screen does not apply.

4.	For fixed rotary radios, the rotary selection  for both Conventional and LS Trunking should be the same.

When the radio is not a non-display model.

Fixed Channel:	Trunking Groups are automatically and sequentially assigned to the 16  positions of the radio’s rotary dial. See Personality Assignment.

Continuous Channel:

Trunking Groups are dynamically assigned to the 16 positions of the radio’s rotary dial. The rotary has no defined start and stop positions allowing it to rotate completely around 360°. When less than 16 Groups or more than 16 Groups exist in a Zone, dynamic re-assigning of channels allows there to never be any empty positions on the rotary dial.

Fixed Zone:	Zones not channels are sequentially assigned to the 16 positions of the radio’s rotary dial. See Personality Assignment.

Continuous Zone:

Zones are dynamically assigned to the 16 positions of the radio’s rotary dial. The rotary has no defined start and stop positions allowing it to rotate completely around 360°. When less than 16 Zones or more than 16 Zones exist, dynamic re-assigning of Zones allows there to never be any empty positions on the rotary dial.

     Go To The Rotary/top Buttons Page


Top Button Short Press  (LS Trunking Buttons - Portable)
Top Button Short Press

(LS Trunking Buttons - Portable)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Short Press of the Top Button. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Emergency On:	The Radio is capable of transmitting MDC radio calls, and the radio is capable of Emergency Mode, and  Emergency Type is not set to Disabled, and this button’s Long Press is set to Emergency Off, and  the radio is a mulit-line display model.
Emergency Siren On:	This button’s Long Press is set to Emergency Siren Off.
Volume Set::	This button’s Long Press is Unassigned.
LED Battery Indicator:	This button’s Long Press is Unassigned.
Toggle System Scan On/Off:	Always available.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  Menu Keys present.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has Menu Keys present..
All Group Scan:	Always available.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Long Press is set to Voice Storage Record.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Light:	Always available.
Home Revert:	Always available.
Home Revert AutoKey	The radio model has a multi-line display.
Home Revert 2	Always available.
Toggle Signaling Squelch On/Off:	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
     Go To The Rotary/top Buttons Page


Top Button Long Press  (LS Trunking Buttons - Portable)
Top Button Long Press

(LS Trunking Buttons - Portable)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of the Top Button.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Emergency Off:	The radio is capable of Emergency Mode, and  Emergency Type is not set to Disabled, and this button’s Short Press is set to Emergency On, and  the radio is a mulit-line display model.
Emergency Siren Off:	This button’s Short Press is set to Emergency Siren On.
Volume Set:	Always available.
LED Battery Indicator:	Always available.
Nuisance Delete:	This button’s Short Press is set to Toggle System Scan On/Off.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle KeypadLock On/Off:	The radio must have a Keypad.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  Menu Keys present.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has Menu Keys present..
All Group Scan:	Always available.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  This button’s Short Press is set to Voice Storage Playback.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Light:	Always available.
Home Revert:	Always available.
Home Revert AutoKey	The radio model has a multi-line display.
Home Revert 2	Always available.
Toggle Signaling Squelch On/Off:	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
     Go To The Rotary/top Buttons Page


Side Buttons Page (LS Trunking Buttons - Portable)
The Side Buttons Page

(LS Trunking Buttons - Portable)

DEFINITION:

The Side Buttons Page allows you to assign functionality to the radio’s three side buttons (SB1, SB2, and SB3). These assignments apply when the radio is operating in a Trunking Dispatch Mode.

Click on any CPS field title (in green) below to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Side Button 1 (SB1) Short Press  Side Button 1 (SB1) Long Press  Side Button 2 (SB2) Short Press	Side Button 2 (SB2) Long Press  Side Button 3 (SB3) Short Press  Side Button 3 (SB3) Long Press
     Go To The LS Trunking Buttons Window


Side Button 1 (Upper) Short Press  (LS Trunking Buttons - Portable)
Side Button 1 (Upper) Short Press

(LS Trunking Buttons - Portable)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Short Press of Side Button 1 (SB1). A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Volume Set:	This button’s Long Press is Unassigned.
LED Battery Indicator:	This button’s Long Press is Unassigned.
Toggle System Scan On/Off:	Always available.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  Menu Keys present.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has Menu Keys present..
All Group Scan:	Always available.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Long Press is set to Voice Storage Record.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Light:	Always available.
Home Revert:	Always available.
Home Revert AutoKey	The radio model has a multi-line display.
Home Revert 2	Always available.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
     Go To The Side Buttons Page


Side Button 1 (Upper) Long Press  (LS Trunking Buttons - Portable)
Side Button 1 (Upper) Long Press

(LS Trunking Buttons - Portable)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of Side Button 1 (SB1).

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Volume Set:	Always available.
LED Battery Indicator:	Always available.
Nuisance Delete:	This button’s Short Press is set to Toggle System Scan On/Off.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle KeypadLock On/Off:	The radio must have a Keypad.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  Menu Keys present.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has Menu Keys present..
All Group Scan:	Always available.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  This button’s Short Press is set to Voice Storage Playback.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Light:	Always available.
Home Revert:	Always available.
Home Revert AutoKey	The radio model has a multi-line display.
Home Revert 2	Always available.
Toggle Signaling Squelch On/Off:	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
     Go To The Side Buttons Page


Side Button 2 (Middle) Short Press  (LS Trunking Buttons - Portable)
Side Button 2 (Middle) Short Press

(LS Trunking Buttons - Portable)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Short Press of Side Button 2 (SB2). A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Volume Set:	This button’s Long Press is Unassigned.
LED Battery Indicator:	This button’s Long Press is Unassigned.
Toggle System Scan On/Off:	Always available.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  Menu Keys present.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has Menu Keys present..
All Group Scan:	Always available.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Long Press is set to Voice Storage Record.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Light:	Always available.
Home Revert:	Always available.
Home Revert AutoKey	The radio model has a multi-line display.
Home Revert 2	Always available.
Toggle Signaling Squelch On/Off:	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
     Go To The Side Buttons Page


Side Button 2 (Middle) Long Press  (LS Trunking Buttons - Portable)
Side Button 2 (Middle) Long Press

(LS Trunking Buttons - Portable)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of Side Button 2 (SB2).

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Volume Set:	Always available.
LED Battery Indicator:	Always available.
Nuisance Delete:	This button’s Short Press is set to Toggle System Scan On/Off.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle KeypadLock On/Off:	The radio must have a Keypad.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  Menu Keys present.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has Menu Keys present..
All Group Scan:	Always available.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  This button’s Short Press is set to Voice Storage Playback.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Light:	Always available.
Home Revert:	Always available.
Home Revert AutoKey	The radio model has a multi-line display.
Home Revert 2	Always available.
Toggle Signaling Squelch On/Off:	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
     Go To The Side Buttons Page


Side Button 3 (Lower) Short Press  (LS Trunking Buttons - Portable)
Side Button 3 (Lower) Short Press

(LS Trunking Buttons - Portable)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Short Press of Side Button 3 (SB3). A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Volume Set:	This button’s Long Press is Unassigned.
LED Battery Indicator:	This button’s Long Press is Unassigned.
Toggle System Scan On/Off:	Always available.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  Menu Keys present.
Speed Dial (Memory):	The radio has Menu Keys present.
All Group Scan:	Always available.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Long Press is set to Voice Storage Record.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Light:	Always available.
Home Revert:	Always available.
Home Revert AutoKey	The radio model has a multi-line display.
Home Revert 2	Always available.
Toggle Signaling Squelch On/Off:	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
     Go To The Side Buttons Page


Side Button 3 (Lower) Long Press  (LS Trunking Buttons - Portable)
Side Button 3 (Lower) Long Press

(LS Trunking Buttons - Portable)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of Side Button 3 (SB3).

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Volume Set:	Always available.
LED Battery Indicator:	Always available.
Nuisance Delete:	This button’s Short Press is set to Toggle System Scan On/Off.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle KeypadLock On/Off:	The radio must have a Keypad.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  Menu Keys present.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has Menu Keys present..
All Group Scan:	Always available.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  This button’s Short Press is set to Voice Storage Playback.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Light:	Always available.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a multi-line display.
Home Revert AutoKey	Always available.
Home Revert 2	Always available.
Toggle Signaling Squelch On/Off:	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
     Go To The Side Buttons Page


Front Buttons Page (LS Trunking Buttons - Portable)
The Front Buttons Page

(LS Trunking Buttons - Portable)

DEFINITION:

The Front Buttons Page allows you to assign functionality to the radio’s three Front buttons (P1, P2, and P3). These assignments apply when the radio is operating in a Trunking Dispatch Mode.

Click on any CPS field title (in green) below to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Front Button P1 Short Press  Front Button P1 Long Press  Front Button P2 Short Press	Front Button P2 Long Press  Front Button P3 Short Press  Front Button P3 Long Press
     Go To The LS Trunking Buttons Window


Front Button P1 Short Press  (LS Trunking Buttons - Portable)
Front Button P1 Short Press

(LS Trunking Buttons - Portable)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Short Press of Front Button P1. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Volume Set:	This button’s Long Press is Unassigned.
LED Battery Indicator:	This button’s Long Press is Unassigned.
Toggle System Scan On/Off:	Always available.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  Menu Keys present.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has Menu Keys present..
All Group Scan:	Always available.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Long Press is set to Voice Storage Record.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Light:	Always available.
Home Revert:	Always available.
Home Revert AutoKey	The radio model has a multi-line display.
Home Revert 2	Always available.
Toggle Signaling Squelch On/Off:	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
     Go To The Front Buttons Page


Front Button P1 Long Press  (LS Trunking Buttons - Portable)
Front Button P1 Long Press

(LS Trunking Buttons - Portable)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of Front Button P1.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Volume Set:	Always available.
LED Battery Indicator:	Always available.
Nuisance Delete:	This button’s Short Press is set to Toggle System Scan On/Off.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle KeypadLock On/Off:	The radio must have a Keypad.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  Menu Keys present.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has Menu Keys present..
All Group Scan:	Always available.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  This button’s Short Press is set to Voice Storage Playback.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Light:	Always available.
Home Revert:	Always available.
Home Revert AutoKey	The radio model has a multi-line display.
Home Revert 2	Always available.
Toggle Signaling Squelch On/Off:	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
     Go To The Front Buttons Page


Front Button P2 Short Press  (LS Trunking Buttons - Portable)
Front Button P2 Short Press

(LS Trunking Buttons - Portable)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Short Press of Front Button P2. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Volume Set:	This button’s Long Press is Unassigned.
LED Battery Indicator:	This button’s Long Press is Unassigned.
Toggle System Scan On/Off:	Always available.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  Menu Keys present.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has Menu Keys present..
All Group Scan:	Always available.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Long Press is set to Voice Storage Record.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Light:	Always available.
Home Revert:	Always available.
Home Revert AutoKey	The radio model has a multi-line display.
Home Revert 2	Always available.
Toggle Signaling Squelch On/Off:	Always available.
Channel/Group or Zone Down:	The radio model has a continuous rotary, or  The radio model has a fixed rotary which has capable of Fixed Zone.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
     Go To The Front Buttons Page


Front Button P2 Long Press  (LS Trunking Buttons - Portable)
Front Button P2 Long Press

(LS Trunking Buttons - Portable)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of Front Button P2.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Volume Set:	Always available.
LED Battery Indicator:	Always available.
Nuisance Delete:	This button’s Short Press is set to Toggle System Scan On/Off.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle KeypadLock On/Off:	The radio must have a Keypad.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  Menu Keys present.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has Menu Keys present..
All Group Scan:	Always available.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  This button’s Short Press is set to Voice Storage Playback.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Light:	Always available.
Home Revert:	Always available.
Home Revert AutoKey	The radio model has a multi-line display.
Home Revert 2	Always available.
Toggle Signaling Squelch On/Off:	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
     Go To The Front Buttons Page


Front Button P3 Short Press  (LS Trunking Buttons - Portable)
Front Button P3 Short Press

(LS Trunking Buttons - Portable)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Short Press of Front Button P3. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Volume Set:	This button’s Long Press is Unassigned.
LED Battery Indicator:	This button’s Long Press is Unassigned.
Toggle System Scan On/Off:	Always available.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  Menu Keys present.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has Menu Keys present..
All Group Scan:	Always available.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Long Press is set to Voice Storage Record.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Light:	Always available.
Home Revert:	Always available.
Home Revert AutoKey	The radio model has a multi-line display.
Home Revert 2	Always available.
Toggle Signaling Squelch On/Off:	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
     Go To The Front Buttons Page


Front Button P3 Long Press  (LS Trunking Buttons - Portable)
Front Button P3 Long Press

(LS Trunking Buttons - Portable)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a Long Press of Front Button P3.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Volume Set:	Always available.
LED Battery Indicator:	Always available.
Nuisance Delete:	This button’s Short Press is set to Toggle System Scan On/Off.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle KeypadLock On/Off:	The radio must have a Keypad.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  Menu Keys present.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has Menu Keys present..
All Group Scan:	Always available.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  This button’s Short Press is set to Voice Storage Playback.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Light:	Always available.
Home Revert:	Always available.
Home Revert AutoKey	The radio model has a multi-line display.
Home Revert 2	Always available.
Toggle Signaling Squelch On/Off:	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
     Go To The Front Buttons Page


Conventional Buttons (Mobile)
The Conventional Buttons Window

(Mobile)

DEFINITION:

The Conventional Buttons window allows you to assign functionality to the mobile radio’s Mobile Key Buttons, Programmable Buttons, Microphone Buttons, and Function Buttons. These assignments apply while the radio is operating in Conventional Dispatch Mode.

Click on any page title below (underlined in green) to see more information.


The Mobile Key Buttons Page (Conventional Buttons – Mobile)
The Mobile Key Buttons Page

(Conventional Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

The Mobile Key Buttons page allows you to assign functionality to a (non-display) mobile radio’s MK1, MK2, MK3, and MK4 buttons. These assignments apply while the radio is operating in Conventional Dispatch Mode.

Click on any CPS field title (in green) below to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Mobile Key Button 1 Short Press Mobile Key Button 2 Short Press Mobile Key Button 3 Short Press	Mobile Key Button 3 Long Press Mobile Key Button 4 Short Press Mobile Key Button 4 Long Press
      Go to the Conventional Buttons Window


Mobile Key Button 1 Short Press (Conventional Buttons – Mobile)
Mobile Key Button 1 Short Press

(Conventional Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Currently the short press and the Long Press for MK1 is view-only and is always set to Channel Select 1.

When the radio is a Mobile non-display model.

   Go to the Mobile Key Buttons Page


Mobile Key Button 1 Long Press (Not on GUI Yet)

(Conventional Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a defined Long Press of the Control Head’s MK1 button.

When the radio is a Mobile non-display model.

      Go to the Mobile Key Buttons Page


Mobile Key Button 2 Short Press (Conventional Buttons – Mobile)
Mobile Key Button 2 Short Press

(Conventional Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Currently the short press and the Long Press for MK2 is view-only and is always set to Channel Select 2.

When the radio is a Mobile non-display model.

      Go to the Mobile Key Buttons Page


Mobile Key Button 2 Long Press (Not on GUI Yet)

(Conventional Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a defined Long Press of the Control Head’s MK2 button.

When the radio is a Mobile non-display model.

      Go to the Mobile Key Buttons Page


Mobile Key Button 3 Short Press (Conventional Buttons – Mobile)
Mobile Key Button 3 Short Press

(Conventional Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of the Control Head’s MK3 button. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

When the radio is a Mobile non-display model.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Channel Select 3:	The Control Head type is Control Head A only.
Emergency On:	The Radio is capable of transmitting MDC radio calls, and The Emergency Type is not set to Disabled, and this button’s Long Press is set to Emergency Off.
Monitor:	This button’s Long Press is set to Open Squelch.
Volume Set:	This button’s Long Press is Unassigned.
Toggle System Scan On/Off:	Always available.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Toggle Voice Operated Tx:	Always Available.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Radio Call:	The radio is capable of transmitting Radio Calls.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Long Press is set to Voice Storage Record.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
PRTT:	Always available.
Status:	The radio is Messages /Status.
Messages:	The radio is Message/Status.
One Touch Selections 1 thru 8:	The radio is Messages /Status.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
      Go to the Mobile Key Buttons Page


Mobile Key Button 3 Long Press (Conventional Buttons – Mobile)
Mobile Key Button 3 Long Press

(Conventional Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a defined Long Press of the Control Head’s MK3 button.

When the radio is a Mobile non-display model.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Emergency Off:	Emergency Type is not set to Disabled, and this button’s Short Press is set to Emergency On.
Volume Set:	Always available.
Nuisance Delete:	This button’s Short Press is set to Toggle System Scan On/Off.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Toggle Voice Operated Tx:	Always Available.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Radio Call:	The radio is capable of transmitting Radio Calls.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Short Press is set to Voice Storage Playback.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Status:	The radio is Messages /Status.
Messages:	The radio is Message/Status.
One Touch Selections 1 thru 8:	The radio is Messages /Status.
Open Squelch:	This button’s Short Press is set to Monitor.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
      Go to the Mobile Key Buttons Page


Mobile Key Button 4 Short Press (Conventional Buttons – Mobile)
Mobile Key Button 4 Short Press

(Conventional Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of the Control Head’s MK4 button. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

When the radio is a Mobile non-display model.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Channel Select 4:	The Short Press of MK3 is set to Channel Select 3.
Emergency On:	The Radio is capable of transmitting MDC radio calls, and the Emergency Type is not set to Disabled, and this button’s Long Press is set to Emergency Off.
Monitor:	This button’s Long Press is set to Open Squelch.
Volume Set:	This button’s Long Press is Unassigned.
Toggle System Scan On/Off:	Always available.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Toggle Voice Operated Tx:	Always Available.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Radio Call:	The radio is capable of transmitting Radio Calls.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Long Press is set to Voice Storage Record.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
PRTT:	Always available.
Status:	The radio is Messages /Status.
Messages:	The radio is Message/Status.
One Touch Selections 1 thru 8:	The radio is Messages /Status.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
      Go to the Mobile Key Buttons Page


Mobile Key Button 4 Long Press (Conventional Buttons – Mobile)
Mobile Key Button 4 Long Press

(Conventional Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a defined Long Press of the Control Head’s MK4 button.

When the radio is a Mobile non-display model.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Emergency Off:	Emergency Type is not set to Disabled, and this button’s Short Press is set to Emergency On.
Volume Set:	Always available.
Nuisance Delete:	This button’s Short Press is set to Toggle System Scan On/Off.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Toggle Voice Operated Tx:	Always Available.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Radio Call:	The radio is capable of transmitting Radio Calls.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Short Press is set to Voice Storage Playback.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Status:	The radio is Messages /Status.
Messages:	The radio is Message/Status.
One Touch Selections 1 thru 8:	The radio is Messages /Status.
Open Squelch:	This button’s Short Press is set to Monitor.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
      Go to the Mobile Key Buttons Page


The Programmable Buttons Page (Conventional Buttons – Mobile)
The Programmable Buttons Page

(Conventional Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

The Programmable Buttons page allows you to assign functionality to a mobile radio’s P1, P2, P3, and P4 buttons. These assignments apply while the radio is operating in Conventional Dispatch Mode.

Click on any CPS field title (in green) below to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

P1 Button Short Press P1 Button Long Press P2 Button Short Press P2 Button Long Press	P3 Button Short Press P3 Button Long Press P4 Button Short Press P4 Button Long Press
      Go to the Conventional Buttons Window


P1 Button Short Press (Conventional Buttons – Mobile)
P1 Button Short Press

(Conventional Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of the Control Head’s P1 button. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Emergency On:	The Radio is capable of transmitting MDC radio calls, and the Emergency Type is not set to Disabled, and this button’s Long Press is set to Emergency Off.
Monitor:	This button’s Long Press is set to Open Squelch.
Volume Set:	This button’s Long Press is Unassigned.
Toggle System Scan On/Off:	Always available.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Toggle Voice Operated Tx:	Always Available.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Radio Call:	The radio is capable of transmitting Radio Calls.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Long Press is set to Voice Storage Record.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
PRTT:	Always available.
Status:	The radio is Messages /Status.
Messages:	The radio is Message/Status.
One Touch Selections 1 thru 8:	The radio is Messages /Status.
Menu/Channel Up:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Down:	The radio model has a Display.
Select/Enter:	The radio model has a Display.
Exit:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
      Go to the Programmable Buttons Page


P1 Button Long Press (Conventional Buttons – Mobile)
P1 Button Long Press

(Conventional Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a defined Long Press of the Control Head’s P1 button.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Emergency Off:	Emergency Type is not set to Disabled, and this button’s Short Press is set to Emergency On.
Volume Set:	Always available.
Nuisance Delete:	This button’s Short Press is set to Toggle System Scan On/Off.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Toggle Voice Operated Tx:	Always Available.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Radio Call:	The radio model has a Display, and  is capable of transmitting Radio Calls.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Short Press is set to Voice Storage Playback.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Status:	The radio is Messages /Status.
Messages:	The radio is Message/Status.
One Touch Selections 1 thru 8:	The radio is Messages /Status.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Open Squelch:	This button’s Short Press is set to Monitor.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
      Go to the Programmable Buttons Page


P2 Button Short Press  (Conventional Buttons – Mobile)
P2 Button Short Press

(Conventional Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of the Control Head’s P2 button. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Emergency On:	The Radio is capable of transmitting MDC radio calls, and the Emergency Type is not set to Disabled, and this button’s Long Press is set to Emergency Off.
Monitor:	This button’s Long Press is set to Open Squelch.
Volume Set:	This button’s Long Press is Unassigned.
Toggle System Scan On/Off:	Always available.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Toggle Voice Operated Tx:	Always Available.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Radio Call:	The radio is capable of transmitting Radio Calls.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Long Press is set to Voice Storage Record.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
PRTT:	Always available.
Status:	The radio is Messages /Status.
Messages:	The radio is Message/Status.
One Touch Selections 1 thru 8:	The radio is Messages /Status.
Menu/Channel Up:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Down:	The radio model has a Display.
Select/Enter:	The radio model has a Display.
Exit:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
      Go to the Programmable Buttons Page


P2 Button Long Press (Conventional Buttons – Mobile)
P2 Button Long Press

(Conventional Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a defined Long Press of the Control Head’s P2 button.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Emergency Off:	Emergency Type is not set to Disabled, and this button’s Short Press is set to Emergency On.
Volume Set:	Always available.
Nuisance Delete:	This button’s Short Press is set to Toggle System Scan On/Off.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Toggle Voice Operated Tx:	Always Available.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Radio Call:	The radio model has a Display, and  is capable of transmitting Radio Calls.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Short Press is set to Voice Storage Playback.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Status:	The radio is Messages /Status.
Messages:	The radio is Message/Status.
One Touch Selections 1 thru 8:	The radio is Messages /Status.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Open Squelch:	This button’s Short Press is set to Monitor.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
      Go to the Programmable Buttons Page


P3 Button Short Press (Conventional Buttons - Mobile)
P3 Button Short Press

(Conventional Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of the Control Head’s P3 button. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Emergency On:	The Radio is capable of transmitting MDC radio calls, and the Emergency Type is not set to Disabled, and this button’s Long Press is set to Emergency Off.
Monitor:	This button’s Long Press is set to Open Squelch.
Volume Set:	This button’s Long Press is Unassigned.
Toggle System Scan On/Off:	Always available.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Toggle Voice Operated Tx:	Always Available.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Radio Call:	The radio is capable of transmitting Radio Calls.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Long Press is set to Voice Storage Record.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
PRTT:	Always available.
Status:	The radio is Messages /Status.
Messages:	The radio is Message/Status.
One Touch Selections 1 thru 8:	The radio is Messages /Status.
Menu/Channel Up:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Down:	The radio model has a Display.
Select/Enter:	The radio model has a Display.
Exit:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revertl 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
      Go to the Programmable Buttons Page


P3 Button Long Press (Conventional Buttons – Mobile)
P3 Button Long Press

(Conventional Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a defined Long Press of the Control Head’s P3 button.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Emergency Off:	Emergency Type is not set to Disabled, and this button’s Short Press is set to Emergency On.
Volume Set:	Always available.
Nuisance Delete:	This button’s Short Press is set to Toggle System Scan On/Off.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Toggle Voice Operated Tx:	Always Available.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Radio Call:	The radio model has a Display, and  is capable of transmitting Radio Calls.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Short Press is set to Voice Storage Playback.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Status:	The radio is Messages /Status.
Messages:	The radio is Message/Status.
One Touch Selections 1 thru 8:	The radio is Messages /Status.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Open Squelch:	This button’s Short Press is set to Monitor.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
   Go to the Programmable Buttons Page


P4 Button Short Press (Conventional Buttons – Mobile)
P4 Button Short Press

(Conventional Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of the Control Head’s P4 button. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Emergency On:	The Radio is capable of transmitting MDC radio calls, and the Emergency Type is not set to Disabled, and this button’s Long Press is set to Emergency Off.
Monitor:	This button’s Long Press is set to Emergency Off is set to Open Squelch.
Volume Set:	This button’s Long Press is set to Emergency Off is Unassigned.
Toggle System Scan On/Off:	Always available.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Toggle Voice Operated Tx:	Always Available.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Radio Call:	The radio is capable of transmitting Radio Calls.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Long Press is set to Voice Storage Record.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
PRTT:	Always available.
Status:	The radio is Messages /Status.
Messages:	The radio is Message/Status.
One Touch Selections 1 thru 8:	The radio is Messages /Status.
Menu/Channel Up:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Down:	The radio model has a Display.
Select/Enter:	The radio model has a Display.
Exit:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
      Go to the Programmable Buttons Page


P4 Button Long Press (Conventional Buttons – Mobile)
P4 Button Long Press

(Conventional Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a defined Long Press of the Control Head’s P4 button.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Emergency Off:	Emergency Type is not set to Disabled, and this button’s Short Press is set to Emergency On.
Volume Set:	Always available.
Nuisance Delete:	This button’s Short Press is set to Toggle System Scan On/Off.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Toggle Voice Operated Tx:	Always Available.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Radio Call:	The radio model has a Display, and  is capable of transmitting Radio Calls.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Short Press is set to Voice Storage Playback.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Status:	The radio is Messages /Status.
Messages:	The radio is Message/Status.
One Touch Selections 1 thru 8:	The radio is Messages /Status.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Open Squelch:	This button’s Short Press is set to Monitor.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
      Go to the Programmable Buttons Page


The Microphone Buttons Page (Conventional Buttons – Mobile)
The Microphone Buttons Page

(Conventional Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

The Microphone Buttons page allows you to assign functionality to a mobile radio’s Microphone A, B, and C buttons. These assignments apply while the radio is operating in Conventional Dispatch Mode.

Click on any CPS field title (in green) below to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Button A Short Press Button A Long Press Button B Short Press	Button B Long Press Button C Short Press Button C Long Press
      Go to the Conventional Buttons Window


Microphone Button A Short Press (Conventional Buttons – Mobile)
Microphone Button A Short Press

(Conventional Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of a Microphone’s Button A. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

When the Keypad Configuration field is set to a Numeric Keypad selection.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Monitor:	This button’s Long Press is set to Open Squelch.
Toggle System Scan On/Off:	Always available.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Toggle Voice Operated Tx:	Always Available.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Radio Call:	The radio is capable of transmitting Radio Calls.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Long Press is set to Voice Storage Record.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
One Touch Selections 1 thru 8:	Always available.
Menu/Channel Up:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Down:	The radio model has a Display.
Select/Enter:	The radio model has a Display.
Exit:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
      Go to the Microphone Buttons Page


Microphone Button A Long Press (Conventional Buttons – Mobile)
Microphone Button A Long Press

(Conventional Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a defined Long Press of a Microphone’s Button A.

When the Keypad Configuration field is set to a Numeric Keypad selection.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Nuisance Delete:	This button’s Short Press is set to Toggle System Scan On/Off.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Toggle Voice Operated Tx:	Always Available.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Radio Call:	The radio model has a Display, and  is capable of transmitting Radio Calls.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Short Press is set to Voice Storage Playback.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
One Touch Selections 1 thru 8:	Always available.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Open Squelch:	This button’s Short Press is set to Monitor.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
      Go to the Microphone Buttons Page


Microphone Button B Short Press (Conventional Buttons – Mobile)
Microphone Button B Short Press

(Conventional Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short of a Microphone’s Button B. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

When the Keypad Configuration field is set to a Numeric Keypad selection.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Monitor:	This button’s Long Press is set to Open Squelch.
Toggle System Scan On/Off:	Always available.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Toggle Voice Operated Tx:	Always Available.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Radio Call:	The radio is capable of transmitting Radio Calls.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Long Press is set to Voice Storage Record.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
One Touch Selections 1 thru 8:	Always available.
Menu/Channel Up:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Down:	The radio model has a Display.
Select/Enter:	The radio model has a Display.
Exit:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
      Go to the Microphone Buttons Page


Microphone Button B Long Press (Conventional Buttons – Mobile)
Microphone Button B Long Press

(Conventional Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a defined Long Press of a Microphone’s Button B.

When the Keypad Configuration field is set to a Numeric Keypad selection.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Nuisance Delete:	This button’s Short Press is set to Toggle System Scan On/Off.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Toggle Voice Operated Tx:	Always Available.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Radio Call:	The radio model has a Display, and  is capable of transmitting Radio Calls.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Short Press is set to Voice Storage Playback.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
One Touch Selections 1 thru 8:	Always available.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Open Squelch:	This button’s Short Press is set to Monitor.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
      Go to the Microphone Buttons Page


Microphone Button C Short Press (Conventional Buttons – Mobile)
Microphone Button C Short Press

(Conventional Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short of a Microphone’s Button C. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

When the Keypad Configuration field is set to a Numeric Keypad selection.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Monitor:	This button’s Long Press is set to Open Squelch.
Toggle System Scan On/Off:	Always available.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Toggle Voice Operated Tx:	Always Available.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Radio Call:	The radio is capable of transmitting Radio Calls.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Long Press is set to Voice Storage Record.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
One Touch Selections 1 thru 8:	Always available.
Menu/Channel Up:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Down:	The radio model has a Display.
Select/Enter:	The radio model has a Display.
Exit:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
      Go to the Microphone Buttons Page


Microphone Button C Long Press  (Conventional Buttons – Mobile)
Microphone Button C Long Press

(Conventional Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a defined Long Press of the Microphone’s Button C.

When the Keypad Configuration field is set to a Numeric Keypad selection.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Nuisance Delete:	This button’s Short Press is set to Toggle System Scan On/Off.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Toggle Voice Operated Tx:	Always Available.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Radio Call:	The radio model has a Display, and  is capable of transmitting Radio Calls.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Short Press is set to Voice Storage Playback.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
One Touch Selections 1 thru 8:	Always available.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Open Squelch:	This button’s Short Press is set to Monitor.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
      Go to the Microphone Buttons Page


The Infrared Remote Buttons Page

(Conventional Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

The Infrared Remote Buttons page allows you to assign functionality to a mobile radio’s Infrared Remote buttons. These assignments apply while the radio is operating in Conventional Dispatch Mode.

Click on any CPS field title (in green) below to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Infrared Remote Button 1 Infrared Remote Button 2 Infrared Remote Button 3 Infrared Remote Button 4	Infrared Remote Button 5 Infrared Remote Button 6 Infrared Remote Button 7 Infrared Remote Button 8
      Go to the Conventional Buttons Window


Infrared Remote Button 1

(Conventional Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to Infrared Remote Control Button 1.

When the Infrared Remote field is enabled.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Monitor:	Open Squelch can be assigned to another button.
Open Squelch:	Monitor can be assigned to anther button.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Toggle Voice Operated Tx:	Always Available.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Radio Call:	The radio is capable of transmitting Radio Calls.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
One Touch Selections 1 thru 8:	Always available.
Menu/Channel Up:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Down:	The radio model has a Display.
Select/Enter:	The radio model has a Display.
Exit:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Go to the Infrared Remote Buttons Page


Infrared Remote Button 2

(Conventional Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to Infrared Remote Control Button 2.

When the Infrared Remote field is enabled.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Monitor:	Open Squelch can be assigned to another button.
Open Squelch:	Monitor can be assigned to anther button.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Toggle Voice Operated Tx:	Always Available.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Radio Call:	The radio is capable of transmitting Radio Calls.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
One Touch Selections 1 thru 8:	Always available.
Menu/Channel Up:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Down:	The radio model has a Display.
Select/Enter:	The radio model has a Display.
Exit:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  The radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  The radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Go to the Infrared Remote Buttons Page


Infrared Remote Button 3

(Conventional Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to Infrared Remote Control Button 3.

When the Infrared Remote field is enabled.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Monitor:	Open Squelch can be assigned to another button.
Open Squelch:	Monitor can be assigned to anther button.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Toggle Voice Operated Tx:	Always Available.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Radio Call:	The radio is capable of transmitting Radio Calls.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
One Touch Selections 1 thru 8:	Always available.
Menu/Channel Up:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Down:	The radio model has a Display.
Select/Enter:	The radio model has a Display.
Exit:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  The radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  The radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Go to the Infrared Remote Buttons Page


Infrared Remote Button 4

(Conventional Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to Infrared Remote Control Button 4.

When the Infrared Remote field is enabled.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Monitor:	Open Squelch can be assigned to another button.
Open Squelch:	Monitor can be assigned to anther button.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Toggle Voice Operated Tx:	Always Available.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Radio Call:	The radio is capable of transmitting Radio Calls.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
One Touch Selections 1 thru 8:	Always available.
Menu/Channel Up:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Down:	The radio model has a Display.
Select/Enter:	The radio model has a Display.
Exit:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  The radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  The radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Go to the Infrared Remote Buttons Page


Infrared Remote Button 5

(Conventional Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to Infrared Remote Control Button 5.

When the Infrared Remote field is enabled.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Monitor:	Open Squelch can be assigned to another button.
Open Squelch:	Monitor can be assigned to anther button.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Toggle Voice Operated Tx:	Always Available.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Radio Call:	The radio is capable of transmitting Radio Calls.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
One Touch Selections 1 thru 8:	Always available.
Menu/Channel Up:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Down:	The radio model has a Display.
Select/Enter:	The radio model has a Display.
Exit:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  The radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  The radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Go to the Infrared Remote Buttons Page


Infrared Remote Button 6

(Conventional Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to Infrared Remote Control Button 6.

When the Infrared Remote field is enabled.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Monitor:	Open Squelch can be assigned to another button.
Open Squelch:	Monitor can be assigned to anther button.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Toggle Voice Operated Tx:	Always Available.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Radio Call:	The radio is capable of transmitting Radio Calls.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
One Touch Selections 1 thru 8:	Always available.
Menu/Channel Up:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Down:	The radio model has a Display.
Select/Enter:	The radio model has a Display.
Exit:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  The radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  The radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Go to the Infrared Remote Buttons Page


Infrared Remote Button 7

(Conventional Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to Infrared Remote Control Button 7.

When the Infrared Remote field is enabled.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Monitor:	Open Squelch can be assigned to another button.
Open Squelch:	Monitor can be assigned to anther button.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Toggle Voice Operated Tx:	Always Available.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Radio Call:	The radio is capable of transmitting Radio Calls.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
One Touch Selections 1 thru 8:	Always available.
Menu/Channel Up:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Down:	The radio model has a Display.
Select/Enter:	The radio model has a Display.
Exit:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  The radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  The radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Go to the Infrared Remote Buttons Page


Infrared Remote Button 8

(Conventional Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to Infrared Remote Controls Button 8.

When the Infrared Remote field is enabled.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Monitor:	Open Squelch can be assigned to another button.
Open Squelch:	Monitor can be assigned to anther button.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Toggle Voice Operated Tx:	Always Available.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Radio Call:	The radio is capable of transmitting Radio Calls.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
One Touch Selections 1 thru 8:	Always available.
Menu/Channel Up:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Down:	The radio model has a Display.
Select/Enter:	The radio model has a Display.
Exit:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  The radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  The radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Go to the Infrared Remote Buttons Page


The Function Buttons Page (Conventional Buttons - Mobile)
The Function Buttons Page

(Conventional Buttons - Mobile)

DEFINITION:

The Function Buttons page allows you to assign functionality to a mobile multi-line display radio’s F1, F2, and F3 buttons. These assignments apply while the radio is operating in Conventional Dispatch Mode.

Click on any CPS field title (in green) below to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Function Button F1 Short Press Function Button F1 Long Press Function Button F2 Short Press	Function Button F2 Long Press Function Button F3 Short Press Function Button F3 Long Press
     Go to the Conventional Buttons Window


Function Button F1 Short Press (Conventional Buttons - Mobile)
Function Button F1 Short Press

(Conventional Buttons - Mobile)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of the Control Head’s F1 button. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Emergency On:	The Radio is capable of transmitting MDC radio calls, and the Emergency Type is not set to Disabled, and this button’s Long Press is set to Emergency Off.
Monitor:	This button’s Long Press is set to Open Squelch.
Volume Set:	This button’s Long Press is Unassigned.
Toggle System Scan On/Off:	Always available.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Toggle Voice Operated Tx:	Always Available.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Radio Call:	The radio is capable of transmitting Radio Calls.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Long Press is set to Voice Storage Record.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
PRTT:	Always available.
Status:	The radio is Messages /Status.
Messages:	The radio is Message/Status.
One Touch Selections 1 thru 8:	The radio is Messages /Status.
Menu/Channel Up:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Down:	The radio model has a Display.
Select/Enter:	The radio model has a Display.
Exit:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
     Go to The Function Buttons Page


Function Button F1 Long Press (Conventional Buttons - Mobile)
Function Button F1 Long Press

(Conventional Buttons - Mobile)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a defined Long Press of the Control Head’s F1 button.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Emergency Off:	Emergency Type is not set to Disabled, and this button’s Short Press is set to Emergency On.
Volume Set:	Always available.
Nuisance Delete:	This button’s Short Press is set to Toggle System Scan On/Off.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Toggle Voice Operated Tx:	Always Available.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Radio Call:	The radio model has a Display, and  is capable of transmitting Radio Calls.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Short Press is set to Voice Storage Playback.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Status:	The radio is Messages /Status.
Messages:	The radio is Message/Status.
One Touch Selections 1 thru 8:	The radio is Messages /Status.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Open Squelch:	This button’s Short Press is set to Monitor.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
     Go to The Function Buttons Page


Function Button F2 Short Press (Conventional Buttons - Mobile)
Function Button F2 Short Press

(Conventional Buttons - Mobile)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of the Control Head’s F2 button. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Emergency On:	The Radio is capable of transmitting MDC radio calls, and the Emergency Type is not set to Disabled, and this button’s Long Press is set to Emergency Off.
Monitor:	This button’s Long Press is set to Open Squelch.
Volume Set:	This button’s Long Press is Unassigned.
Toggle System Scan On/Off:	Always available.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Toggle Voice Operated Tx:	Always Available.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Radio Call:	The radio is capable of transmitting Radio Calls.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Long Press is set to Voice Storage Record.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
PRTT:	Always available.
Status:	The radio is Messages /Status.
Messages:	The radio is Message/Status.
One Touch Selections 1 thru 8:	The radio is Messages /Status.
Menu/Channel Up:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Down:	The radio model has a Display.
Select/Enter:	The radio model has a Display.
Exit:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
     Go to The Function Buttons Page


Function Button F2 Long Press (Conventional Buttons - Mobile)
Function Button F2 Long Press

(Conventional Buttons - Mobile)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a defined Long Press of the Control Head’s F2 button.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Emergency Off:	Emergency Type is not set to Disabled, and this button’s Short Press is set to Emergency On.
Volume Set:	Always available.
Nuisance Delete:	This button’s Short Press is set to Toggle System Scan On/Off.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Toggle Voice Operated Tx:	Always Available.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Radio Call:	The radio model has a Display, and  is capable of transmitting Radio Calls.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Short Press is set to Voice Storage Playback.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Status:	The radio is Messages /Status.
Messages:	The radio is Message/Status.
One Touch Selections 1 thru 8:	The radio is Messages /Status.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Open Squelch:	This button’s Short Press is set to Monitor.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
      Go to The Function Buttons Page


Function Button F3 Short Press (Conventional Buttons - Mobile)
Function Button F3 Short Press

(Conventional Buttons - Mobile)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of the Control Head’s F3 button. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Emergency On:	The Radio is capable of transmitting MDC radio calls, and the Emergency Type is not set to Disabled, and this button’s Long Press is set to Emergency Off.
Monitor:	This button’s Long Press is set to Open Squelch.
Volume Set:	This button’s Long Press is Unassigned.
Toggle System Scan On/Off:	Always available.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Toggle Voice Operated Tx:	Always Available.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Radio Call:	The radio is capable of transmitting Radio Calls.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Long Press is set to Voice Storage Record.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
PRTT:	Always available.
Status:	The radio is Messages /Status.
Messages:	The radio is Message/Status.
One Touch Selections 1 thru 8:	The radio is Messages /Status.
Menu/Channel Up:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Down:	The radio model has a Display.
Select/Enter:	The radio model has a Display.
Exit:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
      Go to The Function Buttons Page


Function Button F3 Long Press (Conventional Buttons - Mobile)
Function Button F3 Long Press

(Conventional Buttons - Mobile)

Selects the Conventional Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a defined Long Press of the Control Head’s F3 button.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Emergency Off:	Emergency Type is not set to Disabled, and this button’s Short Press is set to Emergency On.
Volume Set:	Always available.
Nuisance Delete:	This button’s Short Press is set to Toggle System Scan On/Off.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Repeater/ Talkaround:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Toggle Voice Operated Tx:	Always Available.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Radio Call:	The radio model has a Display, and  is capable of transmitting Radio Calls.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Short Press is set to Voice Storage Playback.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Status:	The radio is Messages /Status.
Messages:	The radio is Message/Status.
One Touch Selections 1 thru 8:	The radio is Messages /Status.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Open Squelch:	This button’s Short Press is set to Monitor.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
      Go to The Function Buttons Page


LS Trunking Buttons (Mobile)
The LS Trunking Buttons Window

(Mobile)

DEFINITION:

The Trunking Buttons window allows you to assign functionality to the mobile radio’s Programmable Buttons, Microphone Buttons, and Function Buttons. These assignments apply while the radio is operating in Trunking Dispatch Mode.

Click on any page title below (underlined in green) to see more information.


The Programmable Buttons Page (LS Trunking Buttons – Mobile)
The Programmable Buttons Page

(LS Trunking Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

The Programmable Buttons page allows you to assign functionality to a mobile radio’s P1, P2, P3, and P4 buttons. These assignments apply while the radio is operating in Trunking Dispatch Mode.

Click on any CPS field title (in green) below to see a description.

NCLUDED FIELDS:

P1 Button Short Press P1 Button Long Press P2 Button Short Press P2 Button Long Press	P3 Button Short Press P3 Button Long Press P4 Button Short Press P4 Button Long Press
      Go to the LS Trunking Buttons Window


P1 Button Short Press (LS Trunking Buttons – Mobile)
P1 Button Short Press

(LS Trunking Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of the Control Head’s P1 Button. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Volume Set:	This button’s Long Press is Unassigned.
Toggle System Scan On/Off:	Always available.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
All Group Scan:	Always available.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Long Press is set to Voice Storage Record.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Up:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Down:	The radio model has a Display.
Select/Enter:	The radio model has a Display.
Exit:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Toggle Signaling Squelch On/Off:	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
      Go to the Programmable Buttons Page


P1 Button Long Press (LS Trunking Buttons – Mobile)
P1 Button Long Press

(LS Trunking Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a defined Long Press of the Control Head’s P1 Button.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Volume Set:	Always available.
Nuisance Delete:	This button’s Short Press is set to Toggle System Scan On/Off.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Short Press is set to Voice Storage Playback.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Toggle Signaling Squelch On/Off:	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
     Go to the Programmable Buttons Page


P2 Button Short Press (LS Trunking Buttons – Mobile)
P2 Button Short Press

(LS Trunking Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of the Control Head’s P2 Button. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Volume Set:	This button’s Long Press is Unassigned.
Toggle System Scan On/Off:	Always available.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
All Group Scan:	Always available.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Long Press is set to Voice Storage Record.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Up:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Down:	The radio model has a Display.
Select/Enter:	The radio model has a Display.
Exit:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Toggle Signaling Squelch On/Off:	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
      Go to the Programmable Buttons Page


P2 Button Long Press (LS Trunking Buttons – Mobile)
P2 Button Long Press

(LS Trunking Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a defined Long Press of the Control Head’s P2 Button.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Volume Set:	Always available.
Nuisance Delete:	This button’s Short Press is set to Toggle System Scan On/Off.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Short Press is set to Voice Storage Playback.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Toggle Signaling Squelch On/Off:	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
      Go to the Programmable Buttons Page


P3 Button Short Press (LS Trunking Buttons – Mobile)
P3 Button Short Press

(LS Trunking Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of the Control Head’s P3 Button. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Volume Set:	This button’s Long Press is Unassigned.
Toggle System Scan On/Off:	Always available.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
All Group Scan:	Always available.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Long Press is set to Voice Storage Record.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Up:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Down:	The radio model has a Display.
Select/Enter:	The radio model has a Display.
Exit:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Toggle Signaling Squelch On/Off:	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
      Go to the Programmable Buttons Page


P3 Button Long Press (LS Trunking Buttons – Mobile)
P3 Button Long Press

(LS Trunking Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a defined Long Press of the Control Head’s P3 Button.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Volume Set:	Always available.
Nuisance Delete:	This button’s Short Press is set to Toggle System Scan On/Off.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Short Press is set to Voice Storage Playback.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Toggle Signaling Squelch On/Off:	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
      Go to the Programmable Buttons Page


P4 Button Short Press (LS Trunking Buttons – Mobile)
P4 Button Short Press

(LS Trunking Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of the Control Head’s P4 Button. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Volume Set:	This button’s Long Press is Unassigned.
Toggle System Scan On/Off:	Always available.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
All Group Scan:	Always available.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Long Press is set to Voice Storage Record.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Up:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Down:	The radio model has a Display.
Select/Enter:	The radio model has a Display.
Exit:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Toggle Signaling Squelch On/Off:	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
      Go to the Programmable Buttons Page


P4 Button Long Press  (LS Trunking Buttons – Mobile)
P4 Button Long Press

(LS Trunking Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a defined Long Press of the Control Head’s P4 Button.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Volume Set:	Always available.
Nuisance Delete:	This button’s Short Press is set to Toggle System Scan On/Off.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Short Press is set to Voice Storage Playback.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Toggle Signaling Squelch On/Off:	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
      Go to the Programmable Buttons Page


The Microphone Buttons Page (LS Trunking Buttons – Mobile)
The Microphone Buttons Page

(LS Trunking Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

The Microphone Buttons page allows you to assign functionality to a mobile radio’s Microphone A, B, and C buttons. These assignments apply while the radio is operating in Trunking Dispatch Mode.

Click on any CPS field title (in green) below to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Button A Short Press Button A Long Press Button B Short Press	Button B Long Press Button C Short Press Button C Long Press
      Go to the LS Trunking Buttons Window


Microphone Button A Short Press (LS Trunking Buttons – Mobile)
Microphone Button A Short Press

(LS Trunking Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of the Microphone’s Button A. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

When the Keypad Configuration field is set to a Numeric Keypad selection.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Toggle System Scan On/Off:	Always available.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Long Press is set to Voice Storage Record.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Up:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Down:	The radio model has a Display.
Select/Enter:	The radio model has a Display.
Exit:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Toggle Signaling Squelch On/Off:	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
      Go to the Microphone Buttons Page


Button A Long Press (LS Trunking Buttons – Mobile)
Microphone Button A Long Press

(LS Trunking Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a defined Long Press of the Microphone’s Button A.

When the Keypad Configuration field is set to a Numeric Keypad selection.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Nuisance Delete:	This button’s Short Press is set to Toggle System Scan On/Off.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Short Press is set to Voice Storage Playback.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Toggle Signaling Squelch On/Off:	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
      Go to the Microphone Buttons Page


Microphone Button B Short Press (LS Trunking Buttons – Mobile)
Microphone Button B Short Press

(LS Trunking Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of Microphone’s Button B. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

When the Keypad Configuration field is set to a Numeric Keypad selection.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Toggle System Scan On/Off:	Always available.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Long Press is set to Voice Storage Record.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Up:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Down:	The radio model has a Display.
Select/Enter:	The radio model has a Display.
Exit:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Toggle Signaling Squelch On/Off:	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
      Go to the Microphone Buttons Page


Microphone Button B Long Press (LS Trunking Buttons – Mobile)
Microphone Button B Long Press

(LS Trunking Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a defined Long Press of the Microphone’s Button B.

When the Keypad Configuration field is set to a Numeric Keypad selection.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Nuisance Delete:	This button’s Short Press is set to Toggle System Scan On/Off.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Short Press is set to Voice Storage Playback.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Toggle Signaling Squelch On/Off:	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
      Go to the Microphone Buttons Page


Microphone Button C Short Press (LS Trunking Buttons – Mobile)
Microphone Button C Short Press

(LS Trunking Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of Microphone’s Button C. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

When the Keypad Configuration field is set to a Numeric Keypad selection.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Toggle System Scan On/Off:	Always available.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Long Press is set to Voice Storage Record.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Up:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Down:	The radio model has a Display.
Select/Enter:	The radio model has a Display.
Exit:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Toggle Signaling Squelch On/Off:	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
      Go to the Microphone Buttons Page


Microphone Button C Long Press (LS Trunking Buttons – Mobile)
Microphone Button C Long Press

(LS Trunking Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a defined Long Press of the Microphone’s Button C.

When the Keypad Configuration field is set to a Numeric Keypad selection.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Nuisance Delete:	This button’s Short Press is set to Toggle System Scan On/Off.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Short Press is set to Voice Storage Playback.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Toggle Signaling Squelch On/Off:	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
      Go to the Microphone Buttons Page


The Infrared Remote Buttons Page

(LS Trunking Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

The Infrared Remote Buttons page allows you to assign functionality to a mobile radio’s Infrared Remote Buttons. These assignments apply while the radio is operating in Trunking Dispatch Mode.

Click on any CPS field title (in green) below to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Infrared Remote Button 1 Infrared Remote Button 2 Infrared Remote Button 3 Infrared Remote Button 4	Infrared Remote Button 5 Infrared Remote Button 6 Infrared Remote Button 7 Infrared Remote Button 8
      Go to the LS Trunking Buttons Window


Infrared Remote Button 1

(LS Trunking Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to Infrared Remote Control Buttons 1.

When the Infrared Remote field is enabled.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Up:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Down:	The radio model has a Display.
Select/Enter:	The radio model has a Display.
Exit:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  The radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  The radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Toggle Signaling Squelch On/Off:	Always available.
Go to the Infrared Remote Buttons Page


Infrared Remote Button 2

(LS Trunking Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to Infrared Remote Control Buttons 2..

When the Infrared Remote field is enabled.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Up:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Down:	The radio model has a Display.
Select/Enter:	The radio model has a Display.
Exit:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  The radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  The radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Toggle Signaling Squelch On/Off:	Always available.
Go to the Infrared Remote Buttons Page


Infrared Remote Button 3

(LS Trunking Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to Infrared Remote Control Buttons 3..

When the Infrared Remote field is enabled.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Up:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Down:	The radio model has a Display.
Select/Enter:	The radio model has a Display.
Exit:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  The radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  The radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Toggle Signaling Squelch On/Off:	Always available.
Go to the Infrared Remote Buttons Page


Infrared Remote Button 4

(LS Trunking Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to Infrared Remote Control Buttons 4..

When the Infrared Remote field is enabled.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Up:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Down:	The radio model has a Display.
Select/Enter:	The radio model has a Display.
Exit:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  The radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  The radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Toggle Signaling Squelch On/Off:	Always available.
Go to the Infrared Remote Buttons Page


Infrared Remote Button 5

(LS Trunking Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to Infrared Remote Control Buttons 5..

When the Infrared Remote field is enabled.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Up:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Down:	The radio model has a Display.
Select/Enter:	The radio model has a Display.
Exit:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  The radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  The radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Toggle Signaling Squelch On/Off:	Always available.
Go to the Infrared Remote Buttons Page


Infrared Remote Button 6

(LS Trunking Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to Infrared Remote Control Buttons 6..

When the Infrared Remote field is enabled.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Up:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Down:	The radio model has a Display.
Select/Enter:	The radio model has a Display.
Exit:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  The radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  The radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Toggle Signaling Squelch On/Off:	Always available.
Go to the Infrared Remote Buttons Page


Infrared Remote Button 7

(LS Trunking Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to Infrared Remote Control Buttons 7..

When the Infrared Remote field is enabled.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Up:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Down:	The radio model has a Display.
Select/Enter:	The radio model has a Display.
Exit:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  The radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  The radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Toggle Signaling Squelch On/Off:	Always available.
Go to the Infrared Remote Buttons Page


Infrared Remote Button 8

(LS Trunking Buttons – Mobile)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to Infrared Remote Control Buttons 8..

When the Infrared Remote field is enabled.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and Voice Storage Record is assigned to a button.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Up:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Down:	The radio model has a Display.
Select/Enter:	The radio model has a Display.
Exit:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  The radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  The radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Toggle Signaling Squelch On/Off:	Always available.
Go to the Infrared Remote Buttons Page


The Function Buttons Page (Trunking Buttons - Mobile)
The Function Buttons Page

(Trunking Buttons - Mobile)

DEFINITION:

The Function Buttons page allows you to assign functionality to a mobile multi-line display radio’s F1, F2, and F3 buttons. These assignments apply while the radio is operating in Trunking Dispatch Mode.

Click on any CPS field title (in green) below to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Function Button F1 Short Press Function Button F1 Long Press Function Button F2 Short Press	Function Button F2 Long Press Function Button F3 Short Press Function Button F3 Long Press
     Go to the LS Trunking Buttons Window


Function Button F1 Short Press (Trunking Buttons - Mobile)
Function Button F1 Short Press

(Trunking Buttons - Mobile)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of the Control Head’s F1 Button. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Volume Set:	This button’s Long Press is Unassigned.
Toggle System Scan On/Off:	Always available.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
All Group Scan:	Always available.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Long Press is set to Voice Storage Record.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Up:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Down:	The radio model has a Display.
Select/Enter:	The radio model has a Display.
Exit:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Toggle Signaling Squelch On/Off:	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
     Go to The Function Buttons Page


Function Button F1 Long Press (Trunking Buttons - Mobile)
Function Button F1 Long Press

(Trunking Buttons - Mobile)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a defined Long Press of the Control Head’s F1 Button.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Volume Set:	Always available.
Nuisance Delete:	This button’s Short Press is set to Toggle System Scan On/Off.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Short Press is set to Voice Storage Playback.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Toggle Signaling Squelch On/Off:	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
     Go to The Function Buttons Page


Function Button F2 Short Press (Trunking Buttons - Mobile)
Function Button F2 Short Press

(Trunking Buttons - Mobile)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of the Control Head’s F2 Button. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Volume Set:	This button’s Long Press is Unassigned.
Toggle System Scan On/Off:	Always available.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
All Group Scan:	Always available.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Long Press is set to Voice Storage Record.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Up:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Down:	The radio model has a Display.
Select/Enter:	The radio model has a Display.
Exit:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Toggle Signaling Squelch On/Off:	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
     Go to The Function Buttons Page


Function Button F2 Long Press (Trunking Buttons - Mobile)
Function Button F2 Long Press

(Trunking Buttons - Mobile)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a defined Long Press of the Control Head’s F2 Button.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Volume Set:	Always available.
Nuisance Delete:	This button’s Short Press is set to Toggle System Scan On/Off.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Short Press is set to Voice Storage Playback.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Toggle Signaling Squelch On/Off:	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
     Go to The Function Buttons Page


Function Button F3 Short Press (Trunking Buttons - Mobile)
Function Button F3 Short Press

(Trunking Buttons - Mobile)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to the Short Press of the Control Head’s F3 Button. A Short Press is defined as any button-press that is shorter in duration than the CPS-user defined Long Press.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Volume Set:	This button’s Long Press is Unassigned.
Toggle System Scan On/Off:	Always available.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
All Group Scan:	Always available.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Playback:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Long Press is set to Voice Storage Record.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Up:	The radio model has a Display.
Menu/Channel Down:	The radio model has a Display.
Select/Enter:	The radio model has a Display.
Exit:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Toggle Signaling Squelch On/Off:	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
     Go to The Function Buttons Page


Function Button F3 Long Press (Trunking Buttons - Mobile)
Function Button F3 Long Press

(Trunking Buttons - Mobile)

Selects the Trunking Dispatch functionality to be assigned to a defined Long Press of the Control Head’s F3 Button.

SELECTIONS:	AVAILABLE WHEN:
Unassigned:	Always available.
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode.
Display Clock:	The radio model has a Display.
Volume Set:	Always available.
Nuisance Delete:	This button’s Short Press is set to Toggle System Scan On/Off.
Toggle High/Low Power:	Always available.
Toggle Option Board On/Off:	The Option Board Type is not set to None.
Phone Mode:	The radio model has a Display.
Speed Dial (Memory):	When the radio is capable of Phone Mode, and the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Voice Storage Playback Exit:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Voice Storage Record:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and  this button’s Short Press is set to Voice Storage Playback.
Voice Storage Delete:	The Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.
Back Light Control:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 1:	The radio model has a Display.
Auxiliary Control 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Direct Channel:	The radio model has a Display,.and  the radio has a Numeric Keypad, or  the radio has a Microphone w/ Keypad.
Home Revert:	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2:	The radio model has a Display.
Zone:	The radio model has a Display.
Horn and Lights (External Alarm):	Always available.
Toggle Signaling Squelch On/Off:	Always available.
Call Stack	The radio model has a multi-line display, and  when Call Stack has been enabled.
Toggle Answer Mode On/Off	The radio model is a portable multi-line display, or The radio model is a mobile display with new firmware.
Scan List Edit	The radio model is a display model with new firmware.
     Go to The Function Buttons Page


Menu Items
The Menu Items Window

DEFINITION:

The Menu Items window allows you to activate Top-Level radio-user menus and Top-Level radio-user features. Once Top-Level radio-user menus are activated, specific radio-user features can be included as the next level of radio-user choices for each menu.

Click on any page title below (underlined in green) to see more information.


Top Level Menu Page (Menu Items)
The Top Level Menu Page

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

The Top Level Menu Options Page allows you to activate the following Top-Level radio-user menus and Top-Level radio-user features: System Scan, All Group Scan, Program Lists, Phone, Radio Call, Zone, Utilities, Repeater/Talkaround, Edit Mode, Audio/Tones, Voice Storage, MDC Message, and MDC Status.

When the radio is a display.

Click on any CPS field title (in green) below to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

System Scan All Group Scan Program Lists Phone Radio Call Zone Utilities	Repeater/Talkaround Edit Mode Audio/Tones Voice Storage MDC Message MDC Status
     Go To The Menu Items Window


System Scan (Menu Items)
System Scan

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Enables ‘System Scan’ as a radio-user Top Level Menu feature. This allows radio-user to enter the radio’s Scan Mode. This is true provided the Conventional or Trunking Personality for the current Channel Selector selected channel has a Scan List selected.

When the radio is a display model.

     Go To The Top Level Menu Options Page


All Group Scan (Menu Items)
All Group Scan

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Enables All Group Scan as a radio-user Top Level Menu feature. This feature causes the radio to automatically scan (listen-for), and consider unmuting to, the Tx ID’s (transmission activity) for all Groups within the current Channel Selector selected Trunking Personality / Zone.

When the radio is a display model, and

is capable of Trunking dispatch.

     Go To The Top Level Menu Options Page


Phone (Menu Items)
Phone

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Enables ‘Phone’ as a radio-user Top Level Menu feature. This allows the radio-user to enter the Phone Mode, which is when the radio is capable of transmitting phone calls.

This same functionality can be assigned to a (short or long) programmable button-press.

When the radio is a display model.

     Go To The Top Level Menu Options Page


Zone (Menu Items)
Zone

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Enables ‘Zone’ as a radio-user Top Level Menu feature. This offers the radio-user the ability to select the appropriate Zone.

When the radio is a display model.

     Go To The Top Level Menu Options Page


Repeater/Direct (Menu Items)
Repeater/Talkaround

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Enables ‘Repeater/Talkaround’ as a radio-user Top Level Menu feature. This allows the radio-user to select to operate radio-wide in Repeater Mode or Talkaround Mode. This feature applies only for Conventional Personalities.

Talkaround Mode is possible only when the current Channel Selector selected channel has:

•	²	·	Talkaround enabled.

•	²	·	It’s Rx and Tx parameters programmed to identical settings.

  Note: 	Radio-wide Repeater/Talkaround functionality can be assigned to a (short or long) programmable button-press.

When the radio is a display model, and

is capable of Conventional dispatch.

     Go To The Top Level Menu Options Page


Edit Mode (Menu Items)
Edit Mode

(Menu Items)

  Causes the Edit Mode feature to be included in the Top Level Menu. This allows the radio-user to access Edit Mode from the radio’s display.

Note:  Edit Mode can be toggled on or off on a per Conventional Personality basis.

When the radio is a portable multi-line display model.

     Go To The Top Level Menu Options Page


MDC Message (Menu Items)
MDC Message

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Enables MDC Message as a radio-user Top Level Menu feature. This allows radio-users to select and transmit MDC Messages.

Note: MDC Message can be assigned to a (short or long) programmable button-press.

When the radio is a display model.

     Go To The Top Level Menu Options Page


MDC Status (Menu Items)
MDC Status

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Enables MDC Status as a radio-user Top Level Menu feature. This allows the radio-user to select and transmit a Status from a portable or mobile unit to a dispatcher.

Note: MDC Status can be assigned to a (short or long) programmable button-press.

When the radio is a display model.

     Go To The Top Level Menu Options Page


Program Lists Sub-Menu (Menu Items)
The Program Lists Sub-Menu Page

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Enables the Program Lists Sub-Menu page, which activates ‘Program Lists’ as a radio-user Top Level Menu item. This allows the following radio-user features to be assigned to this menu: Scan List, Phone List, and Radio Call List.

Note: At least one list must be enabled.

When the radio is a display model.

Click on any CPS field title (in green) below to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Scan List

Phone List

Radio Call List

     Go To The Menu Items Window


Scan List (Menu Items)
Scan List

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the Scan List feature to be included in the Program Lists menu. This allows the radio-user the ability to define and use certain Scan List functionality.

When the radio is a display model, and

the Program Lists menu is enabled.

     Go To The Program Lists Page


Phone List (Menu Items)
Phone List

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the Phone List feature to be included in the Program Lists menu. This allows the radio-user the ability to define and use certain Phone List functionality. The radio-user is able to edit and add Phone list entries when the radio is equipped with a full keypad.

When the radio is a display model, and

the Program Lists menu is enabled.

     Go To The Program Lists Page


Radio Call List (Menu Items)
Radio Call List

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the Radio Call List feature to be included in the Program Lists menu. This allows the radio-user the ability to define and use certain Call List functionality. The radio-user is able to edit and add Phone list entries when the radio is equipped with a full keypad.

When the radio is a display model, and

the Program Lists menu is enabled.

     Go To The Program Lists Page


Radio Call Sub-Menu (Menu Items)
The Radio Call Sub-Menu Page

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Enables the Radio Call Sub-Menu page, which activates ‘Radio Calls’ as a radio-user Top Level Menu item. This allows the following radio-user features to be assigned to this menu: Sel Cal, Call Alert, Radio Check, Call Stack and Remote Monitor.

Note: At least one feature must be enabled.

When the radio is a display model.

Click on any CPS field title (in green) below to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Sel Cal (Select Call)

Call Alert

Radio Check

Call Stack

Remote Monitor

     Go To The Menu Items Window


Sel Cal (Menu Items)
Sel Cal (Select Call)

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the Sel Cal feature to be included in the Radio Call menu. This allows the radio-user the ability to transmit Sel Cal’s.

When the radio is a display model, and

is capable of Sel Cal’s, and

the Radio Call menu is enabled.

     Go To The Radio Call Page


Call Alert (Menu Items)
Call Alert

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the Call Alert feature to be included in the Radio Call menu. This allows the radio-user the ability to transmit Call Alerts.

When the radio is a display model, and

is capable of Call Alerts, and

the Radio Call menu is enabled.

     Go To The Radio Call Page


Radio Check (Menu Items)
Radio Check

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the Radio Check feature to be included in the Radio Call menu. This allows the radio-user the ability to transmit Radio Checks.

When the radio is a display model, and

is capable of Radio Checks, and

the Radio Call menu is enabled.

     Go To The Radio Call Page


Call Stack (Menu Items)
Call Stack

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the Call Stack feature to be included in the Radio Call menu.

Important Note: The Signaling Configuration Call Stack field must be enabled for Call Stack operation to take place.

Note: Call Stack can also be radio-user accessed with a short or long programmable button-press.

When the radio is a multi-line display model, and

when the Radio Call menu is enabled.

     Go To The Radio Call Page


Remote Monitor (Menu Items)
Remote Monitor

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the Remote Monitor feature to be included in the Radio Call menu. This allows the radio-user to transmit Remote Monitor commands thus initiating the Remote Monitor mode on another radio.

Important Note: This feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

When the radio is a mobile model, and

when the MDC System Remote Monitor Type option is not set to Disable, and

when the Radio Call menu is enabled.

     Go To The Radio Call Page


Utilities Sub-Menu (Menu Items)
The Utilities Sub-Menu Page

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Enables the Utilities Sub-Menu page, which activates ‘Utilities’ as a radio-user Top Level Menu item. This allows the following radio-user features to be assigned to this menu: Squelch, Power Level, Clock, Reminder Alarm, Language Mode, Option Board, Light Disable, When Available, Software Version # and Radio Lock.

Note: At least one feature must be enabled.

When the radio is a display model.

Click on any CPS field title (in green) below to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Squelch Power Level Clock Reminder Alarm Language Mode	Option Board Light Disable When Available Software Version # Radio Lock
     Go To The Menu Items Window


Squelch (Menu Items)
Squelch

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the Squelch feature to be included in the Utilities menu. This allows the radio-user the ability to temporarily adjust the Squelch Threshold setting to ‘Normal’ or ‘Tight’ for the current Channel Selector selected channel. Once the radio’s channel is changed, or the radio is powered-off, this setting reverts back to the Squelch Setting for each Conventional Personality.

This same functionality can be assigned to a (short or long) programmable button-press.

When the radio is a display model, and

is capable of Conventional dispatch mode, and

the Utilities menu is enabled.

     Go To The Utilities Page


Power Level (Menu Items)
Power Level

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the Power Level feature to be included in the Utilities menu. This allows the radio-user to adjust the Transmit Power setting (radio-wide) to ‘High’ or ‘Low’. The CPS-user can also select the Tx Power Level setting, however, the CPS settings are based-on individual Conventional and Trunking Personalities.

Radio-wide Tx Power Level functionality can also be assigned to a (short or long) programmable button-press.

When the radio is a display model, and

the Utilities menu is enabled.

     Go To The Utilities Page


Clock (Menu Items)
Clock

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the Clock feature to be included in the Utilities menu. This allows the radio-user the ability to set the time.

When the radio is a display model, and

the Utilities menu is enabled.

     Go To The Utilities Page


Reminder Alarm (Menu Items)
Reminder Alarm

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the Reminder Alarm feature to be included in the Utilities menu. This allows the radio-user the ability to set an alarm to go off at a reqiured time.

When the radio is a display model, and

the Utilities menu is enabled.

     Go To The Utilities Page


Language Mode (Menu Items)
Language Mode

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the Language Mode feature to be included in the Utilities menu. This allows the radio-user the ability to select the language of the characters that appear in the radio’s display.

IMPORTANT NOTE:

This Feature is not available in portables with firmware releases before RO2.00. In addition, some non-English alphabet keyboard characters may not appear correctly in the radio’s display with firmware releases before RO2.00.

Note: An initial setting can be made with the CPS assigned Language Selection field. This radio-user selection takes precedence.

When the radio is a display model, and

the Utilities menu is enabled.

English, Spanish, Portuguese, French-Canadian.

     Go To The Utilities Page


Option Board Feature (Menu Items)
Option Board

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the Option Board feature to be included in the Utilities menu. This allows the radio-user the ability to toggle on and off radio-wide Option Board functionality. Radio-wide functionality applies to Conventional and Trunking Personalities that have Option Board functionality enabled.

Radio-wide Option Board functionality can also be assigned to a (short or long) programmable button-press.

When the radio is a display model, and

the Utilities menu is enabled.

     Go To The Utilities Page


Light Disable (Menu Items)
Light Disable

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the Light Disable feature to be included in the Utilities menu. This allows the radio-user the ability to disable a portable radio’s; keypad back light, the Display light, and the radio’s LED.

Note:

•	²	·	This same functionality is available to the CPS-user with a Disable Alerts selection.

•	²	·	This feature can also disable the Auto Back Light functionality, and the ‘Light’ functionality that can be assigned to a portable radio programmable button.

When the radio is a display model, and

the Utilities menu is enabled.

     Go To The Utilities Page


When Available (Menu Items)
When Available

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the When Available feature to be included in the Utilities menu. This allows the radio-user to record a message that is automatically heard by any callers, when the radio is left unattended.

Note: This field has been changed to Answer Mode in newer firmware versions.

When the radio is a portable model with older firmware, and

the Utilities menu is enabled, and

the Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.

     Go To The Utilities Page


Software Version # (Menu Items)
Software Version #

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the Software Version # feature to be included in the Utilities menu. This allows the radio-user the ability to display the Version Number of internal-radio Firmware Software stored in Read-Only Memory (ROM).

When the radio is a display model, and

the Utilities menu is enabled.

     Go To The Utilities Page


Radio Lock (Menu Items)
Radio Lock

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the Radio Lock feature to be included in the Utilities menu. The radio-user is then able to toggle the Radio Lock feature on or off. The initial password is defined in the Radio Lock Password field. The radio-user has the ability to change the password.

When the radio is a portable model, and

when the radio has a numeric keypad, and

when the Utilities menu is enabled.

     Go To The Utilities Page


Audio/Tones Sub-Menu (Menu Items)
The Audio/Tones Sub-Menu Page

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Enables the Audio/Tones Sub-Menu page, which activates ‘Audio/Tones’ as a radio-user Top Level Menu item. This allows the following radio-user features to be assigned to this menu: Alert Volume Level, Tone Disable, Name Tone Tag, Call Tone Tag, Escalert, Keypad Tones, Companding, and Message Name Tone Tag.

Note: At least one feature must be enabled.

When the radio is a display model.

Click on any CPS field title (in green) below to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Alert Volume Level Tone Disable Name Tone Tag Call Tone Tag	Escalert Keypad Tones Companding MDC Message Tone Tag
     Go To The Menu Items Window


Alert Volume Level (Menu Items)
Alert Volume Level

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the Alert Volume Level feature to be included in the Audio/Tones menu. If the radio-user then enables this field, all Alert Tone Volumes are set to a constant level. The Alert Tone Fixed Volume  field allows the CPS-user to toggle on or off the same functionality.

When the radio is a display model, and

the Audio/Tones menu is enabled.

     Go To The Audio Tones Page


Tone Disable (Menu Items)
Tone Disable

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the Tone Disable feature to be included in the Audio/Tones menu. This allows the radio-user to toggle on and off all Alert Tones. Tone Disable mutes keypad audio, even when Keypad Tones are set to on. Alert tones only can also be disabled by the CPS-user with the Disable Alerts field.

When the radio is a display model, and

the Audio/Tones menu is enabled.

     Go To The Audio Tones Page


Name Tone Tag (Menu Items)
Name Tone Tag

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the Name Tone Tag feature to be included in the Audio/Tones menu. This allows the radio-user to select which tone sounds when receiving a Call Alert or Sel Cal for each Call List Member, thus identifying callers by distinctive tones. These settings take precedence over the Call Tone Tag radio-user menu settings for Call Alerts and Sel Cal’s. However, when this field is set to Standard, the Call Tone Tag radio-user menu settings then take precedence. There are several ring tones to choose from.

Note: An initial setting is made with the CPS for MDC Call. These radio-user selections take precedence.

When the radio is a display model, and

the Audio/Tones menu is enabled.

     Go To The Audio Tones Page


Call Tone Tag (Menu Items)
Call Tone Tag

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the Call Tone Tag feature to be included in the Audio/Tones menu. This allows the radio-user to select which tone sounds when receiving a Call Alert, a Sel Cal, or an MDC Message. There are several ring tones to choose from.

For Call Alert and Sel Cal, these tones apply only when the Call List member’s Name Tone Tag (radio-user menu) settings are set to ‘Standard’. An initial setting is made with the CPS for Call Alert and Sel Cal, Name Tone Tags. These radio-user selections take precedence.

For MDC Messages, this tone applies only when the Message Name Tone Tag (radio-user menu) setting is set to ‘Standard’. An initial setting is made with the CPS for MDC Message Name Tone Tags. The radio-user selection takes precedence.

When the radio is a display model, and

the Audio/Tones menu is enabled.

     Go To The Audio Tones Page


Escalert (Menu Items)
Escalert

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the Escalert feature to be included in the Audio/Tones menu allowing the radio-user to toggle on and off this functionality. Escalert causes the radio to gradually increase the volume of a repetitive alert tone. This repetitive tone is an alert of an incoming radio call.

The CPS-user can also make this selection with the Escalating Alerts field.

When the radio is a display model, and

the Audio/Tones menu is enabled.

     Go To The Audio Tones Page


Keypad Tones (Menu Items)
Keypad Tones

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the Keypad Tones feature to be included in the Audio/Tones menu. This allows the radio-user to toggle on or off the DTMF audio tones heard when using the keypad.

When the radio is a display model, and

the Audio/Tones menu is enabled.

     Go To The Audio Tones Page


Companding (Menu Items)
Companding

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the Companding option to be included in the Audio/Tones menu. This allows the radio-user to toggle Companding functionality on or off for individual Conventional Personalities. Companding is a new standard feature in the cellular phone industry and is supported industry-wide. The purpose of Companding is to reduce radio and airway noise, thus enhancing audio clarity.

When radio-user activated, Companding overrides all individual Conventional Personality settings for Compression Type and Expansion Type.

When radio-user de-activated, control of Compression Type and Expansion Type settings is returned to the individual Convention Personalities where Companding may or may not be selected.

When the radio is a display model, and

the Audio/Tones menu is enabled.

     Go To The Audio Tones Page


MDC Message Tone Tag (Menu Items)
MDC Message Tone Tag

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the MDC Message Tone Tag feature to be included in the Audio/Tones menu. This allows the radio-user to select which tone sounds when receiving an MDC Message, thus identifying callers by distinctive tones.

This setting take precedence over the Message Tone Tag radio-user menu setting. However, when this field is set to Standard, the MessageTone Tag radio-user menu settings then take precedence. There are several ring tones to choose from.

Note: An initial setting can be made with the CPS for MDC Message Name Tone Tag. The radio-user selections take precedence.

When the radio is a mobile-display model, and

the Audio/Tones menu is enabled.

     Go To The Audio Tones Page


Voice Storage Page Sub-Menu (Menu Items)
Voice Storage Page Sub-Menu

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Enables the Voice Storage Sub-Menu page, which activates ‘Voice Storage’ as a radio-user Top Level Menu item. This allows the following radio-user features to be assigned to this menu: Playback, Delete, Record, Voice Memo, All Incoming, Answer Mode and Silent Answer Mode.

Note: At least one feature must be enabled.

When the radio is a display model, and

Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.

Click on any CPS field title (in green) below to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Playback Delete Record Voice Memo	All Incoming Answer Mode Silent Answer Mode
     Go To The Menu Items Window


Playback (Menu Items)
Playback

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the Playback feature to be included in the Voice Storage menu. This allows the radio-user the ability to listen-to previously recorded calls.

When the radio is a display model, and

Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and

the Voice Storage menu is enabled.

     Go To The Voice Storage Page


Delete (Menu Items)
Delete

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the Delete feature to be included in the Voice Storage menu. This allows the radio-user the ability to remove previously recorded calls.

When the radio is a display model, and

Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and

the Voice Storage menu is enabled.

     Go To The Voice Storage Page


Record (Menu Items)
Record

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the Record feature to be included in the Voice Storage menu. This allows the radio-user the ability to record calls.

When the radio is a display model, and

Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and

the Voice Storage menu is enabled.

     Go To The Voice Storage Page


Voice Memo (Menu Items)
Voice Memo

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the Voice Memo feature to be included in the Voice Storage menu. This allows the radio-user the ability to record a reminder message for personal use.

When the radio is a display model, and

Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and

the Voice Storage menu is enabled, and

the Record sub-menu feature is enabled.

     Go To The Voice Storage Page


All Incoming (Menu Items)
All Incoming

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the All Incoming feature to be included in the Voice Storage menu. This allows the radio-user the ability to record all incoming calls.

When the radio is a display model, and

Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and

the Voice Storage menu is enabled, and

the Record sub-menu feature is enabled.

     Go To The Voice Storage Page


Answer Mode (Menu Items)
Answer Mode

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the Answer Mode feature to be included in the Voice Storage menu. The radio-user can then toggle Answer Mode on and off. Answer Mode allows radio callers to leave recorded audio messages.

Once in the Answer Mode, the following options are available to the radio-user: Answer Mode - Answer Mode On, Answer Mode Off; Record Message - Greeting Message, Alternate Message; Review Message - Greeting Message, Alternate Message; Silent Answer Mode (when enabled), Blocking Mode (available when Silent Answer Mode is enabled).

Important Note: This feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

Note:

•	²	·	Answer Mode can also be radio-user accessed with a (short or long programmable button-press.

•	²	·	For multi-line display radio models, an Answer Mode indicator (AM) can also be enabled for the radio-user; see Answer Machine Status.

(When the radio is a multi-line display model, and

when the Voice Storage menu is enabled.)

or

(When the radio is a mobile display model, and

when the Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and

when the Voice Storage menu is enabled.)

     Go To The Voice Storage Page


Silent Answer Mode (Menu Items)
Silent Answer Mode

(Menu Items)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the Silent Answer Mode feature to be included in the Voice Storage menu. Silent Answer Mode causes the radio to mute its speaker when recording calls in the Answer Mode. Silent Answer mode is only available to the radio-user when Answer Mode is active.

Important Note: This feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

Note:

•	²	·	Silent Answer Mode can also be radio-user accessed with a (short or long programmable button-press.

•	²	·	For multi-line display radio models, an Answer Mode indicator (AM) can also be enabled for the radio-user; see Answer Machine Status.

When Answer Mode is set to enable, and

(When the radio is a multi-line display model, and

when the Voice Storage menu is enabled.)

or

(When the radio is a mobile display model, and

when the Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and

when the Voice Storage menu is enabled.)

     Go To The Voice Storage Page


The One Touch Setup Window (One Touch Setup)
The One Touch Setup Window

(One Touch Setup)

DEFINITION:

The One Touch Setup allows you to view or define One Touch selections that may then be assigned to Conventional dispatch programmable buttons. One Touch selections can either send an MDC Message, or an MDC Status, or be Unassigned.

•	²	·	Table Type window records can be moved using the Short Cut Menu.

•	²	·	Right-clicking anywhere on Table Type windows retrieves the Short Cut Menu.

Note: This feature is only available on Conventional mobile models.

Click on any CPS field title (in green) below to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

One Touch Function

One Touch Index

One Touch Alias


One Touch Function (One Touch Setup)
One Touch Function

(One Touch Setup)

DEFINITION:

Selects either an MDC Message or an MDC Status for the current One Touch selection. The One Touch Index selection must then be made to the same row in this One Touch table.

Note:

•	²	·	One Touch Table functionality (rows 1 thru 8) can then be selected for use with the One Touch 1 thru 8 programmable buttons selections.

•	²	·	This feature is only available on Conventional mobile models.

      Go to the One Touch Setup Page


One Touch Index (One Touch Setup)
One Touch Index

(One Touch Setup)

DEFINITION:

Selects the desired MDC Message or MDC Status number for the current One Touch selection. The Message or Status selection is determined in the One Touch Function field for the same row of this One Touch table.

Note:

•	²	·	One Touch Table functionality (rows 1 thru 8) can then be selected for use with the One Touch 1 thru 8 programmable buttons selections.

•	²	·	This feature is only available on Conventional mobile models.

      Go to the One Touch Setup Page


One Touch Alias (One Touch Setup)
One Touch Alias

(One Touch Setup)

DEFINITION:

Selecting a correlating One Touch Function, or One Touch Index automatically displays this Alias. This is a view-only field. These Aliases are created in either the MDC Message Alias, or MDC Status Alias field.

Note: This feature is only available on Conventional mobile models.

      Go to the One Touch Setup Page


The Conventional Personality Window

The Conventional Personality window allows you to create and delete Conventional Personalities, as well as define individual Conventional Personality functionality. Conventional dispatch is one of the two dispatch modes. The other dispatch type is LS Trunking. Conventional channels can only communicate to radios operating on Conventional channels.

In Conventional dispatch mode, each position on the Radio’s Channel Selector is assigned a Personality. When the radio-user sets the Channel Selector to a given channel, the assigned personality for that channel determines the radio’s functionality at that time (see Personality Assignment).

In Trunking dispatch mode, personalities include Groups that are assigned to each channel of the Channel Selector.

The window’s Navigation Toolbar offers high-level functionality for maintaining Conventional Personalities.

Click on any page title below (underlined in green) to see more information.


Basic Page (Conventional Personality)
The Basic Page

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

The Basic page allows you to name and define general radio functionality for the current Conventional Personality. More specifically, these features are relating to Receive and Transmit.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Alias Channel Bandwidth Receive Only Personality Rx Frequency Rx Squelch Type Rx TPL Frequency Rx TPL Code Rx DPL Code Rx DPL Invert	Tx Frequency Tx Squelch Type Tx TPL Frequency Tx TPL Code TPL Reverse Burst Tx DPL Code Tx DPL Invert Tx DPL Turnoff Code
     Go to Conventional Personality Window


Alias (Conventional Personality)
Alias

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

The Alias is a radio-user recognizable description for the current Conventional Personality being defined. Characters, Numbers, Spaces, and Special Characters can be used.

Examples: EMT-001, #500, Electric. #A5.

Note: This alias appears on the tree view.

When the radio has a display.

     Go to the Basic Page


Channel Bandwidth Select (Conventional Personality)
Channel Bandwidth Select

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selects the channel bandwidth while operating on the current Conventional Personality.

Note:  India models only support 12.5KHz.

     Go to the Basic Page


Receive Only Personality (Conventional Personality)
Receive Only Personality

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio to not have transmit capability while operating on the current Conventional Personality.

Note: Receiving calls will be the only operation permitted on this personality.

     Go to the Basic Page


Rx Frequency (Conventional Personality)
Rx Frequency

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selects a designated frequency used when receiving carrier squelch for the current Conventional Personality.

Note:

•	When the Enter FCC Channel Number field is enabled, the CPS automatically converts FCC Channel Numbers to their correlating frequency.

•	Enter the FCC Channel Number and then press the <Tab> key or the <Enter> Key to register and convert the entry.

     Go to the Basic Page


Rx Squelch Type (Conventional Personality)
Rx Squelch Type

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selects the type of Private Line (PL) or Carrier Squelch needed to receive a call, while operating on the current Conventional Personality.

Note: The Unmute/Mute rules for the personality also determines if a call can be received.

(CSQ) Carrier Squelch

(TPL) Tone Private Line

(DPL) Digital Private Line

     Go to the Basic Page


Rx TPL Frequency (Conventional Personality)
Rx TPL Frequency

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selects a designated frequency used when receiving Tone Private Line (TPL) encoding, while operating on the current Conventional Personality. This frequency can directly correlate to the Rx TPL Code field; however, non standard code frequencies may also be selected.

When Rx Squelch Type is set to TPL.

Frequency/Codes List

     Go to the Basic Page


Rx TPL Code (Conventional Personality)
Rx TPL Code

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selects the specific code accepted when receiving Tone Private Line (TPL) encoding, while operating on the current Conventional Personality. This code can directly correlate to the Rx TPL Frequency field. That is, selecting a value for this field automatically selects an Rx TPL Frequency; however, from the Rx TPL Frequency field, non standard code frequencies may also be selected.

When Rx Squelch Type is set to TPL.

Frequency/Codes List

     Go to the Basic Page


Rx DPL Code (Conventional Personality)
Rx DPL Code

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selects the specific code accepted when receiving Digital Private Line (DPL) encoding, while operating on the current Conventional Personality.

When Rx Squelch Type is set to DPL.

Code List

     Go to the Basic Page


Rx DPL Invert (Conventional Personality)
Rx DPL Invert

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

  Causes Digital Private Line (DPL) signals to be inverted when they are received by the radio, while operating on the current Conventional Personality. Inverted coding allows for more traffic/usage on frequencies.

Note: DPL Invert must be set on both receiving and transmitting radios, and repeaters, for communication to occur.

When Rx Squelch Type is set to DPL.

     Go to the Basic Page


Tx Frequency (Conventional Personality)
Tx Frequency

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selects a designated frequency used when transmitting carrier for the current Conventional Personality.

     Go to the Basic Page


Tx Squelch Type (Conventional Personality)
Tx Squelch Type

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selects the type of Private Line (PL) or Carrier Squelch that the radio transmits, while operating on the current Conventional Personality.

(CSQ) Carrier Squelch

(TPL) Tone Private Line

(DPL) Digital Private Line

     Go to the Basic Page


Tx TPL Frequency (Conventional Personality)
Tx TPL Frequency

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selects a designated frequency used to transmit Tone Private Line (TPL) encoding, while operating on the current Conventional Personality. This frequency can directly correlate to the Tx TPL Code field; however, non standard code frequencies may also be selected.

When Tx Squelch Type is set to TPL.

Frequency/Codes List

     Go to the Basic Page


Tx TPL Code (Conventional Personality)
Tx TPL Code

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selects the specific code accepted when receiving Tone Private Line (TPL) encoding, while operating on the current Conventional Personality. This code can directly correlate to the Tx TPL Frequency field. That is, selecting a value for this field automatically selects a Tx TPL Frequency; however, from the Tx TPL Frequency field, non standard code frequencies may also be selected.

When Tx Squelch Type is set to TPL.

Frequency/Codes List

     Go to the Basic Page


TPL Reverse Burst (Conventional Personality)
TPL Reverse Burst

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

  Causes a Tone Private Line (TPL) code to be transmitted at the end of a transmission - once PTT is released,  and while operating on the current Conventional Personality. This sub-audible tone causes the receiving radio to mute its speaker before loss of a carrier is detected. Muting the speaker eliminates unwanted noise (squelch tail) during loss of carrier detection.

When Tx Squelch Type is set to TPL,

and Receive Only Personality is disabled [image].

     Go to the Basic Page


Tx DPL Code (Conventional Personality)
Tx DPL Code

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Digital Private Line (DPL) code that transmits while operating on the current Conventional Personality.

When Tx Squelch Type is set to DPL.

Code List

     Go to the Basic Page


Tx DPL Invert (Conventional Personality)
Tx DPL Invert

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

  Causes Digital Private Line (DPL) signals to be inverted before they are transmitted from the radio, while operating on the current Conventional Personality. Inverted coding allows for more traffic/usage on frequencies.

Note: DPL Invert must be set on both receiving and transmitting radios, and repeaters for communication to occur.

     Go to the Basic Page


Tx DPL Turnoff Code (Conventional Personali
Tx DPL Turnoff Code

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

  Causes a Digital Private Line (DPL) code to be transmitted at the end of a transmission - once PTT is released, and while operating on the current Conventional Personality. This sub-audible code causes the receiving radio to mute its speaker before loss of a carrier is detected. Muting the speaker eliminates unwanted noise (squelch tail) during this process.

When Tx Squelch Type is set to DPL,

and Receive Only Personality is disabled [image].

     Go to the Basic Page


Options Page (Conventional Personality)
The Options Page

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

The Options page allows you to select a variety of general options for the current Conventional Personality.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Talkaround Voice Operated Tx (VOX) Edit Mode Tx Power Level	Time-Out Timer Squelch Setting Unmute/Mute Rule Busy Channel Lockout
     Go to Conventional Personality Window


Talkaround (Conventional Personality)
Talkaround

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

  Allows the radio to operate in Talkaround Mode , while operating on the current Conventional Personality. Radio-wide Talkaround can be selected by a radio-user (short or long programmable button-press, or menu selection.

  Disabling disallows the current personality the ability to operate in Talkaround Mode.

Note:

•	In Talkaround Mode the Rx Parameters are used in place of the Tx Parameters when transmitting.

•	If the Rx Parameters and Tx Parameters are programmed the same for the current personalitiy, the personality is in affect in a constant Talkaround mode, therefore this field is automatically disabled.

When Receive Only Personality is disabled [image], and

the current selected Rx Parameters are not exactly equal to the current selected Tx Parameters (see the Note above).

     Go to the Options Page


Voice Operated Tx (Conventional Personality)
Voice Operated Tx (VOX)

(Conventional Personality)

  Enables the radio to automatically key-up due to recognition of voice received through an Accessory Connector headset microphone on a Portable radio. For a Mobile radio the selected Hot Microphone automatically keys-up due to recognition of voice. In both cases the radio automatically de-keys when audio is no longer present. This feature applies while operating on the current Conventional Personality and while in Emergency Mode.

On a Mobile radio VOX is initiated with a programmable button press.

See Also: VOX Headset.

When Receive Only Personality is disabled.

     Go to the Options Page


Edit Mode (Conventional Personality)
Edit Mode

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

  Allows channel parameters to be radio-user modified through the Edit Mode functionality for the current Conventional Personality. Channel parameters include Rx and Tx Frequencies, Rx and Tx Squelch Code Types, and Bandwidth (see Conventional Personality, The Basic Page).

Note: The Menu Items Edit Mode field must be enabled for radio-user Edit Mode access.

When the radio is a portable multi-line display model.

     Go to the Options Page


Tx Power Level (Conventional Personality)
Tx Power Level

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selects the transmit power level while operating on the current Conventional Personality. For portable radios this feature can extend radio battery life.

Certain radio models offer the ability to manually change the ‘High/Low Power’ setting via a radio-user (short or long) programmable button-press, or menu selection. Certain conditions apply.

Note:

•	During an Emergency Transmission, the radio automatically uses the High setting.

•	For a mobile radio the CPS - Tx High Power and Tx Low Power wattage can be defined.

•	For a non-display radio, if the radio does have a programmable button-press assigned to ‘High/Low Power’, the default setting for each personality is always ‘High’.

Low:	Used when communicating in close proximity, and to keep the radio from transmitting into other geographical groups operating on the same frequency.

High:	Used when a stronger signal is needed to extend transmission distances.

Auto:	Causes the radio to automatically select between low and high power based upon the strength of the last received transmission. After a period of inactivity the radio will always transmit at high power.

Available only when the radio is a display model, and Auto Power Mode is Enabled.

  Go to the Options Page


Time-Out Timer (Conventional Personality)
Time-Out Timer

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selects the maximum amount of communication time allowed per transmission, while operating on the current Conventional Personality. Once this time expires, the transmission is automatically terminated. Time is in seconds.

When Receive Only Personality is disabled [image].

15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 180, or

Infinite.

     Go to the Options Page


Squelch Setting (Conventional Personality)
Squelch Setting

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selects the amount of carrier energy required to unmute the radio’s speaker upon satisfying this selected Carrier Squelch threshold. This feature applies while operating on the current Conventional Personality.

Note:

•	These selections apply only to Portable radios operating in Conventional dispatch mode. All other squelch thresholds are internal to the radio.

•	These Squelch selections can also be assigned to a radio-user long or short programmable button-press, or menu selection.

Normal:	Allows more transmissions with less clarity to unmute the radio’s speaker.

Tight:	Increases the squelch threshold causing a stronger carrier signal to be required before the radio’s speaker will unmute. This helps to reduce unwanted noise.

     Go to the Options Page


Unmute/Mute Rule (Conventional Personality)
Unmute/Mute Rule

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selects the rule that determines when a radio opens and closes its speaker to receive audio for the current Conventional Personality. The Unmute/Mute rule applies when PL is the selected Rx Squelch Type for the current Conventional Personality. Unmuting opens the speaker. Muting closes the speaker.

When Rx Squelch Type is set to TPL or DPL.

Std Unmuting, Std Muting:	To unmute on Proper Private Line (PL) code detection, and to mute on loss of proper PL code.

And Unmuting, Std Muting:	To unmute on Proper PL code detection And Carrier Squelch detect, and to mute on loss of proper PL code.

And Unmuting, Or Muting:	To unmute on Proper PL code detection And Carrier Squelch detect, and to mute on loss of proper PL code Or loss of Carrier Squelch detect.

Note: Proper refers to there being a code match between the transmitting radio’s Transmit PL code, and the receiving radio’s Receive PL code. The transmitting radio’s Tx Squelch Type and the receiving radio’s Rx Squelch Type must also be a match; that is, Tx TPL for Rx TPL, or Tx DPL for Rx DPL.

     Go to the Options Page


Busy Channel Lockout (Conventional Personality)
Busy Channel Lockout

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selects a channel lockout rule while operating on the current Conventional Personality.

These selections prevent the radio from transmitting while the chosen "On Busy Channel" condition exists for the current channel. In addition, when either of the two "On Busy Channel" selections are chosen, Monitor Mode is not possible for the current channel.

Note: The Tx Inhibit Quick Key Override field is an extended feature to the ‘On Busy Channel’, and ‘On Busy Channel with Wrong PL Code’ selections below. This override feature allows the radio-user to transmit regardless of a busy channel status.

When Receive Only Personality is disabled.

Disabled:	Allows transmissions, or Monitor, even when another transmission is detected on the current channel.

On Busy Channel: 	Prevents transmission when the Carrier Squelch threshold is detected on the current channel. Monitor Mode is not possible.

On Busy Channel w/

Wrong PL Code: 	Prevents transmission only when the Carrier Squelch threshold is detected with a PL code that does not match for the current personality/channel. Monitor Mode is not possible.

Accessed Only: When Rx Squelch Type is set to TPL or DPL.

     Go to the Options Page


Signaling Page (Conventional Personality)
Signaling Page

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

The Signaling page allows you to select the Signaling System and data type to be used when receiving or transmitting Signaling data for the current Conventional Personality. Certain Signaling System functionality can also be defined for the current personality.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Rx System

TPL/DPL Required for Data

Signaling Squelch

Tx System

Repeater Access ID

     Go to Conventional Personality Window


Rx Signaling System (Conventional Personality)
Rx System

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Signaling System and data type that the radio uses when receiving Signaling data, while operating on the current Conventional Personality.

None

MDC

Quik-Call II

DTMF

     Go to the Signaling Page


TPL/DPL Required for Data (Conventional Personality)
TPL/DPL Required for Data

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio to require the correct Private Line (PL) codes before Signaling  data can be received, while operating on the current Conventional Personality.

When Rx Squelch Type is set to TPL, or DPL,

and Rx Signaling System is not set to None.

     Go to the Signaling Page


Signaling Squelch (Conventional Personality)
Signaling Squelch

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Unmute rule for the current Rx Signaling System that is selected for the current Conventional Personality. This Signaling System unmute rule applies only to the detection of Voice Calls.

When Rx Signaling System is not set to ‘None’.

And: 	Both the current personality’s Private Line (PL) Unmute/Mute Rule, and Voice Call detection must be satisfied before unmuting occurs.

Or:	Either the current personality’s Private Line (PL) Unmute/Mute rule, or Voice Call detection will unmute the radio’s speaker to receive audio.

     Go to the Signaling Page


Tx Signaling System (Conventional Personality)
Tx System

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Signaling System and data type that the radio uses when transmitting Signaling data, while operating on the current Conventional Personality.

None

MDC

Quik-Call II

DTMF

     Go to the Signaling Page


Repeater Access ID (Conventional Personality)
Repeater Access ID

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Signaling System Access ID code to be transmitted while operating on the current Conventional Personality. During transmission, this ID code determines if Repeater access is granted.

Note: The ID code is automatically transmitted when the ‘MDC’ Repeater Access Type field is set to ‘Auto’ for the selected Tx System, of the current personality.

When The radio is capable of Automatic Repeater Access, and

Receive Only Personality is set to Disabled, and

Tx Signaling system is set to an applicable Signaling data type.

Minimum = 0000

Maximum = FFFF

In Increments of 1

     Go to the Signaling Page


Scan List Page (Conventional Personality)
Select a Scan System Page

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

The Scan System page allows you to select a Scan List for use while operating in scan mode, for the current Conventional Personality. Additionally, automatic scanning functionality can be enabled.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Scan List

Auto Scan

     Go to Conventional Personality Window


Scan List (Conventional Personality)
Scan List

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Scan List used by the radio while operating in the Scan Mode, on the current Conventional Personality. The Scan List determines which callers the radio scans for (actively looks for), and considers Unmuting to, on the selected Scan List channels (Conventional Personalities or Trunking Groups).

     Go To the Scan List Page


Auto Scan (Conventional Personality)
Auto Scan

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio to automatically enter the Scan Mode, when the radio-user selects (with the Channel Selector ) the current Conventional Personality.

  When disabled, the radio-user is able to invoke the Scan Mode operation through a button short-press or menu selection, while operating on the current Conventional Personality.

When Scan List is not set to disabled.

     Go To the Scan List Page


Phone System Page (Conventional Personality)
Select a Phone System Page

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

The Phone page allows you to select the Phone System to be used, when operating in Phone Mode, for the current Conventional Personality.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Phone System

     Go to Conventional Personality Window


Phone System (Conventional Personality)
Phone System

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Phone System to be used when operating in Phone Mode, for the current Conventional Personality. A Phone System defines certain operational functionality for the Phone List.

  Go to the Phone Page


Advanced Page (Conventional Personality)
The Advanced Page

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

The Advanced page contains Option Board and frequency-related options for the current Conventional Personality.

WARNING: These fields should not be modified if the user is not fully aware of the impact of the setting. It is possible to disable the radio's ability to receive and or transmit data.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Option Board Feature Option Board Configuration Index Noise Blanker Compression Type Expansion Type	Emphasis Selection Rx Reference Frequency Tx Reference Frequency Tx Only Personality Non Standard Reverse Burst
     Go to Conventional Personality Window


Option Board Feature (Conventional Personality)
Option Board Feature

(Conventional Personality)

  Enables Option Board functionality to be active for the current Conventional Personality.

Note: The ability to turn radio-wide option board functionality on and off can be assigned to a radio-user (short or long) programmable button-press or menu selection. However, option board functionality only applies for channels where this Conventional Personality Option Board Feature or the Trunking Personality Option Board Feature has been enabled.

When the Option Board Type is not set to None.

     Go to the Advanced Page


Option Board Configuration Index (Conventional Personality)
Option Board Configuration Index

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selects the desired "Advanced" only option board functionality for the current Conventional Personality. Advanced option board types allow for unique settings on a per personality basis. Option board functionality selections are based on the ‘Imported’ third party option board configuration data that applies for the selected Option Board Type.

This selected option board functionality is then automatically downloaded and initiated when the radio-user selects (with the Channel Selector) the current channel.

When Option Board Feature field is enabled, and

when the Option Board Configuration Download is enabled, and

(when the Option Board Type is set to Advanced Option Interface, or Advanced & Voice Storage).

     Go to the Advanced Page


Noise Blanker Conventional Personality
Noise Blanker

(Conventional Personality)

  Enables the use of special noise reduction circuitry that targets certain noise emissions that may be generated in the proximity of a receiving radio.

Note: This feature applies only to low-band radios.

     Go to the Advanced Page


Compression Type (Conventional Personality)
Compression Type

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selects the transmit-audio compression type for the current Conventional Personality. These selections can control or enhance audio clarity. Full Compression allows for Companding Mode. The radio-user can also toggle Companding on or off, on a Personality basis, if the Companding menu selection is enabled.

When Receive Only Personality is set to Disabled.

Disabled

Full Compression: 	If Full Compression is selected, then Full Expansion (in the Expansion Type field) is automatically selected. These two settings put the radio in Companding Mode. Likewise, if Full Compression is de-selected, then Full Expansion is automatically de-selected as the Expansion Type.

AGC Mode:	Audio Gain Control causes all audio to be transmitted at the same volume level, regardless of how volume levels may vary when picked up by the radio’s microphone. If AGC is not set on the transmitting radio, audio volume levels are only equalized by the receiving radio.

     Go to the Advanced Page


Expansion Type (Conventional Personality)
Expansion Type

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selects the receive-audio expansion type for the current Conventional Personality. These selections can control or enhance audio clarity. Full Expansion allows for Companding Mode. The radio-user can also toggle Companding on or off, on a Personality basis, if the Companding menu selection is enabled.

Disabled

Full Expansion:	If Full Expansion is selected, then Full Compression (in the Compression Type field) is automatically selected. These two settings put the radio in Companding Mode. Likewise, if Full Expansion is de-selected, then Full Compression is automatically de-selected as the Compression Type.

AGC Mode:	Audio Gain Control causes all receive audio to be heard at the same volume level, regardless of how volume levels may vary when picked up by the transmitting radio’s microphone. If AGC is not set on the transmitting radio, audio volume levels are only equalized by the receiving radio.

(LLE) Low-level

Expansion:	LLE is a Motorola feature developed to help reduce radio and airway noise thus enhancing audio clarity. LLE is designed for two-way radio communication. LLE is particularly useful when communicating with older radio models.

     Go to the Advanced Page


Emphasis Selected (Conventional Personality)
Emphasis Selected

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selects the type of audio shaping used while operating on the current Conventional Personality. These selections can enhance audio clarity.

None

De-Emphasis

Pre-Emphasis

De-Emphasis & Pre-Emphasis.

     Go to the Advanced Page


Rx Reference Frequency (Conventional Personality)
Rx Reference Frequency

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Reference Frequency used when receiving on the current Conventional Personality.

WARNING: It is possible to disable the radio's ability to receive and or transmit data. If you are not fully aware of the impact of this setting, DO NOT MODIFY IT!

     Go to the Advanced Page


Tx Reference Frequency  (Conventional Personality)
Tx Reference Frequency

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Reference Frequency used when transmitting on the current Conventional Personality.

WARNING: It is possible to disable the radio's ability to receive and or transmit data. If you are not fully aware of the impact of this setting, DO NOT MODIFY IT!

When Receive Only Personality is set to Disabled [image].

     Go to the Advanced Page


Tx Only Personality (Conventional Personality)
Tx Only Personality

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio not to have receive capability while operating on the current Conventional Personality.

Note: Transmitting calls will be the only operation permitted on this personality.

When the radio is a mobile model, and

when Receive Only Personality is disabled.

     Go to the Advanced Page


Non-Standard Reverse Burst (Conventional Personality)
Non-Standard Reverse Burst

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio to receive and or transmit a Non-Standard TPL Reverse Burst. This is needed when working with other radios/equipment that require a Non-Standard Reverse Burst. A Reverse Burst is a sub-audible tone. When the radio receives and decodes this sub-audible tone the radio’s speaker is muted, thus eliminating unwanted noise (squelch tail) during loss of the carrier signal. This feature applies while operating on the current Conventional Personality.

   When disabled, the radio receives Standard TPL Reverse Bursts, and may transmit Standard TPL Reverse Bursts depending on the status of the TPL Reverse Burst field.

When Enabled:

On Receive: The radio decodes only ‘Non-Standard’ Reverse Bursts.

On Transmit:

•	If the TPL Reverse Burst is enabled, the radio transmits a ‘Non-Standard’ Reverse Burst at the end of the transmission once PTT is released.

•	If the TPL Reverse Burst field is disabled, no Reverse Burst is transmitted.

When Disabled:

On Receive: The radio decodes only ‘Standard’ Reverse Bursts.

On Transmit:

•	If TPL Reverse Burst is enabled, the radio transmits a ‘Standard’ Reverse Burst at the end of the transmission once PTT is released.

•	If the TPL Reverse Burst field is disabled, no Reverse Burst is transmitted.

When either the Rx Squelch Type field and/or the Tx Squelch Type field is set to "TPL" for the current Conventional Personality.

     Go to the Advanced Page


The Data Revert Page (Conventional Personality)
The Data Revert Page

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

The Data Revert Page allows you to view or define Data Revert channels for individual Conventional Personalities. Data Revert allows for predefined alternative channels to be designated for the purpose of transmitting and receiving data. Data Revert channels are activated from an external data device connected through the radio’s Accessory Connector. The "Data Revert Pin" selection must be assigned to one of the Radio Configuration programmable input pins. When the "Data Revert" pin is de-asserted the radio returns to the radio’s currently selected channel.

The radio may receive data may through either the "Tx Flat Audio" input line or the "Ext Mic Audio" input line (or both) depending on the Radio Configuration Data PTT Audio Source field selection.

Note:

•	Enabling the Data PTT Overrides Voice field prevents a data transmission from being interrupted. Additionally, when the radio is transmitting or receiving a voice transmission, "Data PTT" will interrupt the voice transmission and begin its own transmission.

•	While in Scan Mode, if Data Revert is asserted, the radio uses the Data Revert channel for the radio’s currently selected channel. This is true no matter what the Scan Mode state, Active or Landed.

•	This is a mobile only feature.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Data Revert Zone Alias

Data Revert Zone

Data Revert Channel Alias

Data Revert Channel

     Go to Conventional Personality Window


Data Revert Zone Alias (Conventional Personality)
Data Revert Zone Alias

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selecting a value for the Data Revert Zone field automatically retrieves this Zone Alias. Zone Aliases are defined in the Personality Assignment, Zone Alias field. This is a view-only field.

When the radio is a Mobile model.

      Go to the Data Revert Page


Data Revert Zone (Conventional Personality)
Data Revert Zone

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Zone that the radio engages (jumps to) when Data Revert is initiated. This selection applies while operating on the current Conventional Personality.

When the radio is a Mobile model.

      Go to the Data Revert Page


Data Revert Channel Alias (Conventional Personality)
Data Revert Channel Alias

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selecting a value for the Data Revert Channel field automatically retrieves this Channel Alias. Channel aliases are defined in the Conventional Personality Alias field. This is a view-only field.

When the radio is a Mobile model.

      Go to the Data Revert Page


Data Revert Channel (Conventional Personality)
Data Revert Channel

(Conventional Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional Channel that the radio engages (jumps to) when Data Revert is initiated. The Data Revert Zone must be selected first. This selection applies while operating on the current Conventional Personality.

When the radio is a Mobile model.

      Go to the Data Revert Page


Signaling Configuration Window (Signaling Systems)
The Signaling Configuration Window

(Signaling Systems)

DEFINITION:

The Signaling Configuration window allows you to define Signaling System functionality that can apply to all Signaling Systems. Signaling Systems can be created in their data type window; MDC, QCII, and DTMF. Signaling Systems can be assigned to radio Channels / Personalities, and selected for use with MDC Messages, MDC Statuses, and Call List Members as receive and transmit data protocols.

Signaling Systems also send data and tones for communications such as PTT ID’s, Emergencies, and Radio Calls. Signaling Systems send and receive data and tones within the voice frequency range, however they are muted.

Note: Functionality of Signaling Systems types vary, therefore some features may not extend to all Signaling System types.

Click on any page title below (underlined in green) to see more information.


General Page (Signaling Configuration)
The General Page

(Signaling Configuration)

DEFINITION:

The General page allows you to define basic Signaling System functionality.

Note: Functionality of Signaling Systems types vary, therefore these features may not extend to all Signaling System types.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Call Alert Encode Sel Cal Encode Radio Check Encode Remote Monitor Encode Emergency Remote Monitor Encode Radio Call Menu Time-Out Timer	Limited Patience Timer Auto Reset Timer Basic Sel Cal Call Stack Call Stack Icon
     Go To Signaling Configuration Window


Call Alert Encode (Signaling Configuration)
Call Alert Encode

(Signaling Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Allows Call Alerts to be transmitted for Signaling Systems. A Call Alert allows a transmitting radio to notify the targeted radio-user of a missed call. The receiving radio responds with both audible and visual alerts to the user. The visual alert persists until reset by the returning user.

Note:

•	The transmitting radio’s LED is solid yellow while the radio is in the Radio Call menu.

•	While transmitting the Call Alert, the LED is solid red.

•	The receiving radio’s LED double-flashes yellow for an individual call, and single-flashes yellow for a group call.

     Go To The General Page


Sel Cal Encode (Signaling Configuration)
Sel Cal Encode

(Signaling Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Allows Sel Cal (Select Calls) to be transmitted for Signaling Systems. A Select Call is typically used when the majority of transmissions are between a dispatcher and one radio-user, or group of radio-users, and when other users need not be bothered. This is accomplished by addressing based on Radio ID’s.

Note:

•	The transmitting radio’s LED is solid yellow while the radio is in the Radio Call menu.

•	While transmitting the Sel Cal, the LED is solid red.

•	The receiving radio’s LED double-flashes yellow for an individual call, and single-flashes yellow for a group call

     Go To The General Page


Radio Check Encode (Signaling Configuration)
Radio Check Encode

(Signaling Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Allows Radio Checks to be transmitted for Signaling Systems. A Radio Check is used to test the status of another radio expected to be listening. When a radio receives a Radio Check, it sends back an acknowledgement to verify that it is working properly and within range.

Note:

•	The transmitting radio’s LED is solid yellow while the radio is in the Radio Call menu.

•	While transmitting the Radio Check, the LED is solid red.

•	The receiving radio’s LED briefly flashes red while transmitting back the Radio Check acknowledgement.

     Go To The General Page


Remote Monitor Encode (Signaling Configuration)
Remote Monitor Encode

(Signaling Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Enables the radio to encode / transmit Remote Monitor commands for MDC - Signaling Sytems.

Important Note: This feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

Note: The Menu Items Remote Monitor field must be enabled for radio-user Remote Monitor initiation.

When the radio is a mobile model, and

when the radio is model/option capable.

     Go To The General Page


Emergency Remote Monitor Encode (Signaling Configuration)
Emergency Remote Monitor Encode

(Signaling Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Enables the radio to encode / transmit Emergency Mode - Remote Monitor commands for MDC - Signaling Sytems. That is, when a radio has initiated Emergency Mode, this feature allows Emergency Remote Monitor commands to be sent to that radio for Remote Monitor mode operation.

Important Note: This feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

When the radio is Remote Monitor Encode capable, and

when the radio is a mobile model.

     Go To The General Page


Radio Call Menu Time-Out Timer (Signaling Configuration)
Radio Call Menu Time-Out Timer

(Signaling Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the amount of time the radio remains in the Radio Call Menu without any radio-user activity. Once the timer expires, the radio exits out of Menu mode. Time is in seconds.

Note: The transmitting radio’s LED is solid yellow while the radio is in the Radio Call menu.

When Call Alert Encode is enabled, or

Sel Call Encode is enabled, or

Radio Check Encode is enabled.

Minimum = Disabled

Maximum = 255 Seconds

     Go To The General Page


Limited Patience Timer (Signaling Configuration)
Limited Patience Timer

(Signaling Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the amount of time that the radio politely waits for a busy channel to become free in order to make a Signaling System communication, known as a Polite Transmission. Once this timer expires, the radio impolitely transmits, even when the channel is currently in use, in-effect stepping on other channel traffic. Time is in seconds.

The timer begins once the PTT button is pressed, and when the current channel is busy. A subsequent press of the PTT button while the timer is running causes the timer to be reset and begin again.

Note: This applies to all polite transmissions that require an Acknowledge including; Radio Checks, Call Alerts, and Emergency Transmissions.

Disabled:	Upon PTT button press the three-minute No Channel Timer begins.

Minimum = 1 Second

Maximum = 127 Seconds

     Go To The General Page


Auto Reset Timer (Signaling Configuration)
Auto Reset Timer

(Signaling Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the amount of time to be used by the Auto Reset Timer Types for Signaling System communications. Time is in seconds.

Minimum = 1 Second

Maximum = 255 Seconds

  Go To The General Page


Call Tone Tag Page (Signaling Configuration)
The Call Tone Tag Page

(Signaling Configuration)

DEFINITION:

The Call Tone Tag page allows you to define the alert tone that sounds when a Call Alert or Sel Cal is received for Signaling System transmissions.

Note: Functionality of Signaling Systems types vary, therefore these features may not extend to all Signaling System types.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Call Alert Tone Tag

Sel Cal Tone Tag

     Go To Signaling Configuration Window


Call Alert Tone Tag (Signaling Configuration)
Call Alert Tone Tag

(Signaling Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the tone type that sounds (on the decoding radio) when a Call Alert is received. Call Alert is a Signaling System call feature. There are several ring tones to choose from. These tones apply only when the Call List member’s Name Tone Tag is set to Standard.

     Go To The Call Tone Tag Page


Sel Cal Tone Tag (Signaling Configuration)
Sel Cal (Select Call) Tone Tag

(Signaling Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the tone type that sounds (on the decoding radio) when a Sel Cal is received. Sel Cal is a Signaling System call feature. There are several ring tones to choose from. These tones apply only when the Call List member’s Name Tone Tag is set to Standard.

     Go To The Call Tone Tag Page


Basic/Auto Sel Cal Signaling Configuration
Basic Sel Cal

(Signaling Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  When selected, a Sel Cal data packet is transmitted only when a Sel Cal radio call is initiated. That is, the Sel Cal data packet is transmitted once the radio-user selects to send a Sel Cal, then selects a call recipient, and then presses the PTT button. Subsequent PTT presses will not send a Sel Cal data packet. See also Radio Call menu.

  When disabled Auto Sel Cal mode is initiated. That is, once the radio-user selects to send a Sel Cal, then selects a call recipient, a Sel Cal is transmitted each time the radio’s PTT button is pressed.

When Sel Cal Encode is enabled.

  Go To The General Page


Call Stack (Signaling Configuration)
Call Stack

(Signaling Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Enables Call Stack for Signaling Systems. Call Stack allows the radio to maintain a list of the most recent caller information received by the radio. The radio-user is then able to view the list of received calls from the Call Stack Menu selection. Reverse Aliasing may only be possible in the Call Stack for MDC type calls.

Note:

•	Call Stack can be radio-user accessed with a short or long programmable button-press.

•	When enabled, a Call Stack Icon [image] appears in the radio’s display whenever caller information exists in the radio’s Call Stack.

When the radio is a multi-line display model.

     Go To The General Page


Call Stack Icon (Signaling Configuration)
Call Stack Icon

(Signaling Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Enables an icon [image] to appear in the radio’s display when caller information exists in the radio’s Call Stack. This icon remains in the radio’s display until the calls are radio-user deleted. This is a Signaling System feature.

When the radio is a multi-line display model, and

when Call Stack is set to enable.

     Go To The General Page


Emergency Page (Signaling Configuration)
The Emergency Page

(Signaling Configuration)

DEFINITION:

The Emergency Page allows you to define the emergency transmission radio functionality that is active during Emergency Mode. Only one emergency configuration can exist per radio.

Note: Currently, only MDC type Signaling Systems offer the ability to host Emergency functionality.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Emergency Type Emergency Impolite Retries Emergency Polite Retries Emergency Long Press Duration Emergency Open Microphone Duration Tx Cycles Tx Cycles Delay Emergency Sidetone Emergency LED Emergency Mode Type	Emergency Alert Emergency Acknowledge Alert Enable Emergency PTT ID Emergency PTT ID Emergency Revert Personality Alias Emergency Revert Personality Emergency Revert Group Emergency Sticky Revert Emergency Sticky Revert Alert Option Board Emergency Filter
     Go To Signaling Configuration Window


Emergency Type (Signaling Configuration)
Emergency Type

(Signaling Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects behavioral traits of the transmitting radio while operating in Emergency Mode.

When the radio is Emergency Encode capable.

Disabled

Standard:	The transmitting radio’s alarm-tone and LED are activated throughout the alarm sequence.

Silent:	The transmitting radio produces no audio or visual indications that an alarm is in progress, and the radio remains unconditionally muted .

Silent w/Voice:	The transmitting radio produces no audio or visual indications that an alarm is in progress, and the radio unmutes to qualified channel activity.

     Go To The Emergency Page


Emergency Impolite Retries (Signaling Configuration)
Emergency Impolite Retries

(Signaling Configuration)

DEFINITION:

When in Emergency Mode, this feature selects the number of times the radio impolitely sends an Emergency Transmission, even when the channel is currently busy with other radio traffic. This is known as an Impolite Transmission.

Note: There must be at least one Impolite or Emergency Polite Retry selected. Both may not be set to zero.

When the radio is Emergency Encode capable, and

when Emergency Type is not set to Disabled.

Minimum = 0

Maximum = 255

255 selects Infinity (unlimited)

     Go To The Emergency Page


Emergency Polite Retries (Signaling Configuration)
Emergency Polite Retries

(Signaling Configuration)

DEFINITION:

When in Emergency Mode, this feature selects the number of times the radio politely sends an Emergency Transmission when the channel is free. This is known as a Polite Transmission.

Note: There must be at least one Impolite or Polite Retry selected. Both may not be set to zero.

When the radio is Emergency Encode capable, and

when Emergency Type is not set to Disabled.

Minimum = 0

Maximum = 255

255 selects Infinity (unlimited)

     Go To The Emergency Page


Emergency Open Microphone Duration (Signaling Configuration)
Emergency Open Microphone Duration

(Signaling Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the amount of time that the microphone remains automatically keyed-up once an acknowledgement confirming the successful transmission of the emergency data packets is received. This automatic Emergency Open Microphone broadcast transmits on the same channel as the Emergency Alarm data packets. Time is in seconds.

Important Note: This feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

Note:

•	For mobile radios, the selected Hot Microphone is used.

•	Emergency Mode Microphone Gain is a CPS selection.

When the radio is Emergency Encode capable.

Disabled

Minimum = 20 Seconds

Maximum = 140 Seconds

In Increments = 20 Seconds

     Go To The Emergency Page


Tx Cycles (Signaling Configuration)
Tx Cycles

(Signaling Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the number of times that the radio automatically keys-up for the purpose of sending voice during Emergency Mode. The radio automatically transmits for the amount of time defined in the Open Mic Duration field.

Important Note: This feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

Note: For mobile radios, the selected Hot Microphone is used.

When the radio is Emergency Encode capable, and

when Emergency Type is not set to Disabled, and

when the Open Mic Duration option is not disabled.

Minimum = 1

Maximum = 10

     Go To The Emergency Page


Tx Cycles Delay (Signaling Configuration)
Tx Cycles Delay

(Signaling Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the amount of time between Tx Cycles. The Tx Cycles selection defines how many Open Mic Durations are initiated during an Emergency Mode.

Important Note: This feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

When the radio is Emergency Encode capable, and

when Emergency Type is not set to Disabled, and

when the Open Mic Duration option is not disabled, and

when the Tx Cycles is set to a value greater than 1.

Disabled

Minimum = 5 Seconds

Maximum = 60 Seconds

In Increments = 5 Seconds

     Go To The Emergency Page


Emergency Long Press Duration (Signaling Configuration)
Emergency Long Press Duration

(Signaling Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the amount of time that the radio’s Emergency button must be continuously pressed to end the Emergency Mode.

When the radio is Emergency Encode capable, and

when Emergency Type is not set to Disabled.

Minimum = 1 Second

Maximum = 15 Seconds

     Go To The Emergency Page


Emergency Sidetone (Signaling Configuration)
Emergency Sidetone

(Signaling Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the transmitting radio to sound an alert tone every time the Emergency Data Packet is sent during Emergency Mode. The Emergency Data Packet contains information as to which radio was the source of the transmission.

Note: This field is ignored when the Emergency Type field is set to Silent or Silent with Voice.

When the radio is Emergency Encode capable, and

when Emergency Type is not set to Disabled.

     Go To The Emergency Page


Emergency LED (Signaling Configuration)
Emergency LED

(Signaling Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the transmitting radio’s LED to continuously light-up during Emergency Mode.

Note: This field is ignored when the Emergency Type field is set to Silent or Silent with Voice.

When the radio is Emergency Encode capable, and

when Emergency Type is not set to Disabled.

     Go To The Emergency Page


Emergency Mode Type (Signaling Configuration)
Emergency Mode Type

(Signaling Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the emergency functionality during the radio’s Emergency Mode.

Important Note: This feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

When the radio is Emergency Encode capable, and

when Emergency Type is not set to Disabled, and

when the radio is a Mobile model.

Alarm:	An MDC emergency alarm data packet is repeatedly sent to the base station unit until the transmission is ended by one of the following four methods:

•	All the CPS defined retries (both polite and impolite) have been exhausted

•	An acknowledgement confirming the successful transmission of the emergency data packet is received back from the base station.

•	A radio-user PTT button press.

•	A radio-user long press of the emergency button.

Alarm/Call:	An MDC emergency alarm data packet is repeatedly sent to the base station. When the Alarm data packet has ceased, then voice (Call) is able to transmit on the channel.

The alarm data packet ceases to transmit and voice is able to be transmitted when any one of the following three conditions is true:

•	All the CPS defined retries (both polite and impolite) have been exhausted

•	An acknowledgement confirming the successful transmission of the emergency data packet is received back from the base station.

•	A radio-user PTT button press.

Important Note:

If the radio is in the Emergency Alarm phase or the Emergency Call phase of Emergency Alarm/Call mode, the following ends the Emergency Mode:

•	A radio-user long press of the emergency button.

•	The radio is powered-off.

     Go To The Emergency Page


Emergency Alert (Signaling Configuration)
Emergency Alert

(Signaling Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio to sound an alert tone when the Emergency Button is pressed initiating the Emergency Mode.

When the radio is Emergency Encode capable, and

when Emergency Type is not set to Disabled.

     Go To The Emergency Page


Emergency Acknowledge Alert (Signaling Configuration)
Emergency Acknowledge Alert

(Signaling Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio to sound an alert tone when an Emergency Transmission acknowledgement is received. The acknowledgement is sent back from the receiving radio, confirming a successful Emergency Transmission.

Note: This field is ignored when the Emergency Type field is set to Silent or Silent with Voice.

When the radio is Emergency Encode capable, and

when Emergency Type is not set to Disabled.

     Go To The Emergency Page


Enable Emergency PTT ID (Signaling Configuration)
Enable Emergency PTT ID

(Signaling Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio to transmit a unique Emergency PTT ID while the radio is operating in an Emergency Mode. This is only true when the Emergency Mode Type field is set to "Alarm/Call".

Important Note: This feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

Note: When the Emergency PTT ID is not enabled, the radio’s MDC System Primary ID is transmitted while operating in Emergency Mode.

When the radio is Emergency Encode capable, and

when Emergency Type is not set to Disabled, and

when the Emergency Mode Type field is set to Alarm/Call.

     Go To The Emergency Page


Emergency PTT ID (Signaling Configuration)
Emergency PTT ID

(Signaling Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects a unique PTT ID that is transmitted while the radio is operating in an Emergency Mode. This is only true when the Emergency Mode Type field is set to "Alarm/Call".

Important Note: This feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

Note: When the Emergency PTT ID is not enabled, the radio’s MDC System Primary ID is transmitted while operating in Emergency Mode.

When the radio is Emergency Encode capable, and

when Emergency Type is not set to Disabled, and

when the Emergency Mode Type field is set to Alarm/Call, and

when Enable PTT ID has been set to enable.

Min = 0001 (Hex)

Max = DEEE (Hex)

Note: All four digits must be defined.

     Go To The Emergency Page


Emergency Revert Personality Alias (Signaling Configuration)
Emergency Revert Personality Alias

(Signaling Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selecting a value for the Emergency Revert Personality or the Emergency Revert Group field, automatically displays this Revert Personality Alias. This is a view-only field.

Note: The Alias is created in either the Conventional Personality Alias, or Trunking Group Alias field.

When the radio is Emergency Encode capable, and

when Emergency Type is not set to Disabled, and

the radio has a display.

  Go To The Emergency Page


Emergency Revert Personality (Signaling Configuration)
Emergency Revert Personality

(Signaling Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Conventional or Trunking Personality (by its CPS given name) to be used during Emergency Mode. No matter what channel the radio is currently operating on, the radio is automatically switched to this personality for an emergency transmission.

If "No Revert" is selected, be sure to select an MDC Tx System for every Conventional and Trunking Personality to ensure that Emergency operation works on all channels.

Note:

•	All Conventional or Trunking Personalities that have a defined Tx System of type MDC are listed for this selection.

•	Selecting a Conventional Personality value for this field automatically selects a value for the Revert Personality Alias.

•	When selecting a Trunking Personality value for this field, a Trunking Revert Group must also be selected.

     Go To The Emergency Page


Emergency Revert Group

(Signaling Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects a Trunking Group for the personality selected in the Emergency Revert Personality field.

When the radio is a Trunking portable multi-line display model, and

when the Signaling Configuration, Emergency Revert Personality field is set to a Trunking Personality.

     Go To The Emergency Page


Emergency Sticky Revert (Signaling Configuration)
Emergency Sticky Revert

(Signaling Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio to remain permanently on the Emergency Revert Personality after the emergency transmission has been sent and acknowledged. The radio must be powered off for it to return to the radio’s Channel Selector selected channel.

When the radio is Emergency Encode capable, and

when Emergency Type is not set to Disabled, and

Emergency Revert Personality not set to None.

     Go To The Emergency Page


Emergency Sticky Revert Alert (Signaling Configuration)
Emergency Sticky Revert Alert

(Signaling Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio to sound an alert tone, if the PTT button is pressed, while the radio is in Emergency Mode.

When the radio is Emergency Encode capable, and

when the Emergency Sticky Revert field is enabled.

     Go To The Emergency Page


Option Board Emergency Filter(Signaling Configuration)
Option Board Emergency Filter

(Signaling Configuration)

DEFINITION:

 Causes the radio to filter the emergency active command from Option Board while radio is already in emergency mode.

 Causes the radio to filter the alert tone (alert1 and alert2) request command from Option Board while radio is in Tx/Rx cycle.

Note:

         This field is ignored when the Option Board Type field is not set to Advanced Option Interface or Advanced & Voice Storage.

         This feature may not be available on some radios due to the hardware limitation.

When the radio is  Emergency Encode capable, and

when radio supports Option Board, and

when Emergency Type is not set to Disabled, and

when the radio is a Portable model.

     Go To The Emergency Page


Message/Status Page (Signaling Configuration)
The Message/Status Page

(Signaling Configuration)

DEFINITION:

The Signaling Systems Message and Status Page allows you to define MDC Message and MDC Status features for all applicable Signaling System.

Note: MDC Messages and Statuses are only applicable to display models.

Click on any CPS field title (in green) below to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Message Encode

Message Tone Tag

Status Encode

Status On Power Up

     Go To Signaling Configuration Window


Message Encode (Signaling Configuration)
Message Encode

(Signaling Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Allows MDC Messages to be transmitted from this radio for all applicable Signaling Systems.

When the radio is a display model.

      Go to the Message/Status Page


Message Tone Tag  (Signaling Configuration)
Message Tone Tag

(Signaling Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Specifies the tone that sounds (on the decoding radio) when an MDC Message is received for all applicable Signaling Systems. This notifies the receiving radio-user that an MDC Message has been received. This tone applies only when the Message Name Tone Tag is set to Standard. There are several ring tones to choose from.

When the radio is a display model.

Alert 1 thru Alert 7, or Standard.

      Go to the Message/Status Page


Status Encode (Signaling Configuration)
Status Encode

(Signaling Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Allows MDC Statuses to be transmitted for all applicable Signaling Systems.

When the radio is a display model.

      Go to the Message/Status Page


Status On Power Up (Signaling Configuration)
Status On Power Up

(Signaling Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio to automatically enter into the Status menu upon radio power-up. The last acknowledged - Status automatically appears in the radio’s display.

When Status Encode field is enabled, and

when the radio is a display model.

      Go to the Message/Status Page


MDC System Window (Signaling Systems)
The MDC System Window

(Signaling Systems)

DEFINITION:

The MDC System window allows you to create and delete MDC Signaling Systems, as well as define individual MDC Signaling System functionality. These individual Signaling Systems can then be selected for use with Conventional and Trunking Personalities , Call List Members, MDC Messages, MDC Statuses, and with Remote Monitor functionality as receive and transmit protocols.

Signaling data transmits at high frequencies for transmissions such as PTT ID’s, Radio Calls , and Voice Calls. Signaling data transmits within the voice frequency range, however it is muted. Other Signaling data types include QCII, and DTMF.

Click on any page title below (underlined in green) to see more information.


Basic Page (MDC System)
The Basic Page

(MDC System)

DEFINITION:

The Basic Page allows you to define general functionality for individual MDC - Signaling System.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Primary ID Group ID PTT ID Type PTT Sidetone PTT Short Sidetone	PL Transmit Radio Check Decode Display Decode ID Emergency Decode
     Go To MDC System Window


Primary ID (MDC System)
Primary ID

(MDC System)

DEFINITION:

Selects the unique one to four digit ID that identifies the radio while operating (transmitting or receiving MDC calls) on the current MDC - Signaling System.

When receiving an MDC transmission, the Primary ID allows the radio to identify the incoming call as being addressed to it. The Primary ID is configured into the Call List of the transmitting radio with the Individual ID field.

When the Primary ID is transmitted with certain MDC call types, and matches an Individual ID in the Call List of the receiving radio, Reverse Aliasing then takes place on the receiving radio.

Note: All four digits must be defined.

Minimum = 0001 (Hex)

Maximum = DEEE (Hex)

     Go To The Basic Page


Group ID (MDC System)
Group ID

(MDC System)

DEFINITION:

Selects the unique three digit ID that identifies the radio as belonging to a unique group while operating (receiving MDC calls) on the current MDC - Signaling System.

When receiving an MDC transmission, the Group ID allows the radio to identify the incoming call as being addressed to it, as well as being addressed to other radios in the Group.

For a Group ID Type call, the Group ID is configured into the Call List of the transmitting radio with the Call List Fleet ID and the Call List Group ID fields.

Minimum = 0 (Hex)

Maximum = EEE (Hex)

     Go To The Basic Page


PTT ID Type (MDC System)
PTT ID Type

(MDC System)

DEFINITION:

Selects when the PTT ID is sent during a Normal Dispatch transmission for the current MDC - Signaling System.

When the radio model is capable of receiving PTT ID.

None

Pre Only:	Sent previous to a Normal Dispatch transmission.

Post Only:	Sent after a Normal Dispatch transmission.

Pre & Post:	Sent both prior to and after a Normal Dispatch transmission.

     Go To The Basic Page


PTT Sidetone (MDC System)
PTT Sidetone

(MDC System)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio to sound a continuous alert tone, from the time the PTT button is pressed, until the time that the Signaling System data packet is transmitted. The purpose is to indicate to the radio-user when voice may be initiated. This feature applies for the current MDC Signaling System.

Note: Applies only to Signaling System data packets that are followed by voice, that is, Voice Calls.

When Sel Cal Encode is Enabled  [image], or

MDC PTT ID Type is set to Pre Only or Pre & Post.

     Go To The Basic Page


PTT Short Sidetone (MDC System)
PTT Short Sidetone

(MDC System)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio to sound one short alert tone, after the PTT button is pressed, and immediately following the Signaling System data packet being transmitted. The purpose is to indicate to the radio-user when voice may be initiated. This feature applies for the current MDC Signaling System.

Note: Applies only to Signaling System data packets that are followed by voice, that is, Voice Calls.

When Sel Cal Encode is Enabled  [image], or

MDC PTT ID Type is set to Pre Only or Pre & Post.

     Go To The Basic Page


PL Transmit (MDC System)
PL Transmit

(MDC System)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio to transmit Private Line (PL) signals for the current MDC - Signaling System. PL is only transmitted if the Conventional Personality that uses this MDC system has PL selected in its Tx Squelch Type field.

  Disabling causes the radio to not transmit PL signals for current MDC Signaling System. The only exception being PTT ID transmissions. Disabling PL speeds up transmissions and reduces radio channel traffic.

     Go To The Basic Page


Radio Check Decode (MDC System)
Radio Check Decode

(MDC System)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio to acknowledge receipt of a Radio Check from a dispatcher or another radio by sending back a reply. This feature applies for the current MDC - Signaling System.

When the radio model is capable of receiving a Radio Check.

     Go To The Basic Page


Display Decode ID (MDC System)
Display Decode ID

(MDC System)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the transmitting radio’s Primary ID to appear in this radio’s display upon receipt of certain MDC transmissions. This feature applies for the current MDC Signaling System.

These MDC call types include; PTT ID’s, Call Alerts, and Sel Cal’s.

Note: If Reverse Aliasing is possible, the Alias has priority over the Primary ID.

When the radio model has a display.

     Go To The Basic Page


Emergency Decode (MDC System)
Emergency Decode

(MDC System)

DEFINITION:

  Enables the radio to receive Emergency Mode signaling for the current MDC - Signaling System.

Important Note: This feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

Note: An External Emergency Input device can be used to clear Emergency Decode messages from the radio’s display. External Emergency input devices can be set-up and configured through the radio’s Accessory Connector.

When the radio is capable of Emergency Mode operation.

     Go To The Basic Page


Call Alert/Sel Cal Page (MDC System)
The Call Alert/Sel Cal (Select Call) Page

(MDC System)

DEFINITION:

The Call Alert/Sel Cal Page allows you to view or define Call Alert and Sel Cal receive functionality for the current MDC - Signaling System.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Call Alert Type Call Alert LED Alert Tone Auto Reset	Sel Cal Decode Sel Cal LED Auto Reset Timer Type
     Go To MDC System Window


Call Alert Type (MDC System)
Call Alert Type

(MDC System)

DEFINITION:

Selects the type of Call Alerts that can be received for the current MDC - Signaling System. A Call Alert allows a transmitting radio to notify (with an alert tone) and leave evidence of (by lighting the LED) a call on a receiving radio, when the radio-user is away. The Call Alert LED persists until reset by the user. A Call Alert w/Voice is a combination of a Sel Cal and a Call Alert.

When the radio is capable of receiving Call Alerts, or

is capable of receiving Call Alert w/ Voice.

None

Call Alert

Call Alert w/Voice

     Go To The Call Alert/Sel Cal Page


Call Alert LED (MDC System)
Call Alert LED

(MDC System)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the receiving radio to blinks its LED when it has received a Call Alert, for the MDC - Signaling System. The radio’s LED double-flashes yellow for an individual call, and single-flashes yellow for a group call.

When the MDC Call Alert Type is not set to None.

     Go To The Call Alert/Sel Cal Page


Alert Tone Auto Reset (MDC System)
Alert Tone Auto Reset

(MDC System)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio to generate only one sequence of the Call Alert or Call Alert w/Voice alert tone, for the current MDC - Signaling System. Normally the Call Alert Tone Tag is a repeating alert tone.

When the MDC Call Alert Type is not set to None.

     Go To The Call Alert/Sel Cal Page


Sel Cal Decode (MDC System)
Sel Cal Decode

(MDC System)

DEFINITION:

  Allows the radio to receive a Sel Cal (Select Call) for the current MDC - Signaling System. A Select Call is typically used when the majority of transmissions are between a dispatcher and a radio-user, or a group of radio-users, and when other users need not be bothered. This is accomplished by addressing based on Radio ID’s.

When the radio is capable of receiving Sel Cal.

     Go To The Call Alert/Sel Cal Page


Sel Cal LED (MDC System)
Sel Cal LED

(MDC System)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio to blink its LED while receiving a Sel Cal (Select Call) for the MDC - Signaling System. The radio’s LED double-flashes yellow for an individual call, and single-flashes yellow for a group call.

When the MDC Sel Cal Decode is enabled [image].

     Go To The Call Alert/Sel Cal Page


Auto Reset Timer Type (MDC System)
Auto Reset Timer Type

(MDC System)

DEFINITION:

Selects a **Timed or *Manual exception to the Signaling Squelch unmuting rule for the current MDC - Signaling System.

This **Timed or *Manual exception is known as the Release Squelch State. The Release Squelch State begins once the radio unmutes to a Voice Call.

When Signaling Squelch is set to "And"; and once the radio is in the Release Squelch state, then only the current personalities - Unmute Rules must be satisfied for unmuting to re-occur, a Voice Call is no longer required. Trunking dispatch only supports "And" Signaling.

When Signaling Squelch is set to "Or"; and once the radio is in the Release Squelch State, only Carrier Squelch Detect is required for unmuting to re-occur, PL and Voice Call are not required. "Or" Signaling is only supported by Conventional dispatch.

Note:

•	For Trunking Groups and Universal ID's, Signaling Squelch functionality can be completely Toggled-off by a radio-user programmable button press.

•	The timer duration is selected in the Auto Reset Timer field.

When MDC Call Alert Type is set to Call Alert with Voice, or

MDC Sel Cal Decode is enabled.

  None:	The radio does not consider a Release Squelch state.

* Manual Reset:	Short Pressing the programmed Monitor button (for a Conventional channel), and pressing the programmed Signaling Squelch button (for a Trunking channel) ends the Release Squelch state.

**Auto Reset With Carrier Override Rules

**Auto Reset Without Carrier Override Rules

     Go To The Call Alert/Sel Cal Page


DOS Page (MDC System)
The DOS Page

(MDC System)

DEFINITION:

The DOS page allows you to define DOS functionality for the current MDC - Signaling System. DOS is the acronym for Data Operated Squelch. DOS causes the radio to automatically mute when receiving MDC Signaling data. This helps to reduce unwanted noise.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

DOS Auto Mute Duration

DOS Coast Duration

DOS Criteria Type

     Go To MDC System Window


DOS Auto Mute Duration (MDC System)
DOS Auto Mute Duration

(MDC System)

DEFINITION:

Selects the amount of time that the radio is muted once Carrier Squelch is detected. This DOS timer is then active while receiving MDC Signaling data, this helps to reduce unwanted noise. This applies for the current MDC - Signaling System. Time is in milliseconds.

WARNING: If you do not have complete knowledge of the system configuration that this radio will be operating on, do not attempt to modify this setting!

Disabled

Minimum = 25 (ms)

Maximum = 4500 (ms)

In Increments of 25 (ms)

     Go To The DOS Page


DOS Coast Duration (MDC System)
DOS Coast Duration

(MDC System)

DEFINITION:

Selects an amount of time that the radio waits muted once the Carrier Squelch signal has been lost. This applies for the current MDC - Signaling System. Time is in milliseconds.

When MDC Signaling data is detected and then once the Carrier Squelch signal is lost - this timer begins. While this timer is active the radio waits muted for Carrier Squelch to be re-detected. If Carrier Squelch is re-detected while this timer is running; this timer is stopped and reset, and the DOS Auto Mute Duration (timer) begins again.

Note: This helps to prevent temporary loss of DOS in areas of poor signal strength, or high multi-path distortion.

WARNING: If you do not have complete knowledge of the system configuration that this radio will be operating on, do not attempt to modify this setting!

Minimum = 0 (ms)

Maximum = 500 (ms)

In Increments of 25 (ms)

     Go To The DOS Page


DOS Criteria Type (MDC System)
DOS Criteria Type

(MDC System)

DEFINITION:

Selects the frequency type used to determine DOS activation, for the current MDC - Signaling System.

WARNING: If you do not have complete knowledge of the system configuration that this radio will be operating on, do not attempt to modify this setting!

1200 or 1800 Hz:	This selection is needed for backward compatibility to earlier radios. Therefore it is rarely used.

1200 and 1800 Hz

     Go To The DOS Page


Advanced Page (MDC System)
The Advanced Page

(MDC System)

DEFINITION:

The Advanced page allows you to define functionality relating to timers, call acknowledge, and repeater access, for the current MDC - Signaling System.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Pretime Preamble Bit Sync Acknowledge Pretime Intersequence Delay	Repeater Access Type Repeater Access Pretime Fixed Retry Wait Time PTT ID Overrides Signaling Squelch
     Go To MDC System Window


Pretime (MDC System)
Pretime

(MDC System)

DEFINITION:

Selects the amount of time between PTT button press and the first digit of a Signaling System data packet transmission. This time allows the receiving radio to stabilize before receiving data. This applies for the current MDC Signaling System. Time is in milliseconds.

When the radio model is capable of transmitting;

Radio Calls, or PTT ID, or

Emergency mode, or Repeater Mode.

Minimum = 0 (ms)

Maximum = 4500 (ms)

In Increments of 25 (ms)

     Go To The Advanced Page


Preamble Bit Sync (MDC System)
Preamble Bit Sync

(MDC System)

DEFINITION:

Selects the number of synchronizing packets sent during MDC Pretime, for the current MDC - Signaling System. Synchronizing packets allow transmitting and receiving radios to synchronize prior to Signaling System data packet transmission.

WARNING: If you do not have complete knowledge of the system configuration that this radio will be operating on, do not attempt to modify this setting!

Minimum = 0

Maximum = 96

     Go To The Advanced Page


Acknowledge Pretime (MDC System)
Acknowledge Pretime

(MDC System)

DEFINITION:

Selects the amount of time between automatic transmitter key-up and the first sent digit of a Signaling System data packet, for a transmission acknowledgement. This time allows the receiving radio to stabilize before receiving data. This applies for the current MDC Signaling System. Time is in milliseconds.

Minimum = 0 (ms)

Maximum = 4500 (ms)

In Increments of 25 (ms)

     Go To The Advanced Page


Repeater Access Type (MDC System)
Repeater Access Type

(MDC System)

DEFINITION:

Selects the type of Repeater access for the current MDC - Signaling System. This repeater Access Type field has to do with transmitting the Repeater Access ID.

When the radio is capable of Repeater Mode.

None

Auto

     Go To The Advanced Page


Repeater Access Pretime (MDC System)
Repeater Access Pretime

(MDC System)

DEFINITION:

Selects the amount of time between PTT button press and the first digit of a Signaling Systems data packet transmission to the Repeater. This time allows the Repeater to stabilize before receiving data. This applies for the current MDC Signaling System. Time is in milliseconds.

When MDC Repeater Access Type is not set to None.

Minimum = 0 (ms)

Maximum = 4500 (ms)

In Increments of 25 (ms)

     Go To The Advanced Page


Intersequence Delay (MDC System)
Intersequence Delay

(MDC System)

DEFINITION:

Selects the length of time separation between data-words that are part of the same call, for the current MDC - Signaling System. Time is in milliseconds.

WARNING: If you do not have complete knowledge of the system configuration that this radio will be operating on, do not attempt to modify this setting!

Minimum = 0 (ms)

Maximum = 4500 (ms)

In Increments of 25 (ms)

     Go To The Advanced Page


Fixed Retry Wait Time (MDC System)
Fixed Retry Wait Time

(MDC System)

DEFINITION:

This duration is added to the CPS-calculated retry-wait-duration for Polite and Impolite transmissions. This has the effect of randomly staggering retry attempts, in an effort to have unsynchronized retry attempts from competing radios. This applies for the current MDC - Signaling System. Time is in seconds.

When the radio model is capable of transmitting a:

Radio Check, or Call Alert, or Emergency Mode.

Minimum = 0

Maximum = 17 seconds

     Go To The Advanced Page


PTT ID Overrides Signaling Squelch MDC System
PTT ID Overrides Signaling Squelch

(MDC System)

DEFINITION:

  Enables the radio while operating on a MDC enabled Trunking Personality to transmit an override of the Signaling Squelch Rules. On receiving MDC Trunking dispatch radios, this feature allows the Signaling Squelch rules to be ignored when this override instruction is received. Therefore, this feature must be enabled on both the transmitting and the receiving radios in order for the Signaling Squelch rules to be ignored. This allows the radio to easily communicate to all other radios operating in the same Trunking Group. This feature applies for the current MDC Signaling System.

Note:

•	The override instruction is transmitted within an MDC PTT ID. Therefore pressing the PTT button initiates the transmission of this override command.

•	When the radio-user selects to transmit a Voice Call, the Signaling Squelch rule continues to apply.

When the radio is capable of Trunking dispatch, and MDC Signaling.

     Go To The Advanced Page


Message/Status Page (MDC System)
The Message/Status Page

(MDC System)

DEFINITION:

The MDC System Message and Status Page allows you to define functionality that can apply to all MDC Messages or to all MDC Statuses for the current MDC - Signaling System.

Note: MDC Messages and Statuses are only applicable to display models.

Click on any CPS field title (in green) below to see a description.

INCLUDED SELECTIONS:

Message Decode

Message Alert Tone Auto Reset

Message LED

Status No Ack Auto Reset

Status Poll

      Go to the MDC System Window


Message Decode (MDC System)
Message Decode

(MDC System)

DEFINITION:

  Allows the radio to receive MDC Messages for the current MDC - Signaling System.

When the radio is a display model.

      Go to the Message/Status Page


Message Alert Tone Auto Reset (MDC System)
Message Alert Tone Auto Reset

(MDC System)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio to generate only one sequence of an MDC Message alert tone. Normally an MDC Message Alert Tone Tag is a repeating alert tone. This feature applies for the current MDC - Signaling System.

When Message Decode is enabled, and

when the radio is a display model.

      Go to the Message/Status Page


Message LED (MDC System)
Message LED

(MDC System)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the receiving radio to blinks its LED (yellow) immediately upon receiving an MDC Message. The LED continues to flash until there is radio-user interaction with the radio, such as a button press. This feature applies for the current MDC - Signaling System.

When Message Decode is enabled, and

when the radio is a display model.

      Go to the Message/Status Page


Status No Acknowledge Auto Reset (MDC System)
Status No Acknowledge Auto Reset

(MDC System)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the "No Acknowledge" indicator to appear only momentarily. This feature applies for the current MDC - Signaling System.

  When disabled, "No Acknowledge" remains on the radio’s display until the radio-user clears it with any button-press or any selector adjustment. "No Acknowledge" appears as the result of an MDC Status packet that was not successfully received and acknowledged, and also having failed on all subsequent retry attempts. This feature applies for the current MDC - Signaling System.

When Status Encode is enabled, and

when the radio is a display model.

      Go to the Message/Status Page


Status Poll (MDC System)
Status Poll

(MDC System)

DEFINITION:

  Enables the radio to respond to a dispatch initiated MDC Status poll. The radio responds by re-transmitting the radio’s last transmitted MDC Status. This requested MDC Status packet is automatically transmitted without any radio-user involvement. This feature applies for the current MDC - Signaling System.

When Status Encode is enabled, and

when the radio is a display model.

      Go to the Message/Status Page


Request To Talk Page (MDC System)
The Request To Talk Page

(MDC System)

DEFINITION:

The Request To Talk Page allows you to select the ability to request channel access for transmitting voice communications, and define maximum voice-transmit channel access time. These features apply for the current MDC - Signaling System.

Note: MDC Messages and Statuses are only applicable to Mobile radios.

Click on any CPS field title (in green) below to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Request To Talk (RTT)

Access-Request Wait Timer

Auto Reset Timer

      Go to the MDC System Window


Request To Talk (MDC System)
Request To Talk (RTT)

(MDC System)

DEFINITION:

  Enables the Request To Talk (RTT) feature for the current MDC - Signaling System. Once PTT is pressed, the radio sends the RTT packet to the dispatcher, thus requesting the ability to transmit voice on the channel. Upon receipt of a Transmit Enable packet from the dispatcher, this radio may begin a voice transmission. This feature allows the dispatcher to manage channel traffic for voice communications.

Note: The radio is not restricted from receiving voice or data, or transmitting data on this channel.

When the radio is a Mobile unit.

     Go to the Request To Talk Page


Access-Request Wait Timer (MDC System)
Access-Request Wait Timer

(MDC System)

DEFINITION

Selects the amount of time that the radio waits for a Transmit Enable packet (from the dispatcher) after sending a Request To Talk (RTT). Once the timer expires, the RTT must be initiated again. This feature applies for the current MDC - Signaling System. Time is in seconds.

When the radio is a Mobile unit, and

when Request to Talk is enabled.

Minimum = 1

Maximum = 180, or infinite

     Go to the Request To Talk Page


Auto Reset Timer (MDC System)
Auto Reset Timer

(MDC System)

DEFINITION

Selects the maximum period of time that the radio is allowed to transmit voice communications once the Request to Talk (RTT) permission (from the dispatcher) has been received. This feature applies for the current MDC - Signaling System. Time is in seconds.

Note: The radio is not restricted from receiving voice or data, or transmitting data on this channel.

When the radio is a Mobile unit, and

when Request to Talk is enabled.

Minimum = 1

Maximum = 255, or Infinite

     Go to the Request To Talk Page


Quik-Call II System Window (Signaling Systems)
The Quik-Call II System Window

(Signaling Systems)

DEFINITION:

The Quik-Call II (QCII) System window allows you to create and delete QCII Signaling Systems, as well as define individual QCII Signaling System functionality. These individual Signaling Systems can then be selected for use with Conventional Personalities, and Call List Members, as receive and transmit protocols.

Signaling data transmits at high frequencies for transmissions such as Call Alerts, and Sel Cal's. Signaling data transmits within the voice frequency range, however it is muted. Other Signaling data types include MDC, and DTMF.

The window’s Navigation Toolbar offers high-level functionality for maintaining QCII Systems.

Click on any page title below (underlined in green) to see more information.


Basic Page (Quik-Call II System)
The Basic Page

(Quik-Call II System)

DEFINITION:

The Basic Page allows you to define general functionality for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) Signaling System

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Call Format Pretime Long Tone Duration	PTT Sidetone PTT Short Sidetone
     Go To Quik-Call II System Window


Call Format (Quik-Call II System)
Call Format

(Quik-Call II System)

DEFINITION:

Selects the call format used for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) Signaling System.

When QCII Sel Cal Decode is set to Enabled [image], or

QCII Call Alert Type is not set to None.

A-B

A-B/A-C

A-B/C-B

A-B/Long B

A-B/Long C

A-B/A-C/Long C

A-B/Long B/Long C

A-B/A-C/Long B/Long C

A-B/A-D/C-D

A-B/C-D	Note: This format is not available in Portables radios with firmware releases before R02.00.

     Go To The Basic Page


Pretime (Quik-Call II System)
Pretime

(Quik-Call II System)

DEFINITION:

Selects the amount of time between PTT button press and the first tone of the Quik Call II (QCII) transmission. This time allows the receiving radio to stabilize before receiving the tone. This applies for the current QCII Signaling System. Time is in milliseconds.

When the radio is capable of transmitting;

Sel Cal’s, or Call Alerts.

Minimum = 0 (ms)

Maximum = 4500 (ms)

In Increments of 25 (ms)

     Go To The Basic Page


Long Tone Duration (Quik-Call II System)
Long Tone Duration

(Quik-Call II System)

DEFINITION:

Selects the time amount used when transmitting (encode) a Quik-Call II (QCII) Long Tone, for the current QCII Signaling System (also see Call Format selections). Time is in seconds.

Note: When Receiving (decode) a QCII Long Tone, the duration for the ProRadio should be at least 8 seconds. The minimum 3-second selection below allows for backward radio-model compatibility.

When Call Alert Encode or Sel Cal Encode is set to Enabled  [image].

Minimum = 3 seconds

Maximum = 33 seconds

In Increments of Step 3 seconds

     Go To The Basic Page


PTT Sidetone (Quik-Call II System)
PTT Sidetone

(Quik-Call II System)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio to sound a continuous alert tone, from the time the PTT button is pressed, until the time that the Signaling System data packet is transmitted. The purpose is to indicate to the radio-user when voice may be initiated. This feature applies for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) Signaling System.

Note: Applies only to Signaling System data packets that are followed by voice, that is, Voice Calls.

When QCII Sel Cal Encode is set to Enabled  [image].

  Go To The Basic Page


PTT Short Sidetone (Quik-Call II System)
PTT Short Sidetone

(Quik-Call II System)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio to sound one short alert tone, after the PTT button is pressed, and immediately following the Signaling System data packet being transmitted. The purpose is to indicate to the radio-user when voice may be initiated. This feature applies for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) Signaling System.

Note: Applies only to Signaling System data packets that are followed by voice, that is, Voice Calls.

When QCII Sel Cal Encode is set to Enabled  [image].

  Go To The Basic Page


Call Alert/Sel Cal Page (Quik-Call II System)
The Call Alert/Sel Cal (Select Call) Page

(Quik-Call II System)

DEFINITION:

The Call Alert/Sel Cal Page allows you to view or define Call Alert or Sel Cal receive functionality for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) Signaling System.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Call Alert Type Call Alert LED Call Alert Tone Auto Reset	Sel Cal Decode Sel Cal LED Auto Reset Timer Type
     Go To Quik-Call II System Window


Call Alert Type (Quik-Call II System)
Call Alert Type

(Quik-Call II System)

DEFINITION:

Selects the type of Call Alerts that can be received for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) Signaling System. A Call Alert allows a transmitting radio to notify (with an alert tone) and leave evidence of (by lighting the LED) a call on a receiving radio while the radio-user is away. The Call Alert LED persists until reset by the user. A Call Alert w/Voice is a combination of a Sel Cal and a Call Alert.

When QCII Sel Cal Decode is set to Disabled [image], and

(the radio model is capable of Call Alerts, or is capable of Call Alerts w/Voice.)

None

Call Alert

Call Alert w/Voice

     Go To The Call Alert/Sel Cal  Page


Call Alert LED (Quik-Call II System)
Call Alert LED

(Quik-Call II System)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the receiving radio to blinks its LED once it has received a Call Alert for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) Signaling System. The radio’s LED double-flashes yellow for an individual call, and single-flashes yellow for a group call.

When the QCII Call Alert Type is not set to None.

     Go To The Call Alert/Sel Cal  Page


Alert Tone Auto Reset (Quik-Call II System)
Alert Tone Auto Reset

(Quik-Call II System)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio to generate only one sequence of the Call Alert or Call Alert w/Voice alert tone, for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) Signaling System. Normally the Call Alert Tone Tag is a repeating alert tone.

When the QCII Call Alert Type is not set to None.

     Go To The Call Alert/Sel Cal  Page


Sel Cal Decode (Quik-Call II System)
Sel Cal Decode

(Quik-Call II System)

DEFINITION:

  Allows the radio to receive a Sel Cal (Select Call) for the current Quik-Call (QCII) Signaling System. A Select Call is typically used when the majority of transmissions are between a dispatcher and a radio-user, or a group of radio-users, and when other users need not be bothered. This is accomplished by addressing based on Radio ID’s.

When QCII Call Alert Type is set to None, and

the radio is capable of receiving Sel Cal’s.

     Go To The Call Alert/Sel Cal  Page


Sel Cal LED (Quik-Call II System)
Sel Cal LED

(Quik-Call II System)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio to blink its LED while receiving a Sel Cal (Select Call) for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) Signaling System. The radio’s LED double-flashes yellow for an individual call, and single-flashes yellow for a group call.

When the QCII Sel Cal Decode is enabled [image].

     Go To The Call Alert/Sel Cal  Page


Auto Reset Timer Type (Quik-Call II System)
Auto Reset Timer Type

(Quik-Call II System)

DEFINITION:

Selects a **Timed or *Manual exception to the Signaling Squelch unmuting rule for the current Quik Call II (QCII) Signaling System.

This **Timed or *Manual exception is known as the Release Squelch State. The Release Squelch State begins once the radio unmutes to a Voice Call.

When Signaling Squelch is set to "And"; and once the radio is in the Release Squelch state, then only the current personalities - Unmute Rules must be satisfied for unmuting to re-occur, a Voice Call is no longer required.

When Signaling Squelch is set to "Or"; and once the radio is in the Release Squelch State, only Carrier Squelch Detect is required to unmuting to re-occur, PL and Voice Call are not required.

Note: The timer duration is selected in the Auto Reset Timer field.

When QCII Call Alert Type is set to Call Alert with Voice, or

QCII Sel Cal Decode is enabled.

  None:	The radio does not consider a Release Squelch state.

* Manual Reset:	Short Pressing the programmed Monitor button ends the Release Squelch state.

**Auto Reset With Carrier Override Rules

**Auto Reset Without Carrier Override Rules

     Go To The Call Alert/Sel Cal  Page


Individual ID Tones Page (Quik-Call II System)
The Individual ID Tones Page

(Quik-Call II System)

DEFINITION:

The Tones page allows you to select receive frequencies for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) Signaling System. Frequencies can be selected by their correlating code.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Tone A Frequency Tone A Code Tone B Frequency Tone B Code	Tone C Frequency Tone C Code Tone D Frequency Tone D Code
     Go To Quik-Call II System Window


Tone A Frequency (Quik-Call II System)
Tone A Frequency

(Quik-Call II System)

DEFINITION:

Selects the receive Tone A Frequency for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) Signaling System. Selecting a value for this field automatically selects a value for the Individual Tone A Code field. Some Frequencies may not have a correlating Code causing nothing to display in the Code field.

Note: Limited performance may occur when using frequencies above 2468.2 Hz.

When QCII Sel Cal Decode is set to Enabled [image], or

QCII Call Alert Type is not set to None.

Minimum = 288.5 (Hz)

Maximum = 3086 (Hz)

In Increments of Step .1 (Hz)

     Go To The Tones Page


Tone A Code (Quik-Call II System)
Tone A Code

(Quik-Call II System)

DEFINITION:

Selects the receive Tone A code for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) Signaling System. QCII Standard Tones are a subset of the QCII Frequency range. Therefore, selecting a value for this field automatically selects a value for the Individual Tone A Frequency field.

Note: Limited performance may occur when using frequencies above 2468.2 Hz.

When QCII Sel Cal Decode is set to Enabled [image], or

QCII Call Alert Type is not set to None.

Codes = Frequency List

  Go To The Tones Page


Tone B Frequency (Quik-Call II System)
Tone B Frequency

(Quik-Call II System)

DEFINITION:

Selects the receive Tone B Frequency for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) Signaling System. Selecting a value for this field automatically selects a value for the Individual Tone B Code field. Some Frequencies may not have a correlating Code causing nothing to display in the Code field.

Note: Limited performance may occur when using frequencies above 2468.2 Hz.

When QCII Sel Cal Decode is set to Enabled [image], or

QCII Call Alert Type is not set to None.

Minimum = 288.5 (Hz)

Maximum = 3086 (Hz)

In Increments of Step .1 (Hz)

     Go To The Tones Page


Tone B Code (Quik-Call II System)
Tone B Code

(Quik-Call II System)

DEFINITION:

Selects the receive Tone B code for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) Signaling System. QCII Standard Tones are a subset of the QCII Frequency range. Therefore, selecting a value for this field automatically selects a value for the Individual Tone B Frequency field.

Note: Limited performance may occur when using frequencies above 2468.2 Hz.

When QCII Sel Cal Decode is set to Enabled [image], or

QCII Call Alert Type is not set to None.

Codes = Frequency List

     Go To The Tones Page


Tone C Frequency (Quik-Call II System)
Tone C Frequency

(Quik-Call II System)

DEFINITION:

Selects the receive Tone C Frequency for current Quik-Call II (QCII) Signaling System. Selecting a value for this field automatically selects a value for the Individual Tone C Code field. Some Frequencies may not have a correlating Code causing nothing to display in the Code field.

Note: Limited performance may occur when using frequencies above 2468.2 Hz.

When (QCII Call Format is not set to A-B or A-B/Long B), and

(QCII Sel Cal Decode is set to Enabled [image], or

QCII Call Alert Type is not set to None.)

Minimum = 288.5 (Hz)

Maximum = 3086 (Hz)

In Increments of Step .1 (Hz)

     Go To The Tones Page


Tone C Code (Quik-Call II System)
Tone C Code

(Quik-Call II System)

DEFINITION:

Selects the receiveTone C code for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) Signaling System. QCII Standard Tones are a subset of the QCII Frequency range. Therefore, selecting a value for this field automatically selects a value for the Individual Tone C Frequency field.

Note: Limited performance may occur when using frequencies above 2468.2 Hz.

When (QCII Call Format is not set to A-B or A-B/Long B), and

(QCII Sel Cal Decode is set to Enabled [image], or

QCII Call Alert Type is not set to None.)

Codes = Frequency List

     Go To The Tones Page


Tone D Frequency (Quik-Call II System)
Tone D Frequency

(Quik-Call II System)

DEFINITION:

Selects the receive Tone D Frequency for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) Signaling System. Selecting a value for this field automatically selects a value for the Individual Tone D Code field. Some Frequencies may not have a correlating Code causing nothing to display in the Code field.

Note: Limited performance may occur when using frequencies above 2468.2 Hz.

When (QCII Call Format is set to A-B/A-D/C-D), and

(QCII Sel Cal Decode is set to Enabled [image], or

QCII Call Alert Type is not set to None.)

Minimum = 288.5 (Hz)

Maximum = 3086 (Hz)

In Increments of Step .1 (Hz)

     Go To The Tones Page


Tone D Code (Quik-Call II System)
Tone D Code

(Quik-Call II System)

DEFINITION:

Selects the receive Tone D code for the current Quik-Call II (QCII) Signaling System. QCII Standard Tones are a subset of the QCII Frequency range. Therefore, selecting a value for this field automatically selects a value for the Individual Tone D Frequency field.

Note: Limited performance may occur when using frequencies above 2468.2 Hz.

When (QCII Call Format is set to A-B/A-D/C-D), and

(QCII Sel Cal Decode is set to Enabled [image], or

QCII Call Alert Type is not set to None.)

Codes = Frequency List

     Go To The Tones Page


DTMF System Window (Signaling Systems)
The DTMF System Window

(Signaling Systems)

DEFINITION:

The DTMF System window allows you to create and delete DTMF Signaling Systems, as well as define individual DTMF Signaling System functionality. These individual Signaling Systems can then be selected for use with Conventional Personalities, and Call List Members , as receive and transmit protocols.

Signaling data transmits at high frequencies for transmissions such as PTT ID’s, Call Alerts, and Sel Cal's. Signaling data transmits within the voice frequency range, however it is muted. Other Signaling data types include MDC, and QCII.

The window’s Navigation Toolbar offers high-level functionality for maintaining DTMF Systems.

Click on any page title below (underlined in green) to see more information.


Basic Page (DTMF System)
The Basic Page

(DTMF System)

DEFINITION:

The Basic Page allows you to define general functionality for the current DTMF - Signaling System.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Primary ID Group ID PTT ID Type	PTT Sidetone PTT Short Sidetone Display Decode ID
     Go To DTMF System Window


Primary ID (DTMF System)
Primary ID

(DTMF System)

DEFINITION:

Selects the unique one to eight digit ID that identifies the radio while operating (transmitting or receiving DTMF calls) on the current DTMF - Signaling System.`

When receiving a call, the Primary ID allows the radio to identify the incoming call as being addressed to it. The Primary ID is configured into the Call List of the transmitting radio with the DTMF Call ID field.

When transmitting DTMF PTT ID's, the Primary ID provides the means for Reverse Aliasing on the receiving radio.

O thru 9,

* , and #

     Go To The Basic Page


Group ID (DTMF System)
Group ID

(DTMF System)

DEFINITION:

Selects the unique one to eight digit ID that identifies the radio as belonging to a unique group while operating (receiving DTMF calls) on the current DTMF - Signaling System.

When receiving a call, the Group ID allows the radio to identify the incoming call as being addressed to it, as well as being addressed to other radios in the Group. The Group ID is configured into the Call List of the transmitting radio with the DTMF Call ID field.

     Go To The Basic Page


PTT ID Type (DTMF System)
PTT ID Type

(DTMF System)

DEFINITION:

Selects when the PTT ID is sent during a Normal Dispatch transmission for the current DTMF - Signaling System.

When the radio model is capable of transmitting PTT ID’s.

None

Pre Only:	Sent previous to a Normal Dispatch transmission.

Post Only:	Sent after a Normal Dispatch transmission.

Pre & Post:	Sent both prior to and after a Normal Dispatch transmission.

     Go To The Basic Page


PTT Sidetone (DTMF System)
PTT Sidetone

(DTMF System)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio to sound a continuous alert tone, from the time the PTT button is pressed, until the time that the Signaling System data packet is transmitted. The purpose is to indicate to the radio-user when voice may be initiated. This feature applies for the current DTMF Signaling System.

Note: Applies only to Signaling System data packets that are followed by voice, that is, Voice Calls.

When Sel Cal Encode is set to Enabled  [image], or

DTMF PTT ID Type is set to Pre Only or Pre & Post.

     Go To The Basic Page


PTT Short Sidetone (DTMF System)
PTT Short Sidetone

(DTMF System)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio to sound one short alert tone, after the PTT button is pressed, and immediately following the Signaling System data packet being transmitted. The purpose is to indicate to the radio-user when voice may be initiated. This feature applies for the current DTMF Signaling System.

Note: Applies only to Signaling System data packets that are followed by voice, that is, Voice Calls.

When Sel Cal Encode is set to Enabled  [image], or

DTMF PTT ID Type is set to Pre Only or Pre & Post.

     Go To The Basic Page


Display Decode ID (DTMF System)
Display Decode ID

(DTMF System)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the transmitting radio’s Primary ID to appear in this radio’s display upon receipt of a PTT ID. This feature applies for the current DTMF - Signaling System.

Note: If Reverse Aliasing is possible, the Alias has priority over the Primary ID.

When the radio model has a display.

     Go To The Basic Page


Call Alert/Select Call Page (DTMF System)
The Call Alert/Sel Cal Page

(DTMF System)

DEFINITION:

The Call Alert/Sel Cal Page allows you to view or define Call Alert or Sel Cal receive functionality for the current DTMF - Signaling System.

Click on any CPS field title (in green) below to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Call Alert Type Call Alert LED Alert Tone Auto Reset	Sel Cal Decode Sel Cal LED Auto Reset Timer Type
     Go To DTMF System Window


Call Alert Type (DTMF System)
Call Alert Type

(DTMF System)

DEFINITION:

Selects the type of Call Alerts that can be received for the current DTMF - Signaling System. A Call Alert allows a transmitting radio to notify (with an alert tone) and leave evidence of (by lighting the LED) a call on a receiving radio, when the radio-user is away. The Call Alert LED persists until reset by the user. A Call Alert w/Voice is a combination of a Sel Cal and a Call Alert.

When the radio is capable of receiving Call Alerts, or

is capable of receiving Call Alert w/ Voice.

None

Call Alert

Call Alert w/Voice

     Go To The Call Alert/Sel Cal Page


Call Alert LED (DTMF System)
Call Alert LED

(DTMF System)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the receiving radio to blinks it’s LED when it has received a Call Alert, for the current DTMF - Signaling System. The radio’s LED double-flashes yellow for an individual call, and single-flashes yellow for a group call.

When the DTMF Call Alert Type is not set to None.

     Go To The Call Alert/Sel Cal Page


Alert Tone Auto Reset (DTMF System)
Alert Tone Auto Reset

(DTMF System)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio to generate only one sequence of the Call Alert or Call Alert w/Voice alert tone, for the current DTMF - Signaling System. Normally the Call Alert Tone Tag is a repeating alert tone.

When the DTMF Call Alert Type is not set to None.

     Go To The Call Alert/Sel Cal Page


Sel Cal Decode (DTMF System)
Sel Cal Decode

(DTMF System)

DEFINITION:

  Allows the radio to receive a Sel Cal (Select Call) for the current DTMF - Signaling System. A Select Call is typically used when the majority of transmissions are between a dispatcher and a radio-user, or a group of radio-users, and when other users need not be bothered. This is accomplished by addressing based on Radios ID’s.

When DTMF Call Alert Type is set to None, and

the radio is capable of receiving Sel Cal.

     Go To The Call Alert/Sel Cal Page


Sel Cal LED (DTMF System)
Sel Cal LED

(DTMF System)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio to blink it’s LED while receiving a Sel Cal (Select Call) for the DTMF - Signaling System. The radio’s LED double-flashes yellow for an individual call, and single-flashes yellow for a group call.

When the DTMF Sel Cal Decode is enabled [image].

     Go To The Call Alert/Sel Cal Page


Auto Reset Timer Type (DTMF System)
Auto Reset Timer Type

(DTMF System)

DEFINITION:

Selects a **Timed or *Manual exception to the Signaling Squelch unmuting rule for the current DTMF - Signaling System.

This **Timed or *Manual exception is known as the Release Squelch State. The Release Squelch State begins once the radio unmutes to a Voice Call.

When Signaling Squelch is set to "And"; and once the radio is in the Release Squelch state, then only the current personalities - Unmute Rules must be satisfied for unmuting to re-occur, a Voice Call is no longer required.

When Signaling Squelch is set to "Or"; and once the radio is in the Release Squelch State, only Carrier Squelch Detect is required to unmuting to re-occur, PL and Voice Call are not required.

Note: The timer duration is selected in the Auto Reset Timer field.

When DTMF Call Alert Type is set to Call Alert with Voice, or

DTMF Sel Cal Decode is enabled.

  None:	The radio does not consider a Release Squelch state.

* Manual Reset:	Short Pressing the programmed Monitor button ends the Release Squelch state.

**Auto Reset With Carrier Override Rules

**Auto Reset Without Carrier Override Rules

     Go To The Call Alert/Sel Cal Page


Advanced Page (DTMF System)
The Advanced Page

(DTMF System)

DEFINITION:

The Advanced page allows you to define functionality relating to timers, call acknowledges, and transmission tones for the current DTMF - Signaling System.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Pretime Reset Duration Acknowledge Type Acknowledge Pretime	Acknowledge Digit Tx Tone Duration Tx Tone Interval
     Go To DTMF System Window


Pretime (DTMF System)
Pretime

(DTMF System)

DEFINITION:

Selects the amount of time between PTT button press and the first digit of Signaling System data packet transmission. This time allows the receiving radio to stabilize before receiving data. This applies for the current DTMF Signaling System. Time is in milliseconds.

When the radio model is capable of transmitting;

Radio Call’s , or PTT ID’s .

Minimum = 0 (ms)

Maximum = 4500 (ms)

In Increments of 25 (ms)

     Go To The Advanced Page


Reset Duration (DTMF System)
Reset Duration

(DTMF System)

DEFINITION:

Selects the amount of time the radio waits for the next incoming DTMF digit in a sequence of digits, before resetting itself to look for the first DTMF digit of a new sequence. The feature applies for the current DTMF Signaling Systems. Time is in seconds.

WARNING: If you do not have complete knowledge of the system configuration that this radio will be operating on, do not attempt to modify this setting!

When the radio model is capable of receiving;

Radio Calls , or PTT ID’s .

Minimum = .20 (sec)

Maximum = 33.0 (sec)

In Increments of .10 (sec)

     Go To The Advanced Page


Acknowledge Pretime (DTMF System)
Acknowledge Pretime

DTMF System)

DEFINITION:

Selects the amount of time between automatic transmitter key-up and the first sent digit of the DTMF transmission-acknowledgement data packet. This time allows the receiving radio to stabilize before receiving data. This applies for the current DTMF Signaling Systems. Time is in milliseconds.

Note: To decode DTMF transmission or DTMF acknowledgement data, a radio must have a Simple Decoder option board installed. See Option Board Type.

Minimum = 0 (ms)

Maximum = 4500 (ms)

In Increments of 25 (ms)

     Go To The Advanced Page


Acknowledge Type (DTMF System)
Acknowledge Type

(DTMF System)

DEFINITION:

Selects the type of acknowledgment that is sent back when the radio receives a DTMF call, for the current DTMF Signaling Systems.

Note: To decode DTMF transmission or DTMF acknowledgement data, a radio must have a Simple Decoder option board installed. See Option Board Type.

When the radio model is capable of receiving Radio Checks, or

When DTMF Call Alert Type is not set to None.

None

Digit:	One DTMF digit is transmitted after the call. The digit is defined in the Acknowledge Digit field.

ID:	The DTMF Primary ID is transmitted after the call.

     Go To The Advanced Page


Acknowledge Digit (DTMF System)
Acknowledge Digit

(DTMF System)

DEFINITION:

Selects the digit that is transmitted after a valid call, only when the Acknowledge Type is set to Digit. This feature applies for the current DTMF - Signaling System.

Note: To decode DTMF transmission or DTMF acknowledgement data, a radio must have a Simple Decoder option board installed. See Option Board Type.

When the Acknowledge Type is set to Digit.

O thru 9,

* , and #

     Go To The Advanced Page


Tx Tone Duration (DTMF System)
Tx Tone Duration

(DTMF System)

DEFINITION:

Selects the amount of time that a DTMF tone is transmitted for a single digit. This is the case when speed dialing, or when manually dialing if the Tone Span field is set to Timed duration. Once this Tx Tone Duration ends, the Tx Tone Interval begins, and vice-versa. This applies for the current DTMF Signaling Systems. Time is in milliseconds.

When the radio model is capable of transmitting;

Radio Calls, or PTT ID’s.

Minimum = 25 (ms)

Maximum = 6400 (ms)

In Increments of 25 (ms)

     Go To The Advanced Page


Tx Tone Interval (DTMF System)
Tx Tone Interval

(DTMF System)

DEFINITION:

Selects the amount of time that the radio waits between DTMF digits. This is the case when speed dialing, or when manually dialing if the Tone Span field is set to Timed duration. Once Tx Tone Interval ends, the Tx Tone Duration begins, and vice-versa. This applies for the current DTMF Signaling Systems. Time is in milliseconds.

When the radio model is capable of transmitting;

Radio Calls, or PTT ID’s.

Minimum = 25 (ms)

Maximum = 6400 (ms)

In Increments of 25 (ms)

  Go To The Advanced Page


The Remote Monitor Page (MDC System)
The Remote Monitor Page

(MDC System)

DEFINITION:

The Remote Monitor page allows you to view and define radio functionality having to do with receiving Remote Monitor commands. Remote Monitor commands cause the radio to enter into the Remote Monitor mode. The Remote Monitor mode causes the radio to automatically key-up allowing the initiating radio to listen-in on all surrounding audio.

Once the radio is commanded into Remote Monitor mode, and the radio-user decides to make a call, the radio’s transmit and receive functionality is determined by CPS defined time limits. See the MDC Call Remote Monitor Page.

These settings apply to individual MDC - Signaling System.

Note:

•	A Remote Monitor command can be initiated by a dispatcher to a mobile radio, or from a mobile radio to a mobile radio through the Menu Items Remote Monitor.

•	Any radio-user interaction on the radio sending the command automatically ends the Remote Monitor mode.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Remote Monitor Type

Remote Monitor Time (sec)

Emergency Remote Monitor

Emergency Remote Monitor Time (sec)

     Go To MDC System Window


Remote Monitor Type (MDC System)
Remote Monitor Type

(MDC System)

DEFINITION:

Selects Remote Monitor functionality for the current MDC - Signaling System.

Important Note: This feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

Note:

•	This Remote Monitor Type selection takes precedence over the MDC Call Remote Monitor Type selection.

•	However, when this Remote Monitor Type is set to "Per Command" then the MDC Call Remote Monitor Type selection takes precedence.

When the radio is a mobile model.

Disabled:	This MDC System ignores all Remote Monitor commands.

Per Command:	Allows the Remote Monitor Type to be determined by the initiating radio’s Remote Monitor Type setting.

Silent:	When the radio receives a remote monitor command, no audio or visual indication is apparent to the radio-user.

Non-Silent:	When the radio receives a remote monitor command, audio or visual indications are apparent to the radio-user.

     Go To The Remote Monitor Page


Remote Monitor Time (sec) (MDC System)
Remote Monitor Time (sec)

(MDC System)

DEFINITION:

Selects the amount of time that determines how long (transmit and receive) the radio remains in the Remote Monitor mode for the current MDC - Signaling System. Time is in seconds.

This Remote Monitor Time is multiplied by the sending radio’s Tx Multiplier, the product of these two numbers then determines the total amount of time that the radio transmits in Remote Monitor mode.

The Remote Monitor Time is multiplied by the sending radio’s Rx Mulitplier, the product of these two numbers then determines the total amount of time that the radio can receive in Remote Monitor mode.

Important Note: This feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

When the radio is a mobile model, and

when the Remote Monitor Type field is not set to disable.

Minimum = 10 Seconds

Maximum = 120 Seconds

In Increments = 10 Seconds

     Go To The Remote Monitor Page


Emergency Remote Monitor (MDC System)
Emergency Remote Monitor

(MDC System)

DEFINITION:

  Enables the radio to receive Remote Monitor commands while operating in Emergency Mode. This is only true when the Emergency Mode Type field is set to "Alarm/Call".

Important Note: This feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

When the radio is Emergency Decode capable, and

when the radio is Remote Monitor Encode capable, and

when Emergency Mode Type is set to Alarm/Call, and

when the radio is a mobile model.

     Go To The Remote Monitor Page


Emergency Remote Monitor Time (sec) (MDC System)
Emergency Remote Monitor Time (sec)

(MDC System)

DEFINITION:

Selects the amount of time that determines how long (transmit and receive) the radio remains in the Remote Monitor mode while operating in Emergency Mode. This is only true when the Emergency Mode Type field is set to "Alarm/Call". This selection applies for the current MDC - Signaling System. Time is in seconds.

This Emergency Remote Monitor Time is multiplied by the sending radio’s Tx Multiplier, the product of these two numbers then determines the total amount of time that the radio transmits in Remote Monitor mode.

The Emergency Remote Monitor Time is multiplied by the sending radio’s Rx Mulitplier, the product of these two numbers then determines the total amount of time that the radio can receive in Remote Monitor mode.

Important Note: This feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

When the radio is Emergency Decode capable, and

when the radio is Remote Monitor Encode capable, and

when the Emergency Remote Monitor option is enabled, and

when the radio is a mobile model.

Minimum = 10 Seconds

Maximum = 120 Seconds

In Increments = 10 Seconds

     Go To The Remote Monitor Page


Phone List Window
The Phone List Window

DEFINITION:

The Phone List Page allows you to add and delete phone numbers, and correlating aliases, to the Phone List. The first nine entries/members in this list can be programmed for one-touch Speed Dialing. Speed Dial is not possible when the Access/Deaccess field is set to Manual. Flexible functionality is assigned to the Phone List through individual Phone Systems.

•	Table Type window records can be moved using the Short Cut Menu.

•	Right-clicking anywhere on Table Type windows retrieves the Short Cut Menu.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Phone Number

Alias

     Go to the Phone Systems Window


Phone Number (Phone)
Phone Number

(Phone)

DEFINITION:

Allows the ability to add a phone number entry to the Phone List.

0 thru 9, the pound sign # , the asterisk * ,

and P :	The letter P allows you to insert a pause where it might be needed. There may be a need for a pause when the radio is transmitting a Phone Number entry that is set-up for one-touch Speed Dialing. The amount of pause time can be defined in the Pause Duration field.

Note: The letter P must be in UPPERCASE.

     Go to the Phone List/Alias Page


Alias (Phone)
Alias

(Phone)

DEFINITION:

Allows the ability to add a user-recognizable name to a correlating Phone number entry in the Phone List.

     Go to the Phone List/Alias Page


Phone Window
The Phone System Window

DEFINITION:

The Phone Window allows you to create and delete Phone Systems, as well as define individual Phone System functionality. Individual Phone Systems – with the Phone List, can then be assigned to a Conventional or Trunking Personality. Only one phone list can exist, however through multiple Phone System definitions, Phone List functionality can be uniquely configured for each personality.

The window’s Navigation Toolbar offers high-level functionality for maintaining Phone Systems.

Click on any page title below (underlined in green) to see more information.

  Go to the Phone List Page


Connection Page (Phone)
The Connection Page

(Phone)

DEFINITION:

The Connection Property Page allows you to define Phone System functionality related to call connecting and disconnecting.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Access Code Deaccess Code Dial Type Override Busy Channel Lockout	Access/Deaccess Type PL Required Strip PL Deaccess Back Porch Delay
     Go to the Phone Window


Access Code (Phone)
Access Code

(Phone)

DEFINITION:

Specifies the 8 digit Access Code for the current Phone System. The Access Code allows a connection to a telephone line and subsequent dial tone.

     Go to the Connection Page


Deaccess Code (Phone)
Deaccess Code

(Phone)

DEFINITION:

Specifies the 8 digit Deaccess Code for the current Phone System. The Deaccess Code causes disconnection from a phone call.

     Go to the Connection Page


Dial Type (Phone)
Dial Type

(Phone)

DEFINITION:

Selects the method that the radio uses to transmit the DTMF digits - dialed by the radio-user, while in the Phone Mode. This applies for the current Phone System.

Live:	Automatically keys-up the radio and sends out DTMF digits as they are dialed.

Buffered:	Sends out all DTMF digit input once PTT is pressed.

     Go to the Connection Page


Override Busy Channel Lockout (Phone)
Override Busy Channel Lockout

(Phone)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio to override the Busy Channel Lockout Rule, while operating in Phone Mode, and for the current Phone System.

     Go to the Connection Page


PL Required (Phone)
PL Required

(Phone)

DEFINITION:

  Causes a Private Line (PL) code match to be required on a incoming phone call - while in the Phone Mode, in order for communication to occur. This only applies when the current Phone System is assigned to a Conventional Personality, that requires Receive PL.

     Go to the Connection Page


Strip PL (Phone)
Strip PL

(Phone)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio to not transmit Private Line (PL) codes while in the Phone Mode. This only applies when the current Phone System is assigned to a Conventional Personality that is configured for Transmit PL.

     Go to the Connection Page


Deaccess Back Porch Delay (Phone)
Deaccess Back Porch Delay

(Phone)

DEFINITION:

Selects the amount of time the radio remains in phone mode after sending the deaccess code. This allows the radio a transition time to re-establish normal Conventional or Trunking dispatch repeater access operation. Time is in seconds.

Disabled

Minimum = 0.5 seconds

Maximum = 3.5 seconds

In Increments = 0.5 seconds

     Go to the Connection Page


Access/Deaccess Type (Phone)
Access/Deaccess Type

(Phone)

DEFINITION:

Selects the method used to send the Access and Deaccess codes that are defined for the current Phone System. This feature applies while in Phone Mode for the current Phone System.

Manual:	Radio-user enters the Access or Deaccess code from the Keypad.

Delayed Auto:	Radio-user presses and releases the PTT button to automatically send the Access code. The Deaccess code is automatically sent when the radio exits the Phone Mode.

Immediate Auto:	The Access code is automatically sent when the radio enters the Phone Mode. The Deacess code is automatically sent when the radio exits the Phone Mode.

     Go to the Connection Page


Tone Configuration Page (Phone)
The Tone Configuration Page

(Phone)

DEFINITION:

The Tone Configuration page allows you to define audio and timing functionality while operating in the Phone Mode for the current Phone System.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Tone Span PTT Sidetone PTT Short Sidetone Mute Access/Deacess Tx Hang Time	Pause Duration Pretime Tx Tone Duration Tx Tone Interval
     Go to the Phone Window


Tone Span (Phone)
Tone Span

(Phone)

DEFINITION:

Selects the type of DTMF tone length that is sent when dialing - while in the Phone Mode, and for the current Phone System.

Note: For preprogrammed one-touch Speed Dial, the following ‘Timed’ selection applies.

Timed:	Causes a continuous DTMF tone to be generated for the specified Tx Tone Duration timer setting.

Continuous:	Causes a continuous DTMF tone to be generated for the entire length of the keypad depression.

     Go to the Tone Configuration Page


PTT Sidetone (Phone)
PTT Sidetone

(Phone)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio to sound DTMF digits as they are sent. The purpose is to indicate to the radio-user when the next process may be started. This feature applies while in Phone Mode for the current Phone System.

This applies to Speed Dialed phone numbers, or phone numbers selected from the Phone List, or manually dialed numbers when the Dial Type field is set to Buffered.

This also applies to Access and Deaccess codes when the Access/Deaccess Type field is set to Delayed or Immediate Auto. However, Access/Deacess DTMF tones codes can be muted.

     Go to the Tone Configuration Page


PTT Short Sidetone (Phone)
PTT Short Sidetone

(Phone)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio to sound one short alert tone, after the PTT button is pressed, and immediately following the phone data packet being transmitted. The purpose is to indicate to the radio-user when voice may be initiated. This feature applies while in Phone Mode for the current Phone System.

Note: The Short Sidetone does not apply when the Tone Span is set to Continuous.

     Go to the Tone Configuration Page


Mute Access/Deacess (Phone)
Mute Access/Deacess

(Phone)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the DTMF tones for Access and Deaccess codes to be muted - when the Access/Deaccess Type field is set to Delayed or Immediate Auto. However, DTMF tones are not muted when the Access/Deaccess Type is set to Manual. This feature applies while in Phone Mode for the current Phone System.

     Go to the Tone Configuration Page


Tx Hang Time (Phone)
Tx Hang Time

(Phone)

DEFINITION:

Selects the maximum time that the radio waits between key presses (DTMF digits) - when manually dialing a phone number, before Pretime is automatically inserted before the transmission of the next digit. If the Pretime value is required to be to a large duration, it can significantly slow the dialing process. This feature applies while in Phone Mode for the current Phone System. Time is in milliseconds (ms).

WARNING: If you do not have complete knowledge of the system configuration that this radio will be operating on, do not attempt to modify this setting !

Minimum = 0 (ms)

Maximum = 4500 (ms)

In Increments = 25 (ms)

     Go to the Tone Configuration Page


Pause Duration (Phone)
Pause Duration

(Phone)

DEFINITION:

Selects the amount of time that the radio waits during a dialing pause. This creates a momentary wait at a strategic point - when the radio is automatically dialing pre-programmed speed dial numbers. This wait is sometimes needed, so that the radio does not get ahead of the external phone system that it is attempting to access. This feature applies while in Phone Mode for the current Phone System. Time is in milliseconds (ms).

Example: When the Access/Deaccess Type field is set to Immediate Auto, just after the Access Code is automatically sent, a pause for a dial tone may be needed before the Speed Dialed number is automatically transmitted.

Minimum = 0 (ms)

Maximum = 4500 (ms)

In Increments = 25 (ms)

     Go to the Tone Configuration Page


Pretime (Phone)
Pretime

(Phone)

DEFINITION:

Selects the amount of time between pressing PTT and the first bit of data packet transmission. This time allows the receiving radio to stabilize before receiving data. This feature applies while in Phone Mode for the current Phone System. Time is in milliseconds (ms).

     Go to the Tone Configuration Page


Tx Tone Duration (Phone)
Tx Tone Duration

(Phone)

DEFINITION:

Selects the amount of time that a single DTMF tone is transmitted for manually dialed digits, and when the Tone Span field is set to Timed. This field automatically applies during a preprogrammed Speed Dial, even when the Tone Span field is not set to Timed. This feature applies while in Phone Mode for the current Phone System. Time is in milliseconds (ms).

Note: Once the Tx Tone Duration ends, the Tone Interval begins, and vice-versa.

WARNING: If you do not have complete knowledge of the system configuration that this radio will be operating on, do not attempt to modify this setting !

Minimum = 25 (ms)

Maximum = 6400 (ms)

In Increments = 25 (ms)

     Go to the Tone Configuration Page


Tx Tone Interval (Phone)
Tx Tone Interval

(Phone)

DEFINITION:

Selects the amount of time that the radio waits between DTMF digits during a preprogrammed Speed Dial. Once the Tx Tone Duration ends, this Tone Interval begins, and vice-versa. This feature applies while in Phone Mode for the current Phone System. Time is in milliseconds (ms).

WARNING: If you do not have complete knowledge of the system configuration that this radio will be operating on, do not attempt to modify this setting !

Minimum = 25 (ms)

Maximum = 6400 (ms)

In Increments = 25 (ms)

     Go to the Tone Configuration Page


Revert Page
The Revert Page

(Phone)

DEFINITION

The Revert Page allows you designate a specific Trunking Personality and Group / channel to be used when the radio is transmitting or receiving a telephone call.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELD:

Interconnect Revert Alias

Interconnect Revert Personality

Interconnect Revert Group

      Go to the Phone Window


Interconnect Revert Alias (Phone)
Interconnect Revert Alias

(Phone)

DEFINITION

Selecting a value for the Interconnect Revert Group field, automatically displays this Trunking Personality, Group Alias. This is a view-only field.

When the radio is capable of LS Trunking Dispatch, and

the radio is a display model.

     Go to the Revert Page


Interconnect Revert Personality (Phone)
Interconnect Revert Personality

(Phone)

DEFINITION

Selects the Trunking Personality (by its CPS given name) to be used for transmitting or receiving a telephone call. This is true while the radio is operating in Conventional or Trunking dispatch mode.

The Interconnect Revert Group must then be selected.

When the Radio is capable of LS Trunking Dispatch.

      Go to the Revert Page


Interconnect Revert Group (Phone)
Interconnect Revert Group

(Phone)

DEFINITION

Selects a Trunking transmit and receive Group / channel to be used for telephone calls. This is true while the radio is operating in a Trunking dispatch mode.

The correlating Interconnect Revert Personality must be selected first.

This Group choice automatically fills-in the correlating Interconnect Revert Alias field with the Group Alias.

IMPORTANT NOTE:

For Interconnect Revert to be possible:

The selected Group must have its Group Interconnect enabled, and

the selected Group’s Home Repeater must have its Interconnect enabled.

When the Radio is capable of LS Trunking Dispatch.

      Go to the Revert Page


Radio Configuration
The Radio Configuration Window

DEFINITION:

The Radio Configuration window allows you to view or define radio-wide functionality applying to both dispatch modes, Conventional and Trunking. However, all features are not common to both dispatch modes.

Click on any page title below (underlined in green) to see more information.


Basic Page (Radio Configuration)
The Basic Page

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

The Basic page allows you to view or define general radio-wide functionality.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

VOX Headset Hot Keypad Auto Power Mode Tx Inhibit Quick Key Override Audio Processing Filter (APF) Long Press Duration Talkgroups Assignment to Rotary Knob	Language Selection Disable Alerts Keypad/Microphone Configuration  Hook (HUB) Defeats PL Radio-to-Radio Cloning Radio Clock Update
     Go To The Radio Configuration Window


VOX Headset (Radio Configuration)
VOX Headset

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Causes voice to be routed to an Accessory Connector external headset speaker.

Note: The emergency siren is always routed to the radio’s internal speaker.

See also: Voice Operated Tx (VOX).

When the radio is a Portable model.

     Go To The Basic Page


Hot Keypad (Radio Configuration)
Hot Keypad

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Allows the radio-user the ability to dial telephone numbers using the radio’s keypad, even when the radio is not in Phone Mode. This mode is initiated by pressing the PTT button while dialing the required numbers.

When the radio has a keypad.

     Go To The Basic Page


Tx Inhibit Quick Key Override (Radio Configuration)
Tx Inhibit Quick Key Override

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Gives the radio-user the ability to override the selected Busy Channel Lockout rule, thus allowing a transmission to be sent on a busy channel. The radio-user accomplishes this by Quick-Keying the PTT button. In other words, pressing the PTT, then releasing, and then quickly re-pressing. This feature applies only when the radio is operating in Conventional dispatch mode.

     Go To The Basic Page


Auto Power Mode (Radio Configuration)
Auto Power Mode

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Allows the Conventional personality Tx Power Level field to be set to Automatic. This ‘Auto’ setting causes the radio to automatically select between transmitting at low or high power based upon the strength of the last received transmission. After a period of inactivity the radio will always transmit at high power.

Note: Auto is available for display model radios only.

     Go To The Basic Page


Infrared Remote

(Radio Configuration)

   Enables the use of the Infrared Remote control with a mobile radio’s control head.

When the radio is a mobile type.

  Go To The Basic Page


Audio Processing Filter (APF) (Radio Configuration)
Audio Processing Filter (APF)

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Enables the Audio Processing Filter. When receive audio exceeds a certain volume threshold, this filter is automatically activated. This filter reduces radio and airway noise thus enhancing audio clarity.

     Go To The Basic Page


Hook (HUB) Defeats PL (Radio Configuration)
HUB (Hook Up Box) Defeats PL

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the mobile radio to unmute to all carrier squelch activity on a channel when the microphone is off the hook. This is true even when the selected radio channel’s Unmute/Mute rule requires PL (Private Line).

This applies only when the Public Address (PA) accessory is turned off. An On Busy Channel selection (for a channel) may also override this functionality. This feature applies for Conventional dispatch only.

Note: This mode is similar to Silent Monitor initiated by a short-press of a mobile radio’s programmable button.

     Go To The Basic Page


Radio to Radio Cloning (Radio Configuration)
Radio-to-Radio Cloning

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Enables the radio’s ability to be cloned or to clone. This type of Cloning is the ability to transfer a radio’s entire codeplug to another radio via a special programming cloning cable. This type of Cloning is accomplished without the use of the CPS.

  When disabled, the radio cannot clone or be cloned-to.

When the radio is portable model.

     Go To The Basic Page


Radio Clock Update (Radio Configuration)
Radio Clock Update

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Enables the radio’s time and date to be automatically updated using the computer’s time and date. The computer’s time and date is transferred to the radio when the radio is written-to.

     Go To The Basic Page


Talkgroups Assignment to Rotary Knob (Radio Configuration)
Talkgroups Assignment to Rotary Knob

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Enables the radio's ability to assign LTR/Passport talkgroups to rotary knob and LTR/Passport Zones to Up/Down buttons. Only if "Rotary Control" is selected to be "Channel Selection (Continuous)" or "Select Channel (Continuous)", or "Select Channel (Fixed)" both in "Conventional Buttons" and "LS Trunking Buttons", this option can be enabled. When this option is enabled:

1)	If there is an advanced option board interface configured in the radio and radio has received enhancement initialization command, user can select Passport Talkgroup via radio’s rotary knob.

If the above 2 conditions are met and "Short Press" of "Front Button P2" is configured to "Channel/Group or Zone Down" at the same time, user can select Zone via radio’s Up/Down arrow keys.

2)	If "rotary" is selected to "Channel Selection (Continuous)" or "Select Channel (Fixed)" in "Conventional Buttons" menu and current Zone is a Conventional Zone, user can select Conventional Channel via radio’s rotary knob.

If the above 2 conditions are met and "Short Press" of "Front Button P2" is configured to "Channel/Group or Zone Down" at the same time, user can select Zone via radio’s Up/Down arrow keys.

3)	If "rotary" is selected to "Channel Selection (Continuous)" or "Select Channel (Fixed)" in "LS Trunking Buttons" menu and current Zone is an LTR Zone, user can select LTR Talkgroup via radio’s rotary knob.

If the above 2 conditions are met and "Short Press" of "Front Button P2" is configured to "Channel/Group or Zone Down" at the same time, user can select Zone via radio’s Up/Down arrow keys.

This feature is available for all continuous rotary portables, except  prime portables.

This feature is available for  the  fixed  rotary  which has capable of  Fixed Zone(See more in Rotary page).

This feature can only work in the radio with 256KB ROM size or above.

This feature is only available for portables on firmware R05.11.03 or later.

     Go To The Basic Page


Long Press Duration (Radio Configuration)
Long Press Duration

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the amount of time that the radio-user is required to press (and hold down) a button, for the press to be interpreted by the radio as a long press. The radio’s programmable buttons can be assigned unique long press vs short press functionality. See Control and Menus. Time is in milliseconds.

Minimum = 500 (ms)

Maximum = 16000 (ms)

In Increments = 500 (ms)

     Go To The Basic Page


Language Selection (Radio Configuration)
Language Selection

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the language that appears in the radio’s display. If the Language Mode field is enabled, the radio-user can override this selection.

IMPORTANT NOTE:

This Feature is not available in portables with firmware releases before RO2.00. In addition, some non-English alphabet keyboard characters may not appear correctly in the radio’s display with firmware releases before RO2.00.

English, Spanish, Portuguese, French-Canadian.

     Go To The Basic Page


Disable Alerts (Radio Configuration)
Disable Alerts

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects which type(s) of radio alerts, if any, that are disabled. The radio-user has the ability to change these selections with the Tone Disable and or the Light Disable menu selections, if these fields are enabled for radio-user use.

None

Lights/LEDs:	Keypad Backlight, Display Backlight, and the radio’s LED.

Tones

Lights/LEDs/Tones

     Go To The Basic Page


Keypad/Microphone Configuration (Radio Configuration)
Keypad/Microphone Configuration

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the keypad hardware-option for the current portable radio or mobile radio microphone. This allows the radio’s internal software to be compatible with the current hardware configuration. In addition, this offers radio-users the ability to upgrade the radio’s functionality.

Possible Selections for PORTABLE Radios

SELECTION	AVAILABLE FOR
No Keypad:	Non-Display Radio
Programmable-Menu:	Display Radio
Programmable-Menu/Numeric:	Display Radio
Programmable/Numeric:	Non-Display Radio
Menu/Programmable/Numeric:	Multi-Line Display Radio
Possible Selections for MOBILE Radios and Microphones

Standard Microphone:	Non-Display Radio, or Display w/ Limited Buttons Radio
Standard Microphone/Menu Control Head:	Display w/ Full Buttons Radio
Programmable-Menu/Numeric Microphone:	Display w/ Limited Buttons Radio, or  Display w/ Full Buttons Radio
Programmable/Numeric Microphone:	Non-Display Radio
  Go To The Basic Page


Lights/LEDs (Radio Configuration)
The Lights/LEDs Page

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

The Lights/LEDs page allows you to view or define radio functionality relating to Display illumination and LED preferences.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Auto Backlight

Busy LED

Tx Low Battery LED

Power Up Test LED

Mobile Backlight

     Go To The Radio Configuration Window


Auto Backlight (Radio Configuration)
Auto Backlight

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Allows a portable radio's display and front panel backlight to automatically illuminate on any key press from the radio’s front panel. After a short period of inactivity the light automatically turns off.

Note:

•	Similar functionality can be assigned to a portable radio’s (short or long) programmable button-press. The difference is that these two lights are then illuminated upon pressing the programmed button. The selection is known as "Light".

•	If the Light Disable feature is selected through the radio-user menu, then Auto Backlight and "Light’ functionality is disabled.

     Go To The Lights/LEDs Page


Busy LED (Radio Configuration)
Busy LED

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio’s LED to flash red when the current channel is busy.

     Go To The Lights/LEDs Page


Tx Low Battery LED (Radio Configuration)
Tx Low Battery LED

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Causes a portable radio's LED to flash red when the low battery threshold is reached. This occurs only while the radio is transmitting.

     Go To The Lights/LEDs Page


Power Up Test LED (Radio Configuration)
Power Up Test LED

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio’s LED to be solid red during the power-up-test. This indicates to the radio-user that the radio is in a warm-up phase, and is not yet ready for user operation.

     Go To The Lights/LEDs Page


Mobile Backlight (Radio Configuration)
Mobile Backlight

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the brightness level of a mobile radio’s Control Head. This radio backlight can also be turned off.

When the radio is a Mobile model.

Off

Low

Medium

High

     Go To The Lights/LEDs Page


Mobile Backlight Intensity (New Field – Replaces Backlight on Power Up)

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

     Go To The Lights/LEDs Page


Alert Tones Page (Radio Configuration)
The Alert Tones Page

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

The Alerts Page allows you to view or define radio functionality settings relating to alert tone preferences.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Tx Low Battery Wrap-around Alert Rx Low Battery Alert Interval Power Up Tone Type	Alert Tone Fixed Volume Alert Tone Constant Boost Escalating Alerts Alert Tone Volume Offset
     Go To The Radio Configuration Window


Tx Low Battery (Radio Configuration)
Tx Low Battery Alert

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Causes a portable radio to sound an alert tone (chirp) when its low battery threshold is reached. This tone only occurs following a transmission and when the PTT button is released.

     Go To The Alert Tones Page


Wrap-around Alert (Radio Configuration)
Wrap-around Alert

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Causes an alert tone to sound when a portable radio’s Rotary Channel Selector passes from the last programmed position to the first programmed position, or from the first to the last programmed position.

Zones and Channels are dynamically assigned to the positions of the Rotary Channel Selector. These are radio specific Rotary features known as Continuous Zone and Continuous Channel.

     Go To The Alert Tones Page


Rx Low Battery Alert Interval (Radio Configuration)
Rx Low Battery Alert Interval

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the amount of time that defines the silent interval between each low battery alert tone for a portable radio. This tone only occurs while a call is being received, and when radio’s low battery threshold is reached. Time is in seconds.

Minimum = 0

Maximum = 635 seconds

In Increments = 5 seconds

Note: 0 = disabled

     Go To The Alert Tones Page


Power Up Tone Type (Radio Configuration)
Power Up Tone Type

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the type of alert tone that is sounded - one time - when the radio is powering-on.

Disabled

Normal

Musical

     Go To The Alert Tones Page


Alert Tone Fixed Volume (Radio Configuration)
Alert Tone Fixed Volume

(Radio Configuration)

Note: Enabling the Alert Volume Level menu selection allows the radio-user the ability to toggle on and off this same functionality.

  Causes all alert tones to remain at a constant volume level. This constant volume level is equal to the radio’s Midpoint Volume Setting, plus or minus the Alert Tone Volume Offset setting. The audio level for alert tones then remains at this constant, even when the radio’s Volume Knob is adjusted.

  Causes all alert tones volume levels to be adjustable with the radio’s Volume Knob. The effect that the Volume Knob has on alert tones is then determined by the Alert Tone Constant Boost setting.

     Go To The Alert Tones Page


Alert Tone Constant Boost (Radio Configuration)
Alert Tone Constant Boost

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Important Note: When the Alert Tone Fixed Volume field is enabled, these Constant Boost settings are completely ignored. When the Alert Tone Fixed Volume field is disabled, one of the two following scenarios will be true for the radio-user.

  Based on the Alert Tone Volume Offset setting, alert tone volume levels will be constantly offset higher, lower, or equal to, receive audio volume levels, which are controlled by the radio’s Volume Knob position.

Note: 	The alert tone volume levels always remain within the radio’s internal Minimum / Maximum range for receive audio volume levels.

  When disabled the following rules apply:

•	If the Alert Tone Volume Offset field is set to a negative (-) amount, alert tone volume levels never exceed the (Maximum Volume setting ‘less’ the Volume Offset amount).

•	If the Alert Tone Volume Offset field is set to a positive (+) amount, all alert tone volume levels never go lower than the (Minimum Volume setting ‘plus’ the Volume Offset amount).

     Go To The Alert Tones Page


Escalating Alerts (Radio Configuration)
Escalating Alerts

(Radio Configuration)

  Causes the radio to gradually increase the volume of a repetitive alert tone. This repetitive tone is an alert of an incoming radio call. The radio-user can also make this selection with the Escalert menu feature.

     Go To The Alert Tones Page


Volume Offset (Radio Configuration)
Alert Tone Volume Offset

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the offset value amount to be used by the Alert Tone Fixed Volume, and Alert Tone Constant Boost fields.

If Alert Tone Fixed Volume is enabled, all alert tones to remain at a constant volume level. This constant volume level is equal to the radio’s Midpoint Volume Setting, plus or minus this Volume Offset amount.

When Alert Tone Fixed Volume is disabled, the Alert Tone Constant Boost uses this Volume Offset amount differently when it is enabled, then when it is disabled.

Minimum = -50

Maximum = +50

In Increments = 10

     Go To The Alert Tones Page


Scan Page (Radio Configuration)
The Scan Page

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

The Scan page allows you to view or define radio functionality relating to Scan Mode preferences.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Scan Hang Time

Revert Scan

Hook (HUB) Suspends Scan

Priority Scan

Scanned Channel Discovery

Selected Channel Lock

Priority Channel 1 Lock

     Go To The Radio Configuration Window


Scan Hang Time (Radio Configuration)
Scan Hang Time

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the amount of time that the radio waits on the scanned channel - in Landed Scan mode, before returning to Active Scan mode. The timer begins once receive or transmit activity has ceased. While the timer is counting down, if the radio transmits (PTT is pressed), or the radio unmutes its speaker to receive audio, the timer is reset, and the original conditions again apply. Time is in milliseconds (ms).

Minimum = 0 (ms)

Maximum = 7750 (ms)

In Increments = 250 (ms)

     Go to the Scan Page


Revert Scan (Radio Configuration)
Revert Scan

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

   Causes the radio to automatically move to the last landed scan - channel when exiting scan mode.

   When disabled, the radio automatically moves back to the channel where scan was originally initiated.

When the radio is a mobile model.

     Go to the Scan Page


Hook (HUB) Suspends Scan (Radio Configuration)
Hook (HUB) Suspends Scan

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the mobile radio’s Scan Mode behavior when the microphone is off the hook. This applies only when the Public Address (PA) accessory is turned off.

Disabled:	Scan is not effected.

Suspend Non-Priority Scan:	The radio only scans for Priority Members.

Suspend All Scan:	All scanning is suspended.

     Go to the Scan Page


Priority Scan Alert (Radio Configuration)
Priority Scan Alert

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Causes an alert tone to sound when the radio unmutes to a Priority #1, or a Priority #2 - Scan List Member transmission.

When the radio model is capable of Priority #1 Scan.

     Go to the Scan Page


Scanned Channel Discovery Alert (Radio Configuration)
Scanned Channel Discovery Alert

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Causes an alert tone to sound when the radio-user selects (with the Channel Selector) the Scan List Member channel that last unmuted.

The alert indicates to the radio-user on which channel the last conversation (discovered while in Scan Mode) took place. This is useful on non-display radios where no visual channel indication can be seen.

When the radio is a non-display model.

     Go to the Scan Page


Selected Channnel Lock (Radio Configuration)
Selected Channel Lock

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

   Causes the selected channel can not be added into scan list or deleted from san list via radio menu.

   Causes the Selected channel can not be deleted temporarily from scan list via Nuisance delete.

When radio is portable model, and  firmware version > R05.12.02, and if the radio is having a FlashRom with size no smaller than 256K.

When radio is mobile model, and firmware version > R05.06.04.

     Go to the Scan Page


Priority Channnel 1  Lock (Radio Configuration)
Priority Channel 1 Lock

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

   Causes the priority channel 1 can not be edit via radio menu.

When radio is portable model, and  firmware version > R05.13.04, and if the radio is having a FlashRom with size no smaller than 256K.

When radio is mobile model, and firmware version > R05.06.04.

     Go to the Scan Page


Menu Options Page (Radio Configuration)
The Menu Options Page

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

The Menu Options page allows you to view or define preferences relating to the radio-user menus.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Recall Last Selected Menu

Menu Time-Out Timer

     Go To The Radio Configuration Window


Recall Last Selected Menu (Radio Configuration)
Recall Last Selected Menu

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the last-used Top Level Menu option to automatically appear in the radio’s display when the radio-user enters the Menu Mode.

  When disabled, the first available Top-Level Menu option appears in the radio’s display when the radio-user enters the Menu Mode.

When the radio model has a display.

     Go To The Menu Options Page


Menu Time-Out Timer (Radio Configuration)
Menu Time-Out Timer

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the amount of time the radio waits in Menu Mode, without any radio-user key press activity, before automatically exiting out of Menu Mode. Time is in seconds.

When the radio model has a display.

Minimum = 0

Maximum = 30

     Go To The Menu Options Page


Test Options Page (Radio Configuration)
The Test Options Page

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

The Test Options page allows you to view or customize settings relating to testing functionality via the Front Panel Access feature.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

FPA Entry

RF Test

     Go To The Radio Configuration Window


FPA Entry (Radio Configuration)
FPA Entry (Front Panel Access)

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Allows admittance into the radio’s FPA (Front Panel Access) testing mode.

     Go To The Test Options Page


RF Test (Radio Configuration)
RF Test

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Allows the ability to run the Radio Frequency Test once the radio is in the Front Panel Access test mode.

WARNING: Disable this feature in countries that have strict regulations against radiating unauthorized frequency tests in the air.

     Go To The Test Options Page


(Has been removed) RF Test Power Select

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the transmit power-level for the Radio Frequency Test. Radio power output affects the strength and distance of the radio’s transmissions.

When RF Test is set to Enabled

Low, or High

     Go To The Test Options Page


Monitor Page (Radio Configuration)
The Monitor Page

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

The Monitor Page allows you to view or define settings relating to the radio’s channel monitoring functionality.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Sticky Permanent Monitor Alert

Monitor Type

     Go To The Radio Configuration Window


Sticky Permanent Alert (Radio Configuration)
Sticky Permanent Monitor Alert

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Causes a portable radio to generate an alert tone upon entering Sticky Permanent Monitor Mode. Therefore, the alert tone is sounded when the Monitor button has reached its Long Press duration. This feature only applies for channels capable of Conventional Dispatch.

When the radio is capable of Conventional Dispatch, and

when the radio is portable model.

     Go To The Monitor Page


Monitor Type (Radio Configuration)
Monitor Type

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the monitoring mode of the radio (portable only). Monitor allows the radio-user to listen to all radio traffic for channels of Conventional dispatch type. Monitor is possible for PL (Private Line) transmissions that do not match for the current channel.

Note: This mode is initiated using the short-press Monitor Button.

When the radio is capable of Conventional Dispatch, and

when the radio is portable model.

Open Squelch:	The radio’s speaker is constantly open to all channel activity.

Silent:	The radio’s speaker unmutes to any carrier squelch activity.

     Go To The Monitor Page


Option Board Page (Radio Configuration)
The Option Board Page

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

The Option Board page allows you to view or customize settings relating to the internal addition of an Option Board to the current radio.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Option Board Type

Option Board Configuration Download

Enable Flat Tx Audio

     Go To The Radio Configuration Window


Option Board Type (Radio Configuration)
Option Board Type

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the type of option board that has been installed in the current radio. This prompts the radio to expect certain new functionality.

None

Simple Decoder

Simple Option Interface

Advanced Option Interface

Voice Storage

Advanced & Voice Storage

Note: In multi-line display radios, voice storage is built in. Therefore, Voice Storage and Advanced & Voice Storage are not shown in the selections.

     Go To The Option Board Page


Option Board Configuration Download (Radio Configuration)
Option Board Configuration Download

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio to download third party option board configuration data which initializes specific option board functionality on a per Conventional or Trunking Personality basis. Option board configuration data downloads apply only to specific option board types.

Note: "Advanced" option board types allow for unique settings on a per personality basis with the Option Board Configuration Index fields

When the Import has been run. The Import feature allows the CPS user to import this third party option board configuration data, and .

when the Option Board Type is set to:

Simple Option Interface, or

Advanced Option Interface, or

Advanced & Voice Storage.

     Go To The Option Board Page


Enable Flat Tx Audio Radio Configuration
Enable Flat Tx Audio

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Enables a data path for an external option board. Flat Tx Audio allows for backward compatibility and should only be enabled with full knowledge of the option board type to be used.

When enabled Conventional PL and LTR Trunking are automatically disabled on a radio-wide basis.

When the Option Board Type field is set to "NONE".

     Go To The Option Board Page


Voice Storage Page (Radio Configuration)
The Voice Storage Page

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

The Voice Storage page allows you to define functionality relating to voice recordings and playback. These features apply when the radio’s Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Total Recording Time (sec)

Maximum Message Length (sec)

Voice Storage Inactivity Timer (sec)

Voice Storage Debouncer Timer (sec)

     Go To The Radio Configuration Window


Total Recording Time (Radio_Configuration)
Total Recording Time

(Radio Configuration)

Selects the maximum amount of recording time for the installed Voice Storage Board. Time is in seconds.

WARNING: Do not exceed the maximum setting for the particular Voice Storage Board being installed. It may be 120, 240, or 480 seconds. Setting the Maximum higher than the board’s capacity could cause the board to severely malfunction. Refer to the User/Installation guide for the proper setting.

When the Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.

Minimum = 60 Seconds

Maximum = 480 Seconds

     Go to the Voice Storage Page


Maximum Message Length (Radio Configuration)
Maximum Message Length

(Radio Configuration)

Selects the maximum amount of time for a recorded voice message. This time period determines the number of recording slots that are available. The number of slots is equal to Total Recording Time, divided by this Maximum Message Length. The maximum number of recorded voice slots currently supported is 99. Time is in seconds.

Note: The Answer Mode - Greeting Message and Alternate Message each use one slot.

When the Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.

Minimum = 1 Second

Maximum = Cannot be greater than the Total Recording Time, and cannot exceed 255 seconds.

     Go to the Voice Storage Page


Voice Storage Inactivity Timer (Radio Configuration)
Voice Storage Inactivity Timer

(Radio Configuration)

Selects the amount of time that the radio waits after the completion of a message playback. Once the timer expires, the radio automatically returns to the top of the Voice Storage message list. If the radio-user ‘short-presses’ the ‘programmed’ message playback button before the timer expires, the next message in the Voice Storage message list plays. Time is in seconds.

When the Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.

Minimum = 0

Maximum = 63.75 seconds

In Increments = .25 seconds

     Go to the Voice Storage Page


Voice Storage Debouncer Timer (Radio Configuration)
Voice Storage Debouncer Timer

(Radio Configuration)

During a recording of an incoming call, this selects the amount of time that the Voice Storage recorder waits once carrier is lost. The loss of carrier starts the timer and suspends the recording. If the radio then begins receiving data before the timer expires, the suspended recording resumes. If the timer expires, the current recording is considered complete. Time is in seconds.

When the Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.

Minimum = 0

Maximum = 63.75 seconds

In Increments = .25 seconds

     Go to the Voice Storage Page


Maximum Answer Mode Record Duration (sec) (Radio Configuration)
Maximum Answer Mode Record Duration (sec)

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Defines the maximum amount of time for recording an incoming Answer Mode message. Time is in seconds.

Important Note: This Feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

Note:: If this feature is set to "Disabled", then Answer Mode functionality is disabled on the radio. Therefore, the Menu Items Answer Mode field and Silent Answer Mode field cannot be enabled.

(When the radio is a multi-line display model, and

when Answer Mode is set to enable.)

or

(When the radio is a display model, and

when the Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage, and

when Answer Mode is set to enable.)

Disabled

Minimum = 5 Seconds

Maximum = 255 Seconds

Important Note: This selection must be less than or equal to the Maximum Message Length field selection.

     Go to the Voice Storage Page


Accessory Configuration Page (Radio Configuration)
The Accessory Configuration Page

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

The Accessory Configuration Page allows you to view or define radio functionality settings relating to mobile radio accessories and programmable Accessory Connector pins.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Accessory Power Up Delay Debounce Duration External Alarm Duration External Alarm Delay External Alarm Configuration Rx Audio Type	Data PTT Audio Source External PTT Audio Source  Data PTT Overrides Voice Handset Ignition Sense Type
      Go to the Radio Configuration Window


Accessory Power Up Delay (Radio Configuration)
Accessory Power Up Delay

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the amount of time (during radio power-up) that the Active Level of the Accessory Connector pins are ignored. During this time any functionality associated with all connector pins is delayed for the duration of the timer. Time is in milliseconds.

When the radio is a mobile model.

Minimum = 100 Milliseconds

Maximum = 6400 Milliseconds

In Increments = 100 Milliseconds

      Go to the Accessory Configuration Page


Debounce Duration (Radio Configuration)
Debounce Duration

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the amount of time that the radio waits before rechecking any fully programmable Accessory Connector pin’s Active Level. Debounce is the electrical noise usually caused by relays or other mechanical devices which can cause misleading readings. Therefore certain Accessory Connector pins may require a wait time to allow for possible debounce noise. This applies to Input Lines only. Time is in milliseconds.

When the radio is a mobile model.

Minimum = 0 Milliseconds

Maximum = 375 Milliseconds

In Increments = 25 Milliseconds

      Go to the Accessory Configuration Page


External Alarm Duration (Radio Configuration)
External Alarm Duration

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the amount of time that the External Alarm feature remains active. The External Alarm is activated by an incoming Call Alert, Sel Cal, or MDC Message Time is in seconds.

Note:

•	Any radio-user interaction with the Control Head (other than volume control) deactivates an active External Alarm. The External Alarm then waits in an armed state to be triggered again.

•	The External Alarm can be completely deactivated with the External Alarm programmable button.

When the radio is a mobile model.

Minimum = 1 Seconds

Maximum = 20 Seconds

      Go to the Accessory Configuration Page


External Alarm Delay (Radio Configuration)
External Alarm Delay

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the amount of time prior to the External Alarm Duration timer. Once this External Alarm Delay timer expires, the External Alarm Duration timer begins and the External Alarm becomes active. Time is in seconds.

Note:

•	During this timer period, any radio-user interaction with the Control Head (other than volume control) deactivates an impending External Alarm. The External Alarm then waits in an armed state to be triggered again.

•	The External Alarm can be completely deactivated with the External Alarm programmable button.

When the radio is a mobile model.

Minimum = 0 Seconds

Maximum = 30 Seconds

      Go to the Accessory Configuration Page


External Alarm Configuration (Radio Configuration)
External Alarm Configuration

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the mode of operation for the External Alarm feature.

The armed state is when the radio is constantly polling for the possible triggers to set off the External Alarm.

The unarmed state is when the radio’s External Alarm feature is not polling for any External Alarm triggers, thus the External Alarm Delay or the External Alarm Duration can not begin.

When Pin #4's Function Select is set to External Alarm, and

when the radio is a mobile model.

Permanent External Alarm:

•	Upon radio power-up, the External Alarm is automatically armed regardless of the External Alarm status at last power-down of the radio.

•	Once the External Alarm Duration expires, the radio automatically re-arms itself.

Alarm Re-Arm:

•	Upon radio power-up, the radio automatically remembers and initiates the External Alarm status from the last power-down of the radio, armed or unarmed.

•	Once the External Alarm Duration expires, the radio automatically re-arms itself.

Non-Permanent Manual Re-Arm:

•	Upon radio power-up, the External Alarm must be manually armed.

•	Once the External Alarm Duration expires, the External Alarm feature must be manually re-armed with the External Alarm programmable button.

      Go to the Accessory Configuration Page


Rx Audio Type (Radio Configuration)
Rx Audio Type

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the configuration of the audio output line. The audio output line uses the partially programmable Pin #11 of the Accessory Connector. Certain external accessories such as modems or public address systems may require unfiltered or filtered audio.

When the radio is a mobile model.

Flat (Unfiltered)

Filtered

      Go to the Accessory Configuration Page


Data PTT Audio Source (Radio Configuration)
Data PTT Audio Source

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the point of input for audio data and whether filtering is applied. Data PTT Audio is generally used with accessories such as a Global Positioning System (GPS) or Vehicular Radio Modem (VRM).

When the radio is a mobile model.

Disabled:	No audio input enabled.

Flat Tx Audio:	The external microphone is on the partially programmable Pin #5 of the Accessory Connector, and the audio is un-filtered.

External Mic Audio:	The external microphone is on the partially programmable Pin #2 of the Accessory Connector, and the audio is filtered.

Ext Mic & Flat Tx:	Both inputs are enabled simultaneously.

Note: In older versions of radio firmware, the Ext Mic & Flat Tx selection is not possible.

     Go to the Accessory Configuration Page


External PTT Audio Source (Radio Configuration)
External PTT Audio Source

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the point of input and whether filtering is applied. External PTT Audio is generally used when the radio and the radio-user are in two different locations. For example, the radio-user is inside the car and the radio is in the vehicle’s trunk.

Important Note: This Feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

When the radio is a mobile model.

Disabled:	No audio input enabled.

Flat Tx Audio:	The external microphone is on the partially programmable Pin #5 of the Accessory Connector, and the audio is un-filtered.

External Mic Audio:	The external microphone is on the partially programmable Pin #2 of the Accessory Connector, and the audio is filtered.

Ext Mic & Flat Tx:	Both inputs are enabled simultaneously.

     Go to the Accessory Configuration Page


Data PTT Overrides Voice (Radio Configuration)
Data PTT Overrides Voice

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Selects PTT with a data transmission to override a voice transmission. When the radio is transmitting or receiving a voice transmission, enabling this selection allows PTT with data to interrupt the voice transmission and begin its own transmission.

Note: This feature will be ignored  by firmware on the trunking personality which "Data Operation (Trident)" is enabled.

When the radio is a mobile model.

      Go to the Accessory Configuration Page


Handset (Radio Configuration)
Handset

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Enables the Handset accessory feature. The Handset is similar to a telephone handset, which allows for speaker privacy.

When the radio is a mobile model.

      Go to the Accessory Configuration Page


Ignition Sense Type (Radio Configuration)
Ignition Sense Type

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

The mobile radio can be automatically powered-off or the PTT button can be disabled in conjunction with the switching-off of a vehicle’s ignition. The manual powering-off of a vehicle’s ignition is known as a loss of Ignition Sense. Ignition Sense is a function of Accessory Connector Pin #10.

When the radio is a mobile model.

Disabled:	The loss of Ignition Sense is ignored by the radio. The radio’s Power button is used to power-off the radio.

Follow Ignition Only:	The loss of Ignition Sense powers-off the radio. The radio’s Power button is ignored, it can not be used to power-off the radio.

On/Off & Ignition:	The loss of Ignition Sense powers-off the radio. The radio’s Power button can also be used to power-off the radio.

PTT Disabled:	The loss of Ignition Sense prevents the user from keying the radio with the PTT button. The radio’s Power button is used to power-off the radio.

   Go to the Accessory Configuration Page


Accessory Pins Page (Radio Configuration)
The Accessory Pins Page

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

The Accessory Pins Page allows you to view or define the Fully Programmable Accessory Connector pin functionality. There are three categories for the 16 Accessory Connector pins: Fully Programmable, Partially Programmable, and Fixed - Not Programmable.

•	The Pin selections: Data PTT and PA Switch, are mutually exclusive selections. That is, when selecting either one, the other will not be available.

•	Also see the definition for the Data Revert input pin selection and the LS RPTR Control input pin selection.

•	"Data Revert(input)" selection will be ignored by firmware  on the trunking Personality which  "Data Operation (Trident)" is enabled.

When the radio is a mobile model.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Accessory Package Pin #3 Function Selection Pin #4 Function Selection Pin #6 Function Selection Pin #8 Function Selection Pin #9 Function Selection Pin #12 Function Selection Pin #14 Function Selection	Active Level #3 Active Level #4 Active Level #6 Active Level #8 Active Level #9 Active Level #12 Active Level #14	Debounce Enable #3 Debounce Enable #4 Debounce Enable #6 Debounce Enable #8 Debounce Enable #9 Debounce Enable #12 Debounce Enable #14
      Go to the Radio Configuration Window


Accessory Package (Radio Configuration)
Accessory Package

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects an accessory connector package. Each package assigns a related group of default settings to the fully programmable pins of the Accessory Connector. Once an Accessory Package has been assigned, individual pin settings may be modified.

When the radio is a mobile model.

Click on selections below to see details.

Default

Phone Patch (I750R)

Public Address

Remote

Paging Encoder

Rick (I20R) Tx (Repeater Inter-Connect Kit)

Rick  (I20R) Rx (Repeater Inter-Connect Kit)

Tel Interconnect (ZR340)

Community RPTR (ZR310) Tx

Community RPTR (ZR310) Rx

Tel Interconnect (ZR340) Tx

Tel Interconnect (ZR340) Rx

      Go to the Accesory Pins Page


Pin #3 Function Select (Radio Configuration)
Pin #3 Function Select

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the radio accessory or functionality for Accessory Connector Pin #3. The data direction for this pin is input-only. The Active Level and the Debounce Enable also define this pin’s functionality.

•	The Pin selections: Data PTT and PA Switch, are mutually exclusive selections. That is, when selecting either one, the other will not be available.

•	Also see the definition for the Data Revert input pin selection and the LS RPTR Control input pin selection.

When the radio is a mobile model.

      Go to the Accesory Pins Page


Pin #3 Active Level (Radio Configuration)
Pin #3 Active Level

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the voltage level required to activate Accessory Connector Pin #3’s selected Functionality.

When the radio is a mobile model.

Low

High

      Go to the Accesory Pins Page


Pin #3 Debounce Enabled (Radio Configuration)
Pin #3 Debounce Enabled

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the Debounce Duration to be used for the Accessory Connector Pin #3’s selected Functionality. The Debounce Duration is the amount of time that the radio waits before rechecking Pin #3’s Active Level.

When the radio is a mobile model.

      Go to the Accesory Pins Page


Pin #4 Function Select (Radio Configuration)
Pin #4 Function Select

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the radio accessory or functionality for Accessory Connector Pin #4. The Active Level also defines this pin’s functionality. The data direction for this pin is output-only, therefore Debounce does not apply.

When the radio is a mobile model.

      Go to the Accesory Pins Page


Pin #4 Active Level (Radio Configuration)
Pin #4 Active Level

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the voltage level required to activate Accessory Connector Pin #4’s selected Functionality. Low is the only Active Level setting that the radio acknowledges for Pin #4.

When the radio is a mobile model.

Low

High

      Go to the Accesory Pins Page


Pin #4 Debounce Enabled (Radio Configuration)
Pin #4 Debounce Enabled

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Pin #4's data direction is output-only, therefore the Debounce Duration does not apply.

When the radio is a mobile model.

      Go to the Accesory Pins Page


Pin #6 Function Select (Radio Configuration)
Pin #6 Function Select

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the radio accessory or functionality for Accessory Connector Pin #6. The data direction for this pin is input-only. The Active Level and the Debounce Enable also define this pin’s functionality.

•	The Pin selections: Data PTT and PA Switch, are mutually exclusive selections. That is, when selecting either one, the other will not be available.

•	Also see the definition for the Data Revert input pin selection and the LS RPTR Control input pin selection.

When the radio is a mobile model.

      Go to the Accesory Pins Page


Pin #6 Active Level (Radio Configuration)
Pin #6 Active Level

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the voltage level required to activate Accessory Connector Pin #6’s selected Functionality.

When the radio is a mobile model.

Low

High

      Go to the Accesory Pins Page


Pin #6 Debounce Enabled (Radio Configuration)
Pin #6 Debounce Enabled

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the Debounce Duration to be used for Accessory Connector Pin #6. The Debounce Duration is the amount of time that the radio waits before rechecking Pin #6’s Active Level. Debounce applies only when Pin #6’s selected Functionality has an Input data direction.

When the radio is a mobile model.

      Go to the Accesory Pins Page


Pin #8 Function Select (Radio Configuration)
Pin #8 Function Select

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the radio accessory or functionality for Accessory Connector Pin #8. The data direction for this pin can be input or output. The Active Level and the Debounce Enable for Pin #8 also define this selection.

•	The Pin selections: Data PTT and PA Switch, are mutually exclusive selections. That is, when selecting either one, the other will not be available.

•	Also see the definition for the Data Revert input pin selection and the LS RPTR Control input pin selection.

When the radio is a mobile model.

      Go to the Accesory Pins Page


Pin #8 Active Level (Radio Configuration)
Pin #8 Active Level

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the voltage level required to activate Accessory Connector Pin #8’s selected Functionality.

When the radio is a mobile model.

Low

High

      Go to the Accesory Pins Page


Pin #8 Debounce Enabled (Radio Configuration)
Pin #8 Debounce Enabled

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the Debounce Duration to be used for Accessory Connector Pin #8. The Debounce Duration is the amount of time that the radio waits before rechecking Pin #8’s Active Level. Debounce applies only when Pin #8's selected Functionality has an Input data direction.

When the radio is a mobile model.

      Go to the Accesory Pins Page


Pin #9 Function Select (Radio Configuration)
Pin #9 Function Select

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the radio accessory or functionality for Accessory Connector Pin #9. The data direction for this pin is input-only. The Active Level and the Debounce Enable for Pin #9 also define this selection.

When the radio is a mobile model.

      Go to the Accesory Pins Page


Pin #9 Active Level (Radio Configuration)
Pin #9 Active Level

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the voltage level required to activate Accessory Connector Pin #9’s selected Functionality.

When the radio is a mobile model.

Low

High

      Go to the Accesory Pins Page


Pin #9 Debounce Enabled (Radio Configuration)
Pin #9 Debounce Enabled

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the Debounce Duration to be used for the Accessory Connector Pin #9’s selected Functionality. The Debounce Duration is the amount of time that the radio waits before rechecking Pin #9’s Active Level.

When the radio is a mobile model.

      Go to the Accesory Pins Page


Pin #12 Function Select (Radio Configuration)
Pin #12 Function Select

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the radio accessory or functionality for Accessory Connector Pin #12. The data direction for this pin can be input or output. The Active Level and the Debounce Enable for Pin #12 also define this selection.

•	The Pin selections: Data PTT and PA Switch, are mutually exclusive selections. That is, when selecting either one, the other will not be available.

•	Also see the definition for the Data Revert input pin selection and the LS RPTR Control input pin selection.

When the radio is a mobile model.

      Go to the Accesory Pins Page


Pin #12 Active Level (Radio Configuration)
Pin #12 Active Level

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the voltage level required to activate Accessory Connector Pin #12’s selected Functionality.

When the radio is a mobile model.

Low

High

      Go to the Accesory Pins Page


Pin #12 Debounce Enabled (Radio Configuration)
Pin #12 Debounce Enabled

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the Debounce Duration to be used for Accessory Connector Pin #12. The Debounce Duration is the amount of time that the radio waits before rechecking Pin #12’s Active Level. Debounce applies only when Pin #12’s selected Functionality has an Input data direction.

When the radio is a mobile model.

      Go to the Accesory Pins Page


Pin #14 Function Select (Radio Configuration)
Pin #14 Function Select

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the radio accessory or functionality for Accessory Connector Pin #14. The data direction for this pin can be input or output. The Active Level and the Debounce Enable for Pin #14 also define this selection.

•	The Pin selections: Data PTT and PA Switch, are mutually exclusive selections. That is, when selecting either one, the other will not be available.

•	Also see the definition for the Data Revert input pin selection and the LS RPTR Control input pin selection.

When the radio is a mobile model.

      Go to the Accesory Pins Page


Pin #14 Active Level (Radio Configuration)
Pin #14 Active Level

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the voltage level required to activate Accessory Connector Pin #14’s selected Functionality.

When the radio is a mobile model.

Low

High

      Go to the Accesory Pins Page


Pin #14 Debounce Enabled (Radio Configuration)
Pin #14 Debounce Enabled

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the Debounce Duration to be used for Accessory Connector Pin #14. The Debounce Duration is the amount of time that the radio waits before rechecking Pin #14’s Active Level. Debounce applies only when Pin #14’s selected Functionality has an Input data direction.

When the radio is a mobile model.

      Go to the Accesory Pins Page


Auxiliary Control Page (Radio Configuration)
The Auxiliary Control Page

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

The Auxiliary Control Page allows you to view or define Auxiliary Control #1 and Auxiliary Control #2 functionality. Through the Accessory Connector pin’s Function Select fields, Auxiliary Control functionality can be assigned to the Output capable pins. Auxiliary Controls can then be activated and deactivated with a programmable button press, or remotely with the Active and Inactive ID’s.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Auxiliary Control #1 Momentary Duration Auxiliary Control #1 Active ID Auxiliary Control #1 Inactive ID Auxiliary Control #1 Alias "On" Auxiliary Control #1 Alias "Off"	Auxiliary Control #2 Momentary Duration Auxiliary Control #2 Active ID Auxiliary Control #2 Inactive ID Auxiliary Control #2 Alias "On" Auxiliary Control #2 Alias "Off"
      Go to the Radio Configuration Window


Auxiliary Control #1 Momentary Duration (Radio Configuration)
Auxiliary Control #1 Momentary Duration

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the amount of time that the radio activates voltage Active Levels for the Accessory Connector pin. Time is in milliseconds.

Auxiliary Control #1 functionality can be assigned to any of the fully programmable Output capable pins through their Function Select fields.

Auxiliary Control #1 can then be activated for this Momentary Duration with a programmable button press, or remotely with the Auxiliary Control #1 Active ID.

Note: When the Momentary Duration is set to zero "0", the voltage Active Level timer period is toggled-on indefinitely with a programmable button press, or remotely with the Auxiliary Control #1 Active ID. The voltage Active Level may then be toggled-off with the same programmable button press, or remotely with the Auxiliary Control #1 Inactive ID.

Minimum = 0 ms

Maximum = 20000 ms

In Increments = 100 ms

      Go to the Auxiliary Control Page


Auxiliary Control #1 Active ID (Radio Configuration)
Auxiliary Control #1 Active ID

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Auxiliary Control #1 Active ID. When the Auxiliary Control #1 Active ID is received by the radio, the Auxiliary Control #1 Momentary Duration is activated. Thus toggling-on voltage Active Levels for the assigned Accessory Connector pin, and for the Momentary Duration time period.

Note:

•	The Auxiliary Control #1 Active ID can be input into the transmitting radio with the CPS - Primary ID field, it may then be transmitted as a Call Alert or a Radio Check. These call types typically send back a call Acknowledgment. A radio-user Direct Entry is possible with these call types.

•	When the Auxiliary Control #1 Momentary Duration is set to zero "0", the voltage Active Level timer period is toggled-on indefinitely. The voltage Active Level may then be toggled-off with the Auxiliary Control #1 Inactive ID.

Important Note:

•	All four digits must be filled in, and ‘F’ is not allowed for any digit.

•	The Auxiliary Control #1 Active ID must not be equal to the Auxiliary Control #1 Inactive ID.

Minimum = 0000

Maximum = DEEE

In Increments = 1

      Go to the Auxiliary Control Page


Auxiliary Control #1 Inactive ID (Radio Configuration)
Auxiliary Control #1 Inactive ID

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Auxiliary Control #1 Inactive ID. When the Auxiliary Control #1 Inactive ID is received by the radio, the voltage Active Level for the assigned Accessory Connector pin is toggled off. This is only true when the Auxiliary Control #1 Momentary Duration is set to zero "0" causing the voltage Active Level to be toggled-on indefinitely.

Note: The Auxiliary Control #1 Inactive ID can be input into the transmitting radio with the CPS - Primary ID field, it may then be transmitted as a Call Alert or a Radio Check. These call types typically send back a call Acknowledgment. A radio-user Direct Entry is possible with these call types.

Important Note:

•	All four digits must be filled in, and ‘F’ is not allowed for any digit.

•	The Auxiliary Control #1 the Inactive ID must not be equal to the Auxiliary Control #1 Active ID.

When the Aux Control #1 Momentary Duration is set to zero "0".

Minimum = 0000

Maximum = DEEE

In Increments = 1

      Go to the Auxiliary Control Page


Auxiliary Control #1 Alias "On" (Radio Configuration)
Auxiliary Control #1 Alias "On"

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Allows the ability to add a radio-user recognizable description that appears in the radio’s display. This Alias "On" appears when the Auxiliary Control #1 Momentary Duration is running, and when the Active Level is toggled-on (indefinitely) for a Momentary Duration selection of Zero "0".

When the radio has a display.

      Go to the Auxiliary Control Page


Auxiliary Control #1 Alias "Off" (Radio Configuration)
Auxiliary Control #1 Alias "Off"

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Allows the ability to add a radio-user recognizable description that appears in the radio’s display. This Alias "Off" appears briefly when the Active Level is toggled-off by a programmable button or remotely by the Auxiliary Control #1 Inactive ID.

When the Aux Control #1 Momentary Duration is set to zero "0", and

when the radio has a display.

      Go to the Auxiliary Control Page


Auxiliary Control #2 Momentary Duration (Radio Configuration)
Auxiliary Control #2 Momentary Duration

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the amount of time that the radio activates voltage Active Levels for the assigned Accessory Connector pin. Time is in milliseconds.

Auxiliary Control #2 functionality can be assigned to any of the fully programmable Output capable pins through their Function Select fields.

Auxiliary Control #2 can then be activated for this Momentary Duration with a programmable button press, or remotely with the Auxiliary Control #2 Active ID.

Note: When the Momentary Duration is set to zero "0", the voltage Active Level timer period is toggled-on indefinitely with a programmable button press, or remotely with the Auxiliary Control #2 Active ID. The voltage Active Level may then be toggled-off with the same programmable button press, or remotely with the Auxiliary Control #2 Inactive ID.

Minimum = 0 ms

Maximum = 20000 ms

In Increments = 100

      Go to the Auxiliary Control Page


Auxiliary Control #2 Active ID (Radio Configuration)
Auxiliary Control #2 Active ID

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Auxiliary Control #2 Active ID. When the Auxiliary Control #2 Active ID is received by the radio, the Auxiliary Control #2 Momentary Duration is activated. Thus toggling-on voltage Active Levels for the assigned Accessory Connector pin, and for this momentary duration time period.

Note:

•	The Auxiliary Control #2 Active ID can be input into the transmitting radio with the CPS - Primary ID field, it may then be transmitted as a Call Alert or a Radio Check. These call types typically send back a call Acknowledgment. A radio-user Direct Entry is possible with these call types.

•	When the Auxiliary Control #2 Momentary Duration is set to zero "0", the voltage Active Level timer period is toggled-on indefinitely. The voltage Active Level may then be toggled-off with the Auxiliary Control #2 Inactive ID.

Important Note:

•	All four digits must be filled in, and ‘F’ is not allowed for any digit.

•	The Auxiliary Control #2 Active ID must not be equal to the Auxiliary Control #2 Inactive ID.

Minimum = 0000

Maximum = DEEE

In Increments = 1

      Go to the Auxiliary Control Page


Auxiliary Control #2 Inactive ID (Radio Configuration)
Auxiliary Control #2 Inactive ID

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Auxiliary Control #2 Inactive ID. When the Auxiliary Control #2 Inactive ID is received by the radio, the voltage Active Level for the assigned Accessory Connector pin is toggled off. This is only true when the Auxiliary Control #2 Momentary Duration is set to zero "0" causing the voltage Active Level to be toggled-on indefinitely.

Note: The Auxiliary Control #2 Inactive ID can be input into the transmitting radio with the CPS - Primary ID field, it may then be transmitted as a Call Alert or a Radio Check. These call types typically send back a call Acknowledgment. A radio-user Direct Entry is possible with these call types.

Important Note:

•	All four digits must be filled in, and ‘F’ is not allowed for any digit.

•	The Auxiliary Control #2 the Inactive ID must not be equal to the Auxiliary Control #2 Active ID.

When the Aux Control #2 Momentary Duration is set to zero "0".

Minimum = 0000

Maximum = DEEE

In Increments = 1

      Go to the Auxiliary Control Page


Auxiliary Control #2 Alias "On" (Radio Configuration)
Auxiliary Control #2 Alias "On"

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Allows the ability to add a radio-user recognizable description that appears in the radio’s display. This Alias "On" appears when the Auxiliary Control #2 Momentary Duration running, and when Active Level is toggled-on (indefinitely) for a Momentary Duration selection of Zero "0".

When the radio has a display.

      Go to the Auxiliary Control Page


Auxiliary Control #2 Alias "Off" (Radio Configuration)
Auxiliary Control #2 Alias "Off"

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Allows the ability to add a radio-user recognizable description that appears in the radio’s display. This Alias "Off" appears briefly when the Active Level is toggled-off by a programmable button or remotely by the Auxiliary Control #2 Inactive ID.

When the Aux Control #2 Momentary Duration is set to zero "0", and

when the radio has a display.

      Go to the Auxiliary Control Page


Tx Power Page (Radio Configuration)
The Tx Power Page

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

The Tx Power Page allows you to view or define the Tx Low and High power settings for a mobile radio.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Tx Low Power

Tx High Power

     Go to the Radio Configuration Window


Tx Low Power (Radio Configuration)
Tx Low Power

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

For mobile radios this setting determines the wattage for the CPS - Tx Power Level "Low" setting. The "Low" setting can also be radio-user selected with a programmable button press.

Tx Low Power mode is used when communicating in close proximity, and to keep the radio from transmitting into other geographical groups operating on the same frequency.

When the radio is a mobile type.

Minimum = Minimum Tx Power

Maximum = Maximum Tx Power

      Go to the Tx Power Page


Tx High Power (Radio Configuration)
Tx High Power

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

For mobile radios this setting determines the wattage for the CPS - Tx Power Level "High" setting. The "High" setting can also be radio-user selected with a programmable button press.

Tx High Power mode is used when a stronger signal is needed to extend transmission distances.

When the radio is a mobile type.

Minimum = Minimum Tx Power

Maximum = Maximum Tx Power

      Go to the Tx Power Page


Home Revert Page (Radio Configuration)
The Home Revert Page

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

The Home Revert Page allows you to view or define a Home Revert Channel and Zone. This channel can then be accessed with a single programmable button press that is assigned the "Home Revert" functionality.

This functionality is only possible for display model radios:

•	Mobile display model radios.

•	Portable display model radios must have Continuous Zone functionality that is automatically implemented for Trunking dispatch radios.

This feature is only available for Multi Line Display Portable - Trunking dispatch radios.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Home Revert Zone Alias Home Revert Channel Alias Home Revert Zone Alias 2 Home Revert Channel Alias2	Home Revert Zone Home Revert Channel Home Revert Zone 2 Home Revert Channel 2
      Go to the Radio Configuration Window


Home Revert Zone Alias (Radio Configuration)
Home Revert Zone Alias

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selecting a value for the Home Revert Zone field automatically retrieves this Zone Alias. Zone Aliases are defined in the Personality Assignment, Zone Alias field. This is a view-only field.

When the radio is a Mobile-display model, or

(when the radio is a Portable-display model, and

LS Trunking capable.)

      Go to the Home Revert Page


Home Revert Zone (Radio Configuration)
Home Revert Zone

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Zone that the radio engages (jumps to) when a programmable button set for "Home Revert" is pressed.

When the radio is a Mobile-display model, or

(when the radio is a Portable-display model, and

LS Trunking capable.)

      Go to the Home Revert Page


Home Revert Channel Alias (Radio Configuration)
Home Revert Channel Alias

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selecting a value for the Home Revert Channel field automatically retrieves this Conventional Personality Alias, or Trunking Group Alias depending on the dispatch type of the selected Home Revert Zone. This is a view-only field.

When the Home Revert Zone field is not set to None, and

(when the radio is a Mobile-display model, or

(when the radio is a Portable-display model, and

LS Trunking capable.))

      Go to the Home Revert Page


Home Revert Channel (Radio Configuration)
Home Revert Channel

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Channel that the radio engages (jumps to) when a programmable button  set to "Home Revert" is pressed. The channel will represent either a Conventional Personality or a Trunking Group, depending on the dispatch type of the selected Home Revert Zone.

Note:

•	The Home Revert AutoKey programmable button selection causes the radio to automatically key-up on the Home Revert Channel and to automatically transmit an MDC PTT ID. The MDC PTT ID is only transmitted when the programmed Home Revert Channel is a Trunking Dispatch Personality with an MDC System selected for its Tx System field. If an MDC System is not selected for the Home Revert Channel, the radio still keys-up for a short interval, however PTT ID is not transmitted.

•	This feature is only available for Multi Line Display Portable - Trunking dispatch radios.

When the Home Revert Zone field is not set to None, and

(when the radio is a Mobile-display model, or

(when the radio is a Portable-display model, and

LS Trunking capable.))

      Go to the Home Revert Page


Home Revert Zone Alias 2 (Radio Configuration)
Home Revert Zone Alias 2

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selecting a value for the Home Revert Zone 2 field automatically retrieves this Zone Alias 2. Zone Aliases are defined in the Personality Assignment, Zone Alias field. This is a view-only field.

When the Home Revert Zone 2 field is not set to None, and

(when the radio is a Mobile-display model, or

(when the radio is a Portable-display model, and

LS Trunking capable.))

      Go to the Home Revert Page


Home Revert Zone 2 (Radio Configuration)
Home Revert Zone 2

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Zone that the radio engages (jumps to) when a programmable button set for  "Home Revert 2" or "Home Channel 2" is pressed.

When the radio is a Mobile-display model, or

(when the radio is a Portable-display model, and

LS Trunking capable.)

      Go to the Home Revert Page


Home Revert Channel Alias 2 (Radio Configuration)
Home Revert Channel Alias 2

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selecting a value for the Home Revert Channel 2 field automatically retrieves this Conventional Personality Alias, or Trunking Group Alias depending on the dispatch type of the selected Home Revert Zone 2. This is a view-only field.

When the Home Revert Zone 2 field is not set to None, and

(when the radio is a Mobile-display model, or

(when the radio is a Portable-display model, and

LS Trunking capable.))

      Go to the Home Revert Page


Home Revert Channel 2 (Radio Configuration)
Home Revert Channel 2

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Channel that the radio engages (jumps to) when a programmable button  set to "Home Revert 2" or "Home Channel 2" is pressed. The channel will represent either a Conventional Personality or a Trunking Group, depending on the dispatch type of the selected Home Revert Zone 2.

When the Home Revert Zone 2 field is not set to None, and

(when the radio is a Mobile-display model, or

(when the radio is a Portable-display model, and

LS Trunking capable.))

      Go to the Home Revert Page


The Microphone Page (Radio Configuration)
The Microphone Page

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

The Microphone page allows you to view or define microphone gain and emergency gain functionality. Gain determines the microphone’s transmitted audio volume level for the receiving radio’s speaker.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Microphone Gain

Accessory Microphone Gain

Emergency Microphone Gain

Hot Microphone

     Go to the Radio Configuration Window


Microphone Gain (Radio Configuration)
Microphone Gain

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Gain control for the standard microphone. Gain determines a non-fluctuating audio volume level for the receiving radio’s speaker, this level remains constant regardless of the audio level that the transmitting radio’s microphone receives. The radio-user on the receiving radio can as always adjust speaker levels.

The standard microphone is on the front side of a Portable radio, and attaches to the control head of a Mobile radio.

IMPORTANT NOTE:

This Feature is not available in portables with firmware releases before RO2.00.

Minimum = 1.5

Maximum = 46.5

In Increments = 1.5

      Go to the Microphone Page


Accessory Microphone Gain (Radio Configuration)
Accessory Microphone Gain

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Gain control for the Accessory Microphone. Gain determines a non-fluctuating audio volume level for the receiving radio’s speaker, this level remains constant regardless of the audio level that the transmitting radio’s microphone receives. The radio-user on the receiving radio can as always adjust speaker levels.

The Accessory Microphone attaches to the Accessory Connector of a Portable or Mobile radio.

IMPORTANT NOTE:

This Feature is not available in portables with firmware releases before RO2.00.

Minimum = 1.5

Maximum = 46.5

In Increments = 1.5

      Go to the Microphone Page


Emergency Microphone Gain (Radio Configuration)
Emergency Microphone Gain

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the microphone Gain control during Emergency Mode. Gain determines a non-fluctuating audio volume level for the receiving radio’s speaker, this level remains constant regardless of the audio level that the transmitting radio’s microphone receives. The radio-user on the receiving radio can as always adjust speaker levels. Once the Emergency button is pressed and Emergency Mode is initiated, the microphone automatically keys-up for transmission. This is only true when Emergency Open Mic Duration is not set to Disabled.

Note: The default microphone used for emergency transmission is a CPS selection.

When the radio is Emergency Encode capable.

Minimum = 1.5

Maximum = 46.5

In Increments = 1.5

      Go to the Microphone Page


Hot Microphone (Radio Configuration)
Hot Microphone (Hot Mic)

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects which microphone automatically keys-up and accepts audio, and then automatically de-keys when audio is no longer present: Accessory, or Standard. The Voice Operated Tx field determines if Hot Mic is available on a per Conventional Personality basis. Additionally, during Emergency Mode, the Hot Mic automatically keys-up for the Open Mic Duration regardless of the currently selected radio channel.

Note:

•	Emergency Mode Microphone Gain is a CPS selection.

•	The Hot Mic is also used as the source for Voice Storage.

When the radio is a Mobile type.

      Go to the Microphone Page


The Password Page (Radio Configuration)
The Password Page

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

The Password Page allows you to view or define functionality relating to radio and codeplug security.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Enable Radio Lock

Radio Lock Password

Enable CPS Password

CPS Password

     Go To The Radio Configuration Window


Enable Radio Lock (Radio Configuration)
Enable Radio Lock

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Causes a radio-user prompt for the input of the current Radio Lock Password. The password is required before normal radio operations are allowed.

Note: The Menu Items Radio Lock feature allows the radio-user to toggle Radio Lock functionality on and off, and to change the Radio Lock Password password.

When the radio is a portable display model, and

when the radio has a numeric keypad.

Enable Radio Lock;Radio Configuration:Enable Radio Lock;Password;Radio Lock

     Go To The Password Page


Radio Lock Password (Radio Configuration)
Radio Lock Password

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the four-digit password that the radio requires prior to allowing normal radio operations. The radio-user is prompted to enter this password during radio power-up.

Note: The Menu Items Radio Lock feature allows the radio-user to toggle Radio Lock functionality on and off, and to change this password.

When Radio Lock field is set to enable, and

when the radio is a portable display model, and

when the radio has a numeric keypad.

0000 thru 9999

Important Note: Enter all four digits. If less than four digits are entered, the CPS automatically adds zeros to the remaining digits.

     Go To The Password Page


Enable CPS Password (Radio Configuration)
Enable CPS Password

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the current codeplug to be CPS Password protected.

1.	When reading or writing radio, CPS will validate the password if the checkbox is set.

2.	When opening archive file, CPS will validate the password if the checkbox is set.

When the radio is a portable multi-line display model, or

when the radio is a mobile model.

     Go To The Password Page


CPS Password (Radio Configuration)
CPS Password

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the seven character password that is required when reading/writing the current codeplug.

1.	When reading or writing radio, CPS will validate the password if the radio is CPS password protected.

2.	When opening archive file, CPS will validate the password if the archive file is CPS password protected.

When Enable CPS Password is enabled, and

when the radio is a portable multi-line display model, or

when the radio is a mobile model.

Minimum = one character (letters, numbers or special characters)

Maximum = seven characters (letters, numbers or special characters)

Note: Entries are case sensitive.

     Go To The Password Page


The Edit Mode Page (Radio Configuration)
The Edit Mode Page

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

The Edit Mode Page allows you to view or define Edit Mode functionality. Edit Mode allows the radio-user to modify receive and transmit Conventional dispatch channel parameters. Channel parameters include the Rx and Tx Frequencies, Rx and Tx Squelch Code Types, and Bandwidth (see Conventional Personality, The Basic Page). Edit Mode Enable can be toggled on or off on a per Conventional Personality basis. The Menu Items Edit Mode must be enabled for radio-user access. Edit Mode is password protected.

Note:

•	This feature is typically used when the radio-user travels outside his normal operating area and may need to modify radio dispatch functionality for the new area.

•	Available only when the radio is a portable multi-line display model.

•	Edit Mode is only possible when the radio’s battery is equipped with an Edit Mode Programming Key.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Edit Mode Password

Lower Limit Frequency (MHz)

Upper Limit Frequency (MHz)

Tx Offset Frequency (MHz)

     Go To The Radio Configuration Window


Edit Mode Password (Radio Configuration)
Edit Mode Password

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the four digit password that is required in order for the radio-user to gain access to Edit Mode.

When the radio is a portable multi-line display model.

0000 thru 9999

Important Note: Enter all four digits. If less than four digits are entered, the CPS automatically adds zeros to the remaining digits.

     Go To The Edit Mode Page


Lower Limit Frequency (MHz) (Radio Configuration)
Lower Limit Frequency (MHz)

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the lower frequency limit for the radio-user when operating in the Edit Mode. This Lower Limit Frequency and the Upper Limit Frequency define the Edit Mode frequency range.

When the radio is a portable multi-line display model.

Minimum:	Must be Greater Than or Equal To the Radio Information Minimum Radio Frequency field.

Maximum:	Must be Less Than or Equal To the Radio Information Maximum Radio Frequency field, and Less Than the Upper Limit Frequency.

     Go To The Edit Mode Page


Upper Limit Frequency (MHz) (Radio Configuration)
Upper Limit Frequency (MHz)

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the upper frequency limit for the radio-user when operating in the Edit Mode. This Upper Limit Frequency and the Lower Limit Frequency define the Edit Mode frequency range.

When the radio is a portable multi-line display model.

Minimum:	Must be Greater Than or Equal To the Radio Information Minimum Radio Frequency field.

Maximum:	Must be Less Than or Equal To the Radio Information Maximum Radio Frequency field, and Greater Than the Lower Limit Frequency.

     Go To The Edit Mode Page


Tx Offset Frequency (MHz) (Radio Configuration)
Tx Offset Frequency (MHz)

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the offset amount for the transmit frequency when operating in the Edit Mode. That is, the radio-user is able to select for the transmit frequency to be offset positively or negatively from the receive frequency by this selected amount.

When the radio is a portable multi-line display model.

Minimum = .1

Maximum = 10

     Go To The Edit Mode Page


The Default Display Page (Radio Configuration)
The Default Display Page

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

The Default Display Page allows you to view or define the information that appears in each individual line of the radio’s four-line display.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4	VOX Status Answer Machine Status Call Stack Status
     Go To The Radio Configuration Window


Line 1 (Radio Configuration)
Line 1

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the value that appears on the first line of the four line Display.

When the radio is a multi-line display model.

Blank

Channel/Group Alias

Zone Alias

Channel Information: Trunking Radio only.

•	Home Repeater and Tx ID appear when operating in Trunking dispatch mode.

•	Frequency and PL appear when operating in Conventional dispatch mode.

Clock/Status:	(Status = Vox Status, Answer Machine Status, and Call Stack Status)

Frequency / PL: Conventional Radio only.

     Go To The Default Display Page


Line 2 (Radio Configuration)
Line 2

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the value that appears on the second line of the four line Display.

When the radio is a multi-line display model.

Blank

Channel/Group Alias

Zone Alias

Channel Information: Trunking Radio only.

•	Home Repeater and Tx ID appear when operating in Trunking dispatch mode.

•	Frequency and PL appear when operating in Conventional dispatch mode.

Clock/Status:	(Status = Vox Status, Answer Machine Status, and Call Stack Status)

Frequency / PL: Conventional Radio only.

     Go To The Default Display Page


Line 3 (Radio Configuration)
Line 3

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the value that appears on the third line of the four line Display.

When the radio is a multi-line display model.

Blank

Channel/Group Alias

Zone Alias

Channel Information: Trunking Radio only.

•	Home Repeater and Tx ID appear when operating in Trunking dispatch mode.

•	Frequency and PL appear when operating in Conventional dispatch mode.

Clock/Status:	(Status = Vox Status, Answer Machine Status, and Call Stack Status)

Frequency / PL: Conventional Radio only.

     Go To The Default Display Page


Line 4 (Radio Configuration)
Line 4

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the value that appears on the fourth line of the four line Display.

When the radio is a multi-line display model.

Blank

Channel/Group Alias

Zone Alias

Channel Information: Trunking Radio only.

•	Home Repeater and Tx ID appear when operating in Trunking dispatch mode.

•	Frequency and PL appear when operating in Conventional dispatch mode.

Clock/Status:	(Status = Vox Status, Answer Machine Status, and Call Stack Status)

Frequency / PL: Conventional Radio only.

     Go To The Default Display Page


VOX Status (Radio Configuration)
VOX Status

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Enables the Voice Operated Transmit (VOX) indicator to appear on the same line as the "Clock/Status" selection in the radio’s display. VOX Status indicates to the radio-user if VOX is available for the currently selected channel.

Answer Machine Status and Call Stack Status also appear on the radio’s same display line. Clock/Status can be assigned to any line of a multi-line display radio. Therefore the display line selected for "Clock/Status" determines the display line for VOX Status, Answer Machine Status, and Call Stack Status.

Note:

•	VOX can be enabled or disabled on a Conventional Personality Basis.

•	VOX applies only for Conventional dispatch.

When Line 1, or Line 2, or Line 3, or Line 4 is set to Clock/Status, and

when the radio is a multi-line display model.

     Go To The Default Display Page


Answer Machine Status (Radio Configuration)
Answer Machine Status

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the Answer Machine indicator (AM) to appear on the same line as the "Clock/Status" selection in the radio’s display. Answer Machine Status indicates to the radio-user if the Answer Mode functionality is currently active.

VOX Status and Call Stack Status also appear on the radio’s same display line. Clock/Status can be assigned to any line of a multi-line display radio. Therefore, the display line selected for "Clock/Status" determines the display line for VOX Status, Answer Machine Status, and Call Stack Status.

Important Note: This feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

Note:

•	When the Menu Items Answer Mode field is enabled, radio-user access to Answer Machine functionality is available through the radio’s display.

•	Answer Machine functionality can also be radio-user accessed with a (short or long) programmable button-press.

When Line 1, or Line 2, or Line 3, or Line 4 is set to Clock/Status), and

when the radio is a multi-line display model.

     Go To The Default Display Page


Call Stack Status (Radio Configuration)
Call Stack Status

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the Call Stack Status field to appear on the same line as the "Clock/Status" selection in the radio’s display. Call Stack Status indicates to the radio-user if the Call Stack functionality is currently active and the number of calls the radio-user may have missed.

VOX Status and Answer Mode Status also appear on the radio’s same display line. Clock/Status can be assigned to any line of a multi-line display radio. Therefore the display line selected for "Clock/Status" determines the display line for VOX Status, Answer Machine Status, and Call Stack Status.

Note:

•	The Signaling Configuration Call Stack field must be enabled for Call Stack operation to take place.

•	Call Stack can be radio-user accessed with a menu selection or a (short or long) programmable button-press.

(When Line 1, or Line 2, or Line 3, or Line 4 is set to Clock/Status), and

when the radio is a multi-line display model.

     Go To The Default Display Page


Scan List Information Window

DEFINITION:

The Scan List Information window allows you to create and delete Scan Lists, as well as define individual Scan List functionality. Scan List Member channels can then be scanned for transmission activity, when the radio is in Scan Mode.

The window’s Navigation Toolbar offers high-level functionality for maintaining Scan Lists.

Click on any page title below (underlined in green) to see more information


List Page (Scan List Information)
The List Page

(Scan List Information)

DEFINITION:

The Scan List page allows you to select the grouping of Conventional Personalities and or Trunking Groups that make-up the current Scan List Member channels. This grouping of Scan List Member channels can then be scanned for transmission activity - one at a time, and when the radio is in Scan Mode.

A Scan List can have a maximum number of 16 Scan List Members. Scan List Member scanning priority is definable.

A Scan List can be assigned to a Conventional or Trunking Personality. Several Scan Lists can exist. A Scan List can be assigned to more than one personality.

•	Table Type window records can be moved using the Short Cut Menu.

•	Right-clicking anywhere on Table Type windows retrieves the Short Cut Menu.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Alias

Personality

Group

     Go To The Scan List Information Window


Personality Alias (Scan List Information)
Alias

(Scan List Information)

DEFINITION:

Selecting a correlating Conventional Personality, or Trunking Group, automatically displays the Alias for the current Scan List Member. This is a view-only field. The Alias is created in either the Conventional Personality Alias, or Trunking Group Alias field.

Note:  The view-only status is represented with a "glasses" cursor. The glasses cursor appears when the cursor hovers over a field.

When the radio model has a display.

     Go To The Scan List Page


Personality (Scan List Information)
Personality

(Scan List Information)

DEFINITION:

Selects a Conventional or Trunking Personality for the current Scan List Member. Personality selections are CPS given names. For example; Conventional-1, or Trunking-1.

Note:

•	The "Selected" choice causes the radio to scan the channel of the radio’s current Channel Selector position. See Personality Assignment.

•	When selecting a Personality of Conventional type, the correlating Alias field automatically fills-in.

•	When selecting a Personality of Trunking type, the correlating Group field must still be selected.

     Go To The Scan List Page


Group (Scan List Information)
Group

(Scan List Information)

DEFINITION:

Selects a Group for the current Scan List Member. The correlating Personality must be selected first, and the selection must be of the Trunking dispatch type. This Group choice automatically fills-in the correlating Alias field.

When the Personality is of the Trunking dispatch type.

     Go To The Scan List Page


General Page (Scan List Information)
The General Page

(Scan List Information)

DEFINITION:

This General Page allows you to define basic functionality for the current Scan List being defined. This functionality applies while in Scan Mode.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Priority #1 Scan Type Priority #2 Scan Type Sample Time PL Scan Type	Nuisance Delete User Programmable PL Scan Lockout
     Go To The Scan List Information Window


Priority #1 Scan List Member (Scan List Information)
Priority #1 Scan List Member

(Scan List Information)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the highest priority to be assigned to the first member/row in the current Scan List. When the radio is scanning a Scan List (Active Scan), 50% of the scans are targeted at the Priority #1 Member channel.

Example: If the Priority #1 Member is P1, and the non-priority Scan List Members are Nn, then the scanning sequence is: P1 N1, P1 N2, P1 N3, P1 N4, P1 N5, etc.

Note:

•	When the radio’s speaker is unmuted to a non-priority call (Landed Scan mode), or is unmuted on the Priority #2 Member (if one exists), the radio continues to mute at a specific time interval (the Priority Sample Time), and scan for transmission activity on the Priority #1 Member channel. If the radio discovers a valid Priority #1 transmission, it drops the current transmission, and unmutes to the Priority #1 call.

Also Note: This is only true when the Landed Scan List member and the Priority 1 Member are both of Conventional Dispatch type.

•	When the radio is in Landed Scan mode for a Priority #1 Member call, priority member checking is not necessary.

When the Scan List Member ‘#1’ Personality field is not set to Unassigned.

     Go To The General Page


Priority #2 Scan List Member (Scan List Information)
Priority #2 Scan List Member

(Scan List Information)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the second highest priority to be assigned to the second member- row in the current Scan List. When the radio is scanning a Scan List (Active Scan), 25% of the scans are targeted at the Priority #2 Member channel. When a Priority #2 Member exists, scan checks for the Priority #1 Member are reduced from 50% to 25%.

Example: If the Priority #1 Member is P1, the Priority #2 Member is P2, and the non-priority Scan List Members are Nn, then the scanning sequence is: P1 N1, P2 N2, P1 N3, P2 N4, P1 N5, etc.

Note:

•	When the radio’s speaker is unmuted to a non-priority call (Landed Scan mode), the radio continues to mute at a specific time interval (the Priority Sample Time), and scan for transmission activity on the Priority #2 Member channel. If the radio discovers a valid Priority #2 transmission, it drops the current transmission, and unmutes to the Priority #2 call.

Also Note: This is only true when the Landed Scan List member and the Priority 2 Member are both of Conventional Dispatch type.

•	If the radio is in Landed Scan mode on a Priority #2 call, and it discovers a valid Priority #1 transmission, it drops the Priority #2 call and unmutes to the Priority #1 call.

Also Note: This is only true when the Landed Priority 2 Scan List member and the Priority 1 Member are both of Conventional Dispatch type.

When a Priority #1 Member exists, and

the Scan List Member ‘#1’ Personality field is not set to Unassigned.

     Go To The General Page


Priority Sample Time (Scan List Information)
Priority Sample Time

(Scan List Information)

DEFINITION:

Selects the delay period between checking for priority Scan List Member transmission activity for the current Scan List. The checking for Priority #1, or Priority #2 Members, occurs in Landed Scan Mode when the radio is unmuted on a non-priority, or a Priority #2 Member call. This checking briefly mutes the current transmission. Time is in milliseconds.

Note:

•	When the radio is in Landed Scan mode for a Priority #2 Member call, priority member checking is for the Priority #1 Member only.

•	When the radio is in Landed Scan mode for a Priority #1 Member call, priority member checking is not necessary.

When Priority #1 Member exists, and

the Scan List Member ‘#1’ Personality field is not set to Unassigned.

Minimum = 500 (ms)

Maximum = 7750 (ms)

In Increments = 250 (ms)

  Go To The General Page


PL Scan Type (Scan List Information)
PL Scan Type

(Scan List Information)

DEFINITION:

Causes Private Line (PL) to be required - when accepting calls from members of the current Scan List, while in Scan Mode. PL is considered only when the Conventional transmission being received has its Tx Squelch Type set for PL.

Note: Disabling the need for PL codes increases scanning speeds.

Disabled:	PL decoding is not required.

Non-Priority Channel:	Requires PL decoding only on any Non-Priority current Scan List members channel.

Priority Channel:	Requires PL decoding only on Priority #1, and or Priority #2 Scan List Members channel. This selection exists only when Priority Members are enabled.

Priority and

Non-Priority Channel:	Requires PL decoding on all current Scan List Members channels.

     Go To The General Page


Nuisance Delete (Scan List Information)
Nuisance Delete

(Scan List Information)

DEFINITION:

  When a Scan List Member continually generates unwanted noise, this allows the radio-user to temporarily remove the channel from the current Active Scan. This feature applies for the current Scan List.

This is accomplished by the radio-user with a long-press of the short-press Scan button while in Landed Scan Mode, and while landed on the member to be removed.

Note: Switching to a another channel on the radio’s Channel Selector, or turning the radio off and then back on, effectively brings that temporily removed Scan List member channel back to an actively scanned status.

Nuisance Delete is NOT possible:

•	For a Priority #1, or Priority #2 Scan List Member channel.

•	If the Transmit Frequency of a Landed Scan channel/call, is the same as the Transmit Frequency of the selected Designated Transmit Channel, relating to the current Scan List.

•	If the current Scan List does not contain at least two members before a Nuisance Delete occurs.

     Go To The General Page


User Programmable (Scan List Information)
User Programmable

(Scan List Information)

DEFINITION:

  Allows the radio-user the ability to modify the contents of the current Scan List using the radio’s display and menu navigation keys.

Note: The Scan List Edit feature can be assigned with a short or long button press.

When the radio is a display model.

     Go To The General Page


PL Scan Lockout (Scan List Information)
PL Scan Lockout

(Scan List Information)

DEFINITION:

  Enhances Scan Mode performance for the current Scan List. The lockout condition occurs when, the unsuccessfully scanned - Scan List Member channel/call, had no PL code where a PL code was expected, or where the PL code was incorrect. Once lockout occurs a counter begins. The counter continues the lockout for the next nine scans of that channel. However, if scan finds that carrier has dropped on that channel, then the counter is reset and the lockout is discontinued.

This is particularly effective when in Landed Scan Mode on a non-priority scan list member - and when the radio briefly mutes at specific time intervals to check for Priority #1 or Priority #2 Member activity. The lockout allows this muting period to be a smaller amount of time. Therefore there is less interruption for the current call.

     Go To The General Page


Tx Configuration Page (Scan List Information)
The Tx Configuration Page

(Scan List Information)

DEFINITION:

The Tx Configuration Page allows you to select the designated transmit channel for the current Scan List being defined. This functionality applies while in Scan Mode.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Designated Tx Channel Alias

Designated Tx Channel Personality

Designated Tx Channel Group

Talkback

    Go To The Scan List Information Window


Designated Tx Channel Alias (Scan List Information)
Designated Tx Channel Alias

(Scan List Information)

DEFINITION:

Selecting a correlating Conventional Designated Tx Channel Personality or Trunking Designated Tx Channel Group, automatically displays the Designated Tx Channel Alias for the current Scan List Member. This is a view-only field. The Alias is created in either the Conventional Personality Alias, or Trunking Group Alias field.

Note:  The view-only status is represented with a "glasses" cursor. The glasses cursor appears when the cursor hovers over a field.

  Go To The Tx Configuration Page


Designated Tx Channel Personality (Scan List Information)
Designated Tx Channel Personality

(Scan List Information)

DEFINITION:

Selects a transmit Conventional, or Trunking Personality, to be used for the current Scan List and while operating in Scan Mode. Personality selections are CPS given names. For example; Conventional-1, or Trunking-1.

Selected:	Causes the radio to transmit on the assigned channel of the radio’s current Channel Selector position during scan mode operation. See Personality Assignment.

Last Active:	Causes the radio to transmit on the last landed channel relating to Landed Scan Mode during scan mode operation. Prior to a scanned channel being landed (in scan mode), the radio defaults to transmitting on the radio’s current channel selector position. This feature should be used in combination with scan hang time of more than 1000ms.

Conventional Personality:

Causes the radio to transmit on the selected personality during scan mode operation. When selecting a Conventional Personality for the Designated Tx Channel Personality, the correlating Designated Tx Channel Alias field automatically fills-in.

Trunking Personality:

Causes the radio to transmit on the selected personality during scan mode operation. When selecting a Trunking Personality for the Designated Tx Channel Personality, the correlating Designated Tx Channel Group field must still be selected.

     Go To The Tx Configuration Page


Designated Tx Channel Group (Scan List Information)
Designated Tx Channel Group

(Scan List Information)

DEFINITION:

Selects a Trunking transmit Group / channel to be used for the current Scan List and while operating in Scan Mode.

The correlating Designated Tx Channel Personality must be selected first, and the selection must be of the Trunking dispatch type. This Group choice automatically fills-in the correlating Designated Tx channel Alias field.

When the Personality is of the Trunking dispatch type.

     Go To The Tx Configuration Page


Talkback (Scan List Info)
Talkback

(Scan List Information)

  Causes the radio to transmit on the landed channel, relating to Landed Scan Mode, this is true for the duration of the Scan Hang Timer. Once the Scan Hang Timer has expired, and Active Scan is initiated, the radio uses the Designated Tx Channel ‘Conventional’ Personality, or the Designate Tx Channel ‘Trunking’ Group to transmit on.

This applies to the current Scan List, while operating in Scan Mode.

  Disabling Talkback, causes the radio to transmit on the Designated Tx Channel ‘Conventional’ Personality, or the Designate Tx Channel ‘Trunking’ Group. This applies to the current Scan List, while operating in Scan Mode.

  Go To The Tx Configuration Page


Advanced Page (Scan List Information)
The Advanced Page

(Scan List Information)

DEFINITION:

The Advanced page allows you to view or modify functionality for the current Scan List. This functionality applies while in Scan Mode.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

LS Scan Activity Search Time

Signaling Scan Type

Signaling Hold Time

     Go To The Scan List Information Window


LS Scan Activity Search Time (Scan List Information)
LS Scan Activity Search Time

(Scan List Information)

DEFINITION:

Selects the amount of time that the radio waits in Active Scan Mode on a Trunking dispatch mode - Scan List Member channel. This feature applies to the current Scan List. Time is in milliseconds.

The wait only applies when carrier squelch is detected on the channel. This pause allows the radio enough time to decode Trunking data. If Trunking data is not decoded then the timer expires and the radio scans the next Scan List Member channel.

Minimum = 25 (ms)

Maximum = 2500 (ms)

In Increments = 25 (ms)

     Go To The Advanced Page


Signaling Scan Type (Scan List Information)
Signaling Scan Type

(Scan List Information)

DEFINITION:

While in Scan Mode, these selections cause Signaling System data decoding to be required when receiving Signaling System calls from the members of the current Scan List.

Signaling decode is usually necessary when the transmission being received is Tx System encoded, as is the case with Radio Calls, Messages, Statuses, and PTT ID's.

Note: Disabling the need for Signaling System data increases scanning speeds.

Disable:	Signaling System data is not required.

Non-Priority Channel:	Signaling System data decoding is required only for Non-Priority current Scan List members channels.

Priority Channel:	Signaling System data decoding is required only for Priority #1, and or Priority #2 Scan List members channels. This selection exists only when Priority Members are enabled.

Priority and

Non-Priority Channel:	Signaling System data decoding is required for all current Scan List member channels.

  Go To The Advanced Page


Signaling Hold Time (Scan List Information)
Signaling Hold Time

(Scan List Information)

DEFINITION:

Selects the amount of time that the radio waits in Active Scan, on a Scan List Member channel. The wait only applies when carrier squelch is detected on the channel. This pause allows the radio enough time to decode Signaling System data. If Signaling System data is not decoded and the timer expires, the radio then scans the next Scan List Member channel. This feature applies to the current Scan List. Time is in milliseconds.

Signaling Hold Time applies for Signaling System transmissions such as Radio Calls and PTT ID's.

Note:

•	The total hold time value must be set equal to or greater than the amount of time that it takes the sending radio to transmit the signaling data packet, plus the transmitting personality’s Signaling System Pretime .

•	Hold Time applies to both priority and non-priority Scan List member channels.

Minimum = 50 (ms)

Maximum = 6375 (ms)

In Increments = 25 (ms)

     Go To The Advanced Page


Radio Information
The Radio Information Window

DEFINITION:

The Radio Information window includes high-level information used when programming or troubleshooting a radio.

 The view-only status of Radio Information fields is represented with a “glasses” cursor. The glasses cursor appears when the cursor hovers over a field.

Click on any page title below (underlined in green) to see more information.


General Page (Radio Information)
The General Page

(Radio Information)

DEFINITION:

The General page contains model and serial number information for the attached radio. The CPS retrieves and allows you to view-only the following information from the radio’s codeplug.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Model Number

Serial Number

Firmware Version

     Go To The Radio Information Window


Model Number (Radio Information)
Model Number

(Radio Information)

DEFINITION:

The CPS retrieves and allows you to view-only the radio’s model number. The model number identifies the type of radio. This information is stored in the radio’s codeplug.

     Go To The General Page


Serial Number (Radio Information)
Serial Number

(Radio Information)

DEFINITION:

The CPS retrieves and allows you to view-only the radio’s serial number. Each radio has its own unique serial number. This information is stored in the radio’s codeplug.

     Go To The General Page


Firmware Version (Radio Information)
Firmware Version

(Radio Information)

DEFINITION:

The CPS retrieves and allows you to view-only the firmware version of the currently connected radio. Firmware is Software that controls the internal hardware components of the radio. Firmware cannot be modified with the CPS.

Note:: When the CPS reads this information from a codeplug file (not from a radio), this field displays “Unknown”.

     Go To The General Page


Tracking Info Page (Radio Information)
The Tracking Information Page

(Radio Information)

DEFINITION:

The Tracking Information page lists Codeplug; Version, Source, Date, and Time information. This information can give historical insight relating to the life of the radio. The CPS retrieves and allows you to view-only the following information.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Original Codeplug Version Latest Codeplug Version Original Programming Source Latest Programming Source	Original Programming Date Original Programming Time Latest Programming Date Latest Programming Time
     Go To The Radio Information Window


Original Codeplug Version (Radio Information)
Original Codeplug Version

(Radio Information)

DEFINITION:

The CPS retrieves and allows you to view-only the first version number of codeplug information that was loaded into the radio. This is stored in the radio’s codeplug.

     Go To The Tracking Information Page


Latest Codeplug Version (Radio Information)
Latest Codeplug Version

(Radio Information)

DEFINITION:

The CPS retrieves and allows you to view-only the most recent version number of codeplug information that was loaded into the radio. This is stored in the radio’s codeplug.

     Go To The Tracking Information Page


Original Programming Source (Radio Information)
Original Programming Source

(Radio Information)

DEFINITION:

The CPS retrieves and allows you to view-only the first source used to program the radio. The programming source is either the Factory, or the CPS. This information is stored in the radio’s codeplug.

     Go To The Tracking Information Page


Latest Programming Source (Radio Information)
Latest Programming Source

(Radio Information)

DEFINITION:

The CPS retrieves and allows you to view-only the most recent source used to program the radio. The programming source is either the Factory, or the CPS. This information is stored in the radio’s codeplug.

     Go To The Tracking Information Page


Original Programming Date (Radio Information)
Original Programming Date

(Radio Information)

DEFINITION:

The CPS retrieves and allows you to view-only the first date on which the radio was programmed. This information is stored in the radio’s codeplug.

     Go To The Tracking Information Page


Original Programming Time (Radio Information)
Original Programming Time

(Radio Information)

DEFINITION:

The CPS retrieves and allows you to view-only the first time at which the radio was programmed. This information is stored in the radio’s codeplug.

     Go To The Tracking Information Page


Latest Programming Date (Radio Information)
Latest Programming Date

(Radio Information)

DEFINITION:

The CPS retrieves and allows you to view-only the most recent date on which the radio was programmed. This information is stored in the radio’s codeplug.

     Go To The Tracking Information Page


Latest Programming Time (Radio Information)
Latest Programming Time

(Radio Information)

DEFINITION:

The CPS retrieves and allows you to view-only the most recent time at which the radio was programmed. This information is stored in the radio’s codeplug.

     Go To The Tracking Information Page


Frequency Range Page (Radio Information)
The Frequency Range Page

(Radio Information)

DEFINITION:

The Frequency Range page lists Minimum and Maximum frequency settings for the attached radio. The radio is capable of transmitting and receiving on all frequencies within and equal to the defined Minimum and Maximum of this range. The CPS retrieves and allows you to view-only the following information.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Minimum Radio Frequency

Maximum Radio Frequency

     Go To The Radio Information Window


Minimum Radio Frequency (Radio Information)
Minimum Radio Frequency

(Radio Information)

DEFINITION:

The CPS retrieves and allows you to view-only the minimum frequency setting at which the radio is allowed to operate. The radio’s frequency range is defined as being between, or equal to, the Minimum and Maximum frequencies. This information is stored in the radio’s codeplug.

     Go To The Frequency Range Page


Maximum Radio Frequency (Radio Information)
Maximum Radio Frequency

(Radio Information)

DEFINITION:

The CPS retrieves and allows you to view-only the maximum frequency setting at which the radio is allowed to operate. The radio’s frequency range is defined as being between, or equal to, the Minimum and Maximum frequencies. This information is stored in the radio’s codeplug.

     Go To The Frequency Range Page


Tx Power Page

(Radio Information)

DEFINITION:

The Tx Power Page lists the lowest possible and the highest possible transmit-power settings (in watts) for a mobile radio only. The CPS retrieves (from the radio’s codeplug) and allows you to view-only this information.

The Tx Low and Tx High power settings are then selectable for a mobile radio.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Minimum Tx Power

Maximum Tx Power

      Go to the Radio Information Window


Minimum Tx Power

(Radio Information)

DEFINITION:

The CPS retrieves and allows you to view-only the lowest possible transmit power setting (in watts) for a mobile radio only. This information is stored in the radio’s codeplug. Tx Low and Tx High power settings are then definable for a mobile radio.

Minimum = 1 Watt

Maximum =	163 Watts, but always less than or equal to the Maximum Tx Power.

      Go to the Tx Power Page


Maximum Tx Power

(Radio Information)

DEFINITION:

The CPS retrieves and allows you to view-only the highest possible transmit power setting (in watts) for a mobile radio only. This information is stored in the radio’s codeplug. Tx Low and Tx High power settings are then definable for a mobile radio.

Minimum =	1 Watt, but always greater than or equal to the Minimum Tx Power.

Maximum = 163 Watts

      Go to the Tx Power Page


The LS Trunking Personality Window


Site Access Page


System Site

Selects an LS Trunking Site for use while operating on any Group for the current Trunking Personality. The LS Trunking Site is a bank of repeaters used for Trunking communications.

• See More Information


Home Repeater

Selects a Home Repeater for the Trunking Site selected in the System Site field. The Home Repeater is the designated repeater in a Trunking Site that receives transmissions from the radio. The radio is also informed of incoming traffic (voice or data) by data messages sent from its Home Repeater.

• See More Information


Tx Power Level

Selects the transmit power level while operating on any Group for the current Trunking Personality. For portable radios this feature can extend radio battery life.

• See More Information


Time-Out Timer

Selects the maximum amount of communication time allowed per transmission. This feature applies while operating on any Group for the current Trunking Personality. Once this time expires, the transmission is automatically terminated. Time is in seconds.

• See More Information


Unmute/Mute Rule

Selects the rule that determines when a radio opens and closes its speaker to receive audio. Unmuting opens the speaker. Muting closes the speaker. This feature applies while operating on any Group for the current Trunking Personality.

• See More Information


Cue Tone

  Causes an alert tone to sound just after the radio-user presses the PTT button. This indicates to the radio-user that the radio is ready to transmit. This feature applies while operating on any Group for the current Trunking Personality.

• See More Information


All Group Scan

  Causes the radio to automatically scan (listens for), and consider unmuting to, the Tx ID’s (transmission activity) of all Groups for the current Trunking Personality. This feature applies while operating on any Group for the current Trunking Personality.

• See More Information


High Priority Group Scan

  Causes the radio to automatically scan for (listen for) higher priority Group List member(s), or Universal ID List members, while unmuted on a lower priority call. Group and Universal ID priority is determined by position within each list. For both lists, position 1 has the highest priority and then position 2, etc. This feature applies while operating on any Group for the current Trunking Personality.

• See More Information


Option Board Feature

  Enables Option Board functionality to be active for the current Trunking Personality.

• See More Information


Option Board Configuration Index

  Selects the desired "Advanced" only option board functionality for the current Trunking Personality. Advanced option board types allow for unique settings on a per personality basis. Option board functionality selections are based on the ‘Imported’ third party option board configuration data that applies for the selected Option Board Type.

• See More Information


Data Operation (Trident)

  Enables Data Operation (Trident) functionality to be active for the current Trunking Personality.

• See More Information


Group ID’s Page


Alias

The Alias is a radio-user recognizable description for the current Group being defined. Characters, Numbers, and Special Characters can be used.

• See More Information


Rx Low ID

Selects the Receive Low ID for the current Group. The transmitting radio’s Group Transmit ID must fall within this radio’s Receive Range for communication to occur. The Receive Range is defined as being greater than or equal to this Receive Low ID and less than or equal to this Group’s Receive High ID.

• See More Information


Rx High ID

Selects the Receive High ID for the current Group. The transmitting radio ’s Group Transmit ID must fall within this radio’s Receive Range for communication to occur. The Receive Range is defined as being greater than or equal to the this Group’s Receive Low ID and less than or equal to this Receive High ID.

• See More Information


Tx Inhibit Low ID

Selects the Transmit Inhibit Low ID for the current Group. Transmit Inhibit allows the transmitting radio-user 3 seconds after releasing the PTT button, to decide to re-press the PTT and transmit again. Within this three second period, this (receiving) radio is not able to transmit.

The transmitting radio’s Group Transmit ID must fall within this radio’s Tx Inhibit Receive Range for Tx Inhibit to occur.

• See More Information


Tx Inhibit High ID

Selects the Transmit Inhibit High ID for the current Group. Transmit Inhibit allows the transmitting radio-user 3 seconds after releasing the PTT button, to decide to re-press the PTT and transmit again. Within this three second period, this (receiving) radio is not able to transmit.

The transmitting radio’s Group Transmit ID must fall within this radio’s Tx Inhibit Receive Range for Tx Inhibit to occur.

• See More Information


Tx ID

Selects the Transmit ID for the current Group. This Transmit ID is sent when the radio-user presses the PTT button for the current Group.

• See More Information


Group Options Page


Call Light

  Causes the radio’s LED to flash yellow while receiving a call on the current Group. This call indicator allows a dispatcher or radio-caller to notify a targeted radio-user (or group of radios-users) of a missed call. The visual alert persists until reset by the returning user. This is known as a Call Light call.

When enabled an incoming radio call triggers external alarms. External alarms include either the Radio Configuration Mobile Accessory Pin 4 "External Alarm" selection or the (Mobile Conventional or Trunking) button "Horn and Lights" selection.

• See More Information


Interconnect

  Allows the radio-user to transmit while the radio is unmuted on the current Trunking Group. This transmit while unmuted capability also facilitates telephone communications while operating in Trunking dispatch mode for the current Group.

• See More Information


Transpond

 Causes the radio to transmit the current Group Transmit ID upon detection of a disconnect message. This serves as an audio Radio Check for all radio’s with a qualified receive range. This feature applies while operating on the current Group.

WARNING: When radios within the same talk group share the same receive range, and when these radios all have Transpond enabled, Transpond can then initiate an infinite loop of these audio radio checks.

• See More Information


Auto Group Scan

  Enables the current Group to be included in the Auto Group Scan. When operating on an Auto Group Scan enabled Group, this feature automatically scans (listens-for) and considers unmuting to current Group transmissions and all lower numbered Group transmissions (based on their position in the current Group List). Lower numbered Groups (in the Group List) are only considered for unmuting when they have this Auto Group Scan feature enabled.

Important Note: Enabling the Non-prioritized Auto Group Scan field changes the functionality of this feature.

• See More Information


Scan Reply

  Enables the radio to automatically transmit on this Group when it is unmuted to / landed-on. This feature applies when this Group is landed from any of the following Scan features: All Group Scan, Auto Group Scan, and High Priority Group Scan.

• See More Information


Data Only

  Causes the radio to not unmute its speaker to an incoming Group call. Therefore call data can be received without any noticeable audio to the radio-user.

This feature applies while operating on the current Group.

• See More Information


Signaling Enable

  Allows the current Trunking Group to transmit or receive Signaling System data.

• See More Information


Signaling Squelch

  Signaling Squelch requires the current Trunking Personality’s - Unmute Rule to be satisfied And a Voice Call match to be detected in order for the radio to unmute. This feature applies while operating on the current Group.

• See More Information


Universal ID List Page


Universal ID List

Selects the Universal ID Lists for the current Trunking Personality. This Universal ID List then applies for all Groups of the current Trunking Personality.

A Universal ID List can contain up to four Universal ID's. A Universal ID List can be assigned to more than one Trunking Personality.

• See More Information


Signaling System Page


Rx System

Selects the Rx Signaling data type and system to be used when receiving a Signaling System transmission for the current Trunking Personality. This Rx Signaling System then applies for all Groups of the current Trunking Personality.

• See More Information


Tx System

Selects the Tx Signaling data type and system to be used when transmitting a Signaling System communication for the current Trunking Personality. This Tx Signaling System then applies for all Groups of the current Trunking Personality.

• See More Information


Scan List Page


Scan List

Selects the Scan List to be used by the radio while operating in the Scan Mode for the current Trunking Personality. This Scan List then applies for all Groups of the current Trunking Personality.

The Scan List defines certain functionality and determines which callers the radio scans for (listens for), and considers unmuting to, on the selected Scan List channels (Conventional Personalities or Trunking Groups).

• See More Information


Non-prioritized Auto Group Scan

  Enables all Groups (of the current Trunking Personality) having Auto Group Scan enabled to be automatically scanned for (listened-for) possible incoming transmissions.

  When disabled, Auto Group Scan then considers Auto Group Scanning based on priority/position in the Group List. This priority is based relative to the radio’s current operating channel/Group position in the Group List.

• See More Information


Phone System Page


Phone System

Selects the Phone System to be used for all Groups in the current Trunking Personality. This Phone System then applies for all Groups of the current Trunking Personality.

A Phone System defines certain functionality and the list of phone numbers that allow the radio-user to make telephone calls.

• See More Information


LS Universal ID


Alias

The Alias is a radio-user recognizable description for the current Universal ID. Characters, Numbers, and Special Characters can be used.

• See More Information


Rx ID

Selects a receive code for the current Universal ID. If at any time this receive code is detected, the radio unmutes to it. This high-priority call can interrupt any call except higher ranked Universal ID calls.

• See More Information


Tx Inhibit

  Causes Transmit Inhibit to be active when the radio receives a call for the current Universal ID. Transmit inhibit allows the transmitting radio-user 3 seconds after releasing the PTT button to decide to re-press the PTT and transmit again. Within this three second period, this (receiving) radio is not able to transmit.

• See More Information


LS Universal ID List Options Page


Call Light

  Causes the radio’s LED to flash yellow while receiving a call for the current Universal ID. This call indicator allows a dispatcher or radio-caller to notify a targeted radio-user (or group of radios-users) of a missed call. The visual alert persists until reset by the returning user. This is known as a Universal ID, Call Light call.

When enabled an incoming radio call triggers external alarms. External alarms include either the Radio Configuration Mobile Accessory Pin 4 "External Alarm" selection or the (Mobile Conventional or Trunking) button "Horn and Lights" selection.

• See More Information


Transpond

 Causes the radio to transmit its current Group Transmit ID upon detection of a disconnect message. This serves as an audio Radio Check for all radio’s with a qualified receive range. This feature applies while receiving a call for the current Universal ID.

WARNING: When radios within the same talk group share the same receive range, and when these radios all have Transpond enabled, Transpond can then initiate an infinite loop of these audio radio checks.

• See More Information


Interconnect

  Allows the radio-user to transmit while the radio is unmuted to the current Universal ID. This transmit while unmuted capability also facilitates telephone communications while operating in a Trunking dispatch mode for the current Universal ID.

• See More Information


Data Only

  Causes the radio to not unmute its speaker to an incoming call for the current Universal ID. Therefore call data can be received without any noticeable audio to the radio-user.

• See More Information


Signaling Enable

  Allows the current Universal ID to receive Signaling data.

• See More Information


Signaling Squelch

  Signaling Squelch requires the current Trunking Personality’s - Unmute Rule to be satisfied And a Voice Call match to be detected in order for the radio to unmute. This feature applies while receiving a call from the current Universal ID.

• See More Information


The LS Trunking Site Window


System Page


Area ID

  Selects the Area ID setting for the current Trunking Site. When frequencies are the same for two Trunking Sites located in close geographical vicinity to each other, the Area ID can ensure site uniqueness. An Area ID match determines successful communication between radios and their proper Trunking Site. There are only two possible selections: "0" or "1".

• See More Information


Unassigned Repeater Display

Insert when comes back from translation


Front Porch

Selects the amount of time that the radio waits to transmit data once carrier has begun to transmit. Transmitting carrier is initiated by pressing the PTT button. This feature applies for the current Trunking Site.

WARNING: It is possible to disable the radio's ability to receive and/or transmit data. If you are not fully aware of the impact of this setting, DO NOT MODIFY IT!

• See More Information


Disconnect Words

Selects the number of Disconnect Words that the radio transmits when the radio-user de-keys the radio. A Disconnect Word warns the receiving radio to mute its speaker to avoid unwanted disconnect noise, known as Squelch Tail. This feature applies for the current Trunking Site.

• See More Information


Data Deviation 12.5 KHz

Selects the relative deviation setting for the current Trunking Site. This setting allows you to adjust the transmit signal-strength for Trunking data such as, MDC Messages and MDC Statuses. Either this 12.5 KHz setting, or the 20/25 KHz Data Deviation setting will apply for the individual repeaters of this Trunking Site. This is determined by the Bandwidth setting of each individual repeater.

• See More Information


Data Deviation 20 KHz / 25 KHz

Selects the relative deviation setting for the current Trunking Site. This setting allows you to adjust the transmit signal-strength for Trunking data such as, MDC Messages and MDC Statuses. Either this 20/25 KHz setting, or the 12.5 KHz Data Deviation setting will apply for the individual repeaters of this Trunking Site. This is determined by the Bandwidth setting of each individual repeater.

• See More Information


Data Invert Rx

  Causes receive data to be inverted by the radio. This feature applies for the current Trunking Site. Data Invert must also be enabled for the transmitting radio, and Trunking Site, for successful communication to occur.

• See More Information


Data Invert Tx

  Causes transmit data to be inverted just prior to being transmitted by the radio. This feature applies for the current Trunking Site. Data Invert Rx must also be enabled for the receiving radio, and Trunking Site, for successful communication to occur.

• See More Information


Unassigned Repeater Display

  Causes "UNPROG RPTR" to appear on the radio’s display for a ten second duration. This is true when the radio is attempting to access a repeater currently not defined for the Trunking Site that the radio’s current Trunking channel is operating on. This alerts the radio-user that this repeater is not accessible. This feature applies for the current Trunking Site.

Important Note: This feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

• See More Information


Repeaters Page


Repeater Assigned

Determines whether this repeater is assigned or active for the current Trunking Site. An unassigned repeater can not be used or modified.

• See More Information


Rx Radio Frequency

Selects the radio’s receive frequency to match the transmit frequency of the current repeater.

• See More Information


Tx Radio Frequency

Selects the radio’s transmit frequency to match the receive frequency of the current repeater.

• See More Information


Repeater Interconnect

  Selects the current repeater as being capable of transmitting telephone calls.

• See More Information


Repeater Bandwidth

Selects the radio’s transmit and receive Bandwidth to match the bandwidth of the current repeater.

• See More Information


Advanced Page


Advanced Rx Reference Frequency

Selects the Receive Reference Frequency of the current repeater.

WARNING: It is possible to disable the radio's ability to receive and/or transmit data. If you are not fully aware of the impact of this setting, DO NOT MODIFY IT!

• See More Information


Advanced Tx Reference Frequency

Selects the Transmit Reference Frequency of the current repeater.

WARNING: It is possible to disable the radio's ability to receive and/or transmit data. If you are not fully aware of the impact of this setting, DO NOT MODIFY IT!

• See More Information


Emphasis

Selects the type of audio shaping used on the current repeater. This feature can enhance audio clarity.

• See More Information


Compression Type

Selects the transmitting-audio Compression Type of the current repeater. These selections can control or enhance audio clarity. Full Compression allows for Companding Mode. Companding can also be initiated radio-wide by a radio-user menu selection.

• See More Information


Expansion Type

Selects the receive-audio Expansion Type of the current repeater. These selections can control or enhance audio clarity. Full Expansion allows for Companding Mode. Companding can also be initiated radio-wide by a radio-user menu selection.

• See More Information


The Data Revert Page


Data Revert Zone Alias

Selecting a value for the Data Revert Zone field automatically retrieves this Zone Alias. Zone Aliases are defined in the Personality Assignment, Zone Alias field. This is a view-only field.

• See More Information


Data Revert Zone

Selects a Trunking Zone that the radio engages (jumps to) when Data Revert is initiated. This selection applies while operating on any Group for the current Trunking Personality.

• See More Information


Data Revert Channel Alias

Selecting a value for the Data Revert Channel field automatically retrieves this Channel. Aliases are defined in the Group Alias field. This is a view-only field.

• See More Information


Data Revert Channel

Selects the Trunking Group - Channel that radio engages (jumps to) when Data Revert is initiated. The Data Revert Zone must be selected first. This selection applies while operating on any Group for the current Trunking Personality.

• See More Information


Programmable-Menu


Programmable-Menu/Numeric


Programmable/Numeric


Prime Keypad


Keypad


Menu Keys


Menu-Select Key


Horizontal Scroll Bar


Click Here to         Zoom-In on    the Portable Model	Click Here to             Zoom-In on        the Mobile Model


Click Here to              Zoom-In on          the Portable Model	Click Here to             Zoom-In on        the Mobile Model


Infrared Remote

Picture not yet available.


	Click Here to See the Mobile Model


	Click Here to See the Mobile Model


	Click Here to See the Portable Model


	Click Here to See the Portable Model


Click Here to              Zoom-In on          the Portable Model	Click Here to             Zoom-In on        the Mobile Model


	Click Here to See the Mobile Model


	Click Here to See the Portable Model


Welcome

Replace this sample help topic with your own help topic, or type Ctrl-T to add a new Help topic.


Active Level

The Active Level is the voltage setting for the radio’s Accessory Connector fully programmable pins.


Active Scan Mode (Glossary)
Active Scan Mode

When in Scan Mode, and when the radio is rapidly moving through the Scan List Member channels looking for eligible transmission activity to receive - or unmute to. The radio’s LED flashes green during active scan.


Arrow Keys (Glossary)
Arrow Keys

The keyboard up · , down · , left · , or right · selectors, which allow the user to navigate or move the cursor.


Asynchronous Communications (Glossary)
Asynchronous Communications

A method of data communications in which information is transmitted one character at a time, with no specific starting time. Each character is preceded by a start bit and followed by one (or more) stop bit(s).


Bandwidth

The width of the frequency band that is available for radio transmissions.


Calibration (Glossary)
Calibration

The means of teaching the radio how to adjust itself for optimum performance. To Calibrate.


Call Alert

A Signaling System – Radio Call that allows a dispatcher or radio-caller to notify a targeted radio-user (or group of radios-users) of a missed call.

Call Alerts with Voice are also possible, see Call Alert Type.

The receiving radio responds with an alert-tone, and shows evidence of a missed call by lighting the Radio’s LED (also see Call Alert LED). The visual alert persists until reset by the returning user.

Also see Call Alert Encode.


Call Alert w/Voice

A combination of a Voice Sel Cal and a Call Alert.


Call Alert Member #1, #2, and #3 Top
Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3

(Programmable Buttons: Conventional & Trunking)

DEFINITION:

These button-presses allow the radio-user to quickly and easily Call Alert Call List Member #1, Call List Member #2, or Call List Member #3.

For example, when pressing the "Call Alert Member #1" button, the Alias for Call List member #1 appears in the radio’s display. Pressing the PTT button then transmits the Call Alert to Call List member #1.

Additionally as a convenience, prior to the PTT button being pressed, the radio-user is able to select to Call Alert any Call List member in Call List position 1 to 9. For example, when pressing the "Call Alert Member #2" the Alias for Call List member #2 appears in the radio’s display. At this point selecting any number 1 to 9 on the radio’s keypad then retrieves the Alias for that selected member (1 to 9) in the radio’s display, and again, pressing the PTT button then transmits the Call Alert to the desired Call List member (1 to 9).


Sel Cal Member #1, #2, & #3 Top
Sel Cal Member #1, #2, & #3

(Programmable Buttons: Conventional & Trunking)

DEFINITION:

These button-presses allow the radio-user to quickly and easily Sel Cal Call List Member #1, Call List Member #2, or Call List Member #3.

For example, when pressing the "Sel Cal Member #1" button, the Alias for Call List member #1 appears in the radio’s display. Pressing the PTT button then transmits the Sel Cal to Call List member #1.

Additionally as a convenience, prior to the PTT button being pressed, the radio-user is able to select to Sel Cal any Call List member in Call List position 1 to 9. For example, when pressing the "Sel Cal Member #2" the Alias for Call List member #2 appears in the radio’s display. At this point selecting any number 1 to 9 on the radio’s keypad then retrieves the Alias for that selected member (1 to 9) in the radio’s display, and again, pressing the PTT button then transmits the Sel Cal to the desired Call List member (1 to 9).


Speed Call Alert Top
Speed Call Alert

(Programmable Buttons: Conventional & Trunking)

DEFINITION:

This button-press allows the radio-user to quickly and easily Call Alert Call List members.

For example, when pressing the "Speed Call Alert" button, the Alias of the last called Call List member appears in the radio’s display. Pressing the PTT button then transmits the Call Alert to this Call List member. However pressing 1 to 9 on the radio’s keypad retrieves the Alias of that selected member (1 to 9) in the radio’s display, and again, pressing the PTT button then transmits the Call Alert to the desired Call List member (1 to 9).


Speed Sel Cal Top
Speed Sel Cal

(Programmable Buttons: Conventional & Trunking)

DEFINITION:

This button-press allows the radio-user to quickly and easily Sel Cal Call List members.

For example, when pressing the "Speed Sel Cal" button, the Alias of the last called Call List member appears in the radio’s display. Pressing the PTT button then transmits the Sel Cal to this Call List member. However pressing 1 to 9 on the radio’s keypad retrieves the Alias of that selected member (1 to 9) in the radio’s display, and again, pressing the PTT button then transmits the Sel Cal to the desired Call List member (1 to 9).


Call Light

A visual indicator (yellow LED) that flashes when the radio receives valid Trunking activity.


Carrier (Glossary)
Carrier

An electromagnetic signal that is transmitted on a selected frequency for the purpose of carrying voice or data transmissions along with it. Carrier can then be received by all radios listening on that frequency.


Carrier Squelch (Glossary)
Carrier Squelch (CSQ)

When the carrier energy exceeds the CPS-selected or radio-designated carrier energy threshold, known as the Squelch Setting/Threshold.


Carrier Squelch Detect (Glossary)
Carrier Squelch Detect

When the carrier energy exceeds the CPS-selected or radio-designated carrier energy threshold, known as the Squelch Setting/Threshold.

Carrier is an electromagnetic signal that is transmitted on a selected frequency for the purpose of carrying voice or data transmissions along with it. Carrier can then be received by all radios listening on that frequency.


Channel (Glossary)
Channel

A single path separated by frequency or time divisions used for transmitting and or receiving voice and or data.

Unique radio channel functionality can be assigned to Zones, and then assigned to the radio’s Channel Selector as individual Conventional Personalities or Trunking Groups. Also see Personality Assignment.


Codeplug (Glossary)
Codeplug

A solid-state chip inside a radio where the radio’s personality data is stored. Personality data is created using the Motorola Customer Programming Software (CPS). CPS defined data can be transferred to the radio’s chip or to a codeplug file. Codeplug files can be archived on the computer’s hard drive for later use.


Communications Port (Glossary)
Communications Port (COM Port)

A serial hardware interface connection at the back of a computer used to communicate with other hardware devices, such as radios, modems, and printers. Also known as a Serial Port. COM Ports are designated by slot positions such as COM1, COM2, COM3, COM4.

When programming a radio, the computer is connected to the radio with a RIB cable via the COM port. The computer’s CPS Com Port settings are independent of each other and apply to the Read and Write features.

Note: This gives you the ability to quickly Read the codeplug information from one radio and then Write that same programming information to another radio.

Important Note: The Com Port settings for the CPS can only be selected from the File menu. Select: File · Read, or File · Write.


Companding Mode

Companding is a new standard feature in the cellular phone industry and is supported industry-wide. The purpose of Companding is to reduce radio and airway noise, thus enhancing audio clarity.

Companding is active when Full Compression and Full Expansion are used for transmitting and receiving, respectively. Full Compression and Full Expansion can be selected through the Compression Type and Expansion Type fields, respectively.

The radio-user can also toggle Companding on or off, on a Personality basis, if the Companding menu selection is enabled.


Continuous Channel

Channels are dynamically assigned to the positions of a portable radio’s Rotary Channel Selector. The rotary has no defined start and stop positions allowing it to rotate completely around 360°. Once the rotary has moved through all rotary channel positions (see Personality Assignment), the first channel is automatically inserted in the next rotary position. This allows the rotary to have no unassigned positions.

Note:  When the Wrap Around Tone field is enabled, an alert tone will sound when the Rotary passes from the last programmed position to the first programmed position, or from the first to the last programmed position.


Continuous Zone

Zones are dynamically assigned to the positions of a portable radio’s Rotary Channel Selector. The rotary has no defined start and stop positions allowing it to rotate completely around 360°. Once the rotary has moved through all rotary zone positions (see Personality Assignment); the first zone is automatically inserted in the next rotary position. This allows the rotary to have no unassigned positions.

Note:

•	Zone positions are determined by the order that they are created in the Personality Assignment to Zone window. However they can be re-ordered, see the Zone Page.

•	When the Wrap Around Tone field is enabled, an alert tone will sound when the Rotary passes from the last programmed position to the first programmed position, or from the first to the last programmed position.


CTCSS (Glossary)
CTCSS

Acronym for Continuous Tone Coded Squelch System. A generic term for sub-audible tone/ code used to create communications groups. Also See "PL".


Cursor (Glossary)
Cursor

A flashing marker or bolded outline, or reverse video highlight. The cursor generally determines the computers focus (or lack there-of) on a software user-input field. The cursor can indicate to the computer-user what to do next in a software program.


Data Operated Squelch (DOS)

An MDC-1200 term. DOS causes the radio’s speaker to automatically mute when receiving data.


Decode (Glossary)
Decode

When the radio receives a voice or data call.


Default (Glossary)
Default

CPS suggested field values that are pre-programmed into the radio. Based on the radio model, these values may or may not be changed.


Default Drive (Glossary)
Default Drive

The hard disk or diskette-drive that the CPS uses to Read or Save data or files.


De-key (Glossary)
De-key

To release the PTT button and stop transmitting.


Dialog Box (Glossary)
Dialog Box

A window used for data entry, or to present error messages.


Digital Private Line (DPL)

Transmitted when the receiving radio is to only receive calls from radios with specific DPL codes, this creates communications groups while operating in Conventional Dispatch mode. DPL is a digital format transmitted along with the carrier. DPL allows for more use and privacy on a frequency. DPL is transmitted at a sub-audible (not able to be heard) frequency. Also known as Channel Guard, Quiet Call, and CTCSS.


Directory (Glossary)
Directory

A location created on a disk or diskette to store a group of files that are similar in content. Also known as a Folder.


Direct Channel

The Direct Channel programmable button allows the radio-user to jump to a channel within the current Zone.

•	Once the Direct Channel button is pressed, the radio-user can enter (via a Keypad) the desired channel number.

•	Once the desired channel number is input, the radio-user presses the Direct Channel button again to jump to that channel.


Direct Entry

The radio-user can manually-input the ID of a targeted radio for an MDC Radio Call.

Once the Radio Call type is selected and the Call List appears in the radio’s display, entry of an MDC Primary ID (via a keypad) is possible. Pressing the PTT button then transmits the call to the target radio of the entered ID.


Disk Drive (Glossary)
Disk Drive

A device that reads and writes information to and from a removable magnetic storage medium, known as diskettes. Disk drives can also facilitate removable hard-disk capable of a much larger portable storage capacity.


Diskette (Glossary)
Diskette

An alterable, semi-flexible, magnetic storage medium used by microcomputers to store data and files. Also called a disk, floppy, floppy disk or mini diskette. The CPS can be delivered on diskettes. A 3.5 inch diskette stores approximately 1.4 megabytes.


Display (Glossary)
Display

(a)	The computer’s screen or monitor, that displays the computers information.

(b)	The radio’s LED or LCD indicators.


DOS (Glossary)
DOS

Acronym for the computer’s Disk Operating System. See Operating System.


Dual Tone Multiple Frequency (DTMF)

A Signaling System protocol widely used in the telephone industry. Two tones are transmitted simultaneously at different amplitudes for each keypad key pressed. A sequential series of Dual Tones makes a data word.


DVM (Glossary)
DVM

Acronym for Digital Volt Meter.


EEPROM (Glossary)
EEPROM

Acronym for Electronically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory. Used by the radio microcomputer system to store the radio’s codeplug data.


Emergency Mode

When a radio is sending an Emergency transmission initiated by pressing the Emergency Button. Also see the Emergency Page.


Encode (Glossary)
Encode

When the radio transmits a voice or data call.


Enter (Glossary)
Enter

<Enter> A keyboard key which submits previous keystrokes to the computers processor, and typically moves the cursor to the next data entry field.

The Enter key is also used to initiate the functionality associated with the currently highlighted icon or button.

Synonymous with pressing Enter, or Return.


External Alarm

The External Alarm is an accessory item which connects to a mobile radio’s Accessory Connector. The External Alarm is activated by an incoming Call Alert, LS Call Light call, Emergency Decode, or MDC Message. Once activated, the External Alarm can trigger flashing headlights, a siren, or a horn.


File (Glossary)
File

A collection of data or information that is stored on a computer’s hard disk or diskette that can be read by a computer.


Field (Glossary)
Field

A data entry point in a software program where a feature’s current value is entered, selected, viewed, or edited.


Firmware

Software that controls the internal hardware components of the radio. Firmware cannot be modified with the CPS.


Floppy Disk (Glossary)
Floppy Disk

See Diskette.


Frequency

(a)	The location of the center of a channel of operation in the radio spectrum. Measured in Megahertz (MHz). A receive (one-way) or receive and transmit (two-way) path.

(b)	A computer speed. Measured in Megahertz (MHz).


Front Panel Access (FPA) (Glossary)
Front Panel Access (FPA)

Allows the ability to test radio functionality relating to: transmit and receive frequencies, buttons and keys, and the display. Refer to the ProSeries Basic Service Manual for more information.


Function Keys (Glossary)
Function Keys

The twelve keys located across the top of the PC keyboard labeled F1 to F12.


Group

A collection of radios which communicate together.


Hz (Glossary)
Hz

The abbreviation for Hertz.


Hard Disk (Glossary)
Hard Disk

An alterable magnetic storage medium with a much larger storage capacity than a diskette, typically located inside the computer’s system unit, not visible from the outside. A typical personal computer hard disk can store from 100 to 10,000 megabytes (or 10 gigabytes) of information, where a 3.5 inch diskette stores approximately 1.4 megabytes.


Hard Disk Drive (Glossary)
Hard Disk Drive

A device that reads and writes information to and from a magnetic storage medium. Hard Disk Drives facilitate removable hard drives, capable of very large portable storage capacity.


Highlight (Glossary)
Highlight

When a data entry field or icon is selected by clicking on it. This is generally represented with a bolded outline or reverse video.

To Highlight: Selecting text or a graphic by clicking and dragging across it, or by double clicking on it. Once highlighted, it can be copied, moved, or deleted.


Impolite Transmission (Glossary)
Impolite Transmission

When the radio sends a transmission, even when the current channel is busy with other radio traffic, in-effect stepping on other channel traffic.


Import Option Board Data

Allows the CPS user to import third party option board configuration data facilitating variable Option Board functionality on individual Conventional and Trunking Personalities.

•	From the CPS "File" Menu, select "Import".


Key (Keyboard) (Glossary)
Key (Keyboard)

A button on the computer’s keyboard.


Key-Up (To key the radio) (Glossary)
Key-Up (To key the radio)

The action of transmitting. (Pressing the PTT button).


kHz (Glossary)
kHz

The abbreviation for Kilohertz. One Kilohertz is equal to one thousand Hertz (Hz).


Landed Scan Mode (Glossary)
Landed Scan Mode

When in Scan Mode, and once Active Scan finds an eligible Scan List Member channel/call to receive - or unmute to, the radio is then in Landed Scan Mode.

Also, once both Transmit and Receive activity has ceased, and while the Scan Hang Timer is counting down, the radio is still in Landed Scan Mode.


Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) (Glossary)
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)

A display, monitor, or screen type typically used for portable (lap-top) computers and radios.


Light Emitting Diode (LED) (Glossary)
Light Emitting Diode (LED)

A visual indicator that flashes or glows. Usually located at the top of the radio.


LS RPTR Control GlossTop
LS RPTR Control

(Radio Configuration, Accessory Pin Selection)

DEFINITION:

The "LS RPTR Control" input pin selection allows for a more efficient data transfer method. This LS Trunking repeater control method applies only when transmitting new data messages that require a successful transmission acknowledgement (Ack). This is accomplished by not sending a repeater shut-off code at the end of a new data transmission. In not sending the shut-off code, the receiving data device or radio can return its Ack on the same channel, without having to request a channel grant and regain channel access.

On the receiving radio that is returning the Ack, "LS RPTR Control" must also be defined as a CPS input pin selection; otherwise the radio will request a channel grant even though it is not needed.

Transmitting Repeater Controlled Data Message that require an ACK:

Typically, the "Data PTT" input pin is asserted initiating a channel request to the repeater. Once the channel grant is received the "Clear To Send" output pin is activated. The data device may then activate the "LS RPTR Control" input pin, and then the new data may be transmitted.

Having the "LS RPTR Control" pin active when the "Data PTT" pin is released causes the radio to de-key without sending a repeater shut-off code.

Note: The data terminal may also activate LS Trunking Data Revert when required. In most applications Data Revert remains active until the ACK is received.

Responding to the Repeater Controlled Data Message with an ACK:

Asserting the "LS RPTR Control" input pin prior to asserting the "Data PTT" input pin (with any required delays) causes the radio to key-up and activate the "Clear To Send" output pin without having to send a channel access request to the repeater. This is possible because the received data transmission did not send a repeater shut-off code and therefore the same channel is still active.

After the ACK is transmitted, releasing the "LS RPTR Control" pin prior to releasing the "Data PTT" pin, causes the radio to send the repeater shut-off code and de-key the radio.

Note: The data terminal may also activate LS Trunking Data Revert when transmitting the acknowledgment of a successful transmission.

      Go to the Accesory Pins Page


LS Trunking Word Detect (Glossary)
LS Trunking Word Detect

Trunking Dispatch requirements which can determine when the radio unmutes to a call:

A Group ID Range Match defined by the Rx Low ID and the Rx High ID, or

A Universal ID Match.


LS Trunking Word Undetect (Glossary)
LS Trunking Word Undetect

The Trunking Dispatch requirements which can determine when the radio mutes to a call:

No Group ID Range Match defined by the Rx Low ID and the Rx High ID, or

No Universal ID Match, or

A Message Drop (out of range), or

A Disconnect Message (ending the call).


Maximum Volume Setting

This value determines the highest volume level for receive audio. This value is hard-coded into the radio and can not be changed with Customer Programming Software (CPS).


Menu (Glossary)
Menu

A drop-down list of features that can be selected by the CPS-user.


Menu Mode

The Menu/Select Key is used by the radio-user to enter the Menu Mode. Once in the Menu Mode, the Top Level Menu Options appear.


MHz (Glossary)
MHz

Abbreviation for Megahertz. One MHz is equal to one million Hertz (Hz).


Midpoint Volume Setting

This value determines the exact center of volume levels for receive audio. This value is hard-coded into the radio and can not be changed with Customer Programming Software (CPS).


Minimum Volume Setting

This value determines the lowest volume level for receive audio. This value is hard-coded into the radio and can not be changed with Customer Programming Software (CPS).


Monitor (Glossary)
Monitor

A computer component, synonymous with display, or screen.


Monitor (Silent Squelch)

The radio’s speaker Unmutes to any carrier squelch activity. Also see Monitor Type.


Motorola Data Communications (MDC)

A Motorola proprietary Signaling System protocol. A binary format using 1200 baud minimum shift keying modulation.


Mute (Glossary)
Mute

When the radio closes its speaker to receive audio.


No Channel Timer

The Radio continues attempts to gain channel access in a Polite manner for the duration of this three-minute timer.


Normal Dispatch

Occurs when; only the PTT button is pressed to initiate a call, while operating on a Conventional or Trunking Personality.

Any call type that requires the radio-user to enter into the radio’s Menu Mode (prior to transmitting) would not be considered normal dispatch.


Open Squelch

When the radio’s speaker is constantly unmuted to all channel activity. Also see Monitor Type.


Operating System (Glossary)
Operating System

A computer program that coordinates your computer’s activities, such as, memory allocation, file management, input and output operations, communications, and interfacing to other application software packages, such as CPS.


Parralel Port (Glossary)
Parallel Port

A hardware interface connection on a computer used to communicate with other hardware devices such as printers, tape drives used for backing up data, and external Disk Drives. Parallel Ports are designated by slot positions such as LPT1, and LPT2. Also see COM Ports.


Path (Glossary)
Path

The location of a directory or sub-directory on a hard disk or diskette. Paths start at the root directory of the hard disk or diskette and end at the directory containing the desired file. For example, the path C:\CPS\Codeplugs\Radio1 shows the hierarchy or ordering of directories/sub-directories the computer must descend to reach a file located in the ‘Radio1’ sub-directory. ‘CPS’ is at the highest level in the hierarchy; therefore it is a directory, not a sub-directory. ‘C:\’ is the root of the path.


Personality

Individual groupings of CPS-user defined functionality, which can be assigned to the individual channels of the radio’s Channel Selector. See Conventional and Trunking.


Phone Mode

When the radio is capable of transmitting a Phone Call. This mode is initiated and ended through a (long or short) programmable button-press or menu selection.


Polite Transmission

When the radio waits for the current Channel Selector selected channel to be free of radio traffic before attempting to transmit.


Programming Session

A programming session is initiated when codeplug information is Read into the CPS from a radio, or loaded from a codeplug file.

A programming session is ended when the current programming information is closed. This is the case either when new programming information is read or loaded, or when the CPS is closed.


Private Line (PL) (Glossary)
Private Line (PL)

A sub-audible tone/code used to create unique/private communication groups while operating in Conventional Dispatch mode. A generic term for Tone Private Line (TPL), or Digital Private Line (DPL).


PRTT (Priority Request To Talk)

Priority Request To Talk allows a radio-user to transmit a Request To Talk (RTT) to the dispatcher that is recognized as being of a higher importance. The dispatcher then chooses to allow the communication to take place before other RTT requests.


To Program

The transfer of CPS information from the computers temporary memory (RAM) to the radio via the RIB communication link, and the computer’s COM Port.


Push to Talk Button (PTT) (Glossary)
Push to Talk Button (PTT)

Used to begin transmitting a radio communication.


PTT ID (Push-To-Talk)

A PTT ID is transmitted when the PTT button is pressed for an MDC or DTMF - Signaling System enabled channel.

An Emergency PTT ID can also be defined specifically for Emergency Mode transmissions.

The Primary ID of the source radio is transmitted with the PTT ID allowing for source radio identification and Reverse Aliasing on the display of the receiving radio.

Also See: PTT ID Type.

Note: Source radio identification is only possible on the receiving radio if the Display Decode ID field is enabled on the MDC or DTMF radio channel.


Public Address System (PA)

The PA System allows for an Accessory Connector external speaker system. The radio’s hand-held microphone is the source of audio for the external speaker.

The PA system is activated with its own on/off switch. Once activated, the radio is not able to transmit a call, however, receiving a transmission is possible.


Quik-Call II (QCII)

A two-tone, sequential tone, Signaling System protocol associated with portable radios and pagers.


Radio Calls

Signaling System calls: Call Alerts, Call Alerts w/Voice, Radio Checks, and Voice Sel Cal’s. Prior to transmitting, a Radio Call type can be selected by the radio-user from the "Radio Call" menu.

Note: Currently all Radio Call types are only possible on an MDC Signaling System.


Radio Check

A Signaling System – Radio Call that allows you to check if a certain radio (or group of radios), is powered-on and in range. The radio-user receives no indication of the polling, except for a brief lighting of the LED - in red, while the radio transmits back the Radio Check acknowledgment.

Also see Radio Check Encode.


Radio ID's (Glossary)
Radio ID's

ID’s are CPS-user defined for each Signaling System. Signaling Systems can then be assigned to personalities.

MDC uses the: Primary and Group fields.

QCII uses the: Tone A, Tone B, Tone C, and Tone D fields.

DTMF uses the: Primary and Group fields.


Radio Interface Box (RIB) (Glossary)
Radio Interface Box (RIB)

Used to connect a personal computer to a radio for the purpose of communication between the two. The RIB consists of level-shifting circuits that convert from the standard RS-232 voltage levels of the computer asynchronous serial interface (COM Port), to the single-ended voltage levels present on the Serial Bus contacts of the radio’s connector. The RIB must have an appropriate RIB-to-radio and RIB-to-computer Radio Interface Cable for communication and radio programming to occur.


Radio Interface Cable (Glossary)
Radio Interface Cable

Allows the Radio Interface Box to be connected to a computer. This allows for communication between the two. Also see COM Port.


Random Access Memory (RAM) (Glossary)
Random Access Memory (RAM)

A temporary storage space used by a computer to operate a software program currently running. Anything stored in RAM is lost when the computer is turned off.


Read (Glossary)
Read

The transfer of programmed information from the radio to the computer’s temporary memory (RAM) via the RIB communication link, and the computer’s COM Port.

Read is initiated from a menu selection or a button-press.

From the Menu Bar select: File · Read Device

From the Button Bar select:


Receive Range

The LS Trunking Receive Range determines if a radio’s Transmitting ID (of a Trunking Group) qualifies for decode. The Receive Range is defined as being between or equal to the receiving radio’s Receive Low ID and its Receive High ID.


Record (Glossary)
Record

Records contain different configurations of the same types of information. For instance, several Scan Lists, or several Conventional Personalities can exist.


Release Squelch (Glossary)
Release Squelch

Creates exceptions to the Signaling Squelch Unmuting Rule (see the Auto Reset Timer Type "Selections").

The Release Squelch State begins once the radio unmutes to a Voice Call.

When Signaling Squelch is set to "Or"; and once the radio is in the Release Squelch State, only Carrier Squelch Detect is required for unmuting to re-occur, PL and Voice Call are not required.

When Signaling Squelch is set to "And"; and once the radio is in the Release Squelch state, then only the current personalities - Unmute Rules must be satisfied for unmuting to re-occur, a Voice Call is no longer required.

Note:  Trunking dispatch only supports "And" Signaling.


Repeater

Radio equipment that receives a radio transmission and then sends it out again. The re-transmitted signal ultimately increases radio range, and long-distance call clarity. Also see Talkaround Mode.


Repeater Mode

When the radio accesses a Repeater for the purpose of increasing transmission signal strength which increases range and audio clarity. Also see Talkaround Mode.


Reverse Aliasing (Glossary)
Reverse Aliasing

Reverse Aliasing allows the receiving radio-user to identify the source-radio for certain call types on an MDC or DTMF - Signaling System enabled channel.

When a (MDC or DTMF) PTT ID, MDC Call Alert, or an MDC Sel Cal is received with the unique Primary ID of the transmitting radio, and if there is a matching (MDC Individual ID or DTMF Call ID) entry in the receiving radio’s Call List for that Primary ID, the Alias for that Call List entry is automatically shown in the receiving radio’s display.

If no entry exists in the receiving radio’s Call List for the received Primary ID then Reverse Aliasing is not possible, the Primary ID is then shown in the receiving radio’s display.

Note: The Display Decode ID field must also be enabled on the receiving channel for Reverse Aliasing to take place.


Root (Glossary)
Root

The highest directory in the hierarchy Path (Tree) for a hard disk or diskette.


CPS (Glossary)
CPS

Acronym for Customer Programming Software. Licensed Motorola software used to program two-way radios with a unique set of features.


Rx (Glossary)
Rx

Acronym for Receive.


Save (Glossary)
Save

The transfer of programming information from the computer’s temporary memory (RAM) to a computer file.

Save is initiated from a menu selection or a button-press.

From the Menu Bar select: File · Save

From the Button Bar select:


Scan Mode

When the radio is in one of the two Scan States, Active Scan and Landed Scan. This mode is initiated automatically through Auto Scan, or through a short-press of a programmable button, or a radio-user menu selection. The radio’s LED flashes green while Actively Scanning in the Scan Mode.


Sel Cal (Select Call)

A Signaling System – Radio Call that allows you to selectively call a radio or group of radios based on Call List - Individual, Group, and Fleet ID's.

It allows for dispatch/announcement type messages. It is not intended to provide privacy, but to eliminate users from receiving unwanted traffic. Also known as a Voice Sel Cal.

Also see Sel Cal Encode.


Software (Glossary)
Software

A set of computer instructions that controls input and produces desired output. The Customer Programming Software (CPS) allows customer input that ultimately programs radios with its output.


Squelch (Glossary)
Squelch

(a)	To cut off or end a transmission due to a lack of signal wave strength (see Squelch Setting).

(b)	A radio circuit which eliminates noise from the radio’s speaker.


Squelch Tail (Glossary)
Squelch Tail

An intrusive noise that is emitted while the transmission of Carrier is fading.


Sticky Permanent Monitor Mode (Glossary)
Sticky Permanent Monitor Mode

Sticky Permanent Monitor Mode occurs when holding the short-press Monitor Button for a Long Press duration. Once the long-press occurs, the radio remains in Monitor Mode until the Monitor Button is short pressed. Initiating Emergency Mode, Phone Mode, Scan Mode, or a Radio Call will also cancel Sticky Permanent Monitor mode.

This feature only applies for channels capable of Conventional Dispatch.


Sub-directories (Glossary)
Sub-directories

Used to organize a hard disk or diskette by groupings of related files. Also known as Sub-folders. See Path.


Tab (Glossary)
Tab

<Tab> A keyboard key which is typically used to move the cursor to the next data entry field in a software program. The Key combination of <Shift> <Tab> typically moves the cursor back to the previous data entry field.


Talkaround Mode

Radio to Radio communications in close proximity. Communicating without the use of a Repeater to boost the signal.

In Talkaround Mode the Rx Parameters are used in place of the Tx Parameters when transmitting. If the Rx Parameters and Tx Parameters are programmed to the same setting for a Conventional Personality, the personality is in affect in a constant Talkaround mode.

Also see Talkaround.


Tone Private Line (TPL)

Transmitted when the receiving radio is to only receive calls from radios with specific TPL codes, this creates communications groups while operating in Conventional Dispatch mode. TPL allows for more use and privacy on a frequency. TPL is transmitted at a sub-audible (not able to be heard) frequency. Also known as Channel Guard, Quiet Call, and CTCSS.


Trunking Site File Import (Glossary)
Trunking Site File Import

Trunking Site configurations may be imported from an archived file. Site File Import allows the CPS-user to obtain duplicate Site File configurations for accelerated CPS radio programming. Only one Site File may be imported at a time.

•	From the Menu Bar select: File · Import.

•	The Open dialog box appears.

•	From the Open dialog box, browse to the location where the Site File has been stored.

•	Click Open.

•	Select the Trunking Site File you wish to Import.

•	Click Open.


Trunking Site File Export (Glossary)
Trunking Site File Export

Trunking Site definitions may be exported to an archive file for retrieval at a later time. This allows the CPS-user to duplicate Site File configurations for use on another radio. Only one Site File may be exported at a time.

Note: All twenty repeaters must be selected for export with a Site File.

•	From the Menu Bar select: File · Export

•	A Professional Radio CPS Warning dialog box appears stating "You Must Select All 20 Repeaters for an LS Trunking Site Export. Please use the Select All Button."

•	Click OK.

•	The LS Trunking Site dialog box appears.

•	From the LS Trunking Site window, select the Trunking Site you wish to export.

•	From the LS Trunking Site Repeaters window, click "Select All".

•	Click OK.

•	From the "Save Copy As" dialog box, browse to the location where the file should be saved and give the file an appropriate name.

•	Click OK.


Tx (Glossary)
Tx

Acronym for Transmit.


Unit ID

The electronic tuning/alignment information of a particular radio.


Unmute (Glossary)
Unmute

When the radio opens its speaker to receive audio.


Voice Call (Glossary)
Voice Call

Signaling System calls: A Voice Sel Cal, or a Call Alert with Voice.


Voice Sel Cal (Select Call)

A Signaling System – Radio Call that allows you to selectively call a radio or group of radios based on Call List - Individual, Group, and Fleet ID's.

It allows for dispatch/announcement type messages. It is not intended to provide privacy, but to eliminate users from receiving unwanted traffic. Also known as a Sel Cal.

Also see Sel Cal Encode.


Write (Glossary)
Write

The transfer of programming information from the computers temporary memory (RAM) to the radio via the RIB communication link, and the computer’s COM Port.

Write is initiated from a menu selection or a button-press.

From the Menu Bar select: File · Write Device

From the Button Bar select:

Also see Upgrade.


Upgrade (Glossary)
Upgrade

DEFINITION:

If the archive file does not support some features while the target radio supports them, CPS above version R06.05.03 will allow the radio to be written. This function is called UPGRADE. The source archive program settings shall be preserved after upgrade. Note that CPS versions below and including R06.05.03 will forbid the writing action if the archive file features are not identical to the target radio features.

• CAN UPGRADE

1. Basic parameters between the archive file and the target radio are identical, e.g. ten-digit model number, major codeplug version and so on.

2. The archive file does not support some features while the target radio supports them, e.g. DTMF signaling system relative features and so on.

3. The frequency in the archive file can be supported by the target radio frequency range.

If all the above three conditions can be met when writing radio, CPS will display a warning message as Figure 1 and allow the radio to be written.

Figure 1: Upgrading Warning Message box

CPS will allow writing the radio by choosing ‘OK’ button while give up writing the radio by choosing ‘Cancel’ button.

Note that after writing radio, the codeplug version and tanapa number of the target radio will not be changed.

• CAN NOT UPGRADE

Over time, certain features of models are subject to be obsolete or new features may be added.  Upon attempting to write older version archives into newer version models, the older archives may no longer be compatible or upgradeable.

If ten-digit model number between the archive file and the target radio is not identical when writing radio, CPS will display a error message as Figure 2 and forbid the radio to be written.

Figure 2: Model Number Mismatch Error Message Box

If the codeplug structures between the archive file and the target radio are different when writing radio, CPS will display a error message as Figure 3 and forbid the radio to be written.

 Figure 3: Codeplug Structure Mismatch Error Message Box

If the archive file supports some features while the target radio does not support them when writing radio, CPS will display a error message as Figure 4 and forbid the radio to be written.

Figure 4: Features Incompatible Error Message Box

If a channel frequency in the archive file is out of the frequency range in target radio when writing radio, CPS will display a error message as Figure 5 and forbid the radio to be written.

Figure 5: Channel Frequency Out Of Range Error Message Box

If the major codeplug version between the archive file and the target radio is not identical when writing radio, CPS will display a error message as Figure 6 and forbid the radio to be written.

Figure 6: Major Version Mismatch Error Message Box


Zone

An assignment of Conventional Personalities or Trunking Groups to the individual channels of the radio’s Channel Selector. Each zone created for the radio offers the ability to increase the total number of the radio’s channels by sixteen. Zones can then be selected by the radio-user through a programmable-button press, Rotary selection, or menu choice.

Also see Personality Assignment.


Active Level

The Active Level is the voltage setting for the Accessory Connector’s fully programmable pins.

• See More Information


Active Scan Mode

When in Scan Mode, and when the radio is rapidly moving through the Scan List Member channels looking for eligible transmission activity to receive - or unmute to. The radio’s LED flashes green during active scan.

• See More Information


Arrow Keys

The keyboard up · , down · , left · , or right · selectors, which allow the user to navigate or move the cursor.

• See More Information


Asynchronous Communications

A method of data communications in which information is transmitted one character at a time, with no specific starting time. Each character is preceded by a start bit and followed by one (or more) stop bit(s).


Bandwidth

The Width of the frequency band that is available for radio transmissions.

• See More Information


Calibration

The means of teaching the radio how to adjust itself for optimum performance. To Calibrate.


Call Alert

A Signaling System – Radio Call that allows a dispatcher or radio-caller to notify a targeted radio-user (or group of radios-users) of a missed call.

• See More Information


Call Alert w/Voice

A combination of a Voice Sel Cal and a Call Alert.

• See More Information


Call Alert Member #1, #2, and #3

These button-presses allow the radio-user to quickly and easily Call Alert Call List Member #1, Call List Member #2, or Call List Member #3.

For example, when pressing the “Call Alert Member #1” button, the Alias for Call List member #1 appears in the radio’s display. Pressing the PTT button then transmits the Call Alert to Call List member #1.

Additionally as a convenience, prior to the PTT button being pressed, the radio-user is able to select to Call Alert any Call List member in Call List position 1 to 9. For example, when pressing the “Call Alert Member #2” the Alias for Call List member #2 appears in the radio’s display. At this point selecting any number 1 to 9 on the radio’s keypad then retrieves the Alias for that selected member (1 to 9) in the radio’s display, and again, pressing the PTT button then transmits the Call Alert to the desired Call List member (1 to 9).

• See More Information


Sel Cal Member #1, #2, & #3

These button-presses allow the radio-user to quickly and easily Sel Cal Call List Member #1, Call List Member #2, or Call List Member #3.

For example, when pressing the “Sel Cal Member #1” button, the Alias for Call List member #1 appears in the radio’s display. Pressing the PTT button then transmits the Sel Cal to Call List member #1.

Additionally as a convenience, prior to the PTT button being pressed, the radio-user is able to select to Sel Cal any Call List member in Call List position 1 to 9. For example, when pressing the “Sel Cal Member #2” the Alias for Call List member #2 appears in the radio’s display. At this point selecting any number 1 to 9 on the radio’s keypad then retrieves the Alias for that selected member (1 to 9) in the radio’s display, and again, pressing the PTT button then transmits the Sel Cal to the desired Call List member (1 to 9).

• See More Information


Speed Call Alert

This button-press allows the radio-user to quickly and easily Call Alert Call List members.

For example, when pressing the “Speed Call Alert” button, the Alias of the last called Call List member appears in the radio’s display. Pressing the PTT button then transmits the Call Alert to this Call List member. However pressing 1 to 9 on the radio’s keypad retrieves the Alias of that selected member (1 to 9) in the radio’s display, and again, pressing the PTT button then transmits the Call Alert to the desired Call List member (1 to 9).

• See More Information


Speed Sel Cal

This button-press allows the radio-user to quickly and easily Sel Cal Call List members.

For example, when pressing the “Speed Sel Cal” button, the Alias of the last called Call List member appears in the radio’s display. Pressing the PTT button then transmits the Sel Cal to this Call List member. However pressing 1 to 9 on the radio’s keypad retrieves the Alias of that selected member (1 to 9) in the radio’s display, and again, pressing the PTT button then transmits the Sel Cal to the desired Call List member (1 to 9).

• See More Information


 Call Light

A visual indicator (yellow LED) that flashes when a Call Alert or Voice Sel Cal is received.

• See More Information


Carrier

An electromagnetic signal that is transmitted on a selected frequency for the purpose of carrying voice or data transmissions along with it. Carrier can then be received by all radios listening on that frequency.


Carrier Squelch (CSQ)

When the carrier energy exceeds the CPS-selected or radio-designated carrier energy threshold, known as the Squelch Setting/Threshold.

• See More Information


Carrier Squelch Detect

When the carrier energy exceeds the CPS-selected or radio-designated carrier energy threshold, known as the Squelch Setting/Threshold.

Carrier is an electromagnetic signal that is transmitted on a selected frequency for the purpose of carrying voice or data transmissions along with it. Carrier can then be received by all radios listening on that frequency.

• See More Information


Channel

A single path separated by frequency or time divisions used for transmitting and or receiving voice and or data.

Unique radio channel functionality can be assigned to Zones, and then assigned to the radio’s Channel Selector as individual Conventional Personalities or Trunking Groups. See Personality Assignment.

• See More Information


Codeplug

A solid-state chip inside a radio where the radio’s personality data is stored. Personality data is created using the Motorola Customer Programming Software (CPS). CPS defined data can be transferred to the radio’s chip or to a codeplug file. Codeplug files can be archived on the computer’s hard drive for later use.

• See More Information


Communications Port (COM Port)

A serial hardware interface connection at the back of a computer used to communicate with other hardware devices, such as radios, modems, and printers. Also known as a Serial Port. COM Ports are designated by slot positions such as COM1, COM2, COM3, COM4.When programming a radio, the computer is connected to the radio with a RIB cable via the COM port. The computer’s CPS Com Port settings are independent of each other and apply to the Read and Write features.

Note: This gives you the ability to quickly Read the codeplug information from one radio and then Write that same programming information to another radio.

Important Note: The Com Port settings for the CPS can only be selected from the File menu. Select: File · Read, or File · Write.

• See More Information


Companding Mode

Companding is a new standard feature in the cellular phone industry and is supported industry-wide. The purpose of Companding is to reduce radio and airway noise, thus enhancing audio clarity.

Companding is active when Full Compression and Full Expansion are used for transmitting and receiving, respectively. Full Compression and Full Expansion can be selected through the Compression Type and Expansion Type fields, respectively.

The radio-user can also toggle Companding on or off, on a Personality basis, if the Companding menu selection is enabled.

• See More Information


Continuous Channel

Channels are dynamically assigned to the positions of a portable radio’s Rotary Channel Selector. The rotary has no defined start and stop positions allowing it to rotate completely around 360°. Once the rotary has moved through all rotary channel positions (see Personality Assignment); the first channel is automatically inserted in the next rotary position. This allows the rotary to have no unassigned positions.

• See More Information


Continuous Zone

Zones are dynamically assigned to the positions of a portable radio’s Rotary Channel Selector. The rotary has no defined start and stop positions allowing it to rotate completely around 360°. Once the rotary has moved through all rotary zone positions (see Personality Assignment); the first zone is automatically inserted in the next rotary position. This allows the rotary to have no unassigned positions.

• See More Information


CTCSS

Acronym for Continuous Tone Coded Squelch System. A generic term for sub-audible tone/ code used to create communications groups. Also See “PL”.


Cursor

A flashing marker or bolded outline, or reverse video highlight. The cursor generally determines the computers focus (or lack there-of) on a software user-input field. The cursor can indicate to the computer-user what to do next in a software program.

• See More Information


Data Operated Squelch (DOS)

DOS causes the radio’s speaker to automatically mute when receiving MDC Signaling data. This helps to reduce unwanted noise.


Decode

When the radio receives a voice or data call.


Default

CPS suggested field values that are pre-programmed into the radio. Based on the radio model, these values may or may not be changed.

• See More Information


Default Drive

The hard disk or diskette-drive that the CPS uses to Read or Save data or files.

• See More Information


De-key

To release the PTT button and stop transmitting.

• See More Information


Dialog Box

A window used for data entry, or to present error messages.


Digital Private Line (DPL)

Transmitted when the receiving radio is to only receive calls from radios with specific DPL codes, this creates communications groups while operating in Conventional Dispatch mode. DPL is a digital format transmitted along with the carrier. DPL allows for more use and privacy on a frequency. DPL is transmitted at a sub-audible (not able to be heard) frequency. Also known as Channel Guard, Quiet Call, and CTCSS.

• See More Information


Direct Channel

The Direct Channel programmable button allows the radio-user to jump to a channel within the current Zone.

•	Once the Direct Channel button is pressed, the radio-user can enter (via a Keypad) the desired channel number.

•	Once the desired channel number is input, the radio-user presses the Direct Channel button again to jump to that channel.

• See More Information


Direct Entry

The radio-user can manually-input the ID of a targeted radio for an MDC Radio Call.

• See More Information


Directory

A location created on a disk or diskette to store a group of files that are similar in content. Also known as a Folder.


Disk Drive

A device that reads and writes information to and from a removable magnetic storage medium, known as diskettes. Disk drives can also facilitate removable hard-drives capable of a much larger portable storage capacity.

• See More Information


Diskette

An alterable, semi-flexible, magnetic storage medium used by microcomputers to store data and files. Also called a disk, floppy, floppy disk or mini diskette. The CPS can be delivered on diskettes. A 3.5 inch diskette stores approximately 1.4 megabytes.

• See More Information


Display

(a) The computer’s screen or monitor, that displays the computers information.

(b) The radio’s LED or LCD indicators.

• See More Information


DOS

Acronym for the computer’s Disk Operating System. See Operating System.

• See More Information


Dual Tone Multiple Frequency (DTMF)

A Signaling System protocol widely used in the telephone industry. Two tones are transmitted simultaneously at different amplitudes for each keypad key press. A sequential series of Dual Tones makes a data word.

• See More Information


DVM

Acronym for Digital Volt Meter.


EEPROM

Acronym for Electronically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory. Used by the radio microcomputer system to store the radio’s codeplug data.

• See More Information


Emergency Mode

When a radio is sending an Emergency transmission initiated by pressing the Emergency Button. Also see the Emergency Page.

• See More Information


Encode

When the radio transmits a voice or data call.


Enter

<Enter> A keyboard key which submits previous keystrokes to the computers processor, and typically moves the cursor to the next data entry field.

The Enter key is also used to initiate the functionality associated with the currently highlighted icon or button.

Synonymous with pressing Enter, or Return.

• See More Information


External Alarm

The External Alarm is an accessory item which connects to a mobile radio’s Accessory Connector. The External Alarm is activated by an incoming Call Alert, LS Call Light call, Emergency Decode, or MDC Message. Once activated, the External Alarm can trigger flashing headlights, a siren, or a horn.

• See More Information


File

A collection of data or information that is stored on a computer’s hard disk or diskette that can be read by a computer.

• See More Information


Field

A data entry point in a software program where a feature’s current value is entered, selected, viewed, or edited.


Firmware

Software that controls the internal hardware components of the radio. Firmware cannot be modified with the CPS.

• See More Information


Floppy Disk

See Diskette.

• See More Information


Frequency

(a)	The location of the center of a channel of operation in the radio spectrum. Measured in Megahertz (MHz). A receive (one-way) or receive and transmit (two-way) path.

(b)	A computer speed. Measured in Megahertz (MHz).

• See More Information


Front Panel Access (FPA)

Allows the ability to test radio functionality relating to: transmit and receive frequencies, buttons and keys, and the display. Refer to the ProSeries Basic Service Manual for more information.

• See More Information


Function Keys

The twelve keys located across the top of the PC keyboard labeled F1 to F12.


Group

A collection of radios which communicate together.


Hz

The abbreviation for Hertz.


Hard Disk

An alterable magnetic storage medium with a much larger storage capacity than a diskette, typically located inside the computer’s system unit, not visible from the outside. A typical personal computer hard disk can store from 100 to 10,000 megabytes (or 10 gigabytes) of information, where a 3.5 inch diskette stores approximately 1.4 megabytes.

• See More Information


Hard Disk Drive

A device that reads and writes information to and from a magnetic storage medium. Hard Disk Drives facilitate removable hard drives, capable of very large portable storage capacity.

• See More Information


Highlight

When a data entry field or icon is selected by clicking on it. This is generally represented with a bolded outline or reverse video.

To Highlight: Selecting text or a graphic by clicking and dragging across it, or by double clicking on it. Once highlighted, it can be copied, moved, or deleted.

• See More Information


Impolite Transmission

When the radio sends a transmission, even when the current channel is busy with other radio traffic, in-effect stepping on other channel traffic.

• See More Information


Import Option Board Data

Allows the CPS user to import third party option board configuration data facilitating variable Option Board functionality on individual Conventional and Trunking Personalities.

• See More Information


Key (Keyboard)

A button on the computer’s keyboard.


Key-Up (To key the radio)

The action of transmitting. (Pressing the PTT button).

• See More Information


kHz

The abbreviation for Kilohertz. One Kilohertz is equal to one thousand Hertz (Hz).


Landed Scan Mode

When in Scan Mode, and once Active Scan finds an eligible Scan List Member channel/call to receive - or unmute to, the radio is then in Landed Scan Mode.

Also, once both Transmit and Receive activity has ceased, and while the Scan Hang Timer is counting down, the radio is still in Landed Scan Mode.

• See More Information


Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)

A display, monitor, or screen type typically used for portable (lap-top) computers and radios.

• See More Information


Light Emitting Diode (LED)

A visual indicator that flashes or glows. Usually located at the top of the radio.

• See More Information


LS RPTR Control

The "LS RPTR Control" input pin selection allows for a more efficient data transfer method. This LS Trunking repeater control method applies only when transmitting new data messages that require a successful transmission acknowledgement (Ack). This is accomplished by not sending a repeater shut-off code at the end of a new data transmission. In not sending the shut-off code, the receiving data device or radio can return its Ack on the same channel without having to request a channel grant and regain channel access.

• See More Information


LS Trunking Word Detect

Trunking Dispatch requirements which can determine when the radio unmutes to a Trunking call:

A Group ID Range Match defined by the Rx Low ID and the Rx High ID, or

A Universal ID Match.

• See More Information


LS Trunking Word Undetect:

Trunking Dispatch requirements which can determine when the radio mutes to the current Trunking call:

No Group ID Range Match defined by the Rx Low ID and the Rx High ID, or

No Universal ID Match, or

A Message Drop (out of range), or

A Disconnect Message (ending the call).

• See More Information


Maximum Volume Setting

This value determines the highest volume level for receive audio. This value is hard-coded into the radio and can not be changed with Customer Programming Software (CPS).


Motorola Data Communications (MDC)

A Motorola proprietary Signaling System protocol. A binary format using 1200 baud minimum shift keying modulation.

• See More Information


Menu

A drop-down list of features that can be selected by the CPS-user.

• See More Information


Menu Mode

The Menu/Select Key is used by the radio-user to enter the Menu Mode. Once in the Menu Mode, the Top Level Menu Options appear.

• See More Information


MHz

Abbreviation for Megahertz. One MHz is equal to one million Hertz (Hz).


Midpoint Volume Setting

This value determines the exact center of volume levels for receive audio. This value is hard-coded into the radio and can not be changed with Customer Programming Software (CPS).


Minimum Volume Setting

This value determines the lowest volume level for receive audio. This value is hard-coded into the radio and can not be changed with Customer Programming Software (CPS).


Monitor

A computer component, synonymous with display, or screen.

• See More Information


Monitor (Silent Squelch)

The radio’s speaker Unmutes to any carrier squelch activity. Also see Monitor Type.

• See More Information


Mute

When the radio closes its speaker to receive audio.


No Channel Timer

The Radio continues attempts to gain channel access in a Polite manner for the duration of this three-minute timer.

• See More Information


Normal Dispatch

Occurs when; only the PTT button is pressed to initiate a call, while operating on a Conventional or Trunking Personality.

Any call type that requires the radio-user to enter into the radio’s Menu Mode (prior to transmitting) would not be considered normal dispatch.

• See More Information


Operating System

A computer program that coordinates your computer’s activities, such as, memory allocation, file management, input and output operations, communications, and interfacing to other application software packages, such as CPS.

• See More Information


Open Squelch

When the radio’s speaker is constantly unmuted to all channel activity. Also see Monitor Type.

• See More Information


Path

The location of a directory or sub-directory on a hard disk or diskette. Paths start at the root directory of the hard disk or diskette and end at the directory containing the desired file. For example, the path C:\CPS\Codeplugs\Radio1 shows the hierarchy or ordering of directories/sub-directories the computer must descend to reach a file located in the ‘Radio1’ sub-directory. ‘CPS’ is at the highest level in the hierarchy; therefore it is a directory, not a sub-directory. ‘C:\’ is the root of the path.

• See More Information


Parallel Port

A hardware interface connection on a computer used to communicate with other hardware devices such as printers, tape drives used for backing up data, and external Disk Drives. Parallel Ports are designated by slot positions such as LPT1, and LPT2. Also see COM Ports.

• See More Information


Personality

Individual groupings of CPS-user defined functionality, which can be assigned to the individual channels of the radio’s Channel Selector. See Conventional and Trunking.

• See More Information


Phone Mode

When the radio is capable of transmitting a Phone Call. This mode is initiated and ended through a (long or short) programmable button-press or menu selection.

• See More Information


Polite Transmission

When the radio waits for the current Channel Selector selected channel to be free of radio traffic before attempting to transmit.

• See More Information


Private Line (PL)

A sub-audible tone/code used to create unique/private communication groups while operating in Conventional Dispatch mode. A generic term for Tone Private Line (TPL), or Digital Private Line (DPL).

• See More Information


PRTT (Priority Request To Talk)

Priority Request To Talk allows a radio-user to transmit a Request To Talk (RTT) to the dispatcher that is recognized as being of a higher importance. The dispatcher then chooses to allow the communication to take place before other RTT requests.

• See More Information


To Program

The transfer of CPS information from the computers temporary memory (RAM) to the radio via the RIB communication link, and the computer’s COM Port.

• See More Information


Programming Session

A programming session is initiated when codeplug information is Read into the CPS from a radio, or loaded from a codeplug file.

A programming session is ended when the current programming information is closed. This is the case either when new programming information is read or loaded, or when the CPS is closed.

• See More Information


Public Address System (PA)

The PA System is an Accessory Connector external speaker system. The radio’s hand-held microphone is the source of audio for the external speaker.

• See More Information


Push to Talk (PTT)

Used to begin transmitting a radio communication.

• See More Information


PTT ID (Push-To-Talk)

A PTT ID is transmitted when the PTT button is pressed for an MDC or DTMF - Signaling System enabled channel.

• See More Information


Quik-Call II (QCII)

A two-tone, sequential tone, Signaling System protocol associated with portable radios and pagers.

• See More Information


Radio Calls

Signaling System calls: Call Alerts, Call Alerts w/Voice, Radio Checks, and Voice Sel Cal’s. Prior to transmitting, a Radio Call type can be selected by the radio-user from the “Radio Call” menu.

• See More Information


Radio Check

A Signaling System – Radio Call that allows you to check if a certain radio (or group of radios), is powered-on and in range. The radio-user receives no indication of the polling, except for a brief lighting of the LED – in red, while the radio transmits back the Radio Check acknowledgment.

• See More Information


Radio ID's

ID’s are CPS-user defined for each Signaling System. Signaling Systems can then be assigned to personalities.

MDC uses the: Primary and Group fields.

QCII uses the: Tone A, Tone B, Tone C, and Tone D fields.

DTMF uses the: Primary and Group fields.

• See More Information


Radio Interface Box (RIB)

Used to connect a personal computer to a radio for the purpose of communication between the two. The RIB consists of level-shifting circuits that convert from the standard RS-232 voltage levels of the computer asynchronous serial interface (COM Port), to the single-ended voltage levels present on the Serial Bus contacts of the radio’s connector. The RIB must have an appropriate RIB-to-radio and RIB-to-computer Radio Interface Cable for communication and radio programming to occur.

• See More Information


Radio Interface Cable

Allows the Radio Interface Box to be connected to a computer. This allows for communication between the two. Also see COM Port.

• See More Information


Random Access Memory (RAM)

A temporary storage space used by a computer to operate a software program currently running. Anything stored in RAM is lost when the computer is turned off.

• See More Information


Read

The transfer of programmed information from the radio to the computer’s temporary memory (RAM) via the RIB communication link, and the computer’s COM Port.

Read is initiated from a menu selection or a button-press.

From the Menu Bar select: File · Read Device

From the Button Bar select:

• See More Information


Receive Range

The LS Trunking Receive Range determines if a radio’s Transmitting ID (of a Trunking Group) qualifies for decode. The Receive Range is defined as being between or equal to the receiving radio’s Receive Low ID and its Receive High ID.

• See More Information


Record

Records contain different configurations of the same types of information. For instance, several Scan Lists, or several Conventional Personalities can exist.

• See More Information


Release Squelch

Creates exceptions to the Signaling Squelch Unmuting Rule (see the Auto Reset Timer Type “Selections”).

The Release Squelch State begins once the radio unmutes to a Voice Call.

When Signaling Squelch is set to “Or”; and once the radio is in the Release Squelch State, only Carrier Squelch Detect is required for unmuting to re-occur, PL and Voice Call are not required.

When Signaling Squelch is set to “And”; and once the radio is in the Release Squelch state, then only the current personalities - Unmute Rules must be satisfied for unmuting to re-occur, a Voice Call is no longer required.

Note:  Trunking dispatch only supports “And” Signaling.

• See More Information


Repeater

Radio equipment that receives a radio transmission and then sends it out again. The re-transmitted signal ultimately increases radio range, and long-distance call clarity. Also see Talkaround Mode.

• See More Information


Repeater Mode

When the radio accesses a Repeater for the purpose of increasing transmission signal strength which increases range and audio clarity. Also see Talkaround Mode.

• See More Information


Reverse Aliasing

Reverse Aliasing allows the receiving radio-user to identify the source-radio for certain call types on an MDC or DTMF - Signaling System enabled channel.

• See More Information


Root

The highest directory level in the heiarchy path (Tree) for a hard disk or diskette.

• See More Information


CPS

Acronym for Customer Programming Software. Licensed Motorola software used to program two-way radios with a unique set of features.

• See More Information


Rx

Acronym for Receive.


Save

The transfer of programming information from the computer’s temporary memory (RAM) to a computer file.

Save is initiated from a menu selection or a button-press.

From the Menu Bar select: File · Save

From the Button Bar select:

• See More Information


Scan Mode

When the radio is in one of the two Scan States, Active Scan and Landed Scan. This mode is initiated automatically through Auto Scan, or through a short-press of a programmable button, or a radio-user menu selection. The radio’s LED flashes green while Actively Scanning in the Scan Mode.

• See More Information


Sel Cal (Select Call)

A Signaling System – Radio Call that allows you to selectively call a radio or group of radios based on Call List - Individual, Group, and Fleet ID's.

• See More Information


Software

A set of computer instructions that controls input and produces desired output. The Customer Programming Software (CPS) allows customer input that ultimately programs radios with its output.

• See More Information


Squelch

(a)	To cut off or end a transmission due to a lack of signal wave strength (see Squelch Setting).

(b)	A radio circuit which eliminates noise from the radio’s speaker.

• See More Information


Squelch Tail

An intrusive noise that is emitted while the transmission of Carrier is fading.

• See More Information


Sticky Permanent Monitor Mode

Sticky Permanent Monitor Mode occurs when holding the short-press Monitor Button for a Long Press duration. Once the long-press occurs, the radio remains in Monitor Mode until the Monitor Button is short pressed. Initiating Emergency Mode, Phone Mode, Scan Mode, or a Radio Call will also cancel Sticky Permanent Monitor mode.

This feature only applies for channels capable of Conventional Dispatch.

• See More Information


Sub-directories

Used to organize a hard disk or diskette by groupings of related files. Also known as Sub-folders. See Path.

• See More Information


Tab

<Tab> A keyboard key which is typically used to move the cursor to the next data entry field in a software program. The Key combination of <Shift> <Tab> typically moves the cursor back to the previous data entry field.

• See More Information


Talkaround Mode

Radio to Radio communications in close proximity. Communicating without the use of a Repeater to boost the signal.

In Talkaround Mode the Rx Parameters are used in place of the Tx Parameters when transmitting. If the Rx Parameters and Tx Parameters are programmed to the same setting for a Conventional Personality, the personality is in affect in a constant Talkaround mode.

Also see Talkaround.

• See More Information


Tone Private Line (TPL)

Transmitted when the receiving radio is to only receive calls from radios with specific TPL codes, this creates communications groups while operating in Conventional Dispatch mode. TPL allows for more use and privacy on a frequency. TPL is transmitted at a sub-audible (not able to be heard) frequency. Also known as Channel Guard, Quiet Call, and CTCSS.

• See More Information


Trunking Site File Import

Trunking Site configurations may be imported from an archived file. Site File Import allows the CPS-user to obtain duplicate Site File configurations for accelerated CPS radio programming. Only one Site File may be imported at a time.

• See More Information


Trunking Site File Export

Trunking Site definitions may be exported to an archive file for retrieval at a later time. This allows the CPS-user to duplicate Site File configurations for use on another radio. Only one Site File may be exported at a time.

• See More Information


Tx

Acronym for Transmit.


Unit ID

The electronic tuning/alignment information of a particular radio.


Unmute

When the radio opens its speaker to receive audio.


Voice Call

Signaling System calls: A Voice Sel Cal, or a Call Alert with Voice.

• See More Information


Voice Sel Cal

A Signaling System – Radio Call that allows you to selectively call a radio or group of radios based on Call List - Individual, Group, and Fleet ID's.

• See More Information


Write

The transfer of programming information from the computers temporary memory (RAM) to the radio via the RIB communication link, and the computer’s COM Port.

Write is initiated from a menu selection or a button-press.

From the Menu Bar select: File · Write Device

From the Button Bar select:

• See More Information


Zone

An assignment of Conventional Personalities or Trunking Groups to the individual channels of the radio’s Channel Selector. Each zone created for the radio offers the ability to increase the total number of the radio’s channels by sixteen. Zones can then be selected by the radio-user through a programmable-button press, Rotary selection, or menu choice.

• See More Information


Auto Reset Timer Type

Selects the Timer or Manual rule having to do with Release Squelch Signaling Systems.

Release Squelch temporarily adds an exception to the Signaling Squelch Unmuting Rule. That is, once a Voice Call has been received, and then Muting occurs, for the radio to Unmute again during the Auto timer, or Manual duration, Voice Call is temporarily not required for the Unmuting to occur. Therefore, when the radio is in the Release Squelch state, only the radio’s Unmute Rules are then required to receive a call.

Once Release Squelch ends, by Auto timer expiration, or by the radio-user Manually pressing the Monitor button, the full Signaling Squelch Unmuting Rules are again required for unmuting to occur.

When Signaling Squelch is set to ‘Or’, and during the Release Squelch state, only Carrier Squelch Detect is required to unmute the radio.

• See More Information


Call List/Call List Member Window

A listing that allows the radio-user to select a Call List Member, then allows the radio-user to transmit to that Member’s radio, or group of radios. Call List Members are defined by a Signaling System type and other CPS-user defined functionality.

• See More Information


Conventional Personality

The Conventional Personality window allows you to create and delete Conventional Personalities, as well as define individual Conventional Personality functionality. Conventional dispatch is one of the two dispatch modes. The other dispatch type is LS Trunking. Conventional channels can only communicate to radios operating on Conventional channels.

• See More Information


Phone List/Members

The Phone List Page allows you to add and delete phone numbers, and correlating aliases, to the Phone List. The first nine entries/Members in this list can be programmed for one-touch Speed Dialing. Flexible functionality is assigned to the Phone List through individual Phone Systems.

• See More Information


• See More Information


Rx Parameters (Glossary)
Rx Parameters Include:

(Conventional Personality)

Rx Frequency Rx Squelch Type Rx TPL Frequency TRx TPL Code	Rx DPL Code Rx DPL Invert Rx System


Scan List/Scan List Members

The Scan List Information window allows you to create and delete Scan Lists, as well as define individual Scan List functionality. A Scan List contains groupings of Conventional Personalities and or Trunking Groups that make up Scan List Member channels. This list of Scan List Member channels can then be scanned for transmission activity - one at a time, when the radio is in Scan Mode.

• See More Information


• See More Information


Tx Parameters (Glossary)
Tx Parameters Include:

(Conventional Personality)

Tx Frequency Tx Squelch Type Tx TPL Frequency Tx TPL Code	Tx DPL Code Tx DPL Invert Tx System


Trunking Personality

The LS Trunking Personality window allows you to create and delete Trunking Personalities, as well as define individual Trunking Personality functionality. LS Trunking dispatch is one of the two dispatch modes. The other dispatch type is Conventional. Trunking channels can only communicate to radios operating on Trunking channels.

• See More Information


Top Level Menu Options

Top Level Menu Options include: System Scan Menu, All Group Scan Menu, Program Lists Menu, Phone Menu, Radio Call Menu, Zone Menu, Utilities Menu, Repeater/Talkaround Menu, Audio/Tones Menu, and the Voice Storage Menu.

• See More Information


Squelch Threshold

A measurement of the strength of an incoming transmission. If the incoming signal is not strong enough to produce a clear transmission, then it should not be heard. This helps to filter out unwanted noise.


High/Low Power

This allows the radio-user to adjust the Transmit Power setting (radio-wide) to ‘High’ or ‘Low’. The purpose of this feature is to extend radio battery-life whenever possible. The CPS-user Tx Power Level fields set a default power level when transmitting for individual Conventional Personalities and Trunking Groups.

• See More Information


High/Low Power

This allows the radio-user to adjust the Transmit Power setting (radio-wide) to ‘High’ or ‘Low’. The purpose of this feature is to extend radio battery-life whenever possible. The CPS-user Tx Power Level fields set a default power level when transmitting for individual Conventional Personalities and Trunking Groups.


Phone Mode

This allows the radio-user to enter the Phone Mode, which is when the radio is capable of transmitting phone calls. This is especially needed when the radio is a non-display model. For display models, the radio-user can enter the Phone Mode with the ‘Phone’ menu selection.

• See More Information


Phone Mode

This allows the radio-user to enter the Phone Mode, which is when the radio is capable of transmitting phone calls. This is especially needed when the radio is a non-display model. For display models, the radio-user can enter the Phone Mode with the ‘Phone’ menu selection.


CPS Windows
Customer Programming Software (CPS) Windows Include:

Radio Information	MDC Call
Radio Configuration	Quik Call II Call
Controls & Menus	DTMF Call
Conventional Personality	MDC Message
Signaling Configuration	MDC Status
MDC System	Phone List
Quik Call II System	Phone System
DTMF System	Scan List
Call List	Personality Assignment to Zone


CPS Windows
Customer Programming Software (CPS) Windows Capable of Multiple Records Include:

MDC System	MDC Message
Quik Call II System	MDC Status
DTMF System	Phone System
MDC Call	Scan List
Quik Call II Call	Personality Assignment to Zone
DTMF Call	Conventional Personality


Navigation Toolbar

The Navigation Toolbar allows you to Add, Delete, move-through, or Goto the records of the current window.

Hover Help is available (as seen below) by briefly holding the mouse-pointer over any of the buttons in the toolbar.


Volume Set

Emits a tone indicated the current volume level of the radio’s speaker. The volume level is based on the current setting of the radio’s Volume Selector Knob.


Frequencies & Codes (TPL)
TPL Squelch Frequencies & Codes

(Right-Click To Print)

Freq (Hz)  =  Code	Freq (Hz)  =  Code
67.0	XZ		136.5	4Z
69.3	WZ		141.3	4A
71.9	XA		146.2	4B
74.4	WA		151.4	5Z
77.0	XB		156.7	5A
79.7	WB		162.2	5B
82.5	YZ		167.9	6Z
85.4	YA		173.8	6A
88.5	YB		179.9	6B
91.5	ZZ		186.2	7Z
94.8	ZA		192.8	7A
97.4	ZB		203.5	M1
100.0	1Z		206.5	8Z
103.5	1A		210.7	M2
107.2	1B		218.1	M3
110.9	2Z		225.7	M4
114.8	2A		229.1	9Z
118.8	2B		233.6	M5
123.0	3Z		241.8	M6
127.3	3A		250.3	M7
131.8	3B		254.1	0Z


DPL Squelch Codes

(Right-Click To Print)

Code		Code		Code		Code		Code
023		132		255*		413		606
025		134		261		423		612
026		143		263		431		624
031		145*		265		432		627
032		152		266*		445		631
036*		155		271		446*		632
043		156		274*		452*		645*
047		162		306		454*		654
051		165		311		455*		662
053*		172		315		462*		664
054		174		325*		464		703
065		205		331		465		712
071		212*		332*		466		723
072		223		343		503		731
073		225*		346		506		732
074		226		351		516		734
144		243		356*		523*		743
115		244		364		525*		754
116		245		365		526*
122*		246*		371		532
125		251		411		546
131		252*		412		565
Note: 	The codes marked with an asterisk are not part of the 83 standard EIA/TIA-603 codes.

           The codes marked in red are only available to the firmware version that for Portable is R05.09.13 or later, for Mobile is R05.05.17 or later.


Quik-Call II Standard Frequency/Code Tones

(Right-Click To Print)

Freq (Hz)	= Code		Freq (Hz)	= Code		Freq (Hz)	= Code		Freq (Hz)	= Code		Freq (Hz)	= Code		Freq (Hz)	= Code
288.5	138		441.6	EA		582.1	HZ		716.7	KZ		892.5	A5		1357.6	197
296.5	108		445.7	146		584.8	151		726.8	155		903.2	159		1395.0	198
304.7	139		457.1	EB		592.5	A1		727.5	A8		907.5	C5		1433.4	199
313.0	109		457.9	116		600.9	121		741.3	KA		912.0	MA		1472.9	170
321.7	140		470.5	147		602.6	HA		746.8	125		922.5	B5		1513.5	171
330.5	110		473.2	FZ		607.5	B1		757.5	A2		928.1	129		1555.2	172
339.6	141		483.5	117		617.4	152		767.4	156		937.5	A6		1598.0	173
346.7	CZ		489.8	FA		622.5	C9		772.5	C2		944.1	MB		1642.0	174
349.0	111		496.8	148		623.7	HB		787.5	B2		952.5	C6		1687.2	175
358.6	142		507.0	FB		634.5	122		788.5	126		953.7	160		1733.7	176
358.9	CA		510.5	118		637.5	A9		794.3	LZ		967.5	B6		1781.5	177
368.5	112		517.5	B7		645.7	JZ		802.5	A3		979.9	130		1830.5	178
371.5	CB		524.6	149		651.9	153		810.2	157		1006.9	161		1881.0	179
378.6	143		524.8	GZ		652.5	B0		817.5	C3		1034.7	131		1930.2	200
384.6	DZ		532.5	C7		667.5	C0		822.2	LA		1063.2	162		1989.1	201
389.0	113		539.0	119		668.3	JA		832.5	127		1092.4	189		2043.8	202
398.1	DA		543.3	GA		669.9	123		847.5	A4		1122.5	190		2094.5	203
399.8	144		547.5	A7		682.5	A0		851.1	LB		1153.4	191		2155.6	204
410.8	114		553.9	150		688.3	154		855.5	158		1185.2	192		2212.2	205
412.1	DB		562.3	GB		691.8	JB		862.5	C4		1217.8	193		2271.7	206
422.1	145		562.5	B8		697.5	B9		877.5	B4		1251.4	194		2334.6	207
426.6	EZ		569.1	120		707.3	124		879.0	128		1285.8	195		2401.0	208
433.7	115		577.5	C8		712.5	C1		881.0	MZ		1321.2	196		2468.2	209


LS Universal ID

A Universal ID call has the highest priority for an incoming call, even over a Priority #1 Scan List member. Within Universal ID’s, call priority is determined by location in the list. Position # 1 has the highest priority. If a higher priority Universal ID call is detected, it interrupts any other call, including lower ranked Universal ID calls currently unmuted on a radio.

• See More Information


Group Options Page

Each Group list can have up to 16 Group members that make up the current Trunking Personality. Group List members are automatically and sequentially assigned to the radio’s channels of a Trunking dispatch Zone (see Personality Assignment).

• See More Information


Group ID's Page

Each Group list can have up to 16 Group members that make up the current Trunking Personality. Group List members are automatically and sequentially assigned to the radio’s channels of a Trunking dispatch Zone (see Personality Assignment).

• See More Information


The Select a Universal ID List Page

The Universal ID List Page allows you to select a Universal ID List for all Group within the current Trunking Personality.

• See More Information


The Advanced Page

The Advanced page allows you to further define individual repeater functionality for each Trunking Site. Repeater settings are continued on the Repeater Page and correlate with the Repeater #.

Important Note: Trunking Site Files may be imported or exported.

• See More Information


The Repeaters Page

The Repeaters page allows you to define individual repeater functionality for each Trunking Site. Repeater settings are continued on the Advanced page and correlate with the Repeater #.

Important Note: Trunking Site Files may be imported or exported.

• See More Information


The LS Trunking Buttons Window

The LS Trunking Buttons window allows you to assign functionality to the radio’s buttons. The programmable buttons include, The Top Button, Side Buttons (SB1, SB2, and SB3), and Front Buttons (P1, P2, and P3). These assignments apply when the radio is operating in a Trunking Dispatch Mode.

• See More Information


MDC Message

An MDC Message allows the transmission of CPS-user defined and radio-user selected Messages from a dispatcher unit to a portable or mobile unit, or from a portable or mobile unit to a dispatcher unit. However, an MDC Message may not be sent from a portable or mobile unit to a portable or mobile unit.

• See More Information


MDC Status

An MDC Status allows the transmission of CPS-user defined and radio-user selected Statuses from a portable or mobile unit to a dispatcher unit.

• See More Information


Default Package

Pin	Pin Configuration	Direction	De-bounce	Active Level
3	External Mic PTT	Input	Enabled	Low
4	NULL	Output	Disabled	Low
6	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
8	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
9	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
11	Rx Audio Type = Filtered Audio
12	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
14	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low


Phone Patch (I750R)

Pin	Pin Configuration	Direction	De-bounce	Active Level
3	External Mic PTT	Input	Enabled	Low
4	External Alarm	Output	Disabled	Low
6	Tx PL Inhibit	Input	Disabled	Low
8	PL/DPL & CSQ Detect	Output	Disabled	Low
9	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
11	Rx Audio Type = Flat Audio (Unfiltered)
12	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
14	CSQ Detect	Output	Disabled	Low


Public Address Package

Pin	Pin Configuration	Direction	De-bounce	Active Level
3	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
4	External Alarm	Output	Disabled	Low
6	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
8	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
9	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
11	Rx Audio Type = Filtered Audio
12	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
14	PA Switch	Input	Enabled	Low


Remote Package

Pin	Pin Configuration	Direction	De-bounce	Active Level
3	External Mic PTT	Input	Enabled	Low
4	External Alarm	Output	Disabled	Low
6	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
8	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
9	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
11	Rx Audio Type = Filtered Audio
12	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
14	Mic Off Hook	Input	Enabled	Low


Paging Encoder Package

Pin	Pin Configuration	Direction	De-bounce	Active Level
3	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
4	External Alarm	Output	Disabled	Low
6	Data PTT	Input	Disabled	Low
8	Tx Audio Mute	Input	Disabled	Low
9	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
11	Rx Audio Type = Filtered Audio
12	Tx PL Inhibit	Input	Disabled	Low
14	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low


RICK (I20R) Tx

Pin	Pin Configuration	Direction	De-bounce	Active Level
3	External Mic PTT	Input	Enabled	Low
4	NULL	Output	Disabled	Low
6	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
8	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
9	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
11	Rx Audio Type = Flat Audio (Unfiltered)
12	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
14	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low


RICK (I20R) Rx

Pin	Pin Configuration	Direction	De-bounce	Active Level
3	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
4	External Alarm	Output	Disabled	Low
6	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
8	PL/DPL & CSQ Detect	Output	Disabled	Low
9	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
11	Rx Audio Type = Flat Audio (Unfiltered)
12	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
14	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low


Tel Interconnect (ZR340)

Pin	Pin Configuration	Direction	De-bounce	Active Level
3	External Mic PTT	Input	Enabled	Low
4	CSQ Detect	Output	Disabled	Low
6	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
8	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
9	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
11	Rx Audio Type = Filtered Audio
12	PL/DPL	Output	Disabled	Low
14	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low


Community RPTR (ZR310) Tx

Pin	Pin Configuration	Direction	De-bounce	Active Level
3	Ext. Mic PTT	Input	Disabled	Low
4	CSQ Detect	Output	Disabled	High
6	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
8	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
9	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
11	Rx Audio Type = Flat Audio (Unfiltered)
12	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
14	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low


Community RPTR (ZR310) Rx

Pin	Pin Configuration	Direction	De-bounce	Active Level
3	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
4	CSQ Detect	Output	Disabled	High
6	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
8	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
9	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
11	Rx Audio Type = Flat Audio (Unfiltered)
12	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
14	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low


Tel Interconnect (ZR340) Tx

Pin	Pin Configuration	Direction	De-bounce	Active Level
3	Ext. Mic PTT	Input	Disabled	Low
4	CSQ Detect	Output	Disabled	High
6	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
8	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
9	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
11	Rx Audio Type = Filtered Audio
12	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
14	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low


Tel Interconnect (ZR340) Rx

Pin	Pin Configuration	Direction	De-bounce	Active Level
3	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
4	CSQ Detect	Output	Disabled	High
6	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
8	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
9	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low
11	Rx Audio Type = Filtered Audio
12	PL/DPL & CSQ Detect	Output	Disabled	Low
14	NULL	Input	Disabled	Low


LED Indicator  (Light Emitting Diode)

The Radio’s LED indicator presents the following colors based on current battery charge levels.

Battery Level		LED Indicator
High	=	Green
Sufficient	=	Yellow
Low	=	Flashing Red
Very Low	=	None


Back Light Control

Allows the radio-user toggle between Off, Low, Medium, or High lighting for the radio’s Control Head.

• See More Information


Back Light Control

Allows the radio-user toggle between Off, Low, Medium, or High lighting for the radio’s Control Head.


Auxiliary Control #1

Through the Accessory Connector pin’s Function Select fields, Auxiliary Control functionality can be assigned to the Output capable pins. Auxiliary Controls can then be activated and deactivated with a programmable button press, or remotely with the Active and Inactive ID’s.

• See More Information


Auxiliary Control #2

Through the Accessory Connector pin’s Function Select fields, Auxiliary Control functionality can be assigned to the Output capable pins. Auxiliary Controls can then be activated and deactivated with a programmable button press, or remotely with the Active and Inactive ID’s.

• See More Information


One Touch Selections

There are eight One Touch selections that can either send an MDC Message or an MDC Status. Pressing the One Touch button automatically sends the programmed Message or Status without pressing the radio’s PTT.

• See More Information


Menu/Channel Up

Allows the radio-user to navigate up · while in the radio’s Menu Mode, or navigate up · thru the radio’s channels while not in the Menu Mode.

• See More Information


Menu/Channel Up

Allows the radio-user to navigate up · while in the radio’s Menu Mode, or navigate up · thru the radio’s channels while not in the Menu Mode.


Menu/Channel Down

Allows the radio-user to navigate down · while in the radio’s Menu Mode, or navigate down ·  thru the radio’s channels while not in the Menu Mode.

• See More Information


Menu/Channel Down

Allows the radio-user to navigate down · while in the radio’s Menu Mode, or navigate down · thru the radio’s channels while not in the Menu Mode.


Channel/Group  or Zone Down

Allows the radio-user to navigate down · thru the radio’s channels / Groups  or Zone while not in the Menu Mode.

By default this button allows the radio-user to navigate down · while in the Menu Mode.

• See More Information


Channel/Group or Zone Down

Allows the radio-user to navigate down · thru the radio’s channels / Groups  or Zone  while not in the Menu Mode.

By default this button allows the radio-user to navigate down · while in the Menu Mode.

When rotary function is selected as Fixed Zone or Continuous Zone, it is used for navigate down Channel/Group.

When rotary function is selected as Fixed Channel or Continuous Channel, and Talkgroup Assignment to Rotary Knob is enabled, It is used for navigate down Zone.


Select / Enter

Select / Enter has two functions; allows the radio-user to enter the Menu Mode, or allows the radio-user to make menu selections.

• See More Information


Select / Enter

Select / Enter has two functions; allows the radio-user to enter the Menu Mode, or allows the radio-user to make menu selections.


Exit

Exit has two functions; Allows the radio-user to move to the previous menu level in the radio’s display menus (with a button short press) or allows the radio-user exit the Menu Mode (with a button Long Press).

• See More Information


Exit

Exit has two functions; Allows the radio-user to move to the previous menu level in the radio’s display menus (with a button short press) or allows the radio-user exit the Menu Mode (with a button Long Press).


Zone

Allows the radio-user to scroll through the radio’s available Zones. Also see Personality Assignment.

• See More Information


Zone

Allows the radio-user to scroll through the radio’s available Zones. Also see Personality Assignment.


The Channels Page

The Channel page facilitates the assignment of specific radio functionality to each of the radio’s channel positions for the current Zone.

• See More Information


The Zone Page

The Zone page allows you to select the Zone dispatch mode, Conventional or LS Trunking. If Trunking is selected, the LS Trunking Personality can then be selected.

Zone positions in the radio are determined by the order that they are created in the CPS. Zones can however be re-ordered using the following commands:

Use the Navigation Toolbar to locate the desired record to be moved. From the CPS Menu Bar select: Record · Move Record, then select the appropriate destination for that record.

• See More Information


The Conventional Buttons Window (Portable)

The Conventional Buttons window allows you to assign functionality to the radio’s programmable buttons. The programmable buttons include, The Top Button, Side Buttons (SB1, SB2, and SB3), and Front Buttons (P1, P2, and P3). These assignments apply while the radio is operating in Conventional Dispatch Mode.

• See More Information


The Conventional Buttons Window (Mobile)

The Conventional Buttons window allows you to assign functionality to the mobile radio’s Programmable Buttons, Microphone Buttons, and Function Buttons. These assignments apply while the radio is operating in Conventional Dispatch Mode.

• See More Information


Infrared Remote Enable

(Radio Configuration)

This field is not yet available!


MDC Message

Allows the radio-user to enter directly to the MDC Message mode/menu on the radio’s display. The appropriate Message must then be selected prior to pressing the PTT button to send it.

• See More Information


MDC Status

Allows the radio-user to enter directly to the MDC Status mode/menu on the radio’s display. The appropriate Status must then be selected prior to pressing the PTT button to send it.

• See More Information


Light

This allows the radio’s display light and front panel back light to be illuminated upon pressing the programmed button. This applies only to a Portable radio model.

Similar functionality can be enabled with the Auto Back Light field.

• See More Information


Light

This allows the radio’s display light and front panel back light to be illuminated upon pressing the programmed button. This applies only to a Portable radio model.

Similar functionality can be enabled with the Auto Back Light field.


Accessory Connector Pin Functionality
Mobile Radio Accessory Connector

Predetermined Functionality:

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Pin	Description	Direction	Comments
1	Speaker (-)		Not Programmable
2	External Microphone Audio		Partially Programmable
3	Digital In #1	Input Only	Fully Programmable, 12V Active Low Only
4	Digital In #2	Output Only	Fully Programmable
5	Flat Tx Audio Input		Partially Programmable
6	Digital In/Out #3	Input Only	Fully Programmable
7	Ground		Not Programmable
8	Digital In/Out #4	Selectable Input/ Output	Fully Programmable
9	Analog In #5	Special Input	Fully Programmable, Tri-state Emergency SW
10	Ignition Sense	Special Input	Not Programmable, Active High
11	Flat Rx Audio		Partially Programmable
12	Digital In/Out #7	Selectable Input/ Output	Fully Programmable
13	Switched Battery (+)		Not Programmable
14	Digital In/Out #8	Selectable Input/ Output	Fully Programmable
15	RSSI (Radio Signal Strength Input)		Not Programmable
16	Speaker (+)		Not Programmable


Communication Error Code Descriptions

0xECEC0003L:	Com port is already claimed by someone else or has been left in an open state by some application.
0xECEC0005L:	Port name is invalid.
0xECEC0006L:	Checksum error radio sent a bad packet or checksum is not right.
0xECEC0007L:	No reply received from radio likely to be because the radio or rib got turned off in the middle of transmission, or the cables came loose in the middle., or there might be a problem  in the firmware.
0xECEC0009L:	NAK was sent by radio the radio didn't like the packet it was sent--some sort of problem in the firmware.
0xECEC000BL:	Garbage data detected on bus collision was detected on the bus, or could possibly be that the rib is turned off.
0xECEC000CL:	Radio did not send an acknowledge, likely to be a problem with either the radio not being turned on, or the connection between the radio and the rib not being secure, or there is a problem in the firmware.
0xECEC000DL:	No echo bounced back from RIB likely to be because either the rib is not on or the connection between the rib and the PC is not secure.  (have seen many problems with battery powered RIBS--they don't have enough juice).
0xECEC000EL:	Communications were lost likely to be because the radio or rib got turned off in the middle of transmission, or the cables came loose, or a problem in the firmware.
0xECEC000FL:	OS error—there is a problem with the user's system.
0xECEC0010L:	OS error—there is a problem with the user's system.
0xECEC0011L:	Failure receiving data could be anything, probably an OS error--there is a probably a problem with the user's system.
0xECEC0014L:	OS error—there is a problem with the user's system.
0xECEC0017L:	OS error—there is a problem with the user's system.
0xECEC0018L:	OS error—there is a problem with the user's system.
0xECEC0019L:	Failure sending data could be anything, probably an Operating System error, there is a probably a problem with the user's system.
0xECEC001AL:	Ran out of memory.
0xECEC001CL:	Didn't detect any serial ports.


Signaling Systems

Signaling Systems can be created in their data type window; MDC, QCII, and DTMF. Signaling Systems can then be assigned to radio Channels / Personalities, and selected for use with MDC Messages, MDC Statuses, and Call List Members as receive and transmit data protocols.

Signaling Systems also send data and tones for communications such as PTT ID’s, Emergencies, and Radio Calls.

• See More Information


MDC System Window

The MDC System window allows you to create and delete MDC Signaling Systems, as well as define individual MDC Signaling System functionality.

• See More Information


Quik Call II System Window

Individual Quik-Call II (QCII) Signaling Systems can be selected for use with Conventional Personalities, and Call List Members, as receive and transmit protocols.

• See More Information


DTMF System Window

Individual DTMF Signaling Systems can then be selected for use with Conventional Personalities, and Call List Members, as receive and transmit protocols.

• See More Information


Emergency Page

Emergency transmission functionality is active during the radio’s Emergency Mode. Only one emergency configuration can exist per radio.

• See More Information


Phone Systems

Individual Phone Systems - with the Phone List, can then be assigned to a Conventional or Trunking Personality. Only one phone list can exist, however through multiple Phone System definitions, Phone List functionality can be uniquely configured for each personality.

• See More Information


Personality Assignment Window

The Personality Assignment window allows you to create and delete Zones, as well as define individual Zone functionality. Zones operate in either Conventional Personality or Trunking Personality dispatch mode. Only single-zone (non-display) radios can operate in a dual dispatch mode.

Zones are selected by the radio-user with a button press or a menu choice. A radio-user Zone change can completely redefine Channel Selector functionality.

• See More Information


Squelch Tight/Normal

This allows the radio-user the ability to temporarily adjust the Squelch Threshold setting to ‘Tight’ or ‘Normal’ for the radio’s current Channel Selector selected Conventional dispatch channel (for portable radio’s only).

Once the radio’s channel selector is changed, or the radio is powered-off, the radio-user setting automatically reverts back to the CPS Squelch Setting for each channel.

• See More Information


Repeater/Talkaround

This allows the radio-user to toggle between Repeater Mode and Talkaround Mode. This is true provided that the radio’s current Channel Selector selected (Conventional Personality only) channel has Talkaround enabled.

This same functionality is radio-user selected with the ‘Repeater/Talkaround’ menu choice.


Repeater/Talkaround

This allows the radio-user to toggle between Repeater Mode and Talkaround Mode. This is true provided that the radio’s current Channel Selector selected (Conventional Personality only) channel has Talkaround enabled.

This same functionality is radio-user selected with the ‘Repeater/Talkaround’ menu choice.

• See More Information


Scan Operation

This allows the radio-user to enter the radio’s Scan Mode. This is true provided the Conventional or Trunking Personality for the current Channel Selector selected channel has a Scan List selected.

When enabled for the current Scan List, Nuisance Delete functionality is automatically assigned to the Long-press of this button.

• See More Information


Scan Operation

This allows the radio-user to enter the radio’s Scan Mode. This is true provided the Conventional or Trunking Personality for the current Channel Selector selected channel has a Scan List selected.

When enabled for the current Scan List, Nuisance Delete functionality is automatically assigned to the Long-press of this button.

Note: Scan Operation functionality is also radio-user selected with the System Scan menu choice.


Using the Short Cut Menu within a Table Type Window

Using the Short Cut Menu within a Table Type Window offers the following flexible approaches to working in tables.

The Short Cut Menu

	Move the currently highlighted record elsewhere within the list. See more about moving a record. Hide the currently highlighted column. Unhide any hidden columns. A window appears to select which columns to unhide.
• See More Information


Using the Short Cut Menu within a Table Type Window

Using the Short Cut Menu within a Table Type Window offers the following flexible approaches to working in tables.

The Short Cut Menu

	Add (a record) at End of the current list. Insert (a record) just above the currently highlighted row. Delete the currently highlighted record. Move the currently highlighted record elsewhere within the list. See more about moving a record. Hide the currently highlighted column. Unhide any hidden columns. A window appears to select which columns to unhide.
• See More Information


Using the Short Cut Menu within a Table Type Window

Using the Short Cut Menu within a Table Type Window offers the following flexible approaches to working in tables.

•	Add (a record) at End of the current list.

•	Insert (a record) just above the currently highlighted row.

•	Delete the currently highlighted record.

•	Move the currently highlighted record elsewhere within the list. See more above moving a record.

•	Hide the currently highlighted column.

•	Unhide any hidden columns. A window appears to select which columns to unhide.


Moving a Record within a Table Type Window

The Move Command allows you to move the currently highlighted record to another row within the current list. When the Move command is selected, this "Move Record To" tool/window appears.

	Selecting the Move Command, See More Information


Moving a Record within a Table Type Window

The Move Command allows you to move the currently highlighted - record to another row within the current list. Follow the three steps below:


Emergency Siren

Pressing the programmed Emergency Siren button causes a loud repeating tone to Sound. The Long Press of the Emergency Siren button deactivates the alarm.


Emergency Siren

Pressing the programmed Emergency Siren button causes a loud repeating tone to Sound. The Long Press of the Emergency Siren button deactivates the alarm.

• See More Information


Auto Reset Timer With Carrier Override

•	The timer begins on the receiving radio once its Signaling Squelch Unmuting Rules are met. (While the timer is running, the radio is in the Release Squelch State.)

•	While the timer is active, it is stopped and reset every time the radio’s PTT button is pressed. The timer is re-started when PTT is released.

•	Once the radio is muted, the timer is reset and re-started in effect extending the Release Squelch state again.

•	If the radio is muted when the timer expires the Signaling Squelch Unmuting Rules are then required again.

•	If the radio is unmuted when the timer expires the radio remains unmuted.


Auto Reset Timer Without Carrier Override

•	The timer begins on the receiving radio once its Signaling Squelch Unmuting Rules are met. (While the timer is running, the radio is in the Release Squelch State.)

•	While the timer is active, it is stopped and reset every time the radio’s PTT button is pressed. The timer is re-started when PTT is released.

•	If the timer expires regardless of whether the radio is muted or unmuted; the radio is muted, the Release Squelch State is ended, and the radio’s Signaling Squelch Unmuting Rules are again required.


Tx Power Page

The Tx Power Page allows you to view or define the Tx Low and High power settings for a mobile radio.

• See More Information


Toggle Option Board On/Off

Offers the ability to turn radio-wide option board functionality on or off. This functionality only applies for Conventional Personality channels with Option Board functionality selected.

• See More Information


Toggle Option Board On/Off

Offers the ability to turn radio-wide option board functionality on or off. This functionality only applies for Conventional Personality channels with Option Board functionality selected.


Toggle Option Board On/Off

Offers the ability to turn radio-wide option board functionality on or off. This functionality only applies for Trunking Personality channels with Option Board functionality selected.

• See More Information


Toggle Option Board On/Off

Offers the ability to turn radio-wide option board functionality on or off. This functionality only applies for Trunking Personality channels with Option Board functionality selected.


The LS Universal ID Window

The LS Universal ID List window allows you to create and delete Universal ID Lists, as well as define individual Universal ID functionality within each list. Each list can have up to 4 Universal IDs. A Universal ID List can be assigned to a Trunking Personality. Once assigned, the Universal ID List applies to all Groups within that Trunking Personality.

A Universal ID call has the highest priority for an incoming call, even over a Priority #1, or a Scan List member. Within Universal ID’s, call priority is determined by location in the list. Position 1 has the highest priority. If a higher priority Universal ID call is detected, it interrupts any other call, including lower ranked Universal ID calls currently unmuted on a radio.

• See More Information


Universal IDList Options Page

Each list can have up to 4 Universal IDs. A Universal ID List can be assigned to a Trunking Personality. Once assigned, the Universal ID List applies to all Groups within that Trunking Personality.

• See More Information


Universal ID List Page

Each list can have up to 4 Universal IDs. A Universal ID List can be assigned to a Trunking Personality. Once assigned, the Universal ID List applies to all Groups within that Trunking Personality.

• See More Information


Trunking Site

The LS Trunking Site window allows you to create and delete Trunking Sites, as well as define individual repeater functionality for each Trunking Site.

A Trunking Site contains up to twenty virtual-setups of repeaters that mirror actual repeater functionality. These setups enable the radio to communicate with these repeaters.

• See More Information


Voice Storage

The Voice Storage page allows you to define functionality relating to voice recordings and playback. These features apply when the radio’s Option Board Type is set to Voice Storage.

• See More Information


Display Clock

Allows the radio-user to flash the current time on the radio’s display for a ten second period.


Toggle Voice Operated Tx

This button allows the radio-user to temporarily change the CPS - Voice Operated Tx setting while operating on a Conventional Personality. When the radio-user moves off and then back to a channel, the CPS setting is again reinstated.

Voice Operated Tx allows the selected Hot Microphone to automatically key-up due to recognition of voice. The radio then automatically de-keys when audio is no longer present.

•  See More Information


Toggle Voice Operated Tx

This button allows the radio-user to temporarily change the CPS - Voice Operated Tx setting while operating on a Conventional Personality. When the radio-user moves off and then back to a channel, the CPS setting is again reinstated.

Voice Operated Tx allows the selected Hot Microphone to automatically key-up due to recognition of voice. The radio then automatically de-keys when audio is no longer present.


LS Call Light

An LS Call Light call causes the receiving radio to flash its LED.

•  See More Information


LS Call Light

An LS Call Light call causes the receiving radio to flash its LED.


The Edit Mode Page

The Edit Mode Page allows you to view or define Edit Mode functionality. Edit Mode allows the radio-user to modify receive and transmit Conventional dispatch channel parameters. Channel parameters include the Rx and Tx Frequencies, Rx and Tx Squelch Code Types, and Bandwidth.

• See More Information


Remote Monitor

The Remote Monitor page allows you to view and define functionality having to do with transmitting Remote Monitor commands. Remote Monitor commands cause a receiving mobile radio to enter into the Remote Monitor mode. The Remote Monitor mode causes the receiving radio to automatically key-up allowing the initiating radio to listen-in-on all surrounding audio.

• See More Information


The Conventional Personality, Basic Page

The Basic page allows you to name and define general radio functionality for the current Conventional Personality. More specifically, these features are relating to Receive and Transmit.

• See More Information


The MDC Call Remote Monitor Page

The MDC Call Remote Monitor page allows you to view and define functionality having to do with transmitting Remote Monitor commands.

• See More Information


The MDC System Remote Monitor Page

The MDC System Remote Monitor page allows you to view and define radio functionality having to do with receiving Remote Monitor commands and Remote Monitor mode operation.

• See More Information


The Data Revert Page

The Data Revert Page allows you to view or define Data Revert channels for individual Conventional Personalities and or Data Revert Groups/channels for individual Trunking Personalities. Data Revert allows for predefined alternative channels to be designated for the purpose of transmitting and receiving data. Data Revert channels are activated from an external data device connected through the radio’s Accessory Connector. The "Data Revert Pin" selection must be assigned to one of the Radio Configuration programmable input pins. When the "Data Revert" pin is de-asserted the radio returns to the radio’s currently selected channel.

• See More Information


Scan List Edit

This allows the radio-user to edit a Scan List. Scan List editing is only available for Scan Lists where the User Programmable field has been enabled.

• See More Information


Scan List Edit

This allows the radio-user to edit a Scan List. Scan List editing is only available for Scan Lists where the User Programmable field has been enabled.


Answer Mode

This allows the radio-user to toggle Answer Mode on and off. Answer Mode allows radio callers to leave recorded audio messages. Answer Mode operation is triggered upon receiving a Call Alert w/ Voice or a Sel Cal.

Note: An Answer Mode indicator can also be enabled for the radio-user; see Answer Machine Status.


Answer Mode

This allows the radio-user to toggle Answer Mode on and off. Answer Mode allows radio callers to leave recorded audio messages. Answer Mode operation is triggered upon receiving a Call Alert w/ Voice or a Sel Cal.

• See More Information


The Answer Mode Feature

Allows the radio to work like an answering machine. Answer Mode operation is triggered upon receiving a Call Alert w/ Voice or a Sel Cal. The receiving radio responds by transmitting a greeting message to the caller. Once the greeting is complete, the receiving radio is then able to record the message. When all available voice storage message slots have been filled (see Maximum Message Length), the alternate message is transmitted to the caller.

Once in the Answer Mode, the following options are available to the radio-user: Answer Mode - Answer Mode On, Answer Mode Off; Record Message - Greeting Message, Alternate Message; Review Message - Greeting Message, Alternate Message; Silent Mode (when enabled), Blocking Mode (available when Silent Answer Mode is enabled).

Note: The radio-user can access Answer Mode through the Menu Items Answer Mode or by a programmable button press.


The Answer Mode Feature

Allows the radio to work like an answering machine. Answer Mode operation is triggered upon receiving a Call Alert w/ Voice or a Sel Cal.

• See More Information


Greeting Message

This message is automatically transmitted to a caller when the radio is operating in Answer Mode.


Alternate Message

This message is automatically transmitted to a caller when the radio is operating in Answer Mode and the radio’s Voice storage slots have been filled (see the Maximum Message Length field).


Blocking Mode

A sub-menu selection available to the radio-user once Silent Answer Mode has been radio-user selected. When Blocking Mode is enabled, certain radio-user inputs (such as PTT & Scan) are blocked while an incoming message is recording. However, Emergency Mode initiation is possible when blocking mode is enabled.

Note: Silent Answer Mode must be enabled by the CPS programmer and must be selected by the radio-user prior to the radio-user being able to select Blocking Mode.


Personality Assignment Wizard

The Personality Assignment Wizard allows you to automatically create Zones and Channels from existing Conventional and Trunking Personalities.

• See More Information


Home Revert

The Home Revert Page allows you to view or define a Home Revert Channel and Zone. This channel can then be accessed with a single programmable button press that is assigned the "Home Channel" functionality.

• See More Information


Home Revert AutoKey

This button-press causes the radio to automatically key-up on the programmed Home Revert Channel and to automatically transmit an MDC PTT ID. The MDC PTT ID is only transmitted when the programmed Home Revert Channel is a Trunking Dispatch Personality with an MDC System selected for its Tx System field. If an MDC System is not selected for the Home Revert Channel, the radio still keys-up for a short interval, however PTT ID is not transmitted.

This feature is only available for Multi Line Display Portable - Trunking dispatch radios.

• See More Information


Home Revert AutoKeyTopPopsOnly
Home Revert AutoKey

This programmable button-press selection causes the radio to automatically key-up on the programmed Home Revert Channel and to automatically transmit an MDC PTT ID. The MDC PTT ID is only transmitted when the programmed Home Revert Channel is a Trunking Dispatch Personality with an MDC System selected for its Tx System. If an MDC System is not selected for the Home Revert Channel, the radio still keys-up for a short interval, however PTT ID is not transmitted.

This feature is only available for Multi Line Display Portable - Trunking dispatch radios.


Drag And Drop

The Drag and Drop feature allows you to efficiently create or add-to the Personality Assignment to Zone groupings of channels. That is, Conventional or Trunking Personalities may be copied by dragging their green arrow icon with the mouse to the appropriate Personality Assignment to Zone node/location.

• See More Information


Green Arrow Icon

 The green arrow icon represents the lowest level in the branch for the Tree View.


Gray Arrow Icon

 The gray arrow icon represents another level/branch in the Tree View.


Tree View

The Tree View offers a graphic representation of the CPS structure. The Tree View may be navigated with the Mouse or the keyboard for the purpose of opening any of the various CPS – Windows, or a specific Window Record containing programming information. Records contain different configurations of the same types of information. For instance, several Scan Lists, or several Conventional Personalities can exist.

To access the Tree View window from a menu selection or a button-press.

From the Menu Bar select: View · Tree View

From the Toolbar select:

• See More Information


Invalid Fields

The Invalid Fields feature presents any and all entries that don’t fall within the correct parameters for a field entry.

To access the Invalid Fields window from a menu selection or a button-press.

From the Menu Bar select: View · Invalid Fields

From the Toolbar select:

• See More Information


Fields Modified

The Fields Modified window allows you to view all changes made during the current CPS Programming Session. Each field modification is recorded by the CPS and appears in the Fields Modified window.

When the radio-programming information is Saved to a file, the Fields Modified feature creates a separate log file of the recorded session changes. This log file is an ASCII text file that may be easily imported into most Word Processor, Spreadsheet or Database programs. Field titles and information within the log file are Delimited in a Tab format. This facilitates clean importing of the data.

• See More Information


CPS Find

The CPS Find feature allows you to search for all CPS field or Window Names. Once found, the Find tool can then jump you to that specific Window and or field.

To access the Find window from a menu selection or a button-press.

From the Menu Bar select: Edit · Find

From the Toolbar select:

• See More Information


Custom Print

The Custom Print feature allows you to print all fields with their current values. Printing is selectable for any one, several, or all CPS windows.

•	Click on a window description to highlight it for selection.

•	Click on a highlighted window to deselect it, the highlight is removed.

•	Click the “OK” button to print all fields and field values for the selected windows.


Trunking Site File Export/Import

Jumps to topic


Tree View

Jumps to topic


Invalid Fields

Jumps to topic


Fields Modified

Jumps to topic


Find

Jumps to topic


Custom Print

Jumps to topic


The Custom Page


Tx Frequency Follows Rx Frequency

  Causes the CPS's two Tx Frequency fields, to be automatically assigned equal or offsetting frequencies, from their correlating Rx Frequency settings. Whether the Tx Frequencies are equal to their correlating Rx Frequencies, or offset, is determined by the Tx Frequency Offset setting. This feature applies to the Tx Frequencies of all Conventional Personalities and Trunking Sites.

• See More Information


Tx Frequency Offset

Selects the amount of frequency variation that is automatically applied to the Tx Frequencies for all Conventional Personalities and Trunking Sites. This offset is a consistent amount from the CPS-defined Rx Frequency settings to their correlating Tx Frequencies.

• See More Information


Tx TPL/DPL Code Follows Rx TPL/DPL Code

  Causes the Conventional Personality Tx TPL Code and the Tx DPL Code fields to be automatically assigned the same codes based on the selected Rx TPL Code and Rx DPL Code field settings (respectively) for the same Conventional Personality. This feature applies for all Conventional Personalities.

• See More Information


Tx Signaling System Follows Rx Signaling System

  Causes the Conventional Personality Tx Signaling System field to be automatically assigned the same signaling system setting based on the selected Rx Signaling System for the same Conventional Personality. This feature applies for all Conventional Personalities.

• See More Information


Enter FCC Channel Number

   Allows the CPS to automatically convert the CPS-user entry of an FCC Channel Number to its correlating frequency. This feature applies to four CPS Frequency fields; the Conventional Personality - General, Rx Frequency and Tx Frequency, the Trunking Site - Repeaters, Radio Rx Frequency and Radio Tx Frequency.

• See More Information


The Main Page


Beep On Invalid Field

  Causes an audio tone to be heard when an inappropriate value is entered or selected in any CPS - field.

• See More Information


Confirm On Deletion

  Causes the CPS to prompt with an Are You Sure message whenever the CPS-user attempts to delete any CPS record. This creates a safety check that requires a CPS-user confirmation when records are being deleted.

• See More Information


Color To Notify Invalid Field Label

Causes CPS - field names to appear in a distinct color whenever an inappropriate value is entered or selected.

• See More Information


The Personality Assignment Wizard Window


Tree View

(Productivity Tools)

The Tree View offers a graphic representation of the CPS structure. The Tree View may be navigated with the Mouse or the keyboard keys for the purpose of opening any of the various CPS Windows, or a specific Window Record containing programming information. Records contain different configurations of the same types of information. For instance, several Scan Lists, or several Conventional Personalities can exist.

To access the Tree View from a menu selection or a button-press.

From the Menu Bar select: View · Tree View

From the Toolbar select:

To access a window with the mouse:

	The gray arrow icon represents another level/branch in the Tree View. To see the next level of the branch, single click on the plus sign “+” to expand the branch.
	To close the next level of the branch, single click on the minus sign “-“ to compress the branch.
	The green arrow icon represents the lowest level in the branch for the Tree View. Double click on this icon to access CPS - Windows, or a specific Window Record.
To access a window with the keyboard:

Use the keyboard <Arrow keys> to navigate Up, Down, Left, or Right to the desired icon in the Tree View.

	Once the desired gray arrow icon is highlighted, press the <Enter> Key to open or close the next level of a tree branch.
	Once the desired green arrow icon is highlighted, Press the <Enter> Key to open the CPS Windows, or Window Record.


Invalid Fields

(Productivity Tools)

The Invalid Fields feature presents any and all entries that don’t fall within the correct parameters for a field entry.

To access the Invalid Fields window from a menu selection or a button-press.

From the Menu Bar select: View · Invalid Fields

From the Toolbar select:

HOW TO USE:

•	If incorrect entries exist, the Invalid Fields window can be retrieved when attempting to Save to a File. If errors exist, the Error dialog box appears. Selecting the dialog box “Show It” button presents the error(s) in the Invalid Fields window.

•	Invalid entries can be checked for prior to attempting to Save or Write, by either of the two above mentioned access techniques.

•	If attempting to Write to a radio when error(s) exist, you are prompted of the problem, and instructed to check the Invalid Fields window.

Important Notes:

•	From the Invalid Fields window, when double-clicking on an entry, you are able to jump directly to the field for that incorrect entry.

•	Be sure to check the “All Invalid Fields” selection when troubleshooting data.

Also Note:

•	Certain CPS Windows allow for multiple records to be created. When double-clicking an entry in the Invalid Fields window, the CPS finds the correct field within the correct record.

•	By clicking the Horizontal Scroll Bar right arrow to scroll to the extreme right, the record number of the Invalid entry can be viewed under the “Window” column.


Fields Modified

(Productivity Tools)

The Fields Modified window allows you to view all changes made during the current CPS - Programming Session. Each field modification is recorded by the CPS and appears in the Fields Modified window.

When the radio-programming information is Saved to a file, the Fields Modified feature creates a separate log file of the recorded session changes. This log file is an ASCII text file that may be easily imported into most Word Processor, Spreadsheet or Database programs. Field titles and information within the log file are Delimited in a Tab format. This facilitates clean importing of the data.

Note:

•	The CPS program normally installs in the following Path:

•	C:\Program Files\Motorola\Professional Radio CPS

•	The log file is stored in the following sub-folder:

•	C:\Program Files\Motorola\Professional Radio CPS\Codeplug

•	The log file will always have the name of the current codeplug file. However, the CPS automatically adds “log” to end of the file name.

•	The current codeplug file name is always displayed at the Root of the Tree View window


CPS Find

(Productivity Tools)

The CPS Find feature allows you to search for all CPS field or Window Names. Once found, the Find tool can then jump you to that specific Window and or field.

To access the Find window from a menu selection or a button-press.

From the Menu Bar select: Edit · Find

From the Toolbar select:

HOW TO USE:

In Window “1.”, Type in a field or window name. Notice that Window “2.” begins searching as you type.

Once Window “2.” has the desired field or window name highlighted, double click on that entry.

If the entry is a window name, the CPS window automatically appears.

If the entry is a field name, Window “3.” presents all occurrences of window(s) that the field appears in.

ALSO:

Once Window “2.” has the desired field or window name highlighted, click the “List Windows” button.

If the entry is a window name, the CPS window automatically appears.

If the entry is a field name, Window “3.” presents all occurrences of window(s) that the field appears in.

Once Window “3.” has the window name or names present, double-click on a name to have that CPS window appear.

ALSO:

Once Window “3.” has the window name or names present, click the “Show Window” button to have that CPS window appear.

Note: If a field name was jumped to within a CPS window, the computers focus is highlighted on that field.


Custom Print

The Custom Print feature allows you to print all CPS fields with their current values. In addition, Custom Print allows for the building of custom printing templates that can include or exclude CPS windows, pages, and fields. Custom printing templates can be saved as files for future use.

Printing CPS Field Values by Window:

•	Click on a CPS window description to highlight it for selection.

•	Click on a highlighted window to deselect it.

•	Click the “Print” button to print all fields and field values for the selected windows.

Creating Custom Printing Templates:

•	  Enable the template field.

•	Click on Create Template.

•	From the Available Print window, click the desired window, page, or field name to highlight it.

•	Click the “Move To” arrow [image] to move the selection to the Selected Print window.

•	These selections may be moved back to the Available Print window by highlighting and then using the “Move From” arrow [image].

•	When all desired print selections appear in the Selected Print window, click “Save As” to name and save your Template into the suggested “Print Template” folder.

•	The Print Selection window appears. Select the desired template and click Print.


Trunking Site File Export/Import

Due to the complexity of creating CPS Trunking Sites, Trunking Site information can be Exported to Trunking Site Files and then reused by other CPS-users. Once Exported, Site File information can then be Imported when needed for other radios.


The Options Window

(Productivity Tools)

The Options window allows you to view or define CPS-user preferences that can add to programming efficiency.

Click on any page title below (underlined in green) to see more information.


The Custom Page

(Options)

DEFINITION:

The Custom page allows you view or define CPS-user preferences relating to Conventional  dispatch programming efficiency.

Note: To access the Custom Page, from the CPS Menu Bar select: View · Options.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Tx Frequency Follows Rx Frequency

Tx Frequency Offset

Tx TPL/DPL Code Follows Rx TPL/DPL Code

Tx Signaling System Follows Rx Signaling System

Enter FCC Channel Number

     Go to The Options  Window


Tx Frequency Follows Rx Frequency

(Options)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the CPS's two Tx Frequency fields, to be automatically assigned equal or offsetting frequencies, from their correlating Rx Frequency settings. Whether the Tx Frequencies are equal to their correlating Rx Frequencies, or offset, is determined by the Tx Frequency Offset setting. This feature applies to the Tx Frequencies of all Conventional Personalities and Trunking Sites.

Note:

•	Rx Frequencies can vary for all Conventional Personalities and Trunking Sites, however this offset amount will always be consistent.

•	Tx Frequencies can still be modified on a per Conventional Personality or Trunking Site basis.

•	This setting becomes effective on a per Conventional Personality or Trunking Site basis, when a new record is added, or when changes are made to existing values.

     Go To The Custom Page


Tx Frequency Offset

(Options)

DEFINITION:

Selects the amount of frequency variation that is automatically applied to the Tx Frequencies for all Conventional Personalities and Trunking Sites. This offset is a consistent amount from the CPS-defined Rx Frequency settings to their correlating Tx Frequencies.

Note:

•	Rx Frequencies can vary for all Conventional Personalities and Trunking Sites, however this offset amount will always be consistent.

•	Tx Frequencies can still be modified on a per Conventional Personality or Trunking Site basis.

•	This setting becomes effective on a per Conventional Personality or Trunking Site basis, when a new record is added, or when changes are made to existing values.

When Tx Frequency Follows Rx Frequency is enabled.

Minimum = -100.0

Maximum = +100.0

     Go To The Custom Page


Tx TPL/DPL Code Follows Rx TPL/DPL Code

(Options)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the Conventional Personality Tx TPL Code and the Tx DPL Code fields to be automatically assigned the same codes based on the selected Rx TPL Code and Rx DPL Code field settings (respectively) for the same Conventional Personality. This feature applies for all Conventional Personalities.

Note: This setting becomes effective when a new record is added, or when changes are made to existing values.

     Go To The Custom Page


Tx Signaling System Follows Rx Signaling System

(Options)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the Conventional Personality Tx Signaling System field to be automatically assigned the same signaling system setting based on the selected Rx Signaling System for the same Conventional Personality. This feature applies for all Conventional Personalities.

Note: This setting becomes effective when a new record is added, or when changes are made to existing values.

     Go To The Custom Page


Enter FCC Channel Number (Options)
Enter FCC Channel Number

(Options)

DEFINITION:

   Allows the CPS to automatically convert the CPS-user entry of an FCC Channel Number to its correlating frequency. This feature applies to four CPS Frequency fields; the Conventional Personality - General, Rx Frequency and Tx Frequency, the Trunking Site - Repeaters, Radio Rx Frequency and Radio Tx Frequency.

Note: Tx Frequency entries can be further automated with the Options window, Tx Frequency Follows Rx Frequency and the Tx Frequency Offset fields.

When the radio is a Trunking model operating in the 800 MHz frequency band.

     Go To The Custom Page


The Main Page

(Options)

DEFINITION:

The Main page allows you view or define CPS-user preferences relating to Invalid Fields Entries and “Are You Sure?” deletion prompts.

Note: To access the Main Page, from the CPS Menu Bar select: View · Options.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Beep On Invalid Field

Confirm On Deletion

Color To Notify Invalid Field Label

     Go to The Options  Window


Beep On Invalid Field

(Options)

DEFINITION:

  Causes an audio tone to be heard when an inappropriate value is entered or selected in any CPS - field.

Note: Inappropriate field values are also viewable at any time from the CPS Invalid Field Entries feature.

     Go To The Main Page


Confirm On Deletion

(Options)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the CPS to prompt with an Are You Sure message whenever the CPS-user attempts to delete any CPS record. This creates a safety check that requires a CPS-user confirmation when records are being deleted.

     Go To The Main Page


Color To Notify Invalid Field Label

(Options)

DEFINITION:

Causes CPS - field names to appear in a distinct color whenever an inappropriate value is entered or selected.

Note: Inappropriate field values are also viewable at any time from the CPS Invalid Field Entries feature.

     Go To The Main Page


The Personality Assignment Wizard

(Productivity Tools)

DEFINITION:

The Personality Assignment Wizard window allows you to automatically create Zones and Channels from existing Conventional and Trunking Personalities.

Trunking zones are created first followed by Conventional zones. A Trunking Zone automatically and sequentially assigns the Groups of a selected Trunking Personality to the Zone’s channels. All Conventional personalities are placed in ascending order beginning with 1. The total number of possible Conventional and Trunking Zones is radio model dependent.

Once the Wizard process is completed the Personality Assignment to Zone Window (as always) allows you to further organize the radio’s channels.

Note:

•	An alternate method, Drag and Drop, allows you to copy Conventional and Trunking Personalities directly into Personality Assignment to Zone.

•	Conventional Personalities added to the tree view node are shown as their CPS defined alias.

To access the Personality Assignment Wizard from a menu selection or a button-press.

From the Menu Bar select: Feature  Personality Assignment Wizard

From the Toolbar select:

•	Running the Wizard completely overwrites the previous Personality Assignment to Zone channel configuration.

•	Running the Wizard may also overwrite Home Revert Page settings.

Also Note: Depending on the current amount of Zones and Channels and the amount of Zones and Channels selected in the wizard, the following results will occur.

Current Codelug Status:	Result:
If the number of Trunking Zones or Conventional Personalities/ Channels assigned in the Wizard is more than the number previously programmed in the codeplug.	The Wizard adds the desired number of Trunking Zones or Conventional Personalities/Channels.
If the number of Trunking Zones or Conventional Personalities/ Channels assigned in the Wizard is less than the number previously programmed in the codeplug.	The Wizard warns you that not all available Trunking or Conventional Personalities are being used. The excess number remains in the codeplug, but are not utilized.


Drag And Drop

(Productivity Tools)

DEFINITION:

The Drag and Drop feature allows you to efficiently create or add-to the Personality Assignment to Zone groupings of channels. That is, Conventional or Trunking Personalities may be copied by dragging their green arrow icon with the mouse to the appropriate Personality Assignment to Zone node/location.

To create a new zone, click on a Conventional or Trunking Personality while holding down the mouse button drag and drop the personality onto the Personality Assignment to Zone main node (the gray arrow icon).

Conventional and Trunking Personalities can be dragged to create new Zones, however, Conventional personalities may be dragged to existing Zones to create new channels. Existing Personality Assignment Zones are represented with the green arrow icon.

Any number of Conventional Personalities or individual Conventional Personalities may be dragged to existing or new Conventional Zones using standard Windows copy techniques:

•	To Drag and Drop multiple and consecutive Conventional or Trunking personalities hold down the <Shift> key while clicking the mouse on the desired personalities.

•	To Drag and Drop multiple non-consecutive personalities hold down the <Ctrl> key while clicking the mouse on the desired personalities.

Note:

•	When dragging a personality, the CPS “Invalid” [image] cursor appears whenever the drop location is inappropriate.

•	Personality Assignments to Zone groupings of channels is also automated with the Personality Assignment Wizard.

•	As always the Personality Assignment to Zone Window allows you to further organize the zones and channels.


The MDC Message Window

(Message)

DEFINITION:

The MDC Message Window allows you to create and delete MDC Messages, as well as define individual MDC Message functionality. Radio-users are then able to select and transmit these Messages from a dispatcher unit to a portable or mobile unit, or from a portable or mobile unit to a dispatcher unit. However, an MDC Message may not be sent from a portable or mobile unit to a portable or mobile unit.

The MDC Message Alias must be set up identically (or with the same meaning) for the dispatcher and the portable or mobile units. That is, the Message 1 Alias from the dispatching unit must be identical (or have the same meaning) as the Message 1 Alias for the portable or mobile unit. The Message number can be seen at the top of the Message Window or from the CPS tree view. An MDC Message makes more efficient use of a channel as compared to a voice transmission.

Note: MDC Messages are only applicable to display models.

The window’s Navigation Toolbar offers high-level functionality for maintaining MDC Message.

Click on the page below to see more information.


MDC Message Page
The MDC Message Page

(Message)

DEFINITION:

The MDC Message Page allows you to define general functionality for the current MDC Message.

Note: MDC Messages are only applicable to display models.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Message Alias MDC System Revert Personality Alias Revert Personality	Revert Group Strip PL/DPL Ack Expected Name Tone Tag
      Go to the MDC Message Window


Message Alias (Message)
Message Alias

(Message)

DEFINITION:

Allows the ability to add a radio-user recognizable description to be associated with the current MDC Message. Hence, when selecting an MDC Message to be transmitted, the Message Alias represents (in the radio-user’s display) the Message that will be sent. Additionally, this same message will be displayed if the radio receives the message from the dispatcher. It is not possible to send messages directly from radio to radio.

Note: This alias appears on the tree view.

When the radio is a display model.

      Go to the MDC Message Page


MDC System (Message)
MDC System

(Message)

DEFINITION:

Selects the MDC Signaling System to be used by the current MDC Message.

Note: This Signaling System becomes the default Signaling System whether a Revert Personality is selected or not.

When the radio is a display model.

      Go to the MDC Message Page


Revert Personality Alias (Message)
Revert Personality Alias

(Message)

DEFINITION:

Selecting a value for the MDC Message Revert Personality or the Revert Group field automatically displays this Revert Personality Alias. This is a view-only field.

Note: The Alias is created in either the Conventional Personality Alias, or Trunking Group Alias field.

When the radio is a display model.

      Go to the MDC Message Page


Revert Personality (Message)
Revert Personality

(Message)

DEFINITION:

Selects a Conventional or Trunking  Personality (by its CPS given name) causing the current MDC Message to transmit on that channel.

Therefore, when an MDC Message is initiated and when a Revert Personality has been selected, that personality’s functionality is utilized (reverted to) during the transmission. Once the transmission has completed, the radio reverts back to the Personality/Group assigned to the current Channel Selector selected channel (see Personality Assignment).

Note:

•	The Revert Personality uses the MDC Signaling System selected for the current MDC Message.

•	Selecting a Conventional Personality value for this field automatically selects a value for the Revert Personality Alias.

•	When selecting a Trunking Personality value for this field, a Trunking Revert Group must also be selected.

When the radio is a display model.

      Go to the MDC Message Page


Revert Group (Message)
Revert Group

(Message)

DEFINITION:

Selects a Trunking Group causing the current MDC Message to transmit on that channel.

Note:

•	The Revert Personality uses the MDC Signaling System selected for the current MDC Call list Member.

•	The correlating Revert Personality must be selected first.

•	This Group choice automatically fills-in the correlating Revert Personality Alias field.

When the radio is a Trunking portable multi-line display model, and

when the MDC Message, Revert Personality field is set to a Trunking Personality value.

      Go to the MDC Message Page


Strip PL/DPL (Message)
Strip PL/DPL

(Message)

DEFINITION:

Causes the radio to not transmit Private Line (PL) codes for the current current MDC Message. PL codes are stripped when the current Revert Personality, or current (Channel Selector) position Conventional Personality has Transmit PL enabled.

Note: This is useful when it is necessary to communicate to a radio or group of radios without disturbing other radio-users.

When the radio is a display model.

      Go to the MDC Message Page


Acknowledge Expected (Message)
Acknowledge Expected

(Message)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio to expect a reply from the radio being called, for the current MDC Message. Upon a successful transmission, the receiving radio then transmits back an Acknowledge packet as a confirmation. “Acknowledge” then momentarily appears in the radio’s display. The radio will retry up to 5 times or until an Acknowledge is received.

  Causes the radio to transmit this MDC Message only one time, with no expectation of an acknowledgement. The benefit is to reduce channel traffic by eliminating mandatory acknowledges and possible retries for this MDC Message.

When the radio is a display model.

      Go to the MDC Message Page


Name Tone Tag (Message)
Name Tone Tag

(Message)

DEFINITION:

Selects the tone that sounds when receiving the current MDC Message. This allows the radio-user to identify the message by a distinctive tone. This setting takes precedence over the Message Tone Tag setting. However, when this field is set to Standard, the Message Tone Tag setting then takes precedence. There are several ring tones to choose from.

When the radio is a display model.

Alert 1 thru Alert 7, or Standard.

      Go to the MDC Message Page


MDC Status Window

(Status)

DEFINITION:

The MDC Status Window allows you to create and delete MDC Statuses, as well as define individual MDC Status functionality. Radio-users are then able to select and transmit these Statuses from a portable or mobile units to a dispatcher.

The MDC Status Alias must be set up identically (or with the same meaning) for the dispatcher and the portable or mobile units. That is, the Status 1 Alias from the dispatching unit must be identical (or have the same meaning) as the Status 1 Alias for the portable or mobile unit. The Status number can be seen at the top of the Status Window or from the CPS tree view. An MDC Status makes more efficient use of a channel as compared to a voice transmission.

When re-programming the radio, the CPS replaces the 'Last Status Sent' with the first CPS MDC Status List member. During normal operation, upon radio power-up, the radio remembers the 'Last Status Sent' prior to powering off the radio. Therefore due to re-programming, it is recommended that you have your radio's default state defined as the first CPS MDC Status List member.

Note: MDC Messages are only applicable to display models.

The window’s Navigation Toolbar offers high-level functionality for maintaining MDC Status.

Click on the page below to see more information.


MDC Status Page
The MDC Status Page

(Status)

DEFINITION:

The MDC Status Page allows you to define general functionality for the current MDC Status.

When re-programming the radio, the CPS replaces the 'Last Status Sent' with the first CPS MDC Status List member. During normal operation, upon radio power-up, the radio remembers the 'Last Status Sent' prior to powering off the radio. Therefore due to re-programming, it is recommended that you have your radio's default state defined as the first CPS MDC Status List member.

Note: MDC Messages are only applicable to display models.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Status Alias MDC System Revert Personality Alias Revert Personality	Revert Group Strip PL/DPL Ack Expected
      Go to the MDC Status Window


Status Alias (Status)
Status Alias

(Status)

DEFINITION:

Allows the ability to add a radio-user recognizable description to be associated with the current MDC Status. Hence, when selecting an MDC Status to be transmitted, the Status Alias represents (in the radio-user’s display) the Status that will be sent.

Note: This alias appears on the tree view.

When the radio is a display model.

      Go to the MDC Status Page


MDC System (Status)
MDC System

(Status)

DEFINITION:

Selects the MDC Signaling System to be used by the current MDC Status.

Note: This Signaling System becomes the default Signaling System whether a Revert Personality is selected or not.

When the radio is a display model.

      Go to the MDC Status Page


Revert Personality Alias (Status)
Revert Personality Alias

(Status)

DEFINITION:

Selecting a value for the MDC Status Revert Personality or the Revert Group field automatically displays this Revert Personality Alias. This is a view-only field.

Note: The Alias is created in either the Conventional Personality Alias, or Trunking Group Alias field.

When the radio is a display model.

      Go to the MDC Status Page


Revert Personality (Status)
Revert Personality

(Status)

DEFINITION:

Selects a Conventional or Trunking Personality (by its CPS given name) causing the current MDC Status to transmit on that channel.

Therefore, when an MDC Status is initiated and when a Revert Personality has been selected, that personality’s functionality is utilized (reverted to) during the transmission. Once the transmission has completed, the radio reverts back to the Personality/ Group assigned to the current Channel Selector selected channel (see Personality Assignment).

Note:

•	The Revert Personality uses the MDC Signaling System selected for the current MDC Status.

•	Selecting a Conventional Personality value for this field automatically selects a value for the Revert Personality Alias.

•	When selecting a Trunking Personality value for this field, a Trunking Revert Group must also be selected.

When the radio is a display model.

      Go to the MDC Status Page


Revert Group (Status)
Revert Group

(Status)

DEFINITION:

Selects a Trunking Group causing the current MDC Status to transmit on that channel.

Note:

•	The Revert Personality uses the MDC Signaling System selected for the current MDC Call list Member.

•	The correlating Revert Personality must be selected first.

•	This Group choice automatically fills-in the correlating Revert Personality Alias field.

When the radio is a Trunking portable multi-line display model, and

when the MDC Status, Revert Personality field is set to a Trunking Personality value.

      Go to the MDC Status Page


Strip PL/DPL (Status)
Strip PL/DPL

(Status)

DEFINITION:

Causes the radio to not transmit Private Line (PL) codes for the current MDC Status. PL codes are stripped when the current Revert Personality, or current (Channel Selector) position Conventional Personality has Transmit PL enabled.

Note: This is useful when it is necessary to communicate to a radio or group of radios without disturbing other radio-users.

When the radio is a display model.

      Go to the MDC Status Page


Acknowledge Expected (Status)
Acknowledge Expected

(Status)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio to expect a reply from the radio being called, for the current MDC Status. Upon a successful transmission, the receiving radio (dispatcher) then transmits back an Acknowledge packet as a confirmation. “Acknowledge” then momentarily appears in the radio’s display. The radio will retry up to 5 times or until an Acknowledge is received.

  Causes the radio to transmit this MDC Status only one time, with no expectation of an acknowledgement. The benefit is to reduce channel traffic by eliminating mandatory acknowledges and possible retries for this MDC Status.

When the radio is a display model.

      Go to the MDC Status Page


MDC Message Dialog


Message Alias

Allows the ability to add a radio-user recognizable description to be associated with the current MDC Message. Hence, when selecting an MDC Message to be transmitted, the Message Alias represents (in the radio-user’s display) the Message that will be sent. Additionally, this same message will be displayed if the radio receives the message from the dispatcher. It is not possible to send messages directly from radio to radio.

• See More Information


MDC System

Selects the MDC Signaling System to be used by the current MDC Message.

• See More Information


Revert Personality Alias

Selecting a value for the MDC Message Revert Personality or the Revert Group field automatically displays this Revert Personality Alias. This is a view-only field.

• See More Information


Revert Personality

Selects a Conventional or Trunking Personality (by its CPS given name) causing the current MDC Message to transmit on that channel.

• See More Information


Revert Group

Selects a Trunking Group causing the current MDC Message to transmit on that channel.

• See More Information


Strip PL/DPL

Causes the radio to not transmit Private Line (PL) codes for the current MDC Message. PL codes are stripped when the current Revert Personality, or current (Channel Selector) position Conventional Personality has Transmit PL enabled.

• See More Information


Acknowledge Expected

  Causes the radio to expect a reply from the radio being called, for the current MDC Message. Upon a successful transmission, the receiving radio then transmits back an Acknowledge packet as a confirmation. “Acknowledge” then momentarily appears in the radio’s display. The radio will retry up to 5 times or until an Acknowledge is received.

  Causes the radio to transmit this MDC Message only one time, with no expectation of an acknowledgement. The benefit is to reduce channel traffic by eliminating mandatory acknowledges and possible retries for this MDC Message.

• See More Information


Name Tone Tag

Selects the tone that sounds when receiving the current MDC Message. This allows the radio-user to identify the message by a distinctive tone. This setting takes precedence over the Message Tone Tag setting. However, when this field is set to Standard, the Message Tone Tag setting then takes precedence. There are several ring tones to choose from.

• See More Information


MDC Status Window


Status Alias

Allows the ability to add a radio-user recognizable description to be associated with the current MDC Status. Hence, when selecting an MDC Status to be transmitted, the Status Alias represents (in the radio-user’s display) the Status that will be sent.

• See More Information


MDC System

Selects the MDC Signaling System to be used by the current MDC Status.

• See More Information


Revert Personality Alias

Selecting a value for the MDC Status Revert Personality or the Revert Group field automatically displays this Revert Personality Alias. This is a view-only field.

• See More Information


Revert Personality

Selects a Conventional or Trunking Personality (by its CPS given name) causing the current MDC Status to transmit on that channel.

• See More Information


Revert Group

Selects a Trunking Group causing the current MDC Status to transmit on that channel.

• See More Information


Strip PL/DPL

Causes the radio to not transmit Private Line (PL) codes for the current MDC Status. PL codes are stripped when the current Revert Personality, or current (Channel Selector) position Conventional Personality has Transmit PL enabled.

• See More Information


Acknowledge Expected

  Causes the radio to expect a reply from the radio being called, for the current MDC Status. Upon a successful transmission, the receiving radio (dispatcher) then transmits back an Acknowledge packet as a confirmation. “Acknowledge” then momentarily appears in the radio’s display. The radio will retry up to 5 times or until an Acknowledge is received.

  Causes the radio to transmit this MDC Status only one time, with no expectation of an acknowledgement. The benefit is to reduce channel traffic by eliminating mandatory acknowledges and possible retries for this MDC Status.

• See More Information


The LS Trunking Personality Window

DEFINITION:

The LS Trunking Personality window allows you to create and delete Trunking Personalities, as well as define individual Trunking Personality functionality. LS Trunking dispatch is one of the two dispatch modes. The other dispatch type is Conventional. Trunking channels can only communicate to radios operating on Trunking channels.

In Trunking dispatch mode, personalities consist of high-level settings that define functionality for all Groups within the personality. Groups then have individual functionality settings. All of the Groups of a Trunking Personality are assigned as a Zone to the radio’s Channel Selector channels. When the radio-user sets the Channel Selector to a given channel, the Group and Personality settings determine the radio’s functionality at that time (see Personality Assignment).

In Conventional dispatch mode, Personalities are assigned to each channel of the Channel Selector.

The Navigation Toolbar offers high-level functionality for Trunking Personalities.

Click on any page title below (underlined in green) to see more information.


Site Access Page (Trunking Personality)
The Site Access Page

(LS Trunking Personality)

DEFINITION:

This Site Access page allows you to select a System Site for the current Trunking Personality; and define System Site access functionality. Site Access functionality determines current Trunking Personality communication with the selected System Site. Therefore, a Trunking Personality is partially defined by its System Site and Site Access settings.

Note:

•	A Trunking Site can be assigned to more than one Trunking Personality.

•	A Trunking Personality constitutes a Zone (see Personality Assignment).

Click on any CPS field below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

System Site Home Repeater Tx Power Level Time-Out Timer Unmute/Mute Rule	Cue Tone All Group Scan High Priority Group Scan Option Board Feature Option Board Configuration Index Data Operation (Trident)
     Go to the Trunking Personality Window


System Site (Trunking Personality)
System Site

(LS Trunking Personality, Site Access)

DEFINITION:

Selects an LS Trunking Site for use while operating on any Group for the current Trunking Personality. The LS Trunking Site is a bank of repeaters used for Trunking communications.

     Go to the Site Access Page


Site Access, Home Repeater (Trunking Personality)
Home Repeater

(LS Trunking Personality, Site Access)

DEFINITION:

Selects a Home Repeater for the Trunking Site selected in the System Site field. The Home Repeater is the designated repeater in a Trunking Site that receives transmissions from the radio. The radio is also informed of incoming traffic (voice or data) by data messages sent from its Home Repeater.

Note: The Home Repeater is constantly letting the radio know which repeater in the LS Trunking Site is available for communications, this is known as the Free Repeater. When the Home Repeater is busy, the Free Repeater is used.

     Go to the Site Access Page


Site Access, Tx Power Level (Trunking Personality)
Tx Power Level

(LS Trunking Personality, Site Access)

DEFINITION:

Selects the transmit power level while operating on any Group for the current Trunking Personality. For portable radios this feature can extend radio battery life.

Certain radio models offer the ability to manually change Tx Power level settings via a (short or long) programmable button-press or menu selection.

Note:

•	For a mobile radio the CPS - Tx High Power and Tx Low Power wattage can be defined.

•	For a non-display radio, if the radio does have a programmable button-press assigned to ‘High/Low Power’, the default setting for each personality is always ‘High’.

Low:	Used when communicating in close proximity, and to keep the radio from transmitting into other geographical groups operating on the same frequency.

High:	Used when a stronger signal is needed to extend transmission distances.

     Go to the Site Access Page


Site Access, Time-Out Timer (Trunking Personality)
Time-Out Timer

(LS Trunking Personality, Site Access)

DEFINITION:

Selects the maximum amount of communication time allowed per transmission. This feature applies while operating on any Group for the current Trunking Personality. Once this time expires, the transmission is automatically terminated. Time is in seconds.

15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 180, or

Infinite.

     Go to the Site Access Page


Site Access, Unmute/Mute Rule (Trunking Personality)
Unmute/Mute Rule

(LS Trunking Personality, Site Access)

DEFINITION:

Selects the rule that determines when a radio opens and closes its speaker to receive audio. Unmuting opens the speaker. Muting closes the speaker. This feature applies while operating on any Group for the current Trunking Personality.

Std Unmuting, Std Muting:	To unmute upon LS Word Detect being satisfied, and to mute upon LS Word Undetect being satisfied.

And Unmuting, Std Muting:	To unmute upon Carrier Squelch Detect And upon LS Word Detect being satisfied, and to mute upon LS Word Undetect being satisfied.

And Unmuting, Or Muting:	To unmute upon Carrier Squelch detect And upon LS Word Detect being satisfied, and to mute upon LS Word Undetect being satisfied Or upon loss of Carrier Squelch detect.

     Go to the Site Access Page


Site Access, Cue Tone (Trunking Personality)
Cue Tone

(LS Trunking Personality, Site Access)

DEFINITION:

  Causes an alert tone to sound just after the radio-user presses the PTT button. This indicates to the radio-user that the radio is ready to transmit. This feature applies while operating on any Group for the current Trunking Personality.

     Go to the Site Access Page


Site Access, All Group Scan (Trunking Personality)
All Group Scan

(LS Trunking Personality, Site Access)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio to automatically scan (listens for), and consider unmuting to, the Tx ID’s (transmission activity) of all Groups for the current Trunking Personality. This feature applies while operating on any Group for the current Trunking Personality.

This feature can be radio-user activated by a button press or menu selection.

Note: The radio’s LED double-flashes green during All Group Scan.

     Go to the Site Access Page


Site Access, High Priority Group Scan (Trunking Personality)
High Priority Group Scan

(LS Trunking Personality, Site Access)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio to automatically scan for (listen for) higher priority Group List member(s), or Universal ID List members, while unmuted on a lower priority call. Group and Universal ID priority is determined by position within each list. For both lists, position 1 has the highest priority and then position 2, etc. This feature applies while operating on any Group for the current Trunking Personality.

Note:

•	High Priority Group Scan is only possible while communicating on the Home Repeater.

     Go to the Site Access Page


Site Access, Option Board Feature (Trunking Personality)
Option Board Feature

(LS Trunking Personality, Site Access)

  Enables Option Board functionality to be active for the current Trunking Personality.

Note: The ability to turn radio-wide option board functionality on and off can be assigned to a radio-user (short or long) programmable button-press or menu selection. However, option board functionality only applies for channels where this Trunking Personality Option Board Feature or the Conventional Personality Option Board Feature has been enabled.

When the Option Board Type is not set to None.

     Go to the Site Access Page


Site Access, Option Board Configuration Index (Trunking Personality)
Option Board Configuration Index

(LS Trunking Personality, Site Access)

DEFINITION:

Selects the desired "Advanced" only option board functionality for the current Trunking Personality. Advanced option board types allow for unique settings on a per personality basis. Option board functionality selections are based on the ‘Imported’ third party option board configuration data that applies for the selected Option Board Type.

This selected option board functionality is then automatically downloaded and initiated when the radio-user selects (with the Channel Selector) the current channel.

When Option Board Feature field is enabled, and

when the Option Board Configuration Download is enabled, and

(when the Option Board Type is set to Advanced Option Interface, or Advanced & Voice Storage).

     Go to the Site Access Page


Site Access, Data Operation (Trident ) (Trunking Personality)
Data Operation (Trident)

(LS Trunking Personality, Site Access)

DEFINITION:

  Enables Data Operation (Trident) functionality to be active for the current Trunking Personality.

When the radio is  mobile  model.

     Go to the Site Access Page


Group ID's Page (Trunking Personality)
The Group ID's Page

(LS Trunking Personality)

DEFINITION:

The Group ID’s page allows you to define individual Group functionality for the current Trunking Personality. Group List members are automatically and sequentially assigned to the radio’s channels of a Trunking dispatch Zone (see Personality Assignment).

Each Group has a Receive ID code range defined by its Rx Low ID and its Rx High ID. When a Group Transmit ID falls within the Receive ID code range, the receiving radio unmutes its speaker to receive audio and communication takes place. The Trunking Personalities Unmute/Mute rules must also be satisfied for unmuting to occur.

•	Table Type windows can be maintained with the Short Cut Menu.

•	Right-clicking anywhere on Table Type windows retrieves the Short Cut Menu.

Note: Group settings are continued on the Group Options Page. Settings correlate with the group # column.

Click on any CPS field below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Alias Rx Low ID Rx High ID	Tx Inhibit Low ID Tx Inhibit High ID Tx ID
     Go to the Trunking Personality Window


Group ID's, Alias (Trunking Personality)
Group ID's, Alias

(LS Trunking Personality)

DEFINITION:

The Alias is a radio-user recognizable description for the current Group being defined. Characters, Numbers, and Special Characters can be used.

Example: Jones-125, #500, Electricians-A5

When the radio has a display.

     Go to the Group ID's Page


Group ID's, Rx Low ID (Trunking Personality)
Group ID's, Rx Low ID

(LS Trunking Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Receive Low ID for the current Group. The transmitting radio’s Group Transmit ID must fall within this radio’s Receive Range for communication to occur. The Receive Range is defined as being greater than or equal to this Receive Low ID and less than or equal to this Group’s Receive High ID.

Minimum = 1

Maximum = 250, but never lower than the Group's Receive High ID

     Go to the Group ID's Page


Group ID's, Rx High ID (Trunking Personality)
Group ID's, Rx High ID

(LS Trunking Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Receive High ID for the current Group. The transmitting radio’s Group Transmit ID must fall within this radio’s Receive Range for communication to occur. The Receive Range is defined as being greater than or equal to the this Group’s Receive Low ID and less than or equal to this Receive High ID.

Minimum = 1, but never lower than the Group’s Receive Low ID

Maximum = 250

     Go to the Group ID's Page


Group ID's, Tx Inhibit Low ID (Trunking Personality)
Group ID's, Tx Inhibit Low ID

(LS Trunking Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Transmit Inhibit Low ID for the current Group. Transmit Inhibit allows the transmitting radio-user 3 seconds after releasing the PTT button, to decide to re-press the PTT and transmit again. Within this three second period, this (receiving) radio is not able to transmit.

The transmitting radio’s Group Transmit ID must fall within this radio’s Tx Inhibit Receive Range for Tx Inhibit to occur.

The Tx Inhibit Receive Range is defined as being greater than or equal to this Tx Inhibit Low ID and less than or equal to this Group’s Tx Inhibit High ID.

Note: Normally the Tx Inhibit Receive Range is a subset of the Group ID’s Receive Range. However there can be exceptions.

Minimum = 1

Maximum = 250, but never higher than the Group's Transmit Inhibit High ID

     Go to the Group ID's Page


Group ID's, Tx Inhibit High ID (Trunking Personality)
Group ID's, Tx Inhibit High ID

(LS Trunking Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Transmit Inhibit High ID for the current Group. Transmit Inhibit allows the transmitting radio-user 3 seconds after releasing the PTT button, to decide to re-press the PTT and transmit again. Within this three second period, this (receiving) radio is not able to transmit.

The transmitting radio’s Group Transmit ID must fall within this radio’s Tx Inhibit Receive Range for Tx Inhibit to occur.

The Tx Inhibit Receive Range is defined as being greater than or equal to the Group’s Tx Inhibit Low ID and less than or equal to this Tx Inhibit High ID.

Note: Normally the Tx Inhibit Receive Range is a subset of the Group ID’s Receive Range. However there can be exceptions.

Minimum = 1, but never lower than the Group's Transmit Inhibit Low ID

Maximum = 250

     Go to the Group ID's Page


Group ID's, Tx ID (Trunking Personality)
Group ID's, Tx ID

(LS Trunking Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Transmit ID for the current Group. This Transmit ID is sent when the radio-user presses the PTT button for the current Group.

If this Transmit ID falls within the Receive Range on the receiving radio, communication can occur. The Receive Range is defined as being greater than or equal to the receiving radio’s Receive Low ID and less than or equal the receiving radio’s Receive High ID.

Minimum = 1

Maximum = 250

     Go to the Group ID's Page


Group Options Page  (Trunking Personality)
The Group Options Page

(LS Trunking Personality)

DEFINITION:

The Group ID’s page allows you to define individual Group member functionality for the current Trunking Personality. Group List members are automatically and sequentially assigned to the radio’s channels of a Trunking dispatch Zone (see Personality Assignment).

•	Table Type windows can be maintained with the Short Cut Menu.

•	Right-clicking anywhere on Table Type windows retrieves the Short Cut Menu.

Note: Group settings are continued on the Group ID's Page. Settings correlate with the group # column.

Click on any CPS field below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Call Light Interconnect Transpond Auto Group Scan	Scan Reply Data Only Signaling Enable Signaling Squelch
     Go to the Trunking Personality Window


Group Options, Call Light (Trunking Personality)
Group Options, Call Light

(LS Trunking Personality)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio’s LED to flash yellow while receiving a call on the current Group. This call indicator allows a dispatcher or radio-caller to notify a targeted radio-user (or group of radios-users) of a missed call. The visual alert persists until reset by the returning user. This is known as a Call Light call.

When enabled an incoming radio call triggers external alarms. External alarms include either the Radio Configuration Mobile Accessory Pin 4 "External Alarm" selection or the (Mobile Conventional or Trunking) button "Horn and Lights" selection.

     Go to the Group Options Page


Group Options, Interconnect (Trunking Personality)
Group Options, Interconnect

(LS Trunking Personality)

DEFINITION:

  Allows the radio-user to transmit while the radio is unmuted on the current Trunking Group. This transmit while unmuted capability also facilitates telephone communications while operating in Trunking dispatch mode for the current Group.

Note:

•	Radio Calls are not decoded on Interconnect enabled Groups.

•	PTT ID's are not encoded or decoded on Interconnect enabled Groups.

•	 When the current personality is "Data Operation (Trident)" enabled, this feature shall be disabled.

     Go to the Group Options Page


Group Options, Transpond (Trunking Personality)
Group Options, Transpond

(LS Trunking Personality)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio to transmit the current Group Transmit ID upon detection of a disconnect message. This serves as an audio Radio Check for all radio’s with a qualified receive range. This feature applies while operating on the current Group.

WARNING: When radios within the same talk group share the same receive range, and when these radios all have Transpond enabled, Transpond can then initiate an infinite loop of these audio radio checks.

     Go to the Group Options Page


Group Options, Auto Group Scan (Trunking Personality)
Group Options, Auto Group Scan

(LS Trunking Personality)

DEFINITION:

  Enables the current Group to be included in the Auto Group Scan. When operating on an Auto Group Scan enabled Group, this feature automatically scans (listens-for) and considers unmuting to current Group transmissions and all lower numbered Group transmissions (based on their position in the current Group List). Lower numbered Groups (in the Group List) are only considered for unmuting when they have this Auto Group Scan feature enabled.

Example: If the radio is currently operating on Group 4, groups 1 to 4 are automatically listened-for. Groups 5 or higher are not listened-for. Any groups between and including 1 and 4 that do not have this Auto Group Scan feature enabled are not listened-for.

Note: Group numbers are listed in the far-left column of the Group List.

Important Note: Enabling the Non-prioritized Auto Group Scan field changes the functionality of this feature.

     Go to the Group Options Page


Group Options, Scan Reply (Trunking Personality)
Group Options, Scan Reply

(LS Trunking Personality)

DEFINITION:

  Enables the radio to automatically transmit on this Group when it is unmuted to / landed-on. This feature applies when this Group is landed from any of the following Scan features: All Group Scan, Auto Group Scan, and High Priority Group Scan.

Note: The radio can transmit on the landed Group as long as the Scan Hang Timer has not expired. Once the Scan Hang Timer has expired, the radio uses the current Channel Selector selected channel / group to transmit on.

     Go to the Group Options Page


Group Options, Data Only (Trunking Personality)
Group Options, Data Only

(LS Trunking Personality)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio to not unmute its speaker to an incoming Group call. Therefore call data can be received without any noticeable audio to the radio-user. This feature applies while operating on the current Group.

Note: Radio Calls and PTT ID's are not decoded on Data Only enabled Groups.

     Go to the Group Options Page


Group Options Signaling Enable
Group Options, Signaling Enable

(Trunking Personality)

  Allows the current Trunking Group to transmit or receive Signaling System data.

Note:  When the current personality is "Data Operation (Trident)" enabled, this feature shall be disabled.

When a Rx System is selected, or

when a Tx System is selected.

     Go to the Group Options Page


Group Options, Signaling Squelch

(Trunking Personality)

  Signaling Squelch requires the current Trunking Personality’s - Unmute Rule to be satisfied And a Voice Call match to be detected in order for the radio to unmute. This feature applies while operating on the current Group.

When an Individual MDC Voice Call targets one radio in a Group, these Signaling Squelch conditions can only be true for that one member of the Group. All other radio’s currently operating on the Group are muted for the duration of the call (if enabled, the Busy LED will be on for the duration of the call).

However, even when the Individual ID call is not a match for a radio operating on the same Group, pressing the programmable Signaling Squelch button allows the radio to unmute to the Trunking call. This is possible because the Signaling Squelch button toggles "On" and "Off" the requirement of a Voice Call match.

When the Signaling Squelch rules are met for the current radio, pressing the Signaling Squelch button effectively ends the Release Squelch state.

  When disabled, only the Trunking Personality’s Unmute Rule must be met for the radio to unmute to a Group call.

Note:  When the current personality is "Data Operation (Trident)" enabled, this feature shall be disabled.

When a Rx System is selected, and

when the Group Options, Signaling Enabled field is Enabled.

     Go to the Group Options Page


Universal ID List Page (Trunking Personality)
Select a Universal ID List Page

(LS Trunking Personality)

DEFINITION:

The Universal ID List Page allows you to select a Universal ID List for the current Trunking Personality. This Universal ID List then applies for all Groups of the current Trunking Personality.

Click on any CPS field below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Universal ID List

     Go to the Trunking Personality Window


Universal ID List (Trunking Personality)
Universal ID List

(LS Trunking Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Universal ID Lists for the current Trunking Personality. This Universal ID List then applies for all Groups of the current Trunking Personality.

A Universal ID List can contain up to four Universal ID's. A Universal ID List can be assigned to more than one Trunking Personality.

Note:

1.	This selection can also be set to None.

2.	 When the current personality is "Data Operation (Trident)" enabled, this feature shall be disabled.

Minimum = 1

Maximum = 16

     Go to the Universal ID List Page


Signaling Page (Trunking Personality)
Signaling Page

(LS Trunking Personality)

DEFINITION:

The Signaling System page allows you to select the Signaling data type and system to be used when receiving and or transmitting Signaling System messages for the current Trunking Personality. These Signaling Systems then apply for all Groups of the current Trunking Personality.

Click on any CPS field below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Rx System

Tx System

     Go to the Trunking Personality Window


Rx Signaling System (Trunking Personality)
Rx System

(LS Trunking Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Rx Signaling data type and system to be used when receiving a Signaling System transmission for the current Trunking Personality. This Rx Signaling System then applies for all Groups of the current Trunking Personality.

Note:  When the current personality is "Data Operation (Trident)" enabled, this feature shall be disabled.

     Go to the Signaling System Page


Tx Signaling System (Trunking Personality)
Tx System

(LS Trunking Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Tx Signaling data type and system to be used when transmitting a Signaling System communication for the current Trunking Personality. This Tx Signaling System then applies for all Groups of the current Trunking Personality.

Note:  When the current personality is "Data Operation (Trident)" enabled, this feature shall be disabled.

     Go to the Signaling System Page


Scan List Page (Trunking Personality)
Select a Scan List Page

(LS Trunking Personality)

DEFINITION:

The Scan List page allows you to select a Scan List for use while operating in the Scan Mode for the current Trunking Personality. This Scan List then applies for all Groups of the current Trunking Personality.

Click on any CPS field below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Scan List

Non-prioritized Auto Group Scan

     Go to the Trunking Personality Window


Scan List (Trunking Personality)
Scan List

(LS Trunking Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Scan List to be used by the radio while operating in the Scan Mode for the current Trunking Personality. This Scan List then applies for all Groups of the current Trunking Personality.

The Scan List defines certain functionality and determines which callers the radio scans for (listens for), and considers unmuting to, on the selected Scan List channels (Conventional Personalities or Trunking Groups).

Note:  When the current personality is "Data Operation (Trident)" enabled, this feature shall be disabled.

     Go to The Scan List Page


Non-prioritized Auto Group Scan (LS Trunking Personality)
Non-prioritized Auto Group scan

(LS Trunking Personality)

  Enables all Groups (of the current Trunking Personality) having Auto Group Scan enabled to be automatically scanned for (listened-for) possible incoming transmissions.

  When disabled, Auto Group Scan then considers Auto Group Scanning based on priority/position in the Group List. This priority is based relative to the radio’s current operating channel/Group position in the Group List.

     Go to The Scan List Page


Phone System Page (Trunking Personality)
Select a Phone System Page

(LS Trunking Personality)

DEFINITION:

The Phone page allows you to select the Phone System to be used for the current Trunking Personality. This Phone System then applies for all Groups of the current Trunking Personality.

Click on any CPS field below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Phone System

     Go to the Trunking Personality Window


Phone System (Trunking Personality)
Phone System

(LS Trunking Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Phone System to be used for all Groups in the current Trunking Personality. This Phone System then applies for all Groups of the current Trunking Personality.

A Phone System defines certain functionality and the list of phone numbers that allow the radio-user to make telephone calls.

Note:  When the current personality is "Data Operation (Trident)" enabled, this feature shall be disabled.

     Go to the Phone System Page


LS Universal ID Window (Trunking Personality)
The LS Universal ID Window

The LS Universal ID List window allows you to create and delete Universal ID Lists, as well as define individual Universal ID functionality within each list. Each list can have up to 4 Universal IDs. A Universal ID List can be assigned to a Trunking Personality. Once assigned, the Universal ID List applies to all Groups within that Trunking Personality.

A Universal ID call has the highest priority for an incoming call, even over a Priority #1 - Scan List member. Within Universal ID’s, call priority is determined by location in the list. Position 1 has the highest priority. If a higher priority Universal ID call is detected, it interrupts any other call, including lower ranked Universal ID calls currently unmuted on a radio.

Note:

•	Current call interruptions by a Universal ID call are only possible when the call is taking place on the Trunking Personality’s Home Repeater.

•	Universal ID communication occurs when a radio transmits a Group Tx ID that is equal to a Universal Rx ID on a receiving radio.

The Navigation Toolbar offers high-level functionality for Universal Lists.

Click on any page title below (underlined in green) to see more information.


LS Universal ID List Page (Trunking Personality)
The LS Universal ID List Page

(LS Trunking Personality)

DEFINITION:

The LS Universal ID List Page allows you to define individual Universal ID functionality within each Universal ID List. Each list can have up to 4 Universal IDs.

A Universal ID call has the highest priority for an incoming call, even over a Priority #1 - Scan List member.

Note: Universal ID settings are continued on the Universal ID List Options Page. Settings correlate with the Universal ID # column.

Click on any CPS field below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Alias

Rx ID

Tx Inhibit

      Go to the LS Universal ID Window


LS Universal, ID Alias (Trunking Personality)
LS Universal, ID Alias

(LS Trunking Personality)

DEFINITION:

The Alias is a radio-user recognizable description for the current Universal ID. Characters, Numbers, and Special Characters can be used.

Example: Jones-125, #500, Electricians-A5

When the radio has a display.

     Go to the Universal ID Window


LS Universal, Rx ID (Trunking Personality)
LS Universal, Rx ID

(LS Trunking Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selects a receive code for the current Universal ID. If at any time this receive code is detected, the radio unmutes to it. This high-priority call can interrupt any call except higher ranked Universal ID calls.

This Universal ID belongs to a Universal ID List. The Universal ID List can be assigned to a Trunking Personality. Once assigned, the Universal ID List and this ID apply to all Groups within that Trunking Personality.

Note:

•	Current call interruptions by a Universal ID call are only possible when the call is taking place on the Trunking Personality’s Home Repeater.

•	The transmitting radio must transmit a Group Tx ID that is equal to this Universal Rx ID for communication to occur.

Minimum = 1

Maximum = 250

     Go to the Universal ID Window


LS Universal ID, Tx Inhibit (Trunking Personality)
LS Universal ID, Tx Inhibit

(LS Trunking Personality)

DEFINITION:

  Causes Transmit Inhibit to be active when the radio receives a call for the current Universal ID. Transmit inhibit allows the transmitting radio-user 3 seconds after releasing the PTT button to decide to re-press the PTT and transmit again. Within this three second period, this (receiving) radio is not able to transmit.

This Universal ID belongs to a Universal ID List. The Universal ID List can be assigned to a Trunking Personality. Once assigned, the Universal ID List, this Universal ID, and this feature apply to all Groups within that Trunking Personality.

     Go to the Universal ID Window


LS Universal ID Options List Page (Trunking Personality)
The LS Universal ID Options List Page

(LS Trunking Personality)

DEFINITION:

The LS Universal ID Options List Page allows you to define individual Universal ID functionality within each Universal ID List. Each list can have up to 4 Universal IDs.

A Universal ID call has the highest priority for an incoming call, even over a Priority #1 - Scan List member.

Note: Universal ID settings are continued on the Universal ID List Page. Settings correlate with the Universal ID # column.

Click on any CPS field below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Call Light Interconnect Transpond	Data Only Signaling Enable Signaling Squelch
      Go to the LS Universal ID Window


LS Universal ID, Call Light (Trunking Personality)
LS Universal ID, Call Light

(LS Trunking Personality)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio’s LED to flash yellow while receiving a call for the current Universal ID. This call indicator allows a dispatcher or radio-caller to notify a targeted radio-user (or group of radios-users) of a missed call. The visual alert persists until reset by the returning user. This is known as a Universal ID, Call Light call.

When enabled an incoming radio call triggers external alarms. External alarms include either the Radio Configuration Mobile Accessory Pin 4 "External Alarm" selection or the (Mobile Conventional or Trunking) button "Horn and Lights" selection.

This Universal ID belongs to a Universal ID List. The Universal ID List can be assigned to a Trunking Personality. Once assigned, the Universal ID List, this Universal ID, and this feature apply to all Groups within that Trunking Personality.

      Go to the Universal ID Options List Page


LS Universal ID, Transpond (Trunking Personality)
LS Universal ID, Transpond

(LS Trunking Personality)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio to transmit its current Group Transmit ID upon detection of a disconnect message. This serves as an audio Radio Check for all radio’s with a qualified receive range. This feature applies while receiving a call for the current Universal ID.

This Universal ID belongs to a Universal ID List. The Universal ID List can be assigned to a Trunking Personality. Once assigned, the Universal ID List, this Universal ID, and this feature apply to all Groups within that Trunking Personality.

WARNING: When radios within the same talk group share the same receive range, and when these radios all have Transpond enabled, Transpond can then initiate an infinite loop of these audio radio checks.

Note: The current Groups Transmit ID is based on the Channel Selector position. See Personality Assignment.

      Go to the Universal ID Options List Page


LS Universal ID, Interconnect (Trunking Personality)
LS Universal ID, Interconnect

(LS Trunking Personality)

DEFINITION:

  Allows the radio-user to transmit while the radio is unmuted to the current Universal ID. This transmit while unmuted capability also facilitates telephone communications while operating in a Trunking dispatch mode for the current Universal ID.

This Universal ID belongs to a Universal ID List. The Universal ID List can be assigned to a Trunking Personality. Once assigned, the Universal ID List, this Universal ID, and this feature apply to all Groups within that Trunking Personality.

      Go to the Universal ID Options List Page


LS Universal ID, Data Only (Trunking Personality)
LS Universal ID, Data Only

(LS Trunking Personality)

DEFINITION:

  Causes the radio to not unmute its speaker to an incoming call from the current Universal ID. Therefore call data can be received without any noticeable audio to the radio-user.

This Universal ID belongs to a Universal ID List. The Universal ID List can be assigned to a Trunking Personality. Once assigned, the Universal ID List, this Universal ID, and this feature apply to all Groups within that Trunking Personality.

      Go to the Universal ID Options List Page


LS Universal ID, Signaling Enable

(Trunking Personality)

  Allows the current Universal ID to receive Signaling System data.

This Universal ID belongs to a Universal ID List. The Universal ID List can be assigned to a Trunking Personality. Once assigned, the Universal ID List, this Universal ID, and this feature apply to all Groups within that Trunking Personality.

Note: This is only true if the current Universal ID List is assigned to a Trunking Personality that has a Rx System selected.

      Go to the Universal ID Options List Page


LS Universal ID, Signaling Squelch

(Trunking Personality)

  Signaling Squelch requires the current Trunking Personality’s - Unmute Rule to be satisfied And a Voice Call match to be detected in order for the radio to unmute. This feature applies while receiving a call from the current Universal ID.

When an Individual MDC Voice Call targets one radio in a Group, these Signaling Squelch conditions can only be true for that one member of the Group. All other radio’s currently operating on the Group are muted for the duration of the call (if enabled, the Busy LED will be on for the duration of the call).

However, even when the Individual ID call is not a match for a radio operating on the same Group, pressing the programmable Signaling Squelch button allows the radio to unmute to the Trunking call. This is possible because the Signaling Squelch button toggles "On" and "Off" the requirement of a Voice Call match.

When the Signaling Squelch rules are met for the current radio, pressing the Signaling Squelch button effectively ends the Release Squelch state.

  When disabled, only the Trunking Personality’s Unmute Rule must be met for the radio to unmute to a Universal ID call.

When the Universal ID, Signaling Enable field is enabled.

      Go to the Universal ID Options List Page


LS Trunking Site Window
The LS Trunking Site Window

DEFINITION:

The LS Trunking Site window allows you to create and delete Trunking Sites, as well as define individual repeater functionality for each Trunking Site.

A Trunking Site contains up to twenty virtual-setups of repeaters that mirror actual repeater functionality. These setups enable the radio to communicate with these repeaters.

Trunking Site settings are assigned to a Trunking Personality through the System Site field. These settings then become functional for all Groups within that Trunking Personality. A site can be used by more than one Trunking Personality.

Important Note: Due to the complexity of creating CPS Trunking Sites, Trunking Site information can be Exported to Trunking Site Files and then reused by other CPS-users. Once Exported, Site File information can then be Imported when needed for other radios.Imported when needed for other radios.

The Navigation Toolbar offers high-level functionality for Truking Sites.

Click on any page title below (underlined in green) to see more information.


System Page (Trunking Site)
The System Page

(Trunking Site)

DEFINITION:

The System page allows you to define functionality that applies to all repeater in the current Trunking Site.

Trunking Site settings are assigned to a Trunking Personality through the System Site field. These settings then become functional for all Groups within that Trunking Personality.

Important Note: Due to the complexity of creating CPS Trunking Sites, Trunking Site information can be Exported to Trunking Site Files and then reused by other CPS-users. Once Exported, Site File information can then be Imported when needed for other radios.

Click on any CPS field below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Area ID Front Porch Disconnect Words Data Deviation 12.5 KHz	Data Deviation 20 KHz / 25 KHz Data Invert Rx Data Invert Tx Unassigned Repeater Display
     Go t the LS Trunking Site Window


Area ID (Trunking Site)
Area ID

(Trunking Site)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Area ID setting for the current Trunking Site. When frequencies are the same for two Trunking Sites located in close geographical vicinity to each other, the Area ID can ensure site uniqueness. An Area ID match determines successful communication between radios and their proper Trunking Site. There are only two possible selections: "0" or "1".

Trunking Site settings are assigned to a Trunking Personality through the System Site field. These settings then become functional for all Groups within that Trunking Personality.

     Go to the System Page


Front Porch (Trunking Site)
Front Porch

(Trunking Site)

DEFINITION:

Selects the amount of time that the radio waits to transmit data once carrier has begun to transmit. Transmitting carrier is initiated by pressing the PTT button. This feature applies for the current Trunking Site.

Trunking Site settings are assigned to a Trunking Personality through the System Site field. These settings then become functional for all Groups within that Trunking Personality.

WARNING: It is possible to disable the radio's ability to receive and/or transmit data. If you are not fully aware of the impact of this setting, DO NOT MODIFY IT!

Minimum = 0 Milliseconds

Maximum = 60 Milliseconds

Increments = 4 Milliseconds

     Go to the System Page


Disconnect Words (Trunking Site)
Disconnect Words

(Trunking Site)

Selects the number of Disconnect Words that the radio transmits when the radio-user de-keys the radio. A Disconnect Word warns the receiving radio to mute its speaker to avoid unwanted disconnect noise, known as Squelch Tail. This feature applies for the current Trunking Site.

Trunking Site settings are assigned to a Trunking Personality through the System Site field. These settings then become functional for all Groups within that Trunking Personality.

Minimum = 1

Maximum = 4

     Go to the System Page


Data Deviation 12.5 KHz (Trunking Site)
Data Deviation 12.5 KHz

(Trunking Site)

Selects the relative deviation setting for the current Trunking Site. This setting allows you to adjust the transmit signal-strength for Trunking data such as, MDC Messages and MDC Statuses. Either this 12.5 KHz setting, or the 20/25 KHz Data Deviation setting will apply for the individual repeaters of this Trunking Site. This is determined by the Bandwidth setting of each individual repeater.

Trunking Site settings are assigned to a Trunking Personality through the System Site field. These settings then become functional for all Groups within that Trunking Personality.

High = 850 Hz

Medium = 650 Hz

Low = 500 Hz

     Go to the System Page


Data Deviation 20_KHz_25_KHz (Trunking Site)
Data Deviation 20 KHz / 25 KHz

(Trunking Site)

Selects the relative deviation setting for the current Trunking Site. This setting allows you to adjust the transmit signal-strength for Trunking data such as, MDC Messages and MDC Statuses. Either this 20/25 KHz setting, or the 12.5 KHz Data Deviation setting will apply for the individual repeaters of this Trunking Site. This is determined by the Bandwidth setting of each individual repeater.

Trunking Site settings are assigned to a Trunking Personality through the System Site field. These settings then become functional for all Groups within that Trunking Personality.

High = 1000 Hz

Medium = 750 Hz

Low = 500 Hz

     Go to the System Page


Data Invert Rx (Trunking Site)
Data Invert Rx

(Trunking Site)

DEFINITION:

  Causes receive data to be inverted by the radio. This feature applies for the current Trunking Site. Data Invert must also be enabled for the transmitting radio, and Trunking Site, for successful communication to occur.

Trunking Site settings are assigned to a Trunking Personality through the System Site field. These settings then become functional for all Groups within that Trunking Personality.

     Go to the System Page


Data Invert Tx (Trunking Site)
Data Invert Tx

(Trunking Site)

DEFINITION:

  Causes transmit data to be inverted just prior to being transmitted by the radio. This feature applies for the current Trunking Site. Data Invert Rx must also be enabled for the receiving radio, and Trunking Site, for successful communication to occur.

Trunking Site settings are assigned to a Trunking Personality through the System Site field. These settings then become functional for all Groups within that Trunking Personality.

     Go to the System Page


Unassigned Repeater Display (Trunking Site)
Unassigned Repeater Display

(Trunking Site)

DEFINITION:

  Causes "UNPROG RPTR" to appear on the radio’s display for a ten second duration. This is true when the radio is attempting to access a repeater currently not defined for the Trunking Site that the radio’s current Trunking channel is operating on. This alerts the radio-user that this repeater is not accessible. This feature applies for the current Trunking Site.

Trunking Site settings are assigned to a Trunking Personality through the System Site field. These settings then become functional for all Groups within that Trunking Personality.

Important Note: This feature is not supported by older versions of radio firmware.

When the radio has a display.

     Go to the System Page


Repeaters Page (Trunking Site)
The Repeaters Page

(Trunking Site)

DEFINITION:

The Repeaters page allows you to define individual repeater functionality for each Trunking Site. Repeater settings are continued on the Advanced page and correlate with the Repeater #.

Important Note: Due to the complexity of creating CPS Trunking Sites, Trunking Site information can be Exported to Trunking Site Files and then reused by other CPS-users. Once Exported, Site File information can then be Imported when needed for other radios.

Note:

•	The Repeater Assigned field must be enabled for an individual repeater to be defined and active.

•	Trunking Sites are assigned to Trunking Personalities through the System Site field.

Click on any CPS field below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Repeater Assigned

Rx Radio Frequency

Tx Radio Frequency

Interconnect

Bandwidth

     Go to the LS Trunking Site Window


Repeater Assigned (Trunking Site)
Repeater Assigned

(Trunking Site)

Determines whether this repeater is assigned or active for the current Trunking Site. An unassigned repeater can not be used or modified.

     Go to the Repeaters Page


Repeater, Rx Radio Frequency (Trunking Site)
Repeater, Rx Radio Frequency

(Trunking Site)

DEFINITION:

Selects the radio’s receive frequency to match the transmit frequency of the current repeater.

This repeater is part of the current Trunking Site that can be assigned to a Trunking Personality. This setting then becomes functional for all Groups within that Trunking Personality.

Note:

•	When the Enter FCC Channel Number field is enabled, the CPS automatically converts FCC Channel Numbers to their correlating frequency.

•	Enter the FCC Channel Number and then press the <Tab> key or the <Enter> Key to register and convert the entry.

When the Repeater Assigned field is enabled.

Minimum = Equal to the Minimum Radio Frequency.

Maximum = Equal to the Maximum Radio Frequency.

     Go to the Repeaters Page


Repeater, Tx Radio Frequency (Trunking Site)
Repeater, Tx Radio Frequency

(Trunking Site)

DEFINITION:

Selects the radio’s transmit frequency to match the receive frequency of the current repeater.

This repeater is part of the current Trunking Site that can be assigned to a Trunking Personality. This setting then becomes functional for all Groups within that Trunking Personality.

When the Repeater Assigned field is enabled.

Minimum = Equal to the Minimum Radio Frequency.

Maximum = Equal to the Maximum Radio Frequency.

     Go to the Repeaters Page


Repeater, Interconnect (Trunking Site)
Repeater, Interconnect

(Trunking Site)

DEFINITION:

  Selects the current repeater as being capable of transmitting telephone calls.

This repeater is part of the current Trunking Site that can be assigned to a Trunking Personality. Telephone calls initiated while operating on any Group within the assigned Trunking Personality are able to use this repeater.

When the Repeater Assigned field is enabled.

     Go to the Repeaters Page


Repeater, Bandwidth (Trunking Site)
Repeater, Bandwidth

(Trunking Site)

DEFINITION:

Selects the radio’s transmit and receive Bandwidth to match the bandwidth of the current repeater.

This repeater is part of the current Trunking Site that can be assigned to a Trunking Personality. This setting then becomes functional for all Groups within that Trunking Personality.

Note:  India models only support 12.5KHz.

When the Repeater Assigned field is enabled.

12.5 KHz

20.0 KHz

25.0 KHz

     Go to the Repeaters Page


Advanced Page (Trunking Site)
The Advanced Page

(Trunking Site)

DEFINITION:

The Advanced page allows you to further define individual repeater functionality for each Trunking Site. Repeater settings are continued on the Repeater Page and correlate with the Repeater #.

Important Note: Due to the complexity of creating CPS Trunking Sites, Trunking Site information can be Exported to Trunking Site Files and then reused by other CPS-users. Once Exported, Site File information can then be Imported when needed for other radios.

Note:

•	The Repeater Assigned field must be enabled for an individual repeater to be defined and active.

•	Trunking Sites are assigned to Trunking Personalities through the System Site field.

WARNING: These fields should not be modified if the user is not fully aware of the impact of the setting. It is possible to disable the radio's ability to receive and/or transmit data.

Click on any CPS field below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Rx Reference Frequency

Tx Reference Frequency

Emphasis

Compression Type

Expansion Type

     Go to the LS Trunking Site Window


Advanced Rx Reference Frequency (Trunking Site)
Rx Reference Frequency

(Trunking Site)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Receive Reference Frequency of the current repeater.

This repeater is part of the current Trunking Site that can be assigned to a Trunking Personality. This setting then becomes functional for all Groups within that Trunking Personality.

WARNING: It is possible to disable the radio's ability to receive and/or transmit data. If you are not fully aware of the impact of this setting, DO NOT MODIFY IT!

When the Repeater Assigned field is enabled.

     Go to the LS Advanced Page


Tx Reference Frequency (Trunking Site)
Tx Reference Frequency

(Trunking Site)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Transmit Reference Frequency of the current repeater.

This repeater is part of the current Trunking Site that can be assigned to a Trunking Personality. This setting then becomes functional for all Groups within that Trunking Personality.

WARNING: It is possible to disable the radio's ability to receive and/or transmit data. If you are not fully aware of the impact of this setting, DO NOT MODIFY IT!

When the Repeater Assigned field is enabled.

     Go to the LS Advanced Page


Emphasis (Trunking Site)
Emphasis

(Trunking Site)

DEFINITION:

Selects the type of audio shaping used on the current repeater. This feature can enhance audio clarity.

This repeater is part of the current Trunking Site that can be assigned to a Trunking Personality. This setting then becomes functional for all Groups within that Trunking Personality.

When the Repeater Assigned field is enabled.

None

De-Emphasis

Pre-Emphasis

De-Emphasis & Pre-Emphasis.

     Go to the LS Advanced Page


Compression Type (Trunking Site)
Compression Type

(Trunking Site)

DEFINITION:

Selects the transmitting-audio Compression Type of the current repeater. These selections can control or enhance audio clarity. Full Compression allows for Companding Mode. The radio-user can also toggle Companding on or off, on a Personality basis, if the Companding menu selection is enabled.

This repeater is part of the current Trunking Site that can be assigned to a Trunking Personality. This setting then becomes functional for all Groups within that Trunking Personality.

When the Repeater Assigned field is enabled.

Disabled

Full Compression: 	If Full Compression is selected, then Full Expansion (in the Expansion Type field) is automatically selected. These two settings put the radio in Companding Mode. Likewise, if Full Compression is de-selected, then Full Expansion is automatically de-selected as the Expansion Type.

AGC Mode:	Audio Gain Control causes all audio to be transmitted at the same volume level, regardless of how volume levels may vary when picked up by the radio’s microphone. If AGC is not set on the transmitting radio, audio volume levels are only equalized by the receiving radio.

     Go to the LS Advanced Page


Expansion Type (Trunking Site)
Expansion Type

(Trunking Site)

DEFINITION:

Selects the receive-audio Expansion Type of the current repeater. These selections can control or enhance audio clarity. Full Expansion allows for Companding Mode. The radio-user can also toggle Companding on or off, on a Personality basis, if the Companding menu selection is enabled.

This repeater is part of the current Trunking Site that can be assigned to a Trunking Personality. This setting then becomes functional for all Groups within that Trunking Personality.

When the Repeater Assigned field is enabled.

Disabled

Full Expansion:	If Full Expansion is selected, then Full Compression (in the Compression Type field) is automatically selected. These two settings put the radio in Companding Mode. Likewise, if Full Expansion is de-selected, then Full Compression is automatically de-selected as the Compression Type.

AGC Mode:	Audio Gain Control causes all receive audio to be heard at the same volume level, regardless of how volume levels may vary when picked up by the transmitting radio’s microphone. If AGC is not set on the transmitting radio, audio volume levels are only equalized by the receiving radio.

(LLE) Low-level

Expansion:	LLE is a Motorola feature developed to help reduce radio and airway noise thus enhancing audio clarity. LLE is designed for two-way radio communication. LLE is particularly useful when communicating with older radio models.

     Go to the LS Advanced Page


The Data Revert Page (Trunking Personality)
The Data Revert Page

(Trunking Personality)

DEFINITION:

The Data Revert Page allows you to view or define Data Revert Groups/channels for individual Trunking Personalities. Data Revert allows for a predefined alternative Trunking Group to be designated for the purpose of transmitting and receiving data. Data Revert channels are activated from an external data device connected through the radio’s Accessory Connector. The "Data Revert Pin" selection must be assigned to one of the Radio Configuration programmable input pins. When the "Data Revert" pin is de-asserted the radio returns to the radio’s currently selected channel.

The radio may receive data may through either the "Tx Flat Audio" input line or the "Ext Mic Audio" input line (or both) depending on the Radio Configuration Data PTT Audio Source field selection.

Note:

•	Enabling the Data PTT Overrides Voice field prevents a data transmission from being interrupted. Additionally, when the radio is transmitting or receiving a voice transmission, "Data PTT" will interrupt the voice transmission and begin its own transmission.

•	While in Scan Mode, if Data Revert is asserted, the radio uses the Data Revert channel for the radio’s currently selected channel. This is true no matter what the Scan Mode state, Active or Landed.

•	This is a mobile only feature.

•	 When the current personality is "Data Operation (Trident)" enabled, this feature shall be disabled.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Data Revert Zone Alias

Data Revert Zone

Data Revert Channel Alias

Data Revert Channel

     Go to the Trunking Personality Window


Data Revert Zone Alias (Trunking Personality)
Data Revert Zone Alias

(Trunking Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selecting a value for the Data Revert Zone field automatically retrieves this Zone Alias. Zone Aliases are defined in the Personality Assignment, Zone Alias field. This is a view-only field.

When the radio is a Mobile model.

      Go to the Data Revert Page


Data Revert Zone (Trunking Personality)
Data Revert Zone

(Trunking Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Trunking Zone that the radio engages (jumps to) when Data Revert is initiated. This selection applies while operating on any Group for the current Trunking Personality.

When the radio is a Mobile model.

      Go to the Data Revert Page


Data Revert Channel Alias (Trunking Personality)
Data Revert Channel Alias

(Trunking Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selecting a value for the Data Revert Channel field automatically retrieves this Channel Alias. Channel aliases are defined in the Group Alias field. This is a view-only field.

When the radio is a Mobile model.

      Go to the Data Revert Page


Data Revert Channel (Trunking Personality)
Data Revert Channel

(Trunking Personality)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Trunking Group / Channel that the radio engages (jumps to) when Data Revert is initiated. The Data Revert Zone must be selected first. This selection applies while operating on any Group for the current Trunking Personality.

When the radio is a Mobile model.

      Go to the Data Revert Page


Personality Assignment Window to Zone
The Personality Assignment to Zone Window

The Personality Assignment window allows you to create and delete Zones, as well as define individual Zone functionality. Zones operate in either Conventional Personality or Trunking Personality dispatch mode. Only single-zone (non-display) radios can operate in dual dispatch mode.

A Conventional Zone allows you to assign Conventional Personalities for each channel of the Zone.

A Trunking Zone automatically and sequentially assigns the Groups of a selected Trunking Personality to the Zone’s channels.

A radio-user Zone change can completely redefine Channel Selector functionality. Zones are selected by the radio-user with a Mobile radio programmable button press, a Portable radio Rotary selection, or a menu choice.

Note:

•	Personality Assignments can be automatically and sequentially assigned with the Personality Assignment Wizard.

•	An alternate method, Drag and Drop, allows you to copy Conventional and Trunking Personalities directly into Personality Assignment to Zone.

The window’s Navigation Toolbar offers high-level functionality for maintaining Zones.

Click on any page title below (underlined in green) to see more information.


Zone Page (Personality Assignment)
The Zone Page

(Personality Assignment)

DEFINITION:

The Zone page allows you to select the Zone dispatch mode, Conventional or LS Trunking. If Trunking is selected, the LS Trunking Personality can then be selected.

Zone positions in the radio are determined by the order that they are created in the CPS. Zones can however be re-ordered using the following commands:

Use the Navigation Toolbar to locate the desired record to be moved. From the CPS Menu Bar select: Record · Move Record, then select the appropriate destination for that record.

When the radio has more than one zone, a display model.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Zone Alias

Conventional Zone Type

LS Trunking Zone Type

LS Trunking Personality

     Go To the Personality Assignment to Zone Window


Zone Alias (Personality Assignment)
Zone Alias

(Personality Assignment)

DEFINITION:

The Alias is a radio-user recognizable description for the current Zone. Characters, Numbers, Spaces, and Special Characters can be used.

Examples: Zone (15), Honolulu #03, Cairo-A5.

Note: This alias appears on the tree view.

When the radio has more than one zone, a display model.

     Go To the Zone Page


Conventional Zone Type (Personality Assignment)
Conventional Dispatch, Zone Type

(Personality Assignment)

DEFINITION:

Selects Conventional as the dispatch mode for the current Zone. Zones can operate in either Conventional or Trunking dispatch mode.

When the radio has more than one zone, a display model.

     Go To the Zone Page


LS Trunking Dispatch Zone Type (Personality Assignment)
LS Trunking Dispatch, Zone Type

(Personality Assignment)

DEFINITION:

Selects Trunking as the dispatch mode for the current Zone. Zones can operate in either Trunking or Conventional dispatch mode.

When the radio has more than one zone, a display model.

  Go To the Zone Page


LS Trunking Personality (Personality Assignment)
LS Trunking Personality

(Personality Assignment)

DEFINITION:

Selects which Trunking Personality is assigned to the current Zone. The selected Personality’s Groups are automatically and sequentially assigned to the radio’s possible Channel Selector - channels.

When the radio has more than one zone, a display model, and

when the Zone Type is set to LS Trunking.

     Go To the Zone Page


Channels Page (Personality Assignment)
The Channels Page

(Personality Assignment)

DEFINITION:

The Channel page facilitates the assignment of specific radio functionality to each of the radio’s channel positions for the current Zone. The channel number is listed in the far-left column.

For a Zone of Conventional dispatch type, Conventional Personalities can be assigned for each channel of the radio’s Channel Selector dial.

For a Zone of Trunking dispatch type, Trunking Groups are automatically and sequentially assigned for each channel of the radio’s Channel Selector. Therefore this Channels Page becomes view-only and no modifications are possible.

For a single-zone radio (non-display), the Trunking Personality and Group can be selected for individual channels. The Trunking Personality is selected first, and then the Group must be selected.

•	Table Type windows can be maintained with the Short Cut Menu.

•	Right-clicking anywhere on Table Type windows retrieves the Short Cut Menu.

Note: For single-zone (non-display) radios, the Alias field is grayed-out (not accessible).

The window’s Navigation Toolbar offers high-level functionality for maintaining Zones.

Click on any CPS field title below (in green) to see a description.

INCLUDED FIELDS:

Alias

Personality

Group

     Go To the Personality Assignment to Zone Window


Alias (Personality Assignment)
Alias

(Personality Assignment)

DEFINITION:

Selecting a Conventional Personality, or Trunking Group, automatically displays its associated Alias. This is a view-only field.

Note: The Alias is created in either the Conventional Personality Alias, or Trunking Group Alias field.

When the radio is a display model.

     Go To the Channels Page


Personality (Personality Assignment)
Personality

(Personality Assignment)

DEFINITION:

Selecting a Personality (by its CPS given name) assigns its functionality to the currently highlighted channel position, for the current Zone. The channel number is listed in the far-left column of this Channels page. It is possible to select either a Conventional or a Trunking Personality.

When selecting a Conventional Zone Type, Conventional Personalities can be selected for each channel of the current Zone. Selecting a Conventional Personality for the current channel position automatically fills-in the Alias field.

For a multi-zone (display model) radio, selecting the LS Trunking Zone Type automatically and sequentially fills-in the Group, the Alias, and this Personality field for this entire Channels Page. Therefore, the Channels Page is view-only and no modifications are possible.

For a single-zone (non-display model) radio, the Trunking Personality and the Group can be selected for individual channels. The Personality is selected first, and then the Group must be selected.

     Go To the Channels Page


Group (Personality Assignment)
Group

(Personality Assignment)

DEFINITION:

Selecting the Trunking Group assigns its functionality to the currently highlighted channel position, for the current Zone. The channel number is listed in the far-left column of this Channels page.

For a multi-zone (display model) radio, selecting the LS Trunking Zone Type automatically and sequentially fills-in the Personality, the Alias, and this Group field for this entire Channels Page. Therefore, the Channels Page is view-only and no modifications are possible.

For a single-zone (non-display model) radio, the Trunking Personality and the Group can be selected for individual channels. The Personality is selected first, and then the Group must be selected.

When the Zone Type is set to LS Trunking.

     Go To the Channels Page


Radio to Radio Cloning

Enables the radio’s ability to be cloned or to clone. This type of Cloning is the ability to transfer a radio’s entire codeplug to another radio via a special programming cloning cable. This type of Cloning is accomplished without the use of the CPS.

When disabled, the radio cannot clone or be cloned-to.


Radio Clock Update

Enables the radio’s time and date to be automatically updated using the computer’s time and date. The computer’s time and date is transferred to the radio when the radio is written-to.


Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3

These button-presses allow the radio-user to quickly and easily Call Alert Call List Member #1, Call List Member #2, or Call List Member #3.

For example, when pressing the “Call Alert Member #1” button, the Alias for Call List member #1 appears in the radio’s display. Pressing the PTT button then transmits the Call Alert to Call List member #1.

Additionally as a convenience, prior to the PTT button being pressed, the radio-user is able to select to Call Alert any Call List member in Call List position 1 to 9. For example, when pressing the “Call Alert Member #2” the Alias for Call List member #2 appears in the radio’s display. At this point selecting any number 1 to 9 on the radio’s keypad then retrieves the Alias for that selected member (1 to 9) in the radio’s display, and again, pressing the PTT button then transmits the Call Alert to the desired Call List member (1 to 9).


Sel Cal Member #1, #2, & #3

These button-presses allow the radio-user to quickly and easily Sel Cal Call List Member #1, Call List Member #2, or Call List Member #3.


Speed Call Alert

(Programmable Buttons: Conventional & Trunking)

This button-press allows the radio-user to quickly and easily Call Alert Call List members.

For example, when pressing the “Speed Call Alert” button, the Alias of the last called Call List member appears in the radio’s display. Pressing the PTT button then transmits the Call Alert to this Call List member. However pressing 1 to 9 on the radio’s keypad retrieves the Alias of that selected member (1 to 9) in the radio’s display, and again, pressing the PTT button then transmits the Call Alert to the desired Call List member (1 to 9).


Speed Sel Cal

This button-press allows the radio-user to quickly and easily Sel Cal Call List members.


Call Alert Member #1, #2, & #3	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode capable.
Sel Call Member #1, #2, #3	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode capable.
Speed Call Alert	The radio is capable of Call Alert Encode capable.
Speed Sel Cal	The radio is capable of Sel Cal Encode capable.


Home Revert Zone Alias 2

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selecting a value for the Home Revert Zone 2 field automatically retrieves this Zone Alias 2. Zone Aliases are defined in the Personality Assignment, Zone Alias field. This is a view-only field.


Home Revert Zone 2

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Zone that the radio engages (jumps to) when a programmable button set for “Home Revert 2” or “Home Channel 2” is pressed.


Home Revert Channel Alias 2

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selecting a value for the Home Revert Channel 2 field automatically retrieves this Conventional Personality Alias, or Trunking Group Alias depending on the dispatch type of the selected Home Revert Zone 2. This is a view-only field.


Home Revert Channel 2

(Radio Configuration)

DEFINITION:

Selects the Channel that the radio engages (jumps to) when a programmable button  set to “Home Revert 2” or “Home Channel 2” is pressed. The channel will represent either a Conventional Personality or a Trunking Group, depending on the dispatch type of the selected Home Revert Zone 2.


Home Channel 2	The radio model has a Display.
Home Revert 2	Always available.


Last Active:	Causes the radio to transmit on the last landed channel relating to Landed Scan Mode during scan mode operation. Prior to a scanned channel being landed (in scan mode), the radio defaults to transmitting on the radio’s current channel selector position.


When the radio is a Conventional disatch only portable multi-line display model, or

(when the radio is capable of Trunking dispatch operation, and

when the radio is not a non-display model.)


TempPop